NEH front intro k2y2 0 # Introduction to Nehemiah<br>## Part 1: General Introduction<br><br>### Outline of Nehemiah<br><br>1. Nehemiah returns to Jerusalem and inspects the walls (1:1-2:20)<br>1. The people rebuild the walls of Jerusalem (3:1-4:23)<br>1. Nehemiah helps the poor and provides an unselfish example (5:1–19)<br>1. Enemies try to slow down the work, but the people finish the walls (6:1–19)<br>1. Nehemiah lists the people who returned from exile (7:6–73)<br>1. Ezra reads the Law of Yahweh and the people respond (8:1-10:39)<br>1. Nehemiah lists the people who lived in and around Jerusalem (11:1–36)<br>1. Nehemiah lists the priests and Levites (12:1–26)<br>1. The people dedicate the walls of Jerusalem (12:27–47)<br>1. Nehemiah corrects problems (13:1–31)<br><br>### What is the Book of Nehemiah about?<br><br>A Jew named Nehemiah lived in Persia and worked for King Artaxerxes. Nehemiah received a report that the walls around Jerusalem were broken down. Nehemiah returned to Jerusalem to help rebuild the city walls. The walls around the city helped protect the city against armies and invaders.<br><br>### How should the title of this book be translated?<br><br>The Book of Nehemiah is named for a Jewish leader named Nehemiah. Translators can use the traditional title “Nehemiah.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “The Book about Nehemiah.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])<br><br>## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts<br><br>### Why were Israelites not allowed to marry people from other nations?<br><br>Foreigners worshiped many false gods. Yahweh did not allow his people to marry foreigners. He knew this would cause the people of Israel to worship false gods. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/falsegod]])<br><br>### Did all of the people of Israel return to their homeland?<br><br>Many of the Jews remained in Babylon instead of returning to the Promised Land. Many of them were successful in Babylon and desired to remain there. However, this meant that they were unable to worship Yahweh in Jerusalem as their ancestors had done. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/promisedland]])<br><br>## Part 3: Important Translation Issues<br><br>### How does the Book of Nehemiah use the term “Israel”?<br><br>The Book of Nehemiah uses the term “Israel” to refer to the kingdom of Judah. It was mostly made up of the tribes of Judah and Benjamin. The other ten tribes had ended their loyalty to any kings descended from David. God allowed the Assyrians to conquer the other ten tribes and take them into exile. As a result, they mixed with other people groups and did not return to the land of Israel. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/israel]])<br><br>### Are the events in the Book of Nehemiah told in the order that they actually happened?<br><br>Some of the events in the Book of Nehemiah are not told in the order they actually happened. Translators should pay attention to notes that signal when events are probably out of order.
NEH 1 intro y5jf 0 # Nehemiah 01 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>### “The words of Nehemiah son of Hacaliah:”<br><br>This phrase serves as an introduction to this entire book.<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Repentance<br><br>This chapter is a single long record of Nehemiah’s repentance on behalf of the people. (See: \[\[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/repent\]\])<br><br>## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter<br><br>### I<br><br>In this book, the word “I” always refers to Nehemiah.<br><br>### Israel<br><br>It is uncertain to whom “Israel” refers. It probably does not refer to the northern kingdom of Israel. Neither does it likely refer to the twelve tribes of Israel. Instead, it is probably a reference to Israel in the sense of the surviving people group. At Nehemiah’s time, this people group exclusively comprised the tribe of Judah because the other tribes had already been scattered throughout the entire Near East, where they lost their identity, for the most part.
NEH 1 1 bi9h translate-names נְחֶמְיָ֖ה בֶּן־חֲכַלְיָ֑ה 1 Nehemiah, the son of Hakaliah Nehemiah is the name of a man, and Hakaliah is the name of his father. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 1 1 abc1 writing-newevent וַיְהִ֤י 1 Now it happened This is a common way of beginning a historical story. Alternate translation: “My story begins” (See: \[\[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent\]\])
NEH 1 1 qd3e translate-hebrewmonths בְחֹֽדֶשׁ־כִּסְלֵיו֙ 1 in the month of Kislev **Kislev** is the ninth month of the Hebrew calendar. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 1 1 hn28 figs-explicit שְׁנַ֣ת עֶשְׂרִ֔ים 1 in the twentieth year This is referring to the number of years that Artaxerxes had been reigning as king. Alternate translation: “in the twentieth year of the reign of Artaxerxes, King of Persia” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
NEH 1 1 abc3 figs-metonymy בְּשׁוּשַׁ֥ן הַבִּירָֽה 1 in Susa the citadel The city in which this palace was located was also called Susa, because the city was associated with the palace. Since this was where the kings of Persia lived, it was the capital city of their empire. Alternate translation: “the capital city of Susa” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
NEH 1 1 abc5 translate-names בְּשׁוּשַׁ֥ן 1 in Susa This was the name of a royal city of the Persian kings. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 1 1 g6dl translate-unknown הַבִּירָֽה 1 the citadel This means a “castle” or “palace” or “stronghold,” usually inside a city, where a king would live. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
NEH 1 2 l6cw חֲנָ֜נִי אֶחָ֧ד 1 one of my brothers The term **brother** is often used figuratively in this book, but here it most likely means that Hanani was Nehemiah’s biological brother.
NEH 1 2 abc7 figs-gendernotations ה֥וּא וַאֲנָשִׁ֖ים 1 he and men This was a delegation that had come from one Jewish community to visit another Jewish community in another part of the world. So it’s possible and even likely that it included women as well as men. Alternate translation: “along with some other people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
NEH 1 2 lg14 translate-names מִֽיהוּדָ֑ה 1 from Judah Judah was formerly the southern kingdom of the Israelites. It was now a Persian province. Alternate translation: “the province of Judah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 1 2 abc9 figs-parallelism הַיְּהוּדִ֧ים הַפְּלֵיטָ֛ה אֲשֶֽׁר־נִשְׁאֲר֥וּ מִן־הַשֶּׁ֖בִי 1 the Jews who escaped, who were left behind from the captivity These two phrases mean the same thing. Nehemiah uses them together for clarity to describe one particular group of people, and perhaps also to express his particular concern for them. You do not need to repeat both phrases in your translation if that would be confusing for your readers. Alternate translation: “the Jews who had escaped the exile” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
NEH 1 2 q7zi figs-explicit הַיְּהוּדִ֧ים הַפְּלֵיטָ֛ה אֲשֶֽׁר־נִשְׁאֲר֥וּ מִן־הַשֶּׁ֖בִי 1 the Jews who escaped, who were left behind from the captivity These two phrases refer to the same group of people. Possible meanings are (1) the few Jews who were taken as exiles to Babylon but escaped and returned to live in Jerusalem or (2) the few Jews who had escaped from those who were trying to take them into exile in Babylon and so remained in Jerusalem. Since it is unclear from where they escaped, it may be best not to specify in the translation. Alternate translation: “the Jews who had escaped the exile and who remained in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 1 2 ab11 figs-abstractnouns הַשֶּׁ֖בִי 1 the captivity **Captivity** is an abstract noun that refers to the Jews being taken away from their homeland. Judah had been conquered by the Babylonians about 150 years before this. The Babylonians had taken many people away from Judah and relocated them to different parts of their empire. About 50 years later, the Persian Empire conquered Babylon and many Jews, like Nehemiah, came to live in Persia. But some also lived in their former homeland. You can translate this idea with a phrase such as “the time when the Jews were taken away” or “the time when soldiers forced many Jews to go to Babylon” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
NEH 1 2 ab13 figs-explicit וְעַל־יְרוּשָׁלִָֽם 1 and about Jerusalem Jerusalem had been the capital city of the kingdom of Judah. Nehemiah was asking specifically about the physical condition of the buildings and walls in the city, in addition to asking about the welfare of the Jewish community in Judah. Alternate translation: “about the condition of Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 1 3 igf2 figs-parallelism הַֽנִּשְׁאָרִ֞ים אֲשֶֽׁר־נִשְׁאֲר֤וּ מִן־הַשְּׁבִי֙ 1 the ones left behind, who were left behind from the captivity These two statements mean similar things. Nehemiah says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to show his concern for this group. You do not need to repeat both phrases in your translation if that would be confusing for your readers. Alternate translation: “the Jews who escaped the exile and remained” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
NEH 1 3 y1zg figs-metonymy בַּמְּדִינָ֔ה 1 in the province Here **province** refers to Judah as an administrative district within the Persian Empire. Hanani is describing Judah by referring to something associated with it, its status as a province. Alternate translation: “in the province of Judah” or “in Judah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
NEH 1 3 ab15 figs-doublet בְּרָעָ֥ה גְדֹלָ֖ה וּבְחֶרְפָּ֑ה 1 in great evil and in reproach **Evil** and **reproach** mean similar things. Hanani uses them together to emphasize what a desperate situation the people are in. You do not need to repeat both words in your translation if that would be confusing for your readers. Alternate translation: “in a desperate situation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
NEH 1 3 ab17 figs-abstractnouns בְּרָעָ֥ה גְדֹלָ֖ה וּבְחֶרְפָּ֑ה 1 in great evil The abstract noun **evil** in this case does not refer to something morally bad, but to a difficult situation. It describes the situation objectively, as bad for the people in it. You can translate this idea with an adjective such as “bad.” Alternate translation: “in a very bad situation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
NEH 1 3 ab19 figs-abstractnouns וּבְחֶרְפָּ֑ה 1 and in reproach **Reproach** is an abstract noun that describes how other people would see the situation of the Jews. The situation would lead them to say bad things about them. You can translate this idea with a verb such as “mock.” Alternate translation: “people are mocking them.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
NEH 1 3 pk3f figs-activepassive וְחוֹמַ֤ת יְרוּשָׁלִַ֨ם֙ מְפֹרָ֔צֶת וּשְׁעָרֶ֖יהָ נִצְּת֥וּ בָאֵֽשׁ 1 the wall of Jerusalem is broken down, and its gates have been burned with fire This can be stated in active form. You can say this with an active form, and you can say who did the action. Alternate translation: “armies have broken open the wall of Jerusalem and have set its gates on fire” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
NEH 1 3 ab21 figs-explicit וְחוֹמַ֤ת יְרוּשָׁלִַ֨ם֙ מְפֹרָ֔צֶת וּשְׁעָרֶ֖יהָ נִצְּת֥וּ בָאֵֽשׁ 1 the wall of Jerusalem is broken down, and its gates have been burned with fire The implication is that the people are now defenseless. If it would make things clearer in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “The people living there are defenseless.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 1 3 ab23 נִצְּת֥וּ בָאֵֽשׁ 1 burned with fire This is a more descriptive expression than just “burned.” It means completely burned. Alternate translation: “burned down”
NEH 1 4 ab25 writing-newevent וַיְהִ֞י 1 And it happened that Nehemiah uses this phrase to introduce the next episode in his story. You do not need to represent it in your translation unless your language has a similar expression that it characteristically uses. Alternate translation: “So the next thing I did” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
NEH 1 4 ab27 figs-metonymy כְּשָׁמְעִ֣י ׀ אֶת־הַדְּבָרִ֣ים הָאֵ֗לֶּה 1 as soon as I heard these words Here **words** refers to the things that were described by the words. Alternate translation: “when I heard about these things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
NEH 1 4 ab29 translate-symaction יָשַׁ֨בְתִּי֙ וָֽאֶבְכֶּ֔ה 1 I sat down, and I wept **Sitting down** likely means that Nehemiah stopped going about his usual business because he was so overcome by grief. Alternate translation: “I could do nothing else but grieve” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
NEH 1 4 ab31 וָאֶתְאַבְּלָ֖ה יָמִ֑ים 1 I mourned for days This means that Nehemiah kept on grieving. He did not get over being upset. The term “days” here suggests “many days” and it is a figurative expression for “a long time.” Alternate translation: “I could not stop mourning for a long time.”
NEH 1 4 ab33 צָם֙ וּמִתְפַּלֵּ֔ל 1 fasting and praying **Fasting** means going without food. This was something that Jews often did in connection with prayer. It allowed them to concentrate on their prayers, and it showed how important those prayers were. Alternate translation: “I went without food, and I prayed”
NEH 1 4 ab35 bita-hq וּמִתְפַּלֵּ֔ל לִפְנֵ֖י 1 and praying before the face of Here **face** is a metonym for the action of seeing, which is a figurative way of referring to a person’s notice or attention to something. Nehemiah is saying that he prayed in order to bring these matters to God’s notice or attention. Alternate translation: “and I prayed to” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-hq]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
NEH 1 4 ab37 אֱלֹהֵ֥י הַשָּׁמָֽיִם 1 the God of heaven Alternate translation: “the God who is in heaven”
NEH 1 5 ab39 וָאֹמַ֗ר 1 Then I said Here Nehemiah tells what he prayed. Alternate translation: “Then I prayed”
NEH 1 5 ab41 figs-exclamations אָֽנָּ֤א 1 Ah! Nehemiah uses this word to call on God with strong feeling. Alternate translation: “O” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
NEH 1 5 pf2l translate-names יְהוָה֙ 1 Yahweh This is the name of God that he revealed to his people in the Old Testament. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 1 5 ab43 figs-you אֱלֹהֵ֣י הַשָּׁמַ֔יִם 1 the God of heaven Since Nehemiah is addressing God directly, you can use “you” forms in your translation. They should be singular but also respectful. Alternate translation: “you are the God who is in heaven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
NEH 1 5 ab45 figs-doublet הָאֵ֥ל הַגָּד֖וֹל וְהַנּוֹרָ֑א 1 the great and fearsome God **Great** and **fearsome** mean similar things. Nehemiah uses them together to emphasize how much respect God deserves. You do not need to repeat both phrases in your translation if that would be confusing for your readers. However, there is a slight difference in meaning, and you could also bring that out in your translation. “Great” refers to how powerful God is objectively. “Fearsome” reflects how people should respond to God’s greatness subjectively. They should “fear” God. This does not mean that they should be afraid of him, but that they should show him respect and reverence. Alternate translation: “the great and awesome God” or “the God who deserves total respect” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
NEH 1 5 ab47 figs-parallelism שֹׁמֵ֤ר הַבְּרִית֙ וָחֶ֔סֶד 1 who keeps the covenant and covenant faithfulness **Covenant** and **covenant faithfulness** mean similar things. Nehemiah says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to emphasize how certain it is that God will keep his promises. You do not need to repeat both phrases in your translation if that would be confusing for your readers. However, there is a slight difference in meaning, and you could bring that out in your translation even if you combine the phrases. The “covenant” is God’s promise to Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob and their descendants. “Covenant faithfulness” is a character quality of God. He is inwardly disposed to keep all of his promises, and so he always does so faithfully. So you could say something like, “Because of who you are, you always keep your promises faithfully.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
NEH 1 5 ab49 figs-parallelism לְאֹהֲבָ֖יו וּלְשֹׁמְרֵ֥י מִצְוֺתָֽיו 1 to those who love him and to those who keep his commandments Nehemiah is not describing two different groups. These phrases mean similar things. The repetition is used for clarity and emphasis. Nehemiah says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to express that those who love God show this by keeping his commandments. You can translate this so that it is clear that these words describe one group. Alternate translation: “those who love you and keep your commandments” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
NEH 1 5 zc64 figs-123person לְאֹהֲבָ֖יו וּלְשֹׁמְרֵ֥י מִצְוֺתָֽיו 1 to those who love him and to those who keep his commandments Since Nehemiah is speaking to Yahweh, the pronouns “him” and “his” can be translated as “you” and “your.” Alternate translation: “who love you and keep your commandments” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
NEH 1 6 ab51 figs-parallelism תְּהִ֣י נָ֣א אָזְנְךָֽ־קַשֶּׁ֣בֶת וְֽעֵינֶ֪יךָ פְתֻוּח֟וֹת 1 Please let your ear be attentive and your eyes opened These two phrases mean similar things. Nehemiah says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to urge God to pay attention to him. If it would be clearer in your language, you could combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “pay attention to me,” otherwise “please listen to me and look at me.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
NEH 1 6 ab53 figs-metonymy אָזְנְךָֽ־קַשֶּׁ֣בֶת 1 your ear be attentive This request for God’s ear to be attentive refers figuratively to the action of listening. In this context, Nehemiah is asking God to listen to his prayer, with the intention that God would do something about the bad situation in Jerusalem. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
NEH 1 6 g947 figs-metonymy וְֽעֵינֶ֪יךָ פְתֻוּח֟וֹת 1 and your eyes opened This request for God’s eyes to be open refers figuratively to the action of seeing. Seeing is a metaphor meaning knowledge, perception, notice, attention, or judgment. In this case, is asking God to pay attention both to him and to the problem in Jerusalem. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 1 6 qjf3 figs-123person תְּפִלַּ֣ת עַבְדְּךָ֡ 1 the prayer of your servant Nehemiah uses the word servant to refer to himself. This is how a person would address a superior in order to show humility and respect. Alternate translation: “my prayer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
NEH 1 6 ab55 bita-hq מִתְפַּלֵּ֨ל לְפָנֶ֤יךָ 1 am praying before your face Here **face** is a metonym for the action of seeing, which is figurative way of referring to a person’s notice or attention to something. Nehemiah is repeating the fact that he is praying in order to bring these matters to God’s notice or attention. Alternate translation: “praying to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-hq]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
NEH 1 6 ab57 figs-idiom הַיּוֹם֙ 1 today This does not necessarily mean on this particular day, but at this time. Alternate translation: “right now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
NEH 1 6 v8gx figs-merism הַיּוֹם֙ יוֹמָ֣ם וָלַ֔יְלָה 1 day and night When Nehemiah says that he has prayed both during the day and during the night, he means that he has also prayed at all times in between, that is, constantly. However, he does not mean that he has prayed non-stop all day long and all night long, without doing any other activities such as sleeping or eating. Alternate translation: “constantly,” otherwise “during the day and at night” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
NEH 1 6 ab59 figs-gendernotations בְּנֵ֥י יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל 1 the sons of Israel Here **sons** figuratively means “descendants.” Alternate translation: “on behalf of the people of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]] and (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 1 6 ab61 figs-metaphor עֲבָדֶ֑יךָ 1 your servants In this context, the word **servants** refers to the special role that the people of Israel had in the world as a model community of God’s followers. Alternate translation: “your chosen people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 1 6 ab63 figs-gendernotations וּמִתְוַדֶּ֗ה עַל־חַטֹּ֤אות בְּנֵֽי־יִשְׂרָאֵל֙ אֲשֶׁ֣ר חָטָ֣אנוּ לָ֔ךְ 1 confessing on account of the sins of the sons of Israel that we have sinned against you Here again **sons** means “descendants” and the phrase refers to the people of Israel Alternate translation: “I must confess the sins that we, the people of Israel, have committed against you.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
NEH 1 6 bxj6 bita-manmade וַאֲנִ֥י וּבֵית־אָבִ֖י חָטָֽאנוּ 1 Even I and the house of my father, we have sinned Among the Israelites, the expression **father’s house** or **house of the father** originally described an extended-family group. It later came to be used more generally to refer to a larger clan within a tribe. In this expression, the word "house" figuratively describes all the people descended from a particular person. The term views all of those descendants as if they were one household living together. However, since Nehemiah is stressing his sense of personal responsibility here and identifying closely with the people in this group, he may be using the term in its original sense to refer to his nearest relatives. Alternate translation: “Both I and my family have also sinned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-hq]])
NEH 1 7 ab65 figs-abstractnouns חֲבֹ֖ל חָבַ֣לְנוּ לָ֑ךְ 1 With extreme corruption we have acted corruptly against you The repetition here is used for emphasis. You can translate the idea of the abstract noun “corruption”’ with an adverb such as “wickedly.” Alternate translation: “We have acted very wickedly toward you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
NEH 1 7 ab67 figs-doublet אֶת־הַמִּצְוֺ֗ת וְאֶת־הַֽחֻקִּים֙ וְאֶת־הַמִּשְׁפָּטִ֔ים 1 the commandments, and the statutes, and the judgments These three words mean basically the same thing. Nehemiah uses the repetition to emphasize how comprehensively the Israelites have disobeyed what God commanded them through Moses. If it would be clearer in your language, you could combine them into a single phrase. Alternate translation: “the Law of Moses,” otherwise “the commands and rules and laws” (Note: A doublet can involve the use of more than two words.) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
NEH 1 7 brz7 figs-explicit אֲשֶׁ֥ר צִוִּ֖יתָ אֶת־מֹשֶׁ֥ה עַבְדֶּֽךָ 1 that you commanded Moses, your servant Moses was the great leader who brought the Israelites out of slavery in Egypt centuries before and gave them God’s law. If it would make things clearer in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “that you gave us many years ago through your servant Moses.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 1 8 pv64 figs-idiom זְכָר־נָא֙ 1 Please remember Here **remember** is an idiom that means to think about someone and consider what action you can take on their behalf. Nehemiah is not suggesting that God has forgotten the promise he made to Moses. Alternate translation: “Please call to mind” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
NEH 1 8 y5jp figs-yousingular הַדָּבָ֔ר אֲשֶׁ֥ר צִוִּ֛יתָ אֶת־מֹשֶׁ֥ה עַבְדְּךָ֖ 1 the word that you commanded Moses, your servant The pronouns **you** and **your** refer to God and so are singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
NEH 1 8 ab69 הַדָּבָ֔ר 1 the word This refers to a promise that God made while giving the Law to the people of Israel through Moses. Alternate translation: “the promise”
NEH 1 8 b6qh figs-you אַתֶּ֣ם תִּמְעָ֔לוּ 1 If you yourselves act unfaithfully The pronouns **you** and **yourselves** refer to the Israelite people, and so they are plural. Alternate translation: “If you Israelites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
NEH 1 8 ab71 figs-metaphor אַתֶּ֣ם תִּמְעָ֔לוּ 1 If you yourselves act unfaithfully Here infidelity in marriage is used as a figurative description of the people of Israel not keeping God’s commandments. Alternate translation: “If you Israelites do not keep my commandments” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 1 8 ab73 אָפִ֥יץ אֶתְכֶ֖ם בָּעַמִּֽים 1 I myself will scatter you among the peoples Alternate translation: “I will take you from your land and make you live among the other nations”
NEH 1 8 evf5 figs-explicit אָפִ֥יץ אֶתְכֶ֖ם בָּעַמִּֽים 1 I myself will scatter you among the peoples The implication is that God would do this to punish the Israelites for breaking his commandments. If it would make things clearer in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “as a punishment, I will take you from your land and make you live among the other nations” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 1 9 dqn5 figs-you וְשַׁבְתֶּ֣ם אֵלַ֔י וּשְׁמַרְתֶּם֙ מִצְוֺתַ֔י וַעֲשִׂיתֶ֖ם אֹתָ֑ם אִם־יִהְיֶ֨ה נִֽדַּחֲכֶ֜ם 1 But if you return to me and keep my commandments and do them, although your banished ones are The pronouns **you** and **your** refer to the Israelite people, so they are plural. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
NEH 1 9 ab75 figs-metaphor וְשַׁבְתֶּ֣ם אֵלַ֔י וּשְׁמַרְתֶּם֙ מִצְוֺתַ֔י וַעֲשִׂיתֶ֖ם אֹתָ֑ם אִם־יִהְיֶ֨ה נִֽדַּחֲכֶ֜ם 1 But if you return to me **Return** is a figurative way of saying “become loyal again.” Alternate translation: “If you become loyal to me again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 1 9 ab77 figs-parallelism וּשְׁמַרְתֶּם֙ מִצְוֺתַ֔י וַעֲשִׂיתֶ֖ם 1 and keep my commandments and do them These two statements mean similar things. They are used together for emphasis. You do not need to repeat both phrases in your translation if that would be confusing for your readers. Alternate translation: “start obeying my commandments once more” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
NEH 1 9 ab79 נִֽדַּחֲכֶ֜ם 1 your banished ones This refers to the exile. Alternate translation: “all of you who were taken away”
NEH 1 9 f8jz figs-hyperbole בִּקְצֵ֤ה הַשָּׁמַ֨יִם֙ 1 at the extremity of heaven This means “the most distant point under the sky.” In this culture the sky was understood to be a solid dome with a flat earth beneath it. The phrase is describing a point beyond which no one could go any farther because they would have reached the edge of the dome of the sky. This is an overstatement, because even from the perspective of this culture, no one could really reach such a point. Alternate translation: “places very far away” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
NEH 1 9 ab81 figs-123person אֲקַבְּצֵ֔ם וַהֲבִֽיאוֹתִים֙ 1 I will gather them and bring them Since God is actually addressing the Israelites here, you can say “you” in the plural. Alternate translation: “I will bring you back” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
NEH 1 9 ab83 figs-parallelism אֲקַבְּצֵ֔ם וַהֲבִֽיאוֹתִים֙ 1 I will gather them and bring them These two statements mean similar things. They are used together to emphasize that God will definitely keep this promise. If it would be clearer in your language, you could combine the phrases. Alternate translation: “I will bring you back” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
NEH 1 9 ab85 figs-personification אֶל־הַמָּק֔וֹם אֲשֶׁ֣ר בָּחַ֔רְתִּי לְשַׁכֵּ֥ן אֶת־שְׁמִ֖י שָֽׁם 1 to the place where I have chosen to cause my name to dwell there Here God’s name is spoken of as if it were capable of living in a place. The phrase indicates the place from which God chose to start making himself famous throughout the world. You can say something like that as an alternate translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
NEH 1 9 lgh9 figs-explicit אֶל־הַמָּק֔וֹם אֲשֶׁ֣ר בָּחַ֔רְתִּי לְשַׁכֵּ֥ן אֶת־שְׁמִ֖י שָֽׁם 1 to the place where I have chosen to cause my name to dwell there This phrase refers initially to Jerusalem, because that was where God chose to put his temple. You could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “to Jerusalem, where I have chosen for my name to remain” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 1 9 w4qw figs-metonymy אֶל־הַמָּק֔וֹם אֲשֶׁ֣ר בָּחַ֔רְתִּי לְשַׁכֵּ֥ן אֶת־שְׁמִ֖י שָֽׁם 1 to the place where I have chosen to cause my name to dwell there Nehemiah is actually using this phrase to refer to all of Judah. As the book explains later, when the Jews returned there, they each settled in their own former towns, though one in ten of them were recruited to live in Jerusalem. So Judah is being described by something associated with it, the capital city. Alternate translation: “to your homeland of Judah.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
NEH 1 9 g88j bita-hq שְׁמִ֖י 1 my name Here **name** is a figurative way of referring to the fame or reputation of a person. Their fame is described by something associated with it, how well known their name is and how people react to hearing it. Alternate translation: “reputation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-hq]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
NEH 1 10 mjx7 figs-123person וְהֵ֥ם עֲבָדֶ֖יךָ וְעַמֶּ֑ךָ 1 And they are your servants and your people The word **they** refers to the Israelite people. Since Nehemiah is speaking on their behalf and including himself, you could say “we” in your translation if that would make things clearer for your readers. If your language marks the distinction, “we” should not include the addressee. Alternate translation: “we are your servants, your chosen people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
NEH 1 10 ab87 figs-parallelism וְהֵ֥ם עֲבָדֶ֖יךָ וְעַמֶּ֑ךָ 1 And they are your servants and your people As in [1:6](../01/06.md), **servants** refers to the special role that the people of Israel had as a model community of God’s followers. So these two phrases are basically saying the same thing. You do not need to repeat both phrases in your translation if that would be confusing for your readers. Alternate translation: “we are your chosen people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
NEH 1 10 ab89 figs-explicit אֲשֶׁ֤ר פָּדִ֨יתָ֙ 1 whom you redeemed This is a reference to the way God delivered the Israelites from slavery in Egypt. Alternate translation: “you rescued us from slavery in Egypt” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 1 10 zu4s figs-doublet בְּכֹחֲךָ֣ הַגָּד֔וֹל וּבְיָדְךָ֖ הַחֲזָקָֽה 1 by your great power and by your strong hand These two phrases mean basically the same thing. Nehemiah uses the repetition to emphasize the intensity of Yahweh’s power. Alternate translation: “by your very great strength” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
NEH 1 10 ab91 bita-hq וּבְיָדְךָ֖ הַחֲזָקָֽה 1 your strong hand Here **hand** represents a person’s power, strength, or ability. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-hq]])
NEH 1 11 ab93 figs-exclamations אָנָּ֣א 1 Ah! As in [1:5](../01/05.md), Nehemiah uses this word to call on God with strong feeling. Alternate translation: “O” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
NEH 1 11 ab95 אֲדֹנָ֗י תְּהִ֣י נָ֣א אָזְנְךָֽ־קַ֠שֶּׁבֶת אֶל־תְּפִלַּ֨ת עַבְדְּךָ֜ 1 My Lord, please let your ear be attentive to the prayer of your servant Nehemiah calls himself a **servant** and he calls God his **Lord** because this is how a person in his culture would address a superior in order to show humility and respect. See how you translated this in [1:6](../01/06.md).
NEH 1 11 ab97 translate-names אֲדֹנָ֗י 1 Lord This term in Hebrew can be understood as either a noun with a pronoun suffix (“My Lord”) or as a simple title (“Lord”). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 1 11 ab99 figs-metonymy תְּהִ֣י נָ֣א אָזְנְךָֽ־קַ֠שֶּׁבֶת 1 let your ear be attentive As in [1:6](../01/06.md), this phrase refers figuratively to the action of listening. Alternate translation: “please pay careful attention.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
NEH 1 11 jjm7 figs-123person תְּפִלַּ֨ת עַבְדְּךָ֜ 1 the prayer of your servant Alternate translation: “to my prayer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
NEH 1 11 j433 תְּפִלַּ֣ת עֲבָדֶ֗יךָ 1 the prayer of your servants Here **servants** refers to the rest of the Israelite people who were also praying for Yahweh to act on behalf of his people and on behalf of Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “and to the prayers of my fellow Israelites”
NEH 1 11 hk3z figs-metonymy הַֽחֲפֵצִים֙ לְיִרְאָ֣ה אֶת־שְׁמֶ֔ךָ 1 the ones who delight to fear your name Here **name** represents Yahweh himself. Alternate translation: “who are glad to honor you” or “who are eager to uphold your reputation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
NEH 1 11 a11b figs-idiom הַֽחֲפֵצִים֙ 1 the ones who delight To delight in doing something means to be glad to do it and to want to do it. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
NEH 1 11 a13b לְיִרְאָ֣ה 1 to fear As in [1:5](../01/05.md), **fear** means to show respect and reverence.
NEH 1 11 a15b figs-123person וְהַצְלִֽיחָה־נָּ֤א לְעַבְדְּךָ֙ הַיּ֔וֹם וּתְנֵ֣הוּ לְרַחֲמִ֔ים 1 cause your servant to succeed today and give him mercies Once again Nehemiah calls himself a **servant** to show respect to a superior. He then refers to himself in the third person (“give him”) to express humility before God. Alternate translation: “make me successful today and let the king be merciful to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
NEH 1 11 a17b figs-parallelism וְהַצְלִֽיחָה־נָּ֤א לְעַבְדְּךָ֙ הַיּ֔וֹם וּתְנֵ֣הוּ לְרַחֲמִ֔ים 1 cause your servant to succeed today and give him mercies These two statements mean similar things. Nehemiah says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to emphasize how important it is for him to have God’s help. You do not need to repeat both phrases in your translation if that would be confusing for your readers. Alternate translation: “grant that the king will have mercy on me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
NEH 1 11 a19b figs-idiom הַיּ֔וֹם 1 today This does not necessarily mean on this same day. Rather, Nehemiah is praying that God will give him the opportunity to speak with the king soon about helping the Jews in Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “soon” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
NEH 1 11 kr99 figs-123person תְנֵ֣הוּ לְרַחֲמִ֔ים 1 give him mercies Here **him** refers to Nehemiah, who refers to himself in the third person to express his humility before God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
NEH 1 11 r7af bita-hq לִפְנֵ֖י הָאִ֣ישׁ הַזֶּ֑ה 1 before the face of this man Here **face** is a figurative way of referring to the action of seeing, and seeing is a figurative way of describing knowledge, perception, notice, attention, or judgment. In this context, Nehemiah is asking God to cause the king to make a favorable decision in response to a request he plans to make. Alternate translation: “Please grant that the king will agree to the request that I am going to make.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-hq]]) and (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 1 11 a21b figs-explicit הָאִ֣ישׁ הַזֶּ֑ה 1 this man As we will discover in the next chapter, **this man** refers to Artaxerxes, the king of Persia. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 1 11 h9hl writing-background וַאֲנִ֛י הָיִ֥יתִי מַשְׁקֶ֖ה לַמֶּֽלֶךְ 1 Now as for me, I was a cupbearer for the king This is background information about Nehemiah’s role in the king’s court. Your language may have a special way to mark background information. As a “cupbearer,” it was Nehemiah’s duty to serve the wine at the king's table, but he was much more than a waiter or butler. When the king gave him this assignment, this showed that he trusted Nehemiah completely to protect him from being poisoned. Nehemiah’s work also allowed him to see the king frequently and get to know him. So this was an important office. Alternate translation: “At that time, I was an important official who served the wine at the king’s table.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
NEH 2 intro mj1d 0 # Nehemiah 02 General Notes<br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>This chapter begins the account of the construction of the wall. Many scholars believe these chapters teach valuable lessons on leadership ([Nehemiah 2-6](./01.md)).<br><br>### Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Nehemiah’s character<br>Apparently, Nehemiah’s character made an impression on the king. It was very unusual for a king to be so concerned with one of his servants. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])<br><br>### Cultural Customs<br>In ancient Persia, they thought it was important for their conquered peoples to practice their own cultural customs. It was thought that this independence promoted peace in their vast kingdom. The rebuilding of Jerusalem may have been seen as a way to allow for the Jewish cultural practices.<br><br>### Yahweh’s control<br>Yahweh is seen as very powerful. He is able to provide for his people, even through a foreign king. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/peopleofgod]])
NEH 2 1 a23b writing-newevent וַיְהִ֣י 1 Then it happened that Nehemiah uses this phrase to introduce the next event in his story. You do not need to represent it in your translation unless your language has a similar expression that it characteristically uses. Alternate translation: “Then one day” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
NEH 2 1 a25b figs-explicit בְּחֹ֣דֶשׁ נִיסָ֗ן שְׁנַ֥ת עֶשְׂרִ֛ים לְאַרְתַּחְשַׁ֥סְתְּא הַמֶּ֖לֶךְ 1 in the month of Nisan, in year twenty of Artaxerxes the King Since there were twelve months in the Hebrew calendar, and it was still the same year in the reign of Artaxerxes, this means that four months had gone by since Hanani came and spoke with Nehemiah. The implication is that Nehemiah had been praying all this time, in the way described in chapter 1. If it would make things clearer in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I prayed like this for four months.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 2 1 h3hu translate-hebrewmonths בְּחֹ֣דֶשׁ נִיסָ֗ן 1 In the month of Nisan **Nisan** is the name of the first month of the Hebrew calendar. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths]])
NEH 2 1 l63f translate-ordinal שְׁנַ֥ת עֶשְׂרִ֛ים לְאַרְתַּחְשַׁ֥סְתְּא הַמֶּ֖לֶךְ 1 in year twenty of Artaxerxes the king This is referring to the number of years that Artaxerxes had been reigning as king. Alternate translation: “in year 20 of the reign of Artaxerxes as the king of Persia” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
NEH 2 1 k1vf יַ֣יִן לְפָנָ֑יו 1 wine was before his face **Him** means King Artaxerxes. Alternate translation: “when it was time to serve him the wine”
NEH 2 1 a27b bita-hq יַ֣יִן לְפָנָ֑יו 1 wine was before his face Here **face** is a figurative way of referring to the presence of a person. This sentence means that a time had come when Nehemiah needed to serve wine to the king. (See: \[\[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-hq\]\] and \[\[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor\]\])
NEH 2 1 a29b וָאֶשָּׂ֤א אֶת־הַיַּ֨יִן֙ וָאֶתְּנָ֣ה לַמֶּ֔לֶךְ 1 I lifted the wine, and I gave it to the king Alternate translation: “I poured a cup of wine and gave it to the king.”
NEH 2 1 a31b figs-idiom וְלֹא־הָיִ֥יתִי רַ֖ע לְפָנָֽיו 1 and I was not evil before his face In this context, **evil** refers to a person looking sad or upset. It does not mean morally bad. Alternate translation: “I did not look sad in his presence.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
NEH 2 1 a33b figs-explicit וְלֹא־הָיִ֥יתִי 1 and I was not The context suggests that **I was not** actually means “I had never been.” It seems that King Artaxerxes always wanted his officials to be cheerful in his presence. That is why Nehemaiah became afraid when the king asked him why he was sad. If it would make things clearer for your readers, you could say “I had never been.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 2 1 a35b bita-hq לְפָנָֽיו 1 before his face **Face** is a figurative way of referring to the presence of a person. Alternate translation: “in his presence” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-hq]]) and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 2 2 n5wy figs-explicit וַיֹּאמֶר֩ לִ֨י הַמֶּ֜לֶךְ 1 And the king said to me The king must have noticed that Nehemiah looked sad because he asked about it. If it would make things clearer in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “But the king noticed that on this day I did look sad. So he asked me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 2 2 ue51 figs-synecdoche מַדּ֣וּעַ׀ פָּנֶ֣יךָ רָעִ֗ים 1 Why is your face evil? The king refers to Nehemiah by one part of him, his **face**, because the face shows one’s emotions. Alternate translation: “Why are you sad” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
NEH 2 2 a37b figs-idiom מַדּ֣וּעַ׀ פָּנֶ֣יךָ רָעִ֗ים 1 Why is your face evil? As in verse 1, **evil** does not mean morally bad in this context. It refers to a person looking sad or upset. Alternate translation: “Why are you sad” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
NEH 2 2 a39b וְאַתָּה֙ אֵֽינְךָ֣ חוֹלֶ֔ה 1 Now as for you, you are not sick Alternate translation: “I can tell that you are not sick.”
NEH 2 2 g1k7 bita-hq אֵ֣ין זֶ֔ה כִּי־אִ֖ם רֹ֣עַֽ לֵ֑ב 1 This is nothing except evil of heart This phrase means “sadness of heart.” The king speaks as if Nehemiah’s heart were a living thing capable of having emotions. Alternate translation: “You must be very sad inside” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-hq]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
NEH 2 2 a41b figs-doublenegatives אֵ֣ין זֶ֔ה כִּי־אִ֖ם רֹ֣עַֽ לֵ֑ב 1 This is nothing except evil of heart You can state this in a positive form: Alternate translation: “This can only be sadness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
NEH 2 2 eyt8 figs-explicit וָאִירָ֖א הַרְבֵּ֥ה מְאֹֽד 1 Then I was extremely much afraid The implication is that Nehemiah was very afraid because no one was supposed to look unhappy in the king’s presence. If it would make things clearer in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “This made me very afraid, because no one was supposed to look unhappy in the king’s presence.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 2 3 qz4i figs-hyperbole הַמֶּ֖לֶךְ לְעוֹלָ֣ם יִחְיֶ֑ה 1 May the king live to eternity! Nehemiah is showing honor to King Artaxerxes. Here **to eternity** is an exaggeration that refers to a long life. Alternate translation: “Long live the king” or “May you have a long life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
NEH 2 3 a43b figs-123person הַמֶּ֖לֶךְ לְעוֹלָ֣ם יִחְיֶ֑ה 1 May the king live to eternity! Nehemiah addresses the king in the third person as a sign of respect. You can indicate this respect by adding an expression such as “Your Majesty.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
NEH 2 3 klj6 figs-rquestion מַדּ֜וּעַ לֹא־יֵרְע֣וּ פָנַ֗י 1 Why should not my face be evil Nehemiah is making a statement, not asking a question. He does not expect the king to give him reasons why he should not be sad. Instead, he is using the question form for emphasis. If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this as a statement. Alternate translation: “I am sorry, but I cannot help being sad.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
NEH 2 3 a45b figs-synecdoche מַדּ֜וּעַ לֹא־יֵרְע֣וּ פָנַ֗י 1 Why should not my face be evil Nehemiah refers to himself by one part of him, his **face**, because the face shows one’s emotions. Alternate translation: “I have very good reasons to be sad” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
NEH 2 3 a47b figs-idiom מַדּ֜וּעַ לֹא־יֵרְע֣וּ פָנַ֗י 1 Why should not my face be evil **Evil** does not mean morally bad in this context. It refers to a person looking sad or upset. Alternate translation: “I have very good reasons to be sad” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
NEH 2 3 a49b figs-explicit הָעִ֜יר…חֲרֵבָ֔ה 1 the city…is desolate **The city** means Jerusalem. If it would make things clearer in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the city of Jerusalem … lies in ruins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 2 3 eh23 bita-manmade בֵּית־קִבְר֤וֹת אֲבֹתַי֙ 1 the house of the graves of my fathers **House** here is a figurative way of referring to a place. Alternate translation: “the place where my ancestors are buried” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-hq]]) and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 2 3 a51b bita-hq בֵּית־קִבְר֤וֹת אֲבֹתַי֙ 1 the house of the graves of my fathers **Fathers** here figuratively means “ancestors.” Alternate translation: “the place where my ancestors are buried” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-hq]]) and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
NEH 2 3 g7f4 figs-activepassive וּשְׁעָרֶ֖יהָ אֻכְּל֥וּ בָאֵֽשׁ 1 its gates have been consumed by fire If it would be clearer in your language, you can say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “fire has destroyed its gates” or “our enemies have burned its gates” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
NEH 2 4 a53b עַל־מַה־זֶּ֖ה אַתָּ֣ה מְבַקֵּ֑שׁ 1 For what is this you are seeking? Alternate translation: “What do you want me to do for you?”
NEH 2 4 a55b figs-explicit וָֽאֶתְפַּלֵּ֔ל 1 And I prayed The implication is that Nehemiah prayed to God before he answered the king. If it would make things clearer in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Before I answered him, I prayed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 2 4 a57b אֱלֹהֵ֖י הַשָּׁמָֽיִם 1 the God of heaven Alternate translation: “the God who is in heaven”
NEH 2 5 uv1p וָאֹמַ֣ר לַמֶּ֔לֶךְ 1 And I said to the king Alternate translation: “Then I replied to the king”
NEH 2 5 a59b figs-idiom אִם־עַל־הַמֶּ֣לֶךְ ט֔וֹב 1 If it is good to the king This is an idiom that means, “If it seems good in your judgment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
NEH 2 5 a61b figs-123person אִם־עַל־הַמֶּ֣לֶךְ ט֔וֹב 1 If it is good to the king Nehemiah speaks to the king in third person as a form of respect. Alternate translation: “If it seems good in your judgment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
NEH 2 5 ae4b bita-hq וְאִם־יִיטַ֥ב עַבְדְּךָ֖ לְפָנֶ֑יךָ 1 and if your servant is good before your face Here **face** figuratively means the presence of a person. So this could mean, “As I stand here before you.” But “face” could also be referring figuratively to the king himself by naming one part of him. What he thought and felt about Nehemiah’s request would become evident in his face first, so that would be an appropriate part of him to use to represent all of him. Alternate translation: “if you are pleased with me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-hq]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
NEH 2 5 u2zy figs-123person וְאִם־יִיטַ֥ב עַבְדְּךָ֖ לְפָנֶ֑יךָ 1 your servant Nehemiah refers to himself as **your servant** to show his submission to the king. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
NEH 2 5 a63b figs-idiom אֲשֶׁ֧ר תִּשְׁלָחֵ֣נִי אֶל־יְהוּדָ֗ה 1 that you would send me to Judah Nehemiah is really asking for permission to go, rather than asking the king to send him. But as a sign of respect, he speaks as if the king would be taking the initiative. Alternate translation: “please allow me to go to Judah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
NEH 2 5 df8l עִ֛יר קִבְר֥וֹת אֲבֹתַ֖י 1 the city of the graves of my fathers This is similar to [2:3](../02/03.md). Alternate translation: “the city where my ancestors are buried”
NEH 2 5 l6nj figs-synecdoche וְאֶבְנֶֽנָּה 1 and I will build it Nehemiah does not plan to do all of the building himself, but he will be the leader of the work. Alternate translation: “that I and my people may rebuild it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
NEH 2 6 a65b figs-explicit וְהַשֵּׁגַ֣ל ׀ יוֹשֶׁ֣בֶת אֶצְל֗וֹ 1 with the queen sitting beside him This detail indicates that this was a private meal, since the queen probably did not attend public banquets with the king. If it would make things clearer in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “This was a private meal, with the queen sitting next to the king.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 2 6 a67b figs-explicit וְהַשֵּׁגַ֣ל ׀ יוֹשֶׁ֣בֶת אֶצְל֗וֹ 1 with the queen sitting beside him The implication is that the private meal gave Nehemiah the opportunity to speak freely. If it would make things clearer in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I was able to speak freely because this was a private meal, with the queen sitting next to the king.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 2 6 a69b figs-parallelism עַד־מָתַ֛י יִהְיֶ֥ה מַֽהֲלָכֲךָ֖ וּמָתַ֣י תָּשׁ֑וּב 1 Until when will be your journey? And when will you return? These two phrases mean the same thing. The king says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to show that he is genuinely interested in Nehemiah’s situation. You do not need to repeat both phrases in your translation if that would be confusing for your readers. Alternate translation: “How long would you be away?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
NEH 2 6 a71b figs-explicit וַיִּיטַ֤ב לִפְנֵֽי־הַמֶּ֨לֶךְ֙ וַיִּשְׁלָחֵ֔נִי 1 And it was good before the face of the king, and he sent me The implication is that Nehemiah told the king how long he would need to be away. If it would make things clearer in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I told him how long I would be gone. That was acceptable to him, and he gave me permission to go.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 2 6 a73b figs-idiom וַיִּיטַ֤ב 1 And it was good As in verse 5, this is an idiom that means, “If it seems like a good idea to you.” Alternate translation: “That was acceptable.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
NEH 2 6 a75b figs-synecdoche לִפְנֵֽי־הַמֶּ֨לֶךְ֙ 1 before the face of the king Nehemiah refers to the king by one part of him, his **face**, likely because the face shows one’s emotions. Alternate translation: “to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
NEH 2 6 a77b וַיִּשְׁלָחֵ֔נִי 1 and he sent me As in [2:5](../02/05.md), Nehemiah was really asking for permission to go, rather than asking the king to send him. But as a sign of respect, he speaks as if the king took the initiative. Alternate translation: “he gave me permission to go”
NEH 2 6 a79b וָֽאֶתְּנָ֥ה ל֖וֹ זְמָֽן 1 and I gave to him a time Alternate translation: “I told him what day I wanted to leave.”
NEH 2 7 a81b וָאוֹמַר֮ 1 Then I said Alternate translation: “I also said”
NEH 2 7 a83b אִם־עַל־הַמֶּ֣לֶךְ ט֔וֹב 1 If it is good to the king Alternate translation: “If it seems like a good idea to you”
NEH 2 7 a85b figs-123person עַל־הַמֶּ֣לֶךְ 1 to the king Nehemiah addresses the king in the third person as a sign of respect. Alternate translation: “to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
NEH 2 7 rgj6 figs-activepassive אִגְּרוֹת֙ יִתְּנוּ־לִ֔י 1 let letters be given to me You can say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “please give me letters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
NEH 2 7 a87b עַֽל־פַּחֲו֖וֹת 1 for the governors Alternate translation: “that I can show to the governors”
NEH 2 7 qp9n translate-names עֵ֣בֶר הַנָּהָ֑ר 1 Beyond-the-River This is the name of the Persian province that lay west of the Euphrates River. Alternate translation: “the province Beyond the River” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 2 7 a89b אֲשֶׁר֙ יַעֲבִיר֔וּנִי עַ֥ד אֲשֶׁר־אָב֖וֹא אֶל־יְהוּדָֽה 1 that they will bring me across as far as where I enter into Judah Nehemiah’s request is not for these governors to provide him with transportation. Nehemiah explains in [2:9](../02/09.md) that the king did that for him. These letter would instead request the governors to allow him safe passage through their provinces. Alternate translation: "Please tell them to give me safe passage through their provinces to Judah"
NEH 2 8 a91b וְאִגֶּ֡רֶת אֶל־אָסָף֩ 1 and a letter to Asaph Nehemiah is continuing his requests to the king. If it would be clearer in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Please also write a letter for me to Asaph”
NEH 2 8 a93b שֹׁמֵ֨ר 1 the keeper of Alternate translation: “the man who takes care of”
NEH 2 8 a95b figs-explicit הַפַּרְדֵּ֜ס אֲשֶׁ֣ר לַמֶּ֗לֶךְ 1 the forest that belongs to the king The implication is that this forest was near where Nehemiah was going to need the wood. If it would be clearer in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “your royal forest in that area” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 2 8 a97b figs-123person הַפַּרְדֵּ֜ס אֲשֶׁ֣ר לַמֶּ֗לֶךְ 1 the forest that belongs to the king Nehemiah addresses the king in the third person as a sign of respect. Alternate translation: “your royal forest” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
NEH 2 8 a99b אֲשֶׁ֣ר יִתֶּן־לִ֣י עֵצִ֡ים 1 that he will give to me timbers Alternate translation: “Please tell him to give me timber”
NEH 2 8 ac11 figs-metonymy הַבִּירָ֤ה אֲשֶׁר־לַבַּ֨יִת֙ 1 the citadel, which is for the house As in [1:1](../01/01.md), **citadel** refers to a fortress or stronghold. “House” here figuratively describes the temple as the “house” where God lives. Alternate translation: “the fortress that is near the temple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
NEH 2 8 ac13 וְלַבַּ֖יִת אֲשֶׁר־אָב֣וֹא אֵלָ֑יו 1 and for the house into which I will enter Alternate translation: “and for the house that I will live in”
NEH 2 8 ac15 וַיִּתֶּן־לִ֣י הַמֶּ֔לֶךְ 1 And the king gave to me Alternate translation: “The king agreed to all of my requests.”
NEH 2 8 wl1s figs-metaphor כְּיַד־אֱלֹהַ֖י הַטּוֹבָ֥ה עָלָֽי 1 according to the good hand of my God upon me Here **hand** figuratively represents strength, power, control, or action. In this context, the expression means that God acted toward Nehemiah in a positive and favorable manner. Alternate translation: “because God’s favor was upon me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 2 8 ac17 grammar-connect-logic-result כְּיַד־אֱלֹהַ֖י הַטּוֹבָ֥ה עָלָֽי 1 according to the good hand of my God upon me If it would be clearer in your language, you can give this explanation (the reason) before the result that it accounts for, using a connecting word like “so.” Alternate translation: “God’s favor was upon me, and so the king agreed to all of my requests” (See: grammar-connect-logic-result)
NEH 2 9 ac19 וָֽאָב֗וֹא אֶֽל־פַּֽחֲווֹת֙ עֵ֣בֶר הַנָּהָ֔ר 1 And I came to the governors of Beyond-the-River Alternate translation: “When I reached the province Beyond the River, I went to see its governors”
NEH 2 9 ac21 translate-names עֵ֣בֶר הַנָּהָ֔ר 1 Beyond-the-River This is the name of a Persian province. See how you translated it in [2:7](../02/07.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 2 9 ac23 וָאֶתְּנָ֣ה לָהֶ֔ם אֵ֖ת אִגְּר֣וֹת הַמֶּ֑לֶך 1 I gave to them the letters of the king Alternate translation: “I showed them the letters the king had given me.”
NEH 2 9 ac25 figs-explicit וָאֶתְּנָ֣ה לָהֶ֔ם אֵ֖ת אִגְּר֣וֹת הַמֶּ֑לֶך 1 I gave to them the letters of the king '
NEH 2 9 ac27 figs-explicit וַיִּשְׁלַ֤ח עִמִּי֙ הַמֶּ֔לֶךְ שָׂ֥רֵי חַ֖יִל וּפָרָשִֽׁים 1 And the king sent with me officers of the army and horsemen The implication is that the king did this when Nehemiah left for Judah, and that the purpose was to protect him on his journey. If it would make things clearer for your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “When I left to travel to Judah, the king sent along some army officers and soldiers riding on horses to protect me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 2 9 ac29 figs-events וַיִּשְׁלַ֤ח עִמִּי֙ הַמֶּ֔לֶךְ שָׂ֥רֵי חַ֖יִל וּפָרָשִֽׁים 1 And the king sent with me officers of the army and horsemen You can put this information first because it happened before Nehemiah showed his letters to the governors. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-events]])
NEH 2 10 ac31 figs-explicit וַיִּשְׁמַ֞ע סַנְבַלַּ֣ט הַחֹרֹנִ֗י וְטֽוֹבִיָּה֙ הָעֶ֣בֶד הָֽעַמֹּנִ֔י 1 Then Sanballat the Horonite and Tobiah, the servant, the Ammonite, heard Sanballat was the governor of Samaria, the area right next to Judah. So he was one of the people Nehemiah would have shown a letter from the king authorizing his trip. If it would make things clearer for your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “This was how Sanballat the Horonite and his deputy Tobiah the Ammonite learned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 2 10 yz8p translate-names סַנְבַלַּ֣ט הַחֹרֹנִ֗י 1 Sanballat the Horonite Sanballat is the name of a man, and Horonite is the name of his people group. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 2 10 eh4c translate-names וְטֽוֹבִיָּה֙…הָֽעַמֹּנִ֔י 1 and Tobiah…the Ammonite Tobiah is the name of a man, and Ammonite is the name of his people group. Tobiah’s name occurs over a dozen times in the book of Nehemiah. It will be helpful to your readers if you translate it consistently each time. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 2 10 vb3p וְטֽוֹבִיָּה֙ הָעֶ֣בֶד 1 and Tobiah, the servant From the role that Tobiah plays in the book, this phrase seems to indicate that he was the official who served directly under Sanballat. Alternate translation: “Tobiah, his deputy”
NEH 2 10 ac33 figs-explicit וַיֵּ֥רַע לָהֶ֖ם רָעָ֣ה גְדֹלָ֑ה אֲשֶׁר־בָּ֥א אָדָ֔ם לְבַקֵּ֥שׁ טוֹבָ֖ה לִבְנֵ֥י יִשְׂרָאֵֽל 1 And it was evil to them, a great evil, that someone had come to seek good for the sons of Israel The implication is that Sanballat and Tobiah did not want to see Judah become strong again because that would be a threat to the power and influence of Samaria. If it would make things clearer in your language, you could say this explicitly. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 2 10 ac35 figs-idiom וַיֵּ֥רַע לָהֶ֖ם רָעָ֣ה גְדֹלָ֑ה 1 And it was evil to them, a great evil Here **evil** means “bad,” so this expression is the opposite of “if it is good to you” in [2:5](../02/05.md) and [2:7](../02/05.md). Alternate translation: “They thought it was a bad thing, a very bad thing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
NEH 2 10 ac37 figs-doublet וַיֵּ֥רַע לָהֶ֖ם רָעָ֣ה גְדֹלָ֑ה 1 And it was evil to them, a great evil These two short phrases mean almost the same thing. Nehemiah uses together for emphasis. If it would be clearer in your language, you could combine them. Alternate translation: “they became very upset” or “they did not like it at all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
NEH 2 10 ac39 figs-idiom אֲשֶׁר־בָּ֥א אָדָ֔ם לְבַקֵּ֥שׁ טוֹבָ֖ה לִבְנֵ֥י יִשְׂרָאֵֽל 1 that someone had come to seek good for the sons of Israel **To seek good for** means “to help.” Alternate translation: “that someone had come to help the people of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
NEH 2 10 ac41 figs-gendernotations לִבְנֵ֥י יִשְׂרָאֵֽל 1 for the sons of Israel As in [1:6](../01/06.md), **sons** means “descendants.” Alternate translation: “the people of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
NEH 2 11 ac43 figs-explicit וָאָב֖וֹא אֶל־יְרוּשָׁלִָ֑ם 1 And I came to Jerusalem Here the text might be implying that Nehemiah made it safely to Jerusalem anyway, despite the opposition of Sanballat and Tobiah. Alternate translation: “But I made it safely to Jerusalem despite their opposition.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 2 11 ac45 וָאֱהִי־שָׁ֖ם יָמִ֥ים שְׁלֹשָֽׁה 1 and I was there three days This phrase seems to look ahead to the next verse, and you could translate it that way and make it the start of the next sentence. Alternate translation: “After I had been there for three days”
NEH 2 12 ac47 figs-explicit וָאָק֣וּם ׀ לַ֗יְלָה 1 Then I arose in the night The implication is that Nehemiah went out to inspect the city walls, as described in 1:13–15(../01/13.md). The implication is also that he did this at night so that no one would know he was doing it. If it would make things clearer in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I got up secretly in the night to inspect the city walls.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 2 12 ac49 figs-gendernotations אֲנִי֮ וַאֲנָשִׁ֣ים ׀ מְעַט֮ עִמִּי֒ 1 myself and a few men with me The word **men** here could conceivably include both men and women. However, for a nighttime mission through the ruins of the city walls, it’s likely that Nehemiah brought along only other men. So in this context you could use a word that indicates that. Alternate translation: “I brought only a few other men with me.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
NEH 2 12 ac51 figs-hyperbole וְלֹא־הִגַּ֣דְתִּי לְאָדָ֔ם מָ֗ה אֱלֹהַי֙ נֹתֵ֣ן אֶל־לִבִּ֔י לַעֲשׂ֖וֹת לִירוּשָׁלִָ֑ם 1 and I did not tell anyone what my God had been giving to my heart to do for Jerusalem Probably Nehemiah told at least some people, since he brought a few men with him when he went out to inspect the walls. So “not … anyone” might be an exaggeration that emphasizes the secrecy Nehemiah maintained. Alternate translation: “I did not say publicly what God had led me to do for Jerusalem.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
NEH 2 12 ac53 grammar-connect-logic-result וְלֹא־הִגַּ֣דְתִּי לְאָדָ֔ם מָ֗ה אֱלֹהַי֙ נֹתֵ֣ן אֶל־לִבִּ֔י לַעֲשׂ֖וֹת לִירוּשָׁלִָ֑ם 1 and I did not tell anyone If it would be clearer in your language, you can give this explanation before describing Nehemiah’s night time mission, because it is the reason that explains the result of him maintaining so much secrecy. (See: grammar-connect-logic-result)
NEH 2 12 s7mw figs-metaphor מָ֗ה אֱלֹהַי֙ נֹתֵ֣ן אֶל־לִבִּ֔י לַעֲשׂ֖וֹת 1 had put into my heart Here Nehemiah’s **heart** figuratively represents his thoughts and will. Alternate translation: “what God had inspired me to do” or “what God had led me to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 2 12 wd63 figs-explicit וּבְהֵמָה֙ אֵ֣ין עִמִּ֔י 1 Now there was no animal with me The implication is that this was another measure to maintain secrecy. If it would make things clearer in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “To keep things quiet, there were no other animals with me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 2 13 au61 figs-synecdoche וָאֵצְאָ֨ה 1 I went out Even though he brought a few men with him, Nehemiah says “I” because he was the primary person conducting this inspection. In this narrative, he represents the entire group. If it would be clearer in your language, you could say “we” in your translation to express this meaning. If your language makes this distinction, “we” would not include the addressee. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
NEH 2 13 ac55 translate-names בְשַֽׁעַר־הַגַּ֜יא 1 at the gate of the valley This is the name of one of the gates of Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “at the Valley Gate” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 2 13 ac57 figs-metonymy וְאֶל־פְּנֵי֙ עֵ֣ין הַתַּנִּ֔ין 1 even to the face of the spring of the dragon Here **face** figuratively means the front of an object. This means that the group passed in front of the well. Alternate translation: “we went past the Dragon Well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
NEH 2 13 pt1h translate-names עֵ֣ין הַתַּנִּ֔ין 1 the spring of the dragon This is the name of a spring-fed well outside Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “the Dragon Well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 2 13 mif3 translate-names וְאֶל־שַׁ֖עַר הָאַשְׁפֹּ֑ת 1 and to the gate of dung This is the name of another one of the gates of Jerusalem. It seems that rubbish was removed from the city through this gate. Alternate translation: “the Rubbish Gate” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 2 13 ac59 וָאֱהִ֨י שֹׂבֵ֜ר בְּחוֹמֹ֤ת יְרוּשָׁלִַ֨ם֙ 1 And I was looking intently at the walls of Jerusalem Alternate translation: “We made a careful inspection of the walls of Jerusalem.”
NEH 2 13 a8u1 figs-activepassive אֲשֶׁר־הֵ֣ם פְּרוּצִ֔ים וּשְׁעָרֶ֖יהָ אֻכְּל֥וּ בָאֵֽשׁ 1 that they were broken down, and its gates had been consumed by fire You can use active forms to express the meaning of these two passive verbs. Alternate translation: “which our enemies had broken open, and the wooden gates which they had destroyed with fire” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
NEH 2 14 l39v figs-synecdoche וָאֱהִ֨י עֹלֶ֤ה בַנַּ֨חַל֙ לַ֔יְלָה וָאֱהִ֥י שֹׂבֵ֖ר בַּחוֹמָ֑ה וָאָשׁ֗וּב וָאָב֛וֹא בְּשַׁ֥עַר הַגַּ֖יְא וָאָשֽׁוּב 1 Then I crossed to Nehemiah continues to speak of himself as representative of the whole group. Alternate translation: “Then we came to” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
NEH 2 14 ac61 translate-names שַׁ֣עַר הָעַ֔יִן 1 the gate of the spring This is the name of one of the gates of Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “the Fountain Gate” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 2 14 ac63 translate-names בְּרֵכַ֖ת הַמֶּ֑לֶךְ 1 the pool of the king This is the name of a pool outside Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “the Royal Pool” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 2 14 ac65 וְאֵין־מָק֥וֹם לַבְּהֵמָ֖ה לַעֲבֹ֥ר תַּחְתָּֽי 1 but there was no place for the animal under me to pass Alternate translation: “The opening there was so narrow that the animal I was riding could not get through.”
NEH 2 15 ac67 grammar-connect-logic-result וָאֱהִ֨י עֹלֶ֤ה בַנַּ֨חַל֙ לַ֔יְלָה וָאֱהִ֥י שֹׂבֵ֖ר בַּחוֹמָ֑ה וָאָשׁ֗וּב וָאָב֛וֹא בְּשַׁ֥עַר הַגַּ֖יְא וָאָשֽׁוּב 1 And I was going up by the wadi at night Nehemiah is saying that because they could not continue going along the wall, they had to take a different route. You could use an introductory word like “so” to indicate this. Alternate translation: “So we followed the path of the Kidron Brook” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
NEH 2 15 ac69 figs-synecdoche וָאֱהִ֨י עֹלֶ֤ה 1 And I was going up Nehemiah continues to speak of himself as representative of the whole group. Alternate translation: “So we followed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
NEH 2 15 ac71 translate-unknown בַנַּ֨חַל֙ 1 by the wadi This refers to the Kidron Brook, which runs along the eastern side of Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “the Kidron Brook” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
NEH 2 15 ac73 figs-explicit לַ֔יְלָה 1 at night The implication may be, “even though it was night.” The slippery, uneven ground of the path along the brook would have been more dangerous in the dark. (Nehemiah is writing a chronicle of all the things he did to help the Jews, and he records specific things that required risk or sacrifice.) Alternate translation: “even though it was night.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 2 15 ac75 figs-explicit וָאֱהִ֥י שֹׂבֵ֖ר בַּחוֹמָ֑ה 1 and I was looking intently at the wall The implication is that from the brook they were able to look up at the wall and see its condition. If it would be clearer in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “From there we were able to look up at the wall and see its condition.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 2 15 ac77 וָאָשׁ֗וּב 1 Then I turned back This likely means not that Nehemiah turned around, but that this route brought him and the other men back to where they started. So they were able to go all the way around the city and inspect the entire wall. Alternate translation: “This route brought us back to where we started.”
NEH 2 15 ac79 figs-synecdoche וָאָשׁ֗וּב 1 Then I turned back The other men with Nehemiah also followed him. Alternate translation: “This route brought us back to where we started.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
NEH 2 15 b637 וָאָב֛וֹא בְּשַׁ֥עַר הַגַּ֖יְא 1 and I came in at the gate of the valley Alternate translation: “We re-entered the city through the Valley Gate”
NEH 2 15 ac81 translate-names בְּשַׁ֥עַר הַגַּ֖יְא 1 at the gate of the valley See how you translated the name of this gate in [2:13](../02/13.md). Alternate translation: “the Valley Gate” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 2 15 ac83 figs-explicit וָאָשֽׁוּב 1 and I returned Here the expression probably means “and I went back home.” The implication is that no one had seen him. If it would be clearer in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “and I went back home without being seen.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 2 16 ac85 וְהַסְּגָנִ֗ים 1 Now the prefects Alternate translation: “the city officials”
NEH 2 16 ac87 figs-explicit עַד־כֵּ֖ן לֹ֥א הִגַּֽדְתִּי 1 until this time I had not yet told The implication is that Nehemiah had not yet told anyone that he was planning to repair the walls. If it would be clearer in your language, you could say that explicitly. I Alternate translation: “had not yet told … that I was planning to repair the walls.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 2 16 ac89 figs-explicit וְלַיְּהוּדִ֨ים וְלַכֹּהֲנִ֜ים וְלַחֹרִ֣ים וְלַסְּגָנִ֗ים 1 the Jews, the priests, or the nobles, or the perfects The implication seems to be that Nehemiah had not said anything privately about his plans to any particular group of leaders. If it would be clearer in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “I had not even said anything about it privately to the Jewish leaders, the priests, the leading citizens, or the city officials” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 2 16 ac91 figs-synecdoche וְלַיְּהוּדִ֨ים 1 the Jews While this expression means “the Jewish people” in most of the book, in the contexts here and in [5:17](../05/17.md) it seems to mean “the Jewish leaders.” Nehemiah is describing some members of this people group, its leaders, as if they were the whole group. Alternate translation: “the Jewish leaders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
NEH 2 16 xd75 figs-explicit וּלְיֶ֨תֶר֙ עֹשֵׂ֣ה הַמְּלָאכָ֔ה 1 the rest who were about to do the work This seems to refer to the people who would later rebuild the walls. Alternate translation: “the others who would later do the work of rebuilding the walls” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 2 17 ac93 figs-explicit וָאוֹמַ֣ר אֲלֵהֶ֗ם 1 Then I said to them This might imply a contrast between what Nehemiah did previously (kept quiet) and what he did now (told everyone). You could use a word like “but” to indicate this. Alternate translation: “But now I said to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 2 17 ac95 figs-abstractnouns אַתֶּ֤ם רֹאִים֙ הָרָעָה֙ אֲשֶׁ֣ר אֲנַ֣חְנוּ בָ֔הּ 1 You see the evil that we are in As in [1:3](../01/03.md), here the abstract noun **evil** does not refer to something morally bad, but to a difficult situation. You can translate this idea with an adjective such as “desperate.” Alternate translation: “You see what a desperate situation we are in” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
NEH 2 17 we6m figs-you אַתֶּ֤ם רֹאִים֙ הָרָעָה֙ 1 You see the evil Here **you** is plural, referring to all the people mentioned in [2:16](../02/16.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
NEH 2 17 ac97 figs-activepassive יְרוּשָׁלִַ֨ם֙ חֲרֵבָ֔ה וּשְׁעָרֶ֖יהָ נִצְּת֣וּ בָאֵ֑שׁ 1 Jerusalem is desolate and its gates have been burned by fire If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the meaning here using active forms. Alternate translation: “Jerusalem lies in ruins, and our enemies have burned down its gates” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
NEH 2 17 f468 figs-explicit יְרוּשָׁלִַ֨ם֙ חֲרֵבָ֔ה וּשְׁעָרֶ֖יהָ נִצְּת֣וּ בָאֵ֑שׁ 1 Jerusalem is desolate and its gates have been burned by fire The implication is, “We need to do something about this!” If it would be clearer in your language, you could add something like that explicitly. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 2 17 ac99 לְכ֗וּ וְנִבְנֶה֙ אֶת־חוֹמַ֣ת יְרוּשָׁלִַ֔ם 1 Come, and let us build the wall of Jerusalem **Come** does not mean “come over to this place” but “come on, let’s do this!” Nehemiah is issuing both an invitation and a public challenge to everyone who is listening. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could translate his words in a way that reflects this. Alternate translation: “I challenge all of you to join me in rebuilding the wall of Jerusalem.”
NEH 2 17 ll6y figs-abstractnouns וְלֹא־נִהְיֶ֥ה ע֖וֹד חֶרְפָּֽה 1 and we will no longer be a reproach You can translate the idea behind the abstract noun “reproach” with an adjective such as “ashamed.” Alternate translation: “so we will no longer be ashamed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
NEH 2 18 twi7 figs-metaphor יַ֣ד אֱלֹהַ֗י אֲשֶׁר־הִיא֙ טוֹבָ֣ה עָלַ֔י 1 the hand of my God, that it was good upon me Here hand is a metaphor meaning strength, power, control, or action. In this context, it means that God had been acting toward Nehemiah in a positive and favorable manner. See how you translated the similar expression in [2:8](../02/08.md). Alternate translation: “God’s favor had been upon me” or “God had been helping me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 2 18 a11c דִּבְרֵ֥י הַמֶּ֖לֶךְ אֲשֶׁ֣ר אָֽמַר־לִ֑י 1 the words of the king that he had spoken to me Alternate translation: “I also told them how the king had given me permission to come.”
NEH 2 18 a13c figs-explicit נָק֣וּם וּבָנִ֔ינוּ 1 We will rise up and build The implication is that the people responded this way after they heard all that God had done for Nehemiah. If it would be clearer in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “When they heard this, they said, ‘Let’s get going and begin building!’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 2 18 a15c figs-idiom נָק֣וּם וּבָנִ֔ינוּ 1 We will rise up and build In this context, **rise up** means to begin something. This was an enthusiastic response. Alternate translation: “Let’s get going and start building!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
NEH 2 18 y6ui figs-idiom וַיְחַזְּק֥וּ יְדֵיהֶ֖ם לַטּוֹבָֽה 1 And they strengthened their hands for good The phrase “strengthened their hands” means that they encouraged one another. “For good” refers to the rebuilding project, which they recognized would be a great benefit. Alternate translation: “So they prepared themselves to do this good work” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
NEH 2 18 a17c bita-hq יְדֵיהֶ֖ם 1 their hands **Hand** in this context represents a person’s strength or power. Alternate translation: “they prepared themselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-hq]] [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 2 19 et87 translate-names סַנְבַלַּ֨ט הַחֹרֹנִ֜י 1 Sanballat the Horonite Sanballat is the name of a man, and Horonite is the name of his people group. See how you translated this in [2:10](../02/10.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 2 19 a19c translate-names וְטֹבִיָּ֣ה…הָֽעַמּוֹנִ֗י 1 and Tobiah…the Ammonite Tobiah is the name of a man, and Ammonite is the name of his people group. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 2 19 a21c וְטֹבִיָּ֣ה ׀ הָעֶ֣בֶד 1 and Tobiah, the servant See how you translated this in [2:10](../02/10.md). Alternate translation: “Tobiah, his deputy”
NEH 2 19 cxe8 translate-names וְגֶ֨שֶׁם֙ הָֽעַרְבִ֔י 1 and Geshem the Arabian Geshem is the name of a man, and Arabian is the name of his people group. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 2 19 a23c figs-explicit וַיִּשְׁמַע֩ 1 Then…heard The implication is that these men learned that the Jews in Jerusalem had started to rebuild the city walls. If it would make things clearer in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “learned that we had started to rebuild the walls of Jerusalem.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 2 19 a25c figs-parallelism וַיַּלְעִ֣גוּ לָ֔נוּ וַיִּבְז֖וּ עָלֵ֑ינוּ 1 and they mocked us, and they despised us These two statements mean similar things. Nehemiah says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to emphasize how contemptuous and dismissive these enemies were being. You do not need to repeat both phrases in your translation if that would be confusing for your readers. Alternate translation: “they ridiculed us mercilessly,” otherwise “they made fun of us and ridiculed us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
NEH 2 19 ww1k figs-rquestion מָֽה־הַדָּבָ֤ר הַזֶּה֙ אֲשֶׁ֣ר אַתֶּ֣ם עֹשִׂ֔ים הַעַ֥ל הַמֶּ֖לֶךְ אַתֶּ֥ם מֹרְדִֽים 1 What is this thing that you are doing? Are you rebelling against the king? These enemies are not asking questions that they expect Nehemiah to answer. They are using the question form to mock him. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could translate their words as statements. Alternate translation: “What you are doing is not going to amount to anything! But you should not be rebelling against the king!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
NEH 2 19 u8ri figs-explicit מָֽה־הַדָּבָ֤ר הַזֶּה֙ אֲשֶׁ֣ר אַתֶּ֣ם עֹשִׂ֔ים 1 What is this thing that you are doing? The implication is that this **thing** is really “nothing” at all. If it would make things clearer in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “What you are doing is not going to amount to anything!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 2 20 a27c figs-explicit וָאָשִׁ֨יב אוֹתָ֜ם דָּבָ֗ר וָאוֹמַ֤ר לָהֶם֙ 1 Then I returned them a word, and I said to them This might imply a contrast between the intimidation his enemies wanted him to feel and the courage that God gave him. You could use a word like “but” to indicate this contrast. Alternate translation: “But in response I said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 2 20 a29c figs-parallelism וָאָשִׁ֨יב אוֹתָ֜ם דָּבָ֗ר וָאוֹמַ֤ר לָהֶם֙ 1 Then I returned them a word, and I said to them These two statements mean similar things. Nehemiah says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to emphasize how firmly he responded to these enemies. You do not need to repeat both phrases in your translation if that would be confusing for your readers. Alternate translation: “But I answered them firmly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
NEH 2 20 a31c אֱלֹהֵ֣י הַשָּׁמַ֔יִם ה֚וּא יַצְלִ֣יחַֽ לָ֔נוּ 1 The God of heaven, he will cause us to succeed Alternate translation: “The God who is in heaven will enable us to complete this project.”
NEH 2 20 a33c figs-metaphor וַאֲנַ֥חְנוּ עֲבָדָ֖יו נָק֣וּם וּבָנִ֑ינוּ 1 we ourselves, his servants, will rise up and build As in [1:6](../01/06.md), the word **servants** refers to the special role that the people of Israel had in the world as a model community of God’s followers. Alternate translation: “we are his chosen people, and we are going to begin rebuilding” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 2 20 iv9x figs-idiom נָק֣וּם וּבָנִ֑ינוּ 1 will arise and build As in [2:18](../02/18.md), **rise up** means to begin something. Alternate translation: “going to begin rebuilding” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
NEH 2 20 a4e6 figs-doublet וְלָכֶ֗ם אֵֽין־חֵ֧לֶק וּצְדָקָ֛ה וְזִכָּר֖וֹן בִּירוּשָׁלִָֽם 1 But you have no share, no right, and no historic claim in Jerusalem The terms **share**, **right**, and **memorial** all mean something similar. Nehemiah uses them together for emphasis. The meanings are not entirely certain. “Share” may suggest that the Samaritans are not part of the community. “Right” may mean that they have no legal basis to say what should happen in Jerusalem. “Memorial” could mean that they had have no role in the city’s history, or that there is no record of their Israelite ancestry. If it would be clearer in your language, you could combine these terms. Alternate translation: “But you have absolutely nothing to do with what happens in Jerusalem.” (Note: A doublet can involve the use of more than two terms.) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
NEH 2 20 a35c figs-abstractnouns וְלָכֶ֗ם אֵֽין־חֵ֧לֶק וּצְדָקָ֛ה וְזִכָּר֖וֹן בִּירוּשָׁלִָֽם 1 But you have no share, no right, and no historic claim in Jerusalem Depending on their meaning, the terms “share,” “right,” and “memorial” may be abstract nouns. If so, you could translate the idea behind them with a phrase that expresses their overall meaning. Alternate translation: “But you have absolutely nothing to do with what happens in Jerusalem.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
NEH 3 intro dfw6 0 # Nehemiah 03 General Notes<br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Priests<br>The priests worked on rebuilding the city. Normally, the priests were exempt from this type of work. Because they helped, it emphasizes that this is a holy work and something done for Yahweh. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/priest]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])<br><br>### Cooperation<br>Everyone worked on this project. Many names are mentioned to emphasize the cooperation between the different families. Each was given a section of the wall to rebuild.
NEH 3 1 ald8 figs-explicit וַיָּ֡קָם אֶלְיָשִׁיב֩ הַכֹּהֵ֨ן הַגָּד֜וֹל 1 And Eliashib the high priest rose up This chapter records the names of the people who repaired the wall of Jerusalem, and it describes what parts of the wall they worked on. If it would make things clearer in your language, you could say this explicitly at the start of the chapter. (In this book Nehemiah records everything he did to help the people of Judah, and he prays that God will remember him and bless him for what he did. We see in this chapter that he also wants God to remember and bless everyone else who helped.) Alternate translation: “These are the names of the people who helped to rebuild the wall around Jerusalem. Now Eliashib the high priest rose up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 3 1 a37c figs-idiom וַיָּ֡קָם 1 And…rose up As in [2:18](../02/18.md), **rise up** here means to begin something. Alternate translation: “began to” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
NEH 3 1 g9az translate-names אֶלְיָשִׁיב֩ 1 Eliashib This is the name of a man. It occurs about a dozen times in the book of Nehemiah. It will be helpful to your readers if you translate it consistently each time. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 3 1 a39c translate-unknown הַכֹּהֵ֨ן הַגָּד֜וֹל 1 the high priest This means that Eliashib was the leader of the priests who conducted worship in the temple and performed many other religious and community functions. Alternate translation: “the priest who was in charge in the temple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
NEH 3 1 a41c bita-hq וְאֶחָ֣יו הַכֹּהֲנִ֗ים 1 with his brothers the priests Here **brother** could mean Eliashib’s biological brothers, but more likely it figuratively refers to the rest of the priests. Alternate translation: “with his fellow priests” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-hq]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 3 1 a43c figs-explicit וַיִּבְנוּ֙ 1 and they built It is clear from the context that they were not building something brand new. Rather, they were rebuilding the walls that had been knocked down. This expression occurs several times in this chapter. It would be helpful to your readers to translate it consistently. Alternate translation: “rebuilt.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 3 1 a45c translate-names שַׁ֣עַר הַצֹּ֔אן 1 the gate of the sheep This is the name of one of the gates of Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “the Sheep Gate” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 3 1 a47c translate-symaction הֵ֣מָּה קִדְּשׁ֔וּהוּ 1 They themselves consecrated it **Consecrate** means to set something apart for a special purpose. The Sheep Gate was the gate closest to the temple. By dedicating it to God, the priests were symbolically dedicating the entire wall to God. The rebuilt wall would define and protect the city of Jerusalem as the place from which God had chosen to start making himself famous throughout the world, as described in [1:9](../01/09.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
NEH 3 1 a49c figs-explicit הֵ֣מָּה קִדְּשׁ֔וּהוּ 1 They themselves consecrated it If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say explicitly that by dedicating the Sheep Gate to God, the priests were symbolically dedicating the entire wall to God. Alternate translation: “They dedicated this gate to God as a symbolic way of dedicating the entire wall.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 3 1 a51c וַֽיַּעֲמִ֖ידוּ דַּלְתֹתָ֑יו 1 and erected its doors **Its** refers to the Sheep Gate. “Erected” means “set up” or “set in place.” This expression occurs several times in this chapter. It would be helpful to your readers to translate it consistently. Alternate translation: “set the doors in place.”
NEH 3 1 a7k9 figs-ellipsis וְעַד־מִגְדַּ֤ל הַמֵּאָה֙ קִדְּשׁ֔וּהוּ עַ֖ד מִגְדַּ֥ל חֲנַנְאֵֽל 1 And they consecrated it as far as the tower of the Hundred and as far as the tower of Hananel In this record of people who helped rebuild the wall, Nehemiah is writing more of a list than a narrative, so he often leaves out one or more words that a sentence normally would have in order to be complete. This sentence seems to mean, “They rebuilt the wall as far as the Tower of the Hundred, and beyond that to the Tower of Hananel. Then they dedicated that part of the wall to God as well.” You could say something like that if it would be helpful to your readers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
NEH 3 1 e1th translate-names מִגְדַּ֤ל הַמֵּאָה֙…מִגְדַּ֥ל חֲנַנְאֵֽל 1 the tower of the Hundred…the tower of Hananel These are the names of two of the towers on the Jerusalem wall. Alternate translation: “the Tower of the Hundred…the Tower of Hananel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 3 1 r9wn translate-unknown מִגְדַּ֤ל הַמֵּאָה֙ 1 the tower of the Hundred It is not clear why this tower had this name. The tower could have been 100 cubits high (about 150 feet or about 45 meters), or 100 soldiers may have been stationed there. Since the reason is unknown, it might be best just to call this the “Tower of the Hundred.” However, if it would be confusing to your readers not to explain the meaning of the number, you suggest one of these possibilities. Alternate translation: “The Tower of the Hundred Soldiers” or “The Hundred-Cubit Tower.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 3 2 xtj9 bita-hq וְעַל־יָד֥וֹ בָנ֖וּ 1 And…built at his hand Here **at his hand** is a figurative way of saying “beside him” or “next to him.” This expression occurs several times in this chapter. It would be helpful to your readers to translate it consistently. Alternate translation: “next to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-hq]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
NEH 3 2 qf25 figs-gendernotations אַנְשֵׁ֣י יְרֵח֑וֹ 1 men of Jericho The word **men** here can include women, and it does seem to include them in this context. Elsewhere in this chapter, [3:12](../02/12.md) tells us that “Shallum and his daughters repaired part of the wall.” So we know that both men and women worked on this project. Alternate translation: “people from Jericho” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
NEH 3 2 u2s6 translate-names יְרֵח֑וֹ 1 Jericho Jericho is the name of one of the cities in Judah. We see from this chapter that several cities and towns sent work parties to help rebuild the walls of Jerusalem. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 3 2 q84s translate-names זַכּ֖וּר בֶּן־אִמְרִֽי 1 Zaccur, the son of Imri Zaccur is the name of a man, and Imri is the name of his father. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 3 3 bbm9 translate-names הַסְּנָאָ֑ה 1 Hassenaah Hassenaah is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 3 3 if44 translate-names שַׁ֣עַר הַדָּגִ֔ים 1 the gate of fish This is the name of one of the gates of Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “the Fish Gate” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 3 3 kxd6 וַֽיַּעֲמִ֨ידוּ֙ דַּלְתֹתָ֔יו מַנְעוּלָ֖יו וּבְרִיחָֽיו 1 They themselves laid its beams and erected its doors, its bolts, and its bars This expression occurs several times in this chapter. It would be helpful to your readers to translate it consistently. Alternate translation: “They framed it with wooden beams, they set its doors in place, and they installed bolts and bars”
NEH 3 3 kc48 figs-explicit מַנְעוּלָ֖יו וּבְרִיחָֽיו 1 its bolts, and its bars Bolts and bars locked the gates securely. If it would make things clearer in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “bolts and bars for locking the gate.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 3 3 nn6j figs-ellipsis הֶחֱזִ֗יק…הֶחֱזִ֔יק 1 strengthened…strengthened **Strengthened** means “repaired.” It refers to repairing the wall, although Nehemiah does not specify this. This expression occurs several times in this chapter. It would be helpful to your readers to translate it consistently. Alternate translation: “repaired the next section of of the wall” (See: Ellipsis)
NEH 3 4 c8hi translate-names מְרֵמ֤וֹת בֶּן־אוּרִיָּה֙ בֶּן־הַקּ֔וֹץ 1 Meremoth, the son of Uriah, the son of Hakkoz Meremoth is the name of a man, Uriah is the name of his father, and Hakkoz is the name of his grandfather. Alternate translation: “Meremoth, the son of Uriah and grandson of Hakkoz” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 3 4 inh2 translate-names מְשֻׁלָּ֥ם בֶּן־בֶּרֶכְיָ֖ה בֶּן־מְשֵׁיזַבְאֵ֑ל 1 Meshullam, the son of Berechiah, the son of Meshezabel Meshullam is the name of a man, Berechiah is the name of his father, and Meshezabel is the name of his grandfather. Alternate translation: “Meshullam, the son of Berekiah and grandson of Meshezabel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 3 4 xn3i translate-names צָד֖וֹק בֶּֽן־בַּעֲנָֽא 1 Zadok, the son of Baana Zadok is the name of a man, and Baana is the name of his father. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 3 5 d8sa figs-ellipsis הֶחֱזִ֣יקוּ הַתְּקוֹעִ֑ים 1 Tekoites repaired These phrases refer to repairing the wall. Alternate translation: “Tekoites repaired the wall” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
NEH 3 5 j3k4 translate-names הַתְּקוֹעִ֑י 1 the Tekoites Tekoa is the name of one of the cities in Judah that sent a work party to help rebuild the walls of Jerusalem. The Tekoites are the people who came from this city. Alternate translation: “some people from Tekoa” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 3 5 x484 grammar-connect-logic-contrast וְאַדִּֽירֵיהֶם֙ 1 but their nobles Here Nehemiah is indicating a contrast between what these people should have done and what they actually did. You can use a word like “but” to indicate this. Alternate translation: “But the leading citizens of Tekoa” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
NEH 3 5 l7zc figs-explicit לֹא־הֵבִ֣יאוּ צַוָּרָ֔ם בַּעֲבֹדַ֖ת אֲדֹנֵיהֶֽם 1 did not bring their necks to the service of their lords Nehemiah does not state the reason why the nobles did not do the work, but it is implied. Alternate translation: “were too proud to do the work” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 3 5 nsg3 figs-metonymy לֹא־הֵבִ֣יאוּ צַוָּרָ֔ם בַּעֲבֹדַ֖ת אֲדֹנֵיהֶֽם 1 did not bring their necks to the service of their lords Here the **neck** represents the entire person, and specifically the person at work. The neck is likely associated with work because in this agrarian culture, draft animals would put their necks into yokes so that they could pull plows and drag loads. Alternate translation: “were too proud to do the work” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
NEH 3 5 r94d translate-unknown בַּעֲבֹדַ֖ת אֲדֹנֵיהֶֽם 1 to the service of their lords **Lords** here most likely refers to the leaders of Judah, who had asked all the surrounding cities and towns to send work parties to help rebuild the walls of Jerusalem. Another possibility is that the plural form of the word “lord” actually refers to God. Alternate translation: “the work that the leaders of Judah had asked them to do” or “the service of their Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
NEH 3 5 d3h9 figs-abstractnouns בַּעֲבֹדַ֖ת 1 to…service of **Service** is an abstract noun that refers to the work of rebuilding the wall. You can translate the idea behind it with a concrete noun such as “work.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
NEH 3 6 ykz8 translate-names שַׁ֨עַר הַיְשָׁנָ֜ה 1 the gate of old This is the name of one of the gates of Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “the Old Gate” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 3 6 i43m translate-names יֽוֹיָדָע֙ בֶּן־פָּסֵ֔חַ 1 Joiada, the son of Paseah Joiada is the name of a man, and Paseah is the name of his father. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 3 6 n1wi translate-names וּמְשֻׁלָּ֖ם בֶּן־בְּסֽוֹדְיָ֑ה 1 and Meshullam, the son of Besodeiah Meshullam is the name of a man, and Besodeiah is the name of his father. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 3 7 hu9u translate-names מְלַטְיָ֣ה הַגִּבְעֹנִ֗י 1 Melatiah the Gibeonite Melatiah is the name of a man. “Gibeonite” means that he was from the city of Gibeon. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 3 7 ipe7 translate-names וְיָדוֹן֙ הַמֵּרֹ֣נֹתִ֔י 1 Jadon the Meronothite Jadon is the name of a man. “Meronothite” probably means that he was from the town of Meronoth. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 3 7 n6xg translate-names אַנְשֵׁ֥י גִבְע֖וֹן וְהַמִּצְפָּ֑ה 1 the men of Gibeon, and of Mizpah Gibeon and Mizpah were two of the cities in Judah that sent work parties to help rebuild the walls of Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “other people from Gibeon and from the city of Mizpah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 3 7 mj92 translate-unknown לְכִסֵּ֕א פַּחַ֖ת עֵ֥בֶר הַנָּהָֽר 1 to the seat of authority of the governor of Beyond-the-River This is where the governor would have stayed when visiting Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “as far as the residence of the governor of the province Beyond the River” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
NEH 3 8 b2yh translate-names עֻזִּיאֵ֤ל בֶּֽן־חַרְהֲיָה֙ 1 Uzziel, the son of Harbaiah Uzziel is the name of a man, and Harhaiah is the name of his father. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 3 8 f4p5 translate-unknown צֽוֹרְפִ֔ים 1 of the goldsmiths This means that Uzziel was one of the goldsmiths who worked in Jerusalem. A goldsmith is a person who makes jewelry and other objects from gold. The term “goldsmith” occurs several more times in the chapter, and if you include both the name and the definition here, that would help your readers understand it in its later occurrences. Alternate translation: “He was one of the goldsmiths, the workers who made jewelry and other objects from gold.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
NEH 3 8 mx88 translate-names חֲנַנְיָ֖ה 1 Hananiah Hananiah is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 3 8 mm1q bita-hq בֶּן־הָרַקָּחִ֑ים 1 a son of the perfumers **Son of** here is a figurative expression that indicates that a person shares the qualities of something. In this case, the book is describing someone who shares the quality of being a maker of perfume. Alternate translation: “one of the perfumers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-hq]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 3 8 y25y translate-names וַיַּֽעַזְבוּ֙ יְר֣וּשָׁלִַ֔ם עַ֖ד הַחוֹמָ֥ה הָרְחָבָֽה 1 And they restored Jerusalem as far as the broad wall This is the name of one of the features of the Jerusalem wall. This may have been a place where the wall had been built thicker and stronger for strategic purposes. Alternate translation: “They rebuilt the wall of Jerusalem as far as the Broad Wall” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 3 9 m5at וְעַל־יָדָ֤ם הֶחֱזִיק֙ רְפָיָ֣ה בֶן־ח֔וּר שַׂ֕ר חֲצִ֖י פֶּ֥לֶךְ יְרוּשָׁלִָֽם 1 And Rephaiah, the son of Hur, the administrator for half of the district of Jerusalem, strengthened at their hand. In this chapter, when Nehemiah names a person, then names their father, and then describes a role, it is the first person, not their father, who was in that role. It will be helpful to your readers if you make this clear. Alternate translation: “Next to them, Rephaiah the son of Hur repaired part of the wall. Rephaiah ruled half of the district of Jerusalem.”
NEH 3 9 avu2 translate-names רְפָיָ֣ה בֶן־ח֔וּר 1 Rephaiah, the son of Hur Rephaiah is the name of a man, and Hur is the name of his father. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 3 9 rd4i translate-fraction חֲצִ֖י פֶּ֥לֶךְ יְרוּשָׁלִָֽם 1 half of the district of Jerusalem The city of Jerusalem and the surrounding area seem to have been divided into districts for administration. This is the name of one of those districts. Apparently it was so large and populous that it had been further divided into two parts, each with its own administrator. Alternate translation: “ruled half the district of Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-fraction]])
NEH 3 10 k6g1 translate-names יְדָיָ֥ה בֶן־חֲרוּמַ֖ף 1 Jedaiah, the son of Harumaph Jedaiah is the name of a man, and Harumaph is the name of his father. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 3 10 v3be וְעַל־יָדָ֧ם הֶחֱזִ֛יק…וְנֶ֣גֶד בֵּית֑וֹ 1 And…at their hand, even in fron of his house Alternate translation: “repaired the next part of the wall, which was in front his house”
NEH 3 10 ek5q translate-names חַטּ֖וּשׁ בֶּן־חֲשַׁבְנְיָֽה 1 And Hattush, the son of Hashabneiah Hattush is the name of a man, and Hashabneiah is the name of his father. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 3 11 b6fx translate-ordinal מִדָּ֣ה שֵׁנִ֗ית 1 a second section This expression occurs six times in the chapter. Two of those times, someone who has been named earlier is said to have repaired “a second section,” suggesting, “in addition to the one they did previously.” But the other four times, the people have not been named earlier. So in those cases it might mean “a further section of the wall,” beyond the one just described that someone else worked on. Both of these likely meanings could be accommodated by saying something like “another section of the wall” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
NEH 3 11 g61e translate-names מַלְכִּיָּ֣ה בֶן־חָרִ֔ם 1 Malkijah, the son of Harim Malkijah is the name of a man, and Malkijah is the name of his father. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 3 11 jy16 translate-names וְחַשּׁ֖וּב בֶּן־פַּחַ֣ת מוֹאָ֑ב 1 and Hasshub, the son of Pahath-Moab Hasshub is the name of a man, and Pahath-Moab is the name of his father. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 3 11 l1db translate-names מִגְדַּ֥ל הַתַּנּוּרִֽים 1 the tower of ovens This is the name of one of the towers of the Jerusalem wall. Alternate translation: “the Tower of the Ovens” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 3 12 e9p4 translate-names שַׁלּוּם֙ בֶּן־הַלּוֹחֵ֔שׁ שַׂ֕ר 1 Shallum, the son of Hallohesh Shallum is the name of a man, and Hallohesh is the name of his father. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 3 12 wml3 translate-names שַׂ֕ר חֲצִ֖י פֶּ֣לֶךְ יְרוּשָׁלִָ֑ם 1 the administrator for half of the district of Jerusalem This is the name of one of the districts into which the city and the surrounding area were divided. Since the first half has already been named, you could say as an alternate translation: “Shallum ruled the other half of the district of Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 3 12 b7iq ה֖וּא וּבְנוֹתָֽיו 1 he and his daughters Alternate translation: “along with his daughters”
NEH 3 13 i9v2 translate-names שַׁ֨עַר הַגַּ֜יְא 1 the gate of the valley This is the name of one of the gates of Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “the Valley Gate” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 3 13 w5le translate-names וְיֹשְׁבֵ֣י זָנוֹחַ֒ 1 the inhabitants of Zanoah Zanoah is the name of one of the cities in Judah that sent a work party to help rebuild the walls of Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “the people from Zanoah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 3 13 kw6h translate-bdistance וְאֶ֤לֶף אַמָּה֙ 1 a thousand cubits Depending on what would be most helpful to your readers, you could express this either in ancient or modern measurements, “1000 cubits” or “460 meters” or “1500 feet.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]])
NEH 3 13 r9e4 translate-names שַׁ֥עַר הָשֲׁפֽוֹת 1 the gate of dung This is the name of one of the gates of Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “the Rubbish Gate” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 3 14 d9dt translate-names שַׁ֣עַר הָאַשְׁפּ֗וֹת 1 the gate of dung This is the name of one of the gates of Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “the Rubbish Gate” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 3 14 w494 translate-names מַלְכִּיָּ֣ה בֶן־רֵכָ֔ב שַׂ֖ר 1 Malkijah, the son of Rechab Malkijah is the name of a man, and Recab is the name of his father. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 3 14 u2dk translate-names פֶּ֣לֶךְ בֵּית־הַכָּ֑רֶם 1 the district of Beth-Hakkerem This is the name of one of the districts into which the city and the surrounding area were divided. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 3 15 shf9 translate-names שַׁ֨עַר הָעַ֜יִן 1 the gate of the spring This is the name of one of the gates of Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “the Fountain Gate” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 3 15 l7wu translate-names שַׁלּ֣וּן בֶּן־כָּל־חֹזֶה֮ 1 Shallun son of Kol-Hozeh Shallun is the name of a man, and Kol-Hozeh is the name of his father. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 3 15 bd9j translate-names פֶּ֣לֶךְ הַמִּצְפָּה֒ 1 the district of Mizpah This is the name of one of the districts into which the city and the surrounding area were divided. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 3 15 l3hf ה֤וּא יִבְנֶ֨נּוּ֙ וִיטַֽלְלֶ֔נּוּ 1 He himself was building it and covering it Alternate translation: “He rebuilt the gate and put a roof over it”
NEH 3 15 c8rt חוֹמַ֞ת בְּרֵכַ֤ת הַשֶּׁ֨לַח֙ 1 the wall of the pool of Siloam Alternate translation: “the wall that surrounded the Pool of Siloam”
NEH 3 15 kmx6 לְגַן־הַמֶּ֔לֶךְ וְעַד־הַֽמַּעֲל֔וֹת הַיּוֹרְד֖וֹת מֵעִ֥יר דָּוִֽיד 1 at the garden of the king even as far as the stairs descending from the city of David Alternate translation: “next to the royal garden, as far as the steps that went down from the City of David.”
NEH 3 15 c5bs translate-names מֵעִ֥יר דָּוִֽיד 1 from the city of David This was one part of Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “the City of David” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 3 16 x774 translate-names נְחֶמְיָ֣ה בֶן־עַזְבּ֔וּק שַׂ֕ר 1 Nehemiah, the son of Azbuk Nehemiah is the name of a man, and Azbuk is the name of his father. (This is not the same Nehemiah who wrote this book.) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 3 16 sc4c translate-names פֶּ֣לֶךְ בֵּֽית־צ֑וּר 1 the district of Beth-Zur This is the name of one of the districts into which the city and the surrounding area were divided. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 3 16 ngr2 עַד־נֶ֨גֶד֙ קִבְרֵ֣י דָוִ֔יד וְעַד־הַבְּרֵכָה֙ הָעֲשׂוּיָ֔ה וְעַ֖ד בֵּ֥ית הַגִּבֹּרִֽים 1 as far as in front of the graves of David, and as far as the pool that was made, and as far as the house of the mighty men Alternate translation: “as far as the place opposite the tombs in the City of David, to the reservoir that the people had made and the army barracks”
NEH 3 17 str7 translate-names אַחֲרָ֛יו הֶחֱזִ֥יקוּ הַלְוִיִּ֖ם 1 After him, the Levites strengthened The Levites were descendants of Levi. They had the special assignment of helping the priests. Alternate translation: “Next to him, some Levites repaired parts of the wall.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 3 17 l6vw translate-names רְח֣וּם בֶּן־בָּנִ֑י 1 Rehum, the son of Bani Rehum is the name of a man, and Bani is the name of his father. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 3 17 yt87 figs-explicit רְח֣וּם בֶּן־בָּנִ֑י 1 Rehum, the son of Bani It seems clear from the context that Rehum was a Levite. If it would be clearer in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “One of them was Rehum the son of Bani.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 3 17 a88s translate-names חֲשַׁבְיָ֛ה 1 Hashabiah Hashabiah is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 3 17 yh3z עַל־יָד֣וֹ הֶחֱזִ֗יק חֲשַׁבְיָ֛ה…לְפִלְכּֽוֹ 1 at his hand, Hashabiah…strengthened for his district This does not mean that Hashabiah repaired this part of the wall for the benefit of his district, but rather that he did it leading a work party from his district. Alternate translation: “led a work party from his district that repaired the next section of the wall”
NEH 3 17 y3tu translate-names חֲצִי־פֶ֥לֶךְ קְעִילָ֖ה 1 half the district of Keilah This is the name of one of the districts into which the city and the surrounding area were divided. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 3 18 h5qz figs-metaphor הֶחֱזִ֣יקוּ אֲחֵיהֶ֔ם 1 their brothers repaired As in [3:1](../03/01.md), **brother** could mean the biological brothers of the Levites mentioned in [3:17](../03/17.md). However, more likely it figuratively means other Levites. Alternate translation: “some other Levites repaired more of the wall” (See:\[\[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor\]\] and\[\[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-hq\]\])
NEH 3 18 b6sj figs-ellipsis בַּוַּ֖י בֶּן־חֵנָדָ֑ד שַׂ֕ר חֲצִ֖י פֶּ֥לֶךְ קְעִילָֽה 1 Binnui, the son of Henadad, the administrator for half the district of Keilah Here Nehemiah does not say “at their hand” (next to them) or “strengthened” (repaired another section of the wall). Once again he is leaving out some of what a complete sentence would be expected to contain. You can fill in this information. Alternate translation: “Next to them, Binnui the son of Henadad, who ruled the other half of the district of Keilah, repaired more of the wall.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
NEH 3 18 gc2h translate-names בַּוַּ֖י בֶּן־חֵנָדָ֑ד 1 Binnui, the son of Henadad Binnui is the name of a man, and Henadad is the name of his father. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 3 18 ca6t translate-names שַׂ֕ר חֲצִ֖י פֶּ֥לֶךְ קְעִילָֽה 1 the administrator for half the district of Keilah This is the name of one of the districts into which the city and the surrounding area were divided. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 3 19 f6if translate-names עֵ֧זֶר בֶּן־יֵשׁ֛וּעַ שַׂ֥ר 1 Ezer, the son of Jeshua Ezer is the name of a man, and Jeshua is the name of his father. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 3 19 g2y6 translate-names שַׂ֥ר הַמִּצְפָּ֖ה 1 the administrator for Mizpah Since the district of Mizpah is mentioned in [3:15](../03/15.md), this probably means the city of Mizpah. Alternate translation: “Ezer ruled the city of Mizpah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 3 19 gcc6 translate-ordinal וַיְחַזֵּ֨ק…מִדָּ֣ה שֵׁנִ֑ית 1 And…was strengthening a second section Alternate translation: “repaired another section” (See: Ordinal Numbers)
NEH 3 19 c8s5 מִנֶּ֕גֶד עֲלֹ֥ת הַנֶּ֖שֶׁק הַמִּקְצֹֽעַ 1 opposite the ascent to the armory at the angle Alternate translation: “He started from the place in front of the steps that went up to the armory, and he finished at the place where the wall bends slightly.”
NEH 3 20 r638 translate-names בָּר֥וּךְ בֶּן־זבי 1 Baruch, the son of Zabbai Baruch is the name of a man, and Zabbai is the name of his father. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 3 20 i7kj figs-metaphor הֶחֱרָ֧ה 1 burned Here **burned** is probably a figurative way of saying that Baruch worked with great enthusiasm. You could say that as an alternate translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 3 20 a53c translate-ordinal הֶחֱזִ֛יק…מִדָּ֣ה שֵׁנִ֑ית 1 strengthened a second section Alternate translation: “repaired another section” (See: Ordinal Numbers)
NEH 3 20 a55c מִן־הַ֨מִּקְצ֔וֹעַ עַד־פֶּ֨תַח֙ בֵּ֣ית אֶלְיָשִׁ֔יב הַכֹּהֵ֖ן הַגָּדֽוֹל 1 from the angle as far as the opening of the house of Eliashib the high priest Alternate translation: “from the bend in the wall as far as the door of the house of Eliashib the high priest”
NEH 3 21 z4b7 translate-names מְרֵמ֧וֹת בֶּן־אוּרִיָּ֛ה בֶּן־הַקּ֖וֹץ 1 Meremoth, the son of Uriah, the son of Hakkoz Meremoth is the name of a man, Uriah is the name of his father, and Hakkoz is the name of his grandfather. See how you translated these names in [3:4](../03/04.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 3 21 a57c translate-ordinal הֶחֱזִ֗יק…מִדָּ֣ה שֵׁנִ֑ית 1 strengthened a section section Alternate translation: “repaired another section” (See: Ordinal Numbers)
NEH 3 21 a59c מִפֶּ֨תַח֙ בֵּ֣ית אֶלְיָשִׁ֔יב וְעַד־תַּכְלִ֖ית בֵּ֥ית אֶלְיָשִֽׁיב 1 from the opening of the house of Eliashib even as far as the end of the house of Eliashib Alternate translation: “from the door of the house of Eliashib to the end of his house”
NEH 3 22 m3ey הַכֹּהֲנִ֖ים אַנְשֵׁ֥י הַכִּכָּֽר 1 the priests, the men of the valley Jerusalem is up on a mountain, so the area around it would be “the valley.” Alternate translation: “some priests from the area around Jerusalem”
NEH 3 23 q2zh הֶחֱזִ֧יק בִּנְיָמִ֛ן וְחַשּׁ֖וּב נֶ֣גֶד בֵּיתָ֑ם 1 strengthened in front of their house Alternate translation: “repaired a section opposite their house”
NEH 3 23 v3fr translate-names בִּנְיָמִ֛ן וְחַשּׁ֖וּב 1 Benjamin and Hasshub Benjamin and Hasshub are the names of men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 3 23 z8p6 הֶחֱזִ֗יק…אֵ֥צֶל בֵּיתֽוֹ 1 strengthened beside his house Alternate translation: “repaired the next section, beside his house”
NEH 3 23 gv74 translate-names עֲזַרְיָ֧ה בֶן־מַעֲשֵׂיָ֛ה בֶּן־עֲנָֽנְיָ֖ה 1 Azariah, the son of Maaseiah, the son of Ananiah Azariah is the name of a man, Maaseiah is the name of his father, and Ananiah is the name of his grandfather. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 3 24 c3eh translate-ordinal הֶחֱזִ֗יק…מִדָּ֣ה שֵׁנִ֑ית 1 strengthened a second section Alternate translation: “repaired another section” (See: Ordinal Numbers)
NEH 3 24 ajs6 translate-names בִּנּ֛וּי בֶּן־חֵנָדָ֖ד 1 Binnui, the son of Henadad Binnui is the name of a man, and Henadad is the name of his father. See how you translated these names in [3:18](../03/18.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 3 24 k7tj מִבֵּ֣ית עֲזַרְיָ֔ה עַד־הַמִּקְצ֖וֹעַ וְעַד־הַפִּנָּֽה 1 from the house of Azariah to the bend in the wall as far as the corner Alternate translation: “from the house of Azariah to the bend in the wall as far as the bulwark”
NEH 3 24 a61c translate-names עֲזַרְיָ֔ה 1 Azariah Azariah is a man, the same one mentioned in verse 23.
NEH 3 25 q3r3 translate-names פָּלָ֣ל בֶּן־אוּזַי֮ 1 Palal, the son of Uzai Palal is the name of a man, and Uzai is the name of his father. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 3 25 dae6 figs-ellipsis מִנֶּ֣גֶד הַמִּקְצוֹעַ֒ וְהַמִּגְדָּ֗ל הַיּוֹצֵא֙ 1 from opposite the angle and the tower projecting Here again Nehemiah leaves out some of the words that a sentence would ordinarily need in order to be complete. Alternate translation: “He began at the place opposite the bend in the wall where the watchtower is taller than” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
NEH 3 25 pt6e figs-metonymy מִבֵּ֤ית הַמֶּ֨לֶךְ֙ הָֽעֶלְי֔וֹן 1 from the upper house of the king Probably **house** figuratively means “palace” here, referring to where the king had lived. Alternate translation: “the upper palace of the king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
NEH 3 25 isu9 אֲשֶׁ֖ר לַחֲצַ֣ר הַמַּטָּרָ֑ה 1 which is by the court of the guard Alternate translation: “That is near the place where the guards stayed”
NEH 3 25 a63c translate-names פְּדָיָ֥ה בֶן־פַּרְעֹֽשׁ 1 Pedaiah, the son of Parosh Pedaiah is the name of a man, and Parosh is the name of his father. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 3 25 d1jm figs-ellipsis פְּדָיָ֥ה בֶן־פַּרְעֹֽשׁ 1 Pedaiah, the son of Parosh Once again Nehemiah leaves out some of the words that a sentence would ordinarily need in order to be complete. Alternate translation: “Next to him, Pedaiah the son of Parosh repaired a section” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
NEH 3 26 b53g figs-ellipsis וְהַ֨נְּתִינִ֔ים הָי֥וּ יֹשְׁבִ֖ים בָּעֹ֑פֶל עַ֠ד נֶ֜גֶד שַׁ֤עַר הַמַּ֨יִם֙ לַמִּזְרָ֔ח וְהַמִּגְדָּ֖ל הַיּוֹצֵֽא 1 And the Nethinim were living in the Ophel, as far as in front of the gate of water and the projecting tower Yet again Nehemiah leaves out some of the words that a sentence would ordinarily need in order to be complete. Alternate translation: “The temple servants who lived on Ophel Hill repaired the wall as far as the eastern side of the Water Gate where there is a tall tower” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
NEH 3 26 ah1b translate-names וְהַ֨נְּתִינִ֔ים 1 Now the temple servants The term **Nethinim** describes servants who worked in the temple. Alternate translation: “the temple servants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
NEH 3 26 mz47 translate-unknown בָּעֹ֑פֶל 1 in the Ophel This is probably the name of a geographic feature, a fortified extension of the hill that the Jerusalem temple was located on. Alternate translation: “Ophel Hill” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
NEH 3 26 s2s5 translate-names שַׁ֤עַר הַמַּ֨יִם֙ 1 the gate of water This is the name of one of the gates of Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “the Water Gate” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 3 26 rvu2 וְהַמִּגְדָּ֖ל הַיּוֹצֵֽא 1 and the projecting tower The phrase refers to a tall tower that juts out from the wall. Alternate translation: “a tall tower”
NEH 3 27 d719 translate-ordinal הֶחֱזִ֥יקוּ…מִדָּ֣ה שֵׁנִ֑ית 1 strengthened a second section Alternate translation: “repaired another section of the wall” (See: Ordinal Number)
NEH 3 27 mgm7 translate-names הַתְּקֹעִ֖ים 1 the Tekoites Tekoa is the name of one of the cities in Judah that sent a work party to help rebuild the walls of Jerusalem. The Tekoites were the people who lived there. See how you translated this name in verse [3:5](../03/05.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 3 27 j6gz מִנֶּ֜גֶד הַמִּגְדָּ֤ל הַגָּדוֹל֙ הַיּוֹצֵ֔א וְעַ֖ד חוֹמַ֥ת הָעֹֽפֶל 1 from in front of the high projecting tower even as far as the wall of the Ophel Alternate translation: “from opposite the very tall watchtower as far as the wall at Ophel Hill”
NEH 3 28 wt87 figs-synecdoche הַכֹּ֣הֲנִ֔ים 1 The priests This does not mean all the priests. Nehemiah is using the name of the whole group to refer to part of it. Alternate translation: “a group of priests” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
NEH 3 28 d5qa מֵעַ֣ל׀ שַׁ֣עַר הַסּוּסִ֗ים 1 from above the gate of horses The word **above** is used here because the houses of the priests were likely located at a higher elevation than the Horse Gate. Alternate translation: “starting at the Horse Gate”
NEH 3 28 q9qb translate-names שַׁ֣עַר הַסּוּסִ֗ים 1 the gate of horses This is the name of one of the gates of Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “the Horse Gate” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 3 28 d5uv figs-idiom אִ֖ישׁ לְנֶ֥גֶד בֵּיתֽוֹ 1 a man to the front of his house Here **a man** means “each one.” Alternate translation: “Each one repaired the section in front of his own house.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
NEH 3 29 n271 translate-names צָד֥וֹק בֶּן־אִמֵּ֖ר 1 Zadok, the son of Immer Zadok is the name of a man, and Immer is the name of his father. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 3 29 f74e translate-names שְׁמַֽעְיָ֣ה בֶן־שְׁכַנְיָ֔ה שֹׁמֵ֖ר שַׁ֥עַר הַמִּזְרָֽח 1 Shemaiah, the son of Shecaniah Shemaiah is the name of a man, and Shecaniah is the name of his father. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 3 29 e9mh שֹׁמֵ֖ר שַׁ֥עַר הַמִּזְרָֽח 1 the keeper of the gate of the east Alternate translation: “the person who looked after the East Gate” or “the person who opened and closed the East Gate”
NEH 3 29 x9q4 translate-names שַׁ֥עַר הַמִּזְרָֽח 1 the gate of the east This is the name of one of the gates of Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “the East Gate” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 3 30 a65c translate-ordinal הֶחֱזִ֜יק…מִדָּ֣ה שֵׁנִ֑י 1 strengthened a second section Alternate translation: “repaired another section” (See: Ordinal Numbers)
NEH 3 30 r5y4 translate-names חֲנַנְיָ֣ה בֶן־שֶׁלֶמְיָ֗ה 1 Hananiah, the son of Shelemiah Hananiah is the name of a man, and Shelemiah is the name of his father. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 3 30 a67c translate-names וְחָנ֧וּן בֶּן־צָלָ֛ף הַשִּׁשִּׁ֖י 1 and Hanun, the sixth son of Zalaph Hanun is the name of a man, and Zalaph is the name of his father. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 3 30 nn44 translate-ordinal הַשִּׁשִּׁ֖י 1 sixth Alternate translation: “son 6” or “son number 6” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
NEH 3 30 ifp5 translate-names מְשֻׁלָּם֙ בֶּן־בֶּ֣רֶכְיָ֔ה 1 Meshullam, the son of Berechiah Meshullam is the name of a man, and Berechiah is the name of his father. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 3 30 bv3t נֶ֖גֶד נִשְׁכָּתֽוֹ 1 in front of his chamber Alternate translation: “in front of the rooms where he stayed”
NEH 3 31 d33p translate-names מַלְכִּיָּה֙ 1 Malkijah Malkijah is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 3 31 uuc7 bita-hq בֶּן־הַצֹּ֣רְפִ֔י 1 a son of the goldsmiths As in [3:8](../03/08.md), this is a figurative way of saying that Malkijah was one of the goldsmiths. In this figure of speech, the “son of” something shares its qualities. Since the goldsmiths have been mentioned previously (in [3:8](../03/08.md), where their work is described), you could say as an alternate translation: “who was another one of the goldsmiths” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-hq]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 3 31 lb9z עַד־בֵּ֥ית הַנְּתִינִ֖ים וְהָרֹכְלִ֑ים 1 as far as the house of the Nethinim and the merchants Alternate translation: “as far as the building used by the temple servants and the merchants”
NEH 3 31 ye2u translate-names שַׁ֣עַר הַמִּפְקָ֔ד 1 the gate of mustering This is the name of one of the gates of Jerusalem. “Mustering” refers to soldiers assembling to go out to battle. Alternate translation: “the Mobilization Gate” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 3 31 r6sv וְעַ֖ד עֲלִיַּ֥ת הַפִּנָּֽה 1 even as far as the upper chamber of the corner Alternate translation: “He built as far as the upper apartments of this building, which were on the corner.”
NEH 3 32 x1tq figs-explicit וּבֵ֨ין עֲלִיַּ֤ת הַפִּנָּה֙ לְשַׁ֣עַר הַצֹּ֔אן הֶחֱזִ֥יקוּ 1 strengthened between the upper chamber of the corner to the gate of sheep This brings the description of the repairs back around to where they started. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate this explicitly by saying “the last section.” Alternate translation: “repaired the last section of the wall, from the corner apartments to the Sheep Gate” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 3 32 p1kr figs-synecdoche הַצֹּרְפִ֖ים וְהָרֹכְלִֽים 1 the goldsmiths and the merchants This does not mean all the goldsmiths and all the merchants. Nehemiah is once again using the names of whole groups to refer to parts of them. Alternate translation: “some of the other goldsmiths, along with some traders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
NEH 3 32 a69c translate-names לְשַׁ֣עַר הַצֹּ֔אן 1 the gate of sheep This is the name of one of the gates of Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “the Sheep Gate” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 4 intro tlj9 0 # Nehemiah 04 General Notes<br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Dedication<br>The people were so dedicated to rebuilding the walls that they worked with their weapons ready for battle right next to them. Even when they were threatened with an attack, they continued to trust in Yahweh. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/trust]])<br><br>## Important figures of speech in this chapter<br><br>### Rhetorical Questions<br><br>Sanballat uses a series of rhetorical questions. These are intended to show his intense anger against the Israelites. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
NEH 4 1 rnw3 וַיְהִ֞י 1 And it happened that Nehemiah uses this phrase to introduce the next event in his story. You do not need to represent it in your translation unless your language has a similar expression that it characteristically uses. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
NEH 4 1 vfu4 translate-names סַנְבַלַּ֗ט 1 Sanballat This is a man’s name. See how you translated this in [2:10](../02/10.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 4 1 a71c figs-parallelism 1 And it burned him, and he was very angry These two phrases mean similar things. Nehemiah uses the repetition to emphasize how angry Sanballat was. If it would be clearer in your language, you could combine these phrases and say something like “he became furiously angry” or “he became very angry.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
NEH 4 1 s6td bita-phenom וַיִּ֣חַר ל֔וֹ וַיִּכְעַ֖ס 1 it burned him, and he was very angry Here Nehemiah says that Sanballat’s anger was a fire that burned inside of him. Alternate translation: “he became furious” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-phenom]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 4 2 v3qv bita-hq וַיֹּ֣אמֶר ׀ לִפְנֵ֣י 1 And he spoke before the face of Here **face** figuratively represents the presence of a person. The expression means that Sanballat was speaking personally to the other people who are named. Alternate translation: “He said to” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-hq]]) and (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 4 2 a73c bita-hq אֶחָ֗יו 1 his brothers Here **brother** likely refers figuratively to Sanballat’s fellow officials. Alternate translation: “the other provincial officials” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-hq]]) and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 4 2 a75c figs-synecdoche וְחֵיל֙ שֹֽׁמְר֔וֹן 1 and the army of Samaria Sanballat was not speaking to the entire army. Nehemiah is figuratively using all of something to mean part of it. He is referring to the officers of the army by the name of the entire army. Alternate translation: “the army officers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
NEH 4 2 d5n2 figs-rquestion מָ֛ה הַיְּהוּדִ֥ים הָאֲמֵלָלִ֖ים עֹשִׂ֑ים הֲיַעַזְב֨וּ לָהֶ֤ם הֲיִזְבָּ֨חוּ֙ הַיְכַלּ֣וּ בַיּ֔וֹם 1 What are the feeble Jews doing? Will they restore for themselves? Will they sacrifice? Will they finish in a day? Sanballat actually is making a series of statement, not asking a series of questions. He does not expect the officials and officers to tell him what the Jews are doing and whether they will succeed. Instead, he is using the question form to mock the Jews. If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate the ideas in his questions as a series of statements. Alternate translation: “These feeble Jews can accomplish nothing. They will never restore the city for themselves. They will not offer sacrifices. They will not finish the work any time soon.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
NEH 4 2 r9lb הֲיִזְבָּ֨חוּ֙ 1 Will they sacrifice? The meaning of this phrase is not entirely clear. It could be that Sanballat is speaking of the Jews offering sacrifices to try to entice God to make their project successful. Alternate translation: “They will not get their God to help them.”
NEH 4 2 uk3w figs-idiom הַיְכַלּ֣וּ בַיּ֔וֹם 1 Will they finish in a day? In this context, the expression “day” means “a short time.” Alternate translation: “any time soon” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
NEH 4 2 ps9n figs-rquestion הַיְחַיּ֧וּ אֶת־הָאֲבָנִ֛ים מֵעֲרֵמ֥וֹת הֶעָפָ֖ר וְהֵ֥מָּה שְׂרוּפֽוֹת 1 Will they bring to life the stones from the piles of rubble after they were burned? '
NEH 4 2 hr7v figs-personification הַיְחַיּ֧וּ אֶת־הָאֲבָנִ֛ים מֵעֲרֵמ֥וֹת הֶעָפָ֖ר וְהֵ֥מָּה שְׂרוּפֽוֹת 1 Will they bring to life the stones from the piles of rubble after they were burned? Here Sanballat is speaking of stones as if they could come to life and stand up straight to form the wall. Alternate translation: “They will not be able to rebuild the city walls from useless stones that were burned and turned into rubble” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
NEH 4 2 b96n figs-activepassive מֵעֲרֵמ֥וֹת הֶעָפָ֖ר וְהֵ֥מָּה שְׂרוּפֽוֹת 1 from the piles of rubble after they were burned If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you can say who did the action. Alternate translation: “useless stones that someone has burned and turned into rubble” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
NEH 4 3 alw5 translate-names וְטוֹבִיָּ֥ה הָעַמֹּנִ֖י 1 And Tobiah the Ammonite This is a man’s name. See how you translated this in [2:10](../02/10.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 4 3 b24b גַּ֚ם 1 Yes This word indicates that Tobiah agrees with Sanballat and that he is going to say something to support him. Alternate translation: “That’s right!”
NEH 4 3 da2t figs-hyperbole אִם־יַעֲלֶ֣ה שׁוּעָ֔ל וּפָרַ֖ץ חוֹמַ֥ת אַבְנֵיהֶֽם 1 If only a fox went up on what they are building, then he would break down their wall of stones Tobiah probably does not believe that the wall would really fall down if a fox walked along the top of it. He is exaggerating to mock the work the Jews are doing. You could use a non-figurative expression in your translation instead, such as, “It wouldn’t take much to make that wall fall over.” However, Tobiah’s expression is so colorful that you may want to retain it, but be sure that your readers understand he is exaggerating. Alternate translation: “Tobiah made fun of the Jews by saying, ‘That wall they are building is so weak that if a fox climbed up on it, the stones would fall to the ground’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
NEH 4 4 buk3 figs-explicit שְׁמַ֤ע אֱלֹהֵ֨ינוּ֙ 1 Hear, our God Nehemiah starts talking directly to God at this point in the book. The implication is that he heard about what Sanballat and Tobiah were saying, and in response, he prayed the prayer that is recorded here in 2:4-5. If it would make things clearer in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “When I heard about what they were saying, I prayed and said, ‘Listen, our God’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 4 4 a77c figs-aside שְׁמַ֤ע אֱלֹהֵ֨ינוּ֙ 1 Hear, our God Nehemiah’s prayer here is a particular type of aside. In an aside, someone who is speaking to or about one person or group will pause and speak confidentially to somebody else about them. Often an aside is spoken to the audience of a work about someone who is being addressed within the work. But in this case, Nehemiah pauses from addressing the audience that is hearing his story to speak confidentially to God in prayer about two of the characters in the story. If it would be clearer in your language, you could show this is a prayer is distinct from the story by making it a direct quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-aside]])
NEH 4 4 ae62 figs-abstractnouns הָיִ֣ינוּ בוּזָ֔ה 1 we are a contempt The abstract noun **contempt** refers to the way Sanballat and Tobiah regarded the Jews, which led them to make fun of them. You can translate the idea behind this term with a verb like “mocking.” Alternate translation: “our enemies are mocking us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
NEH 4 4 z6nz figs-idiom וְהָשֵׁ֥ב חֶרְפָּתָ֖ם אֶל־רֹאשָׁ֑ם 1 and cause their taunts to return on their heads! **Return on his head** is an idiom that means that what a person expected to happen to someone else happens to them instead. Alternate translation: “Make them people whom others will mock” (See: Idiom)
NEH 4 4 pgh8 figs-abstractnouns וּתְנֵ֥ם לְבִזָּ֖ה בְּאֶ֥רֶץ שִׁבְיָֽה 1 And give them for plunder in a land of captivity As in [1:2](../01/02.md), the abstract noun **captivity** refers to a conquering army forcing all or some of a captured population to move to a different place. You can translate the idea behind it with verbs such as “capture” and “force.” Alternate translation: “Allow their enemies to capture them and force them to go to a foreign land” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
NEH 4 5 mc9p figs-parallelism וְאַל־תְּכַס֙ עַל־עֲוֺנָ֔ם וְחַטָּאתָ֖ם מִלְּפָנֶ֣יךָ אַל־תִּמָּחֶ֑ה 1 And do not cover over their iniquity, and do not wipe out their sin from before your face These two phrases mean similar things. Nehemiah uses the repetition to emphasize how guilty Sanballat and Tobiah are for opposing the work that God has sent him to do. If it would be clearer in your language, you could combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “do not ever forgive them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
NEH 4 5 zz8h figs-metaphor וְאַל־תְּכַס֙ עַל־עֲוֺנָ֔ם 1 Do not cover over their iniquity Nehemiah speaks of a person’s sins as if they were an object that could be physically hidden. Alternate translation: “do not forgive their sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 4 5 k9rw figs-metaphor וְחַטָּאתָ֖ם…אַל־תִּמָּחֶ֑ה 1 and do not wipe out their sin Nehemiah speaks of a person’s sins as if they were something written that could be erased. Alternate translation: “do not forget their sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 4 5 a79c bita-hq מִלְּפָנֶ֣יךָ 1 from before your face Here **face** figuratively means the action of seeing or a person’s notice or attention. A person can see what is in front of their face, so in this case the expression means, “from where you can see it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-hq]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 4 5 mbi1 כִּ֥י הִכְעִ֖יסוּ לְנֶ֥גֶד הַבּוֹנִֽים 1 for they have provoked anger before the front of the builders This expression could mean a number of things: (1) They have caused others to be angry at the people who are rebuilding the wall. This third possibility seems the most likely, since Nehemiah is praying that what these men are trying to do to others will happen to them. His prayer is presumably not that the builders or God will make Sanballat and Tobiah angry, but that the other nations they are trying to recruit will turn against them. Alternate translation: “they have caused others to be angry at the people who are rebuilding the wall” (2) Sanballat and Tobiah have made the builders angry by mocking them. Alternate translation: “they have made the builders become angry” (3) They have made God angry by opposing the work he has commanded Nehemiah to do. Alternate translation: “they have made you become angry”
NEH 4 6 r475 וַנִּבְנֶה֙ אֶת־הַ֣חוֹמָ֔ה 1 So we built the wall As in chapter 3, it might be helpful to say “rebuilt.” The Jews were not building something brand new. See the note to [3:1](../03/01.md).
NEH 4 6 mhm5 figs-activepassive וַתִּקָּשֵׁ֥ר כָּל־הַחוֹמָ֖ה עַד־חֶצְיָ֑הּ 1 and all the wall was joined together to half its height You can say this with an active form, and you can say who did the action. Alternate translation: “we filled in the breaks as high as halfway up the wall” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
NEH 4 6 a81c figs-explicit וַתִּקָּשֵׁ֥ר כָּל־הַחוֹמָ֖ה עַד־חֶצְיָ֑הּ 1 and all the wall was joined together It appears from the context that this likely took some time and perseverance after Sanballat and Tobiah began to mock and oppose the project. If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “after some time, we filled in the breaks” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 4 6 ef8p translate-fraction עַד־חֶצְיָ֑הּ 1 half its height “Half” means one part out of two equal parts. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-fraction]])
NEH 4 6 a83c bita-hq וַיְהִ֧י לֵ֦ב לָעָ֖ם לַעֲשֽׂוֹת 1 And the heart of the people was for working Here the **heart** figuratively represents the thoughts and the will of the people. Alternate translation: “Everyone was determined to accomplish this.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-hq]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 4 7 a85c writing-newevent וַיְהִ֣י 1 Then it happened Nehemiah uses this phrase to introduce the next event in his story. You do not need to represent it in your translation unless your language has a similar expression that it characteristically uses. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
NEH 4 7 a87c translate-names סַנְבַלַּ֡ט וְ֠טוֹבִיָּה 1 Sanballat, and Tobiah This are the names of men. See how you translated them in [2:10](../02/10.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 4 7 a89c translate-names וְהָעַרְבִ֨ים וְהָעַמֹּנִ֜ים וְהָאַשְׁדּוֹדִ֗ים 1 and the Arabians, and the Ammonites, and the Ashdodites These are the names of people groups. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 4 7 a91c figs-personification עָלְתָ֤ה אֲרוּכָה֙ לְחֹמ֣וֹת יְרוּשָׁלִַ֔ם 1 the health of the walls of Jerusalem was going up Here Nehemiah is speaking of the wall around Jerusalem as if it was a living thing that was sick because it was broken down. Nehemiah speaks of the repairs to the wall as if the wall is becoming healthy again. Alternate translation: “we were continuing to repair the walls of Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
NEH 4 7 a95c figs-activepassive כִּי־הֵחֵ֥לּוּ הַפְּרֻצִ֖ים לְהִסָּתֵ֑ם 1 and the breaks were beginning to be closed You can say this with an active form, and you can say who did the action. Alternate translation: “we were continuing to … fill in the gaps” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
NEH 4 7 gsb7 bita-phenom וַיִּ֥חַר לָהֶ֖ם מְאֹֽד 1 that…it burned them exceedingly Here Nehemiah says that the anger of these enemies was a fire that burned inside of them. Alternate translation: “they became very angry” or “they became enraged” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-phenom]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 4 8 b6im figs-metonymy לְהִלָּחֵ֣ם בִּירוּשָׁלִָ֑ם 1 to fight against Jerusalem Here **Jerusalem** refers to the people who live there. These enemies were not coming to fight against the walls and buildings. Nehemiah is describing the people of Jerusalem figuratively by reference to something associated with them, the city where they live. Alternate translation: “to fight against the people of Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
NEH 4 8 a97c figs-abstractnouns וְלַעֲשׂ֥וֹת ל֖וֹ תּוֹעָֽה 1 and to make confusion for it The abstract noun **confusion** refers to the way these enemies hoped that their attack would make the people of Jerusalem not know what to do. The people might disagree among themselves about whether they should keep working on the wall, or whether they should discontinue the work to appease the attackers. They might also disagree about how to defend themselves. You can translate the idea behind the term “confusion” with adjectives such as “confused” and “divided.” Alternate translation: “They wanted to make the people inside the city confused and divided.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
NEH 4 9 vz1d וַנַּעֲמִ֨יד מִשְׁמָ֧ר עֲלֵיהֶ֛ם 1 and we set up a guard on account of them “and we put men around the wall to guard the city”
NEH 4 9 a99c figs-merism יוֹמָ֥ם וָלַ֖יְלָה 1 by day and by night This does not mean that some people went up on the walls to look around at various parts of the day, and others went up at certain times of night. Nehemiah is describing how he maintained a constant guard by speaking of two times when people were on duty, the day and the night, in order to include all the time in between. Alternate translation: “at all times,” otherwise “throughout the day and night” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
NEH 4 9 ad11 figs-metaphor מִפְּנֵיהֶֽם 1 from their faces This term could mean two different things: (1) Most likely, here “Their faces” figuratively means the front of a group. This likely means that the lookouts would see the front ranks of the army as it approached. Alternate translation: “to spot them as they approached” (See: bita-hq). (2) Here “their faces” could also be a figurative way of referring to the enemies and their hostile intentions toward the people doing the work. Alternate translations: “against them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
NEH 4 10 ad13 figs-metonymy וַיֹּ֣אמֶר יְהוּדָ֗ה 1 And Judah said Nehemiah is describing the people of Judah figuratively by reference to something associated with them, the name of their province. Alternate translation: “Then the people of Judah started saying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
NEH 4 10 ad15 כָּשַׁל֙ כֹּ֣חַ הַסַּבָּ֔ל 1 the strength of the burden-bearers is failing Alternate translation: “The people who are carrying the stones are getting worn out”
NEH 4 10 vc8h וְהֶעָפָ֖ר 1 and…rubble Alternate translation: “and…burned stone” or “and…broken rock” or “and…unusable stone”
NEH 4 10 ad17 וַאֲנַ֨חְנוּ֙ לֹ֣א נוּכַ֔ל לִבְנ֖וֹת בַּחוֹמָֽה 1 And as for us, we are not able to build the wall. Alternate translation: “We are not going to be able to finish rebuilding the wall”
NEH 4 11 yuc9 figs-parallelism לֹ֤א יֵדְעוּ֙ וְלֹ֣א יִרְא֔וּ עַ֛ד אֲשֶׁר־נָב֥וֹא אֶל־תּוֹכָ֖ם 1 They will not know, and they will not see until when we come into their midst These two phrases mean similar things. The enemies use the repetition to emphasize how confident they are of launching a surprise attack. If it would be clearer in your language, you could combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “They will not be expecting an attack until we are right there,” otherwise “before they see us and know we are coming, we will rush down on them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
NEH 4 11 ad19 bita-hq וְלֹ֣א יִרְא֔וּ 1 and they will not see While the enemies could be referring to the Jews literally not seeing them approach, “seeing” could also be a figuratively way of describing knowledge, notice, or attention. In that case this expression would mean the same thing as “they will not know.” Alternate translation: “they will not be expecting” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-hq]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
NEH 4 12 ad21 figs-explicit בָּ֣אוּ 1 came The implication is that they came to Jerusalem to speak with the Jewish leaders there. If it would make things clearer in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “came to Jerusalem to speak with us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 4 12 t8f2 figs-synecdoche הַיְּהוּדִ֔ים הַיֹּשְׁבִ֖ים אֶצְלָ֑ם 1 the Jews dwelling beside them **Them** means the enemies Nehemiah has been talking about, so this expression likely refers to the Jews who lived near them. But it does not mean all of these Jews, just some who came to Jerusalem. Nehemiah is describing part of this group as if it were the whole group. Alternate translation: “some of the Jews who lived near our enemies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
NEH 4 12 ad23 figs-explicit מִכָּל־הַמְּקֹמ֖וֹת אֲשֶׁר־תָּשׁ֥וּבוּ עָלֵֽינוּ 1 From all the places where you turn, they are on us The meaning of this Hebrew phrase is uncertain. However, one explanation that would fit the context is that these exposed Jewish communities sent representatives to Jerusalem to tell Nehemiah that they were afraid of being attacked in their villages. The “places where you return” could mean “anywhere we live,” referring to the villages, and “they are on us” could mean that the enemies could attack these undefended towns at any time. Perhaps these representatives were asking Nehemiah to release their able-bodied men from work duty and send them home so they could help defend their families and neighbors. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say something like this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Our enemies could attack us anywhere we live, so let our men return home so they can defend us!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 4 12 q1mv figs-hyperbole מִכָּל־הַמְּקֹמ֖וֹת 1 From all the places where you turn This phrase likely indicates “in every direction.” The word “all” is an exaggeration for emphasis. Alternate translation: “anywhere we live” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
NEH 4 13 ad25 וָֽאַעֲמִ֞יד 1 So I stationed If you follow the suggestion in the previous note for translating the last phrase in [4:12](../04/12.md), then you could show here that Nehemiah is indicating a contrast between what the representatives wanted him to do and what he actually did. Instead of scattering his forces by sending the men from other towns home, he concentrated them visibly in Jerusalem, expecting that the main attack would come there. Alternate translation: “But” or “Instead”
NEH 4 13 xc8b וָֽאַעֲמִ֞יד מִֽתַּחְתִּיּ֧וֹת לַמָּק֛וֹם מֵאַחֲרֵ֥י לַחוֹמָ֖ה בַּצְּחִיחִ֑ים 1 So I stationed from the lowest of places behind the wall, in the bare places Alternate translation: “I put guards behind the wall at the places where it was low or where there were gaps in it.”
NEH 4 13 mj33 figs-synecdoche וָֽאַעֲמִ֤יד אֶת־הָעָם֙ לְמִשְׁפָּח֔וֹת 1 I stationed the people by families This does not mean all the people, and it does not mean every member of every family. Nehemiah is figuratively describing part of the people as if they were all of them, and part of each family as if it were the whole family. Chapter 3 describes how Nehemiah organized the work on the wall by family and community groups. He seems to have organized the defense of the city the same way. Alternate translation: “I positioned people from each family” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
NEH 4 13 ad27 translate-unknown וְקַשְּׁתֹתֵיהֶֽם 1 and their bows This means not just bows, but bows and arrows. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
NEH 4 14 l4uz וָאֵ֣רֶא 1 This likely means that Nehemiah literally looked over all the defenses he had put in place. Alternate translation: “After I had inspected everything”
NEH 4 14 h68n figs-explicit וָאָק֗וּם וָאֹמַ֞ר 1 Since Nehemiah immediately addresses a group of people, the implication is that he gathered them together to speak to them. If it would make things clearer in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I summoned … and I told them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 4 14 f9hq figs-idiom וָאָק֗וּם 1 In this context, the expression “rose up” likely is a way of saying that Nehemiah took public action, not that he had been sitting or lying down and got up. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
NEH 4 14 iy4j אֶל־הַחֹרִ֤ים וְאֶל־הַסְּגָנִים֙ 1 See how you translated these terms in [2:16](../02/16.md). Alternate translation: “to the leading citizens and the city officials”
NEH 4 14 mza7 figs-synecdoche יֶ֣תֶר הָעָ֔ם 1 This does not mean all of the other people who lived in Jerusalem, but rather many of them who came to hear Nehemiah speak on this occasion. He is figuratively describing part of the people as if they were all of them. Alternate translation: “many of the other people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
NEH 4 14 ic4q figs-synecdoche אַל־תִּֽירְא֖וּ מִפְּנֵיהֶ֑ם 1 Here **face** figuratively describes an entire person by reference to one part, the “face,” likely because the face shows what the person is thinking and feeling. Alternate translation: “Do not be afraid of our enemies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
NEH 4 14 xyjh figs-idiom זְכֹ֔רוּ 1 In this context, **remember** does not refer to a person recalling something they have forgotten. Rather, it means, “keep in mind.” Alternate translation: “keep in mind” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
NEH 4 14 xgdm figs-synecdoche אֲדֹנָ֞י הַגָּד֤וֹל וְהַנּוֹרָא֙ 1 Nehemiah is referring here to Yahweh, the God who promised to bless and protect the Jews as his chosen people. When he says **my**, he is using himself to represent the entire community. Alternate translation: “our great and awesome God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
NEH 4 14 x0ri figs-doublet הַגָּד֤וֹל וְהַנּוֹרָא֙ 1 Nehemiah uses this same expression in [1:5](../01/05.md). See how you translated it there. Review the note there if that would be helpful. Alternate translation: “great and awesome” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
NEH 4 14 5cs7 bita-hq אֲחֵיכֶם֙ 1 Here **brother** could mean biological brothers, but it is more likely that it refers figuratively to a person’s relatives, that is, their whole family. Alternate translation: “your families” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-hq]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 4 15 puc1 writing-newevent וַיְהִ֞י כַּֽאֲשֶׁר 1 Nehemiah uses this phrase to introduce the next event in his story. You do not need to represent it in your translation unless your language has a similar expression that it characteristically uses. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
NEH 4 15 qxa7 figs-activepassive נ֣וֹדַֽע לָ֔נוּ 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who did the action. Alternate translation: “we found out about their plans”(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
NEH 4 15 lgih figs-explicit נ֣וֹדַֽע לָ֔נוּ 1 **It** means the plan of these enemies to launch a surprise attack, as described in [4:11](../04/11.md). If it would make things clearer in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “we found out about their plans to launch a surprise attack” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 4 15 e4mc וַיָּ֥פֶר הָאֱלֹהִ֖ים אֶת־עֲצָתָ֑ם 1 Alternate translation: “and God had kept them from doing what they planned.”
NEH 4 15 f236 figs-metonymy וַנָּ֤שָׁב כֻּלָּ֨נוּ֙ אֶל־הַ֣חוֹמָ֔ה אִ֖ישׁ אֶל־מְלַאכְתּֽוֹ 1 Here **the wall** means the work on the wall. Nehemiah is describing this work figuratively by referring to something associated with it, the wall that was the object of the work. Alternate translation: “we all went back to working on the wall.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
NEH 4 15 g1de figs-explicit וַנָּ֤שָׁב כֻּלָּ֨נוּ֙ אֶל־הַ֣חוֹמָ֔ה אִ֖ישׁ אֶל־מְלַאכְתּֽוֹ 1 The implication is that when the enemies realized the Jews knew about their plans, they decided not to attack. If it would make things clearer in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “They decided not to attack us, and we all went back to working on the wall” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 4 15 doov figs-idiom אִ֖ישׁ אֶל־מְלַאכְתּֽוֹ 1 In this context, **a man** means “each person.” It does not refer only to an adult male. Alternate translation: “Each person continued doing the same work as before” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
NEH 4 16 rtac figs-idiom מִן־הַיּ֣וֹם 1 In this context, **day** may not refer to one specific day, but rather to a more general time. Alternate translation: “from that time on” or “after that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
NEH 4 16 gh9g figs-idiom נְעָרַי֮ עֹשִׂ֣ים בַּמְּלָאכָה֒ 1 This expression refers to the servants who worked for Nehemiah. While they probably were young adult males, the expression is specifically envisioning their role and status. Alternate translation: “my servants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
NEH 4 16 rgab figs-explicit עֹשִׂ֣ים בַּמְּלָאכָה֒ 1 This refers to the work on the wall. If it would be clearer in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “worked on the wall” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 4 16 f9in translate-fraction חֲצִ֣י נְעָרַי֮ 1 **Half** means one part out of two equal parts. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-fraction]])
NEH 4 16 nf2h translate-unknown וְהַקְּשָׁת֖וֹת 1 As in [4:13](../04/13.md), this means not just bows, but bows and arrows. <br>(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
NEH 4 16 7iwi וְהַ֨שָּׂרִ֔ים אַחֲרֵ֖י כָּל־בֵּ֥ית יְהוּדָֽה 1 This likely means that certain officials literally stood behind the workers and the guards. That is, they were inside the wall and close to it, while the guards stood right at the wall and the workers worked on it. Alternate translation: “Officers stood behind all the workers and guards”
NEH 4 16 gl4t figs-explicit וְהַ֨שָּׂרִ֔ים אַחֲרֵ֖י כָּל־בֵּ֥ית יְהוּדָֽה 1 The implication is that the leaders were there to give orders in case there was an attack. But it is likely that Nehemiah also wanted them to offer encouragement and maintain good morale. If it would make things clearer in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Officers stood behind all the workers and guards to encourage everyone and to give orders in case there was an attack” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 4 16 ijcj וְהַ֨שָּׂרִ֔ים 1 From the context here and the use of this term in [7:2](../07/02.md), it appears that these “officials” were responsible for giving commands in military situations. Alternate translation: “and officers”
NEH 4 16 d9r4 figs-metaphor כָּל־בֵּ֥ית יְהוּדָֽה 1 Here the word **house** describes all the people descended from a particular person. All of the descendants of Judah are being described figuratively as if they were one household living together. So this would ordinarily mean “the people of Judah.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-manmade]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 4 16 1pdv figs-synecdoche כָּל־בֵּ֥ית יְהוּדָֽה 1 However, in this context, the expression is not referring to all the people of Judah. Nehemiah is figuratively describing part of the people as if they were all of them. He means all of the workers and guards. The expression helps clarify that Nehemiah is no longer speaking just of his own servants, whom had divided into two groups to serve as workers and guards. Alternate translation: “all the workers and guards” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
NEH 4 17 hgfd figs-doublet וְהַנֹּשְׂאִ֥ים בַּסֶּ֖בֶל עֹמְשִׂ֑ים 1 These two short phrases mean similar things. Nehemiah uses them together for clarity and emphasis. You do not need to repeat both phrases in your translation if that would be confusing for your readers. Alternate translation: “and those who carried the heavy loads” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
NEH 4 17 uya2 figs-hyperbole עֹמְשִׂ֑ים בְּאַחַ֤ת יָדוֹ֙ עֹשֶׂ֣ה בַמְּלָאכָ֔ה וְאַחַ֖ת מַחֲזֶ֥קֶת הַשָּֽׁלַח 1 Here **his hands** means “their hands.” This is an exaggeration. The builders and porters did not always work with only one hand. Rather, this means that they always had their weapons with them so that they would be prepared to fight off an attack. Alternate translation: “they always had their weapons with them while they were working on the wall” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
NEH 4 18 8gtq figs-idiom וְהַ֨בּוֹנִ֔ים אִ֥ישׁ חַרְבּ֛וֹ אֲסוּרִ֥ים עַל־מָתְנָ֖יו וּבוֹנִ֑ים 1 In this context, **a man** means “each person.” Alternate translation: “each builder worked with his sword strapped to his side” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
NEH 4 18 vur2 figs-explicit וְהַתּוֹקֵ֥עַ בַּשּׁוֹפָ֖ר אֶצְלִֽי 1 The implication is that Nehemiah stationed this person next to him so that he could sound a signal if needed. (This becomes clear in [4:20](../04/20.md).) If it would be clearer in your language, you could say that explicitly here. Alternate translation: “And I stationed someone next to me who would blow a ram’s horn if we needed a signal.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 4 19 yn7h וָאֹמַ֞ר 1 See how you translated these terms in [2:16](../02/16.md). Alternate translation: “the leading citizens … the city officials”
NEH 4 19 xi9g figs-synecdoche הַחֹרִ֤ים…הַסְּגָנִים֙ 1 As in [4:14](../04/14.md), this does not mean all of the other people who lived in Jerusalem, but rather many of them who came to hear Nehemiah speak on this occasion. He is figuratively describing part of the people as if they were all of them. Alternate translation: “many of the other people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
NEH 4 19 agy3 figs-doublet הַמְּלָאכָ֥ה הַרְבֵּ֖ה 1 **Great** and **vast** mean similar things. Nehemiah uses them together to emphasize the scope of the rebuilding project. You do not need to repeat both phrases in your translation if that would be confusing for your readers. Alternate translation: “large-scale” or “huge” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
NEH 4 19 p5fh bita-hq וַאֲנַ֗חְנוּ נִפְרָדִים֙ עַל־הַ֣חוֹמָ֔ה רְחוֹקִ֖ים אִ֥ישׁ מֵאָחִֽיו 1 In this context, **a man** means “each person,” and **brother** means “fellow Jew.” Alternate translation: “each of us is far apart from our fellow Jews along the wall” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-hq]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 4 20 tm9s figs-explicit אֶת־ק֣וֹל הַשּׁוֹפָ֔ר 1 The implication is that the workers and guards would need to gather together to fight off an attack. The implication is also that while the people were widely scattered, they would all be able to hear the ram’s horn even from a distance, and so it would be an effective signal. If it would make things clearer for your readers, you could say these things explicitly. Alternate translation: “So if we all need to gather in one place to fight off an attack, I will have someone blow a ram’s horn there. You will be able to hear this signal from anywhere along the wall.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 4 20 i5t4 translate-unknown הַשּׁוֹפָ֔ר 1 See how you translated this in [4:18](../04/18.md). Review the explanation there if that would be helpful. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
NEH 4 20 qml6 אֱלֹהֵ֖ינוּ יִלָּ֥חֶם לָֽנוּ 1 This does not mean that God will fight instead of the Jews, but that God will take their side and help them win. Alternate translation: “God will help us defeat our enemies.”
NEH 4 21 opos figs-explicit וַאֲנַ֖חְנוּ עֹשִׂ֣ים בַּמְּלָאכָ֑ה 1 This means the **work** of rebuilding the wall. If it would be clearer in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “So we continued to work on rebuilding the wall.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 4 21 xvrl figs-synecdoche וְחֶצְיָ֗ם מַחֲזִיקִים֙ בָּֽרְמָחִ֔ים 1 “Them” means the men who would otherwise have been working as builders or carrying loads, but who were serving as guards instead. As verses [4:13](../04/13.md) and [4:16](../04/13.md) make clear, the weaponry included not just spears, but also shields and bows and arrows. So Nehemiah is using “spears” here to refer figuratively to all of the weaponry. Alternate translation: “half of the men served as guards and kept their weapons ready” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
NEH 4 21 ca45 translate-fraction וְחֶצְיָ֗ם 1 Here **half** means one part out of two equal parts. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-fraction]])
NEH 4 21 w4uu figs-merism מֵעֲל֣וֹת הַשַּׁ֔חַר עַ֖ד צֵ֥את הַכּוֹכָבִֽים 1 Nehemiah is referring to the entire day by speaking of two extreme parts of it, the time when first light of morning appears and the time when it becomes dark enough to see the stars, in order to include everything in between. If it would be clearer in your language, you could express this meaning with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “at all times,” otherwise “from the time when the light of dawn appeared in the morning until the time when the stars appeared at night" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
NEH 4 21 jl3h מֵעֲל֣וֹת הַשַּׁ֔חַר 1 This phrase refers to the daily appearance of light rising in the east in the early morning hours prior to the sun rising above the horizon. Alternate translation: “the first light of day”
NEH 4 21 ww7q figs-metaphor 1 Here Nehemiah describes the appearing of the stars as if they **came out** of an enclosed container. Alternate translation: “the very beginning of the night” <br>(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 4 22 j1fu figs-idiom 1 In this context, **a man** means “each person” and more specifically “each worker.” As in 4:16, “young man” means servant. Alternate translation: “each worker and his servant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
NEH 4 22 r87p figs-explicit בְּת֣וֹךְ יְרוּשָׁלִָ֑ם 1 This could be referring to workers who had come from nearby cities and towns to help rebuild the wall. It could also include people who lived in the Jerusalem area but whose homes were outside the city, such as local farmers. If it would make things clearer in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “spend the night inside Jerusalem and not go home if they live outside the city” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 4 22 gjm3 1 The idea is not that these men would be on guard duty all night and then work all day on the wall. Rather, their presence in the city would mean that a large number of defenders would be ready on short notice if needed. If it would make things clearer in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “That way the city will have plenty of defenders even at night, and they can still work on the wall during the daytime.”
NEH 4 23 llry grammar-connect-time-simultaneous 1 In this verse Nehemiah is describing something else that was also true of the conditions in Jerusalem during the time period he is describing. You can make this clear in your translation with an appropriate connecting word or phrase. Alternate translation: “At that time, neither” <br>(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]])
NEH 4 23 g8mf figs-metonymy 1 Here **brother** likely refers to Nehemiah’s close relatives. Elsewhere in the book he indicates that his brother Hanani lived in the city and that his relatives ate with him at the governor’s table ([1:2](../01/02.md), [5:14](../05/14.md), [7:2](../07/02.md)). Alternate translation: “my relatives” <br>(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
NEH 4 23 vfv3 figs-idiom 1 As in [4:16](../04/16.md), this means “my servants.” <br>(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
NEH 4 23 flyg translate-unknown 1 This likely refers to the personal bodyguard that the king would have assigned to Nehemiah when he appointed him to be the governor of Judah. (Nehemiah describes this appointment in 5:14.) Alternate translation: “my personal bodyguard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
NEH 4 23 upc5 figs-ellipsis 1 Here the specific meaning of the Hebrew text is unknown, but Nehemiah is almost certainly leaving out some of the words that a sentence would normally have to have in order to be complete. He says that he and his relatives, servants, and bodyguards did not take off their clothes, **or anyone his weapon at the water.** This could mean that “no one took his weapon off even when he was washing himself” or that “no one took his weapon off even when going to get water.” If it would be clearer in your language if you explained what “at the water” might mean, you could choose one of these possibilities. Alternate translation: “Each of us always had our weapons with us, even when we were washing ourselves.” <br>(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
NEH 5 intro k7pb 0 # Nehemiah 05 General Notes<br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Equality<br><br>The rich made money from the poor. The rich oppressed the poor by charging interest on loans. Because Nehemiah wanted to treat everyone fairly, he did not collect any taxes from them. This chapter also emphasizes that it was wrong to enslave a fellow Jew. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/oppress]])<br><br>### Governor<br>Nehemiah was a governmental leader in Jerusalem, but he was not a king. Jerusalem had a great deal of independence, but it was under the authority of the Persian king. The term “governor” reflects this idea, but a different term may be used in translation.
NEH 5 1 za4u grammar-connect-time-simultaneous וַתְּהִ֨י 1 Nehemiah now relates something else that was happening even while the Jews were trying to rebuild the wall and defend themselves against their enemies. You can make this clear in your translation with an appropriate connecting word or phrase. Alternate translation: “Around this same time”(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]])
NEH 5 1 zmb8 figs-abstractnouns צַעֲקַ֥ת הָעָ֛ם וּנְשֵׁיהֶ֖ם גְּדוֹלָ֑ה 1 **Outcry** is an abstract noun that refers to the complaints that the poorer Jews made to Nehemiah about how the wealthier and more powerful Jews were treating them. If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate the idea behind this word with a verb such as “complain.” Since Nehemiah says this was a “great” outcry, involving many serious grievances, you could intensify the verb with an adverb such as “bitterly.” Alternate translation: “many of the men and their wives complained bitterly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
NEH 5 1 czx5 הָעָ֛ם וּנְשֵׁיהֶ֖ם 1 Here **the people** seems to indicate certain men who lived in Jerusalem, since Nehemiah also mentions their wives. Alternate translation: “many of the men and their wives”
NEH 5 1 3qlp bita-hq אֲחֵיהֶ֖ם 1 Here **brother** does not seem to mean biological brothers, but to refer figuratively to other members of the same people group. Alternate translation: “their fellow Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-hq]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 5 1 93po figs-doublet אֲחֵיהֶ֖ם הַיְּהוּדִֽים<br> 1 These two short phrases mean similar things. Nehemiah uses them together to emphasize how inappropriate it was for people to treat members of their own group in the ways described. If it would be clearer in your language, you could combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “their fellow Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
NEH 5 2 u19u וְיֵשׁ֙ אֲשֶׁ֣ר אֹמְרִ֔ים 1 Verses 2, 3, 4, and 5 do not seem to be different complaints that people brought to Nehemiah separately. Rather, the whole group seems to be complaining that because they need to get food for their families, wealthier and more powerful Jews are exploiting them. They are forcing them to take mortgages and loans and even sell their children into slavery. Nehemiah is probably depicting one speaker after another in the crowd adding details to this picture. You could suggest this to the readers of your translation by introducing these comments with a translation such as, “some of them began to say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 5 2 i9kn בָּנֵ֥ינוּ וּבְנֹתֵ֖ינוּ אֲנַ֣חְנוּ רַבִּ֑ים 1 Alternate translation: “We have many children”
NEH 5 2 i5cb figs-synecdoche וְנִקְחָ֥ה דָגָ֖ן 1 This does not mean only grain. The people complaining to Nehemiah are using one kind of food, grain, the staple of their diet, to refer figuratively to all the foods they would need to eat. Alternate translation: “we need food” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
NEH 5 2 7ibq figs-explicit וְנִקְחָ֥ה דָגָ֖ן 1 The implication is that because the families are large, a lot of food is needed. If it would make things clearer in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “we need to get a lot of food” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 5 2 ojue figs-doublet וְנֹאכְלָ֥ה וְנִחְיֶֽה 1 These two short phrases mean similar things. The people use them together to emphasize the urgency and importance of having food. If it would be clearer in your language, you could combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “to get enough food to stay alive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
NEH 5 3 hwfh figs-explicit וְיֵשׁ֙ אֲשֶׁ֣ר אֹמְרִ֔ים 1 Alternate translation: “Others added” (See the applicable note to [2:2](../02/02.md). <br>(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 5 3 dt2m translate-unknown שְׂדֹתֵ֛ינוּ וּכְרָמֵ֥ינוּ וּבָתֵּ֖ינוּ אֲנַ֣חְנוּ עֹרְבִ֑ים וְנִקְחָ֥ה דָגָ֖ן בָּרָעָֽב 1 It might be helpful to explain to your readers what a **mortgage** is, if you think they might not know. Alternate translation: “We have had to promise to give someone our fields, vineyards, and houses if we do not pay back the money we borrowed. We had to borrow the money to buy food during this time when food is scarce.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
NEH 5 4 r14f figs-explicit וְיֵשׁ֙ אֲשֶׁ֣ר אֹמְרִ֔ים 1 Different people in the crowd apparently continue to add details to the complaint. Alternate translation: “Still others said”
NEH 5 4 zurg figs-metonymy לָוִ֥ינוּ כֶ֖סֶף 1 **Silver** here means “money.” Nehemiah is describing money figuratively by reference to the commodity that is being used as a means of exchange, silver. Alternate translation: “We have had to borrow money” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
NEH 5 4 9i16 translate-unknown לְמִדַּ֣ת הַמֶּ֑לֶךְ שְׂדֹתֵ֖ינוּ וּכְרָמֵֽינוּ 1 **Tribute** means “taxes” here. Alternate translation: “the taxes that the king commanded us to pay on our fields and our vineyards” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
NEH 5 5 zami grammar-connect-words-phrases וְעַתָּ֗ה 1 This term indicates that the sentence that follows is a further development of the thought from the previous sentence. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
NEH 5 5 z4ru figs-explicit כִּבְשַׂ֤ר אַחֵ֨ינוּ֙ בְּשָׂרֵ֔נוּ כִּבְנֵיהֶ֖ם בָּנֵ֑ינוּ 1 Here the Jews are insisting that they are of the same Jewish descent as the other Jews and that they of the same importance as the others. If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Yet our families are Jews just like the other Jew’s families, and our children are just as important to us as their children are to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 5 5 ff7r figs-abstractnouns כִּבְשַׂ֤ר אַחֵ֨ינוּ֙ בְּשָׂרֵ֔נוּ כִּבְנֵיהֶ֖ם בָּנֵ֑ינוּ 1 These two phrases mean similar things. The people complaining to Nehemiah are using the repetition to emphasize how shameful it is for the wealthy and powerful to sell their own fellow Jews into slavery. If it would be clearer in your language, you could combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “And we are Jews, just like the people who are doing these things to us!” (See [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-[[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]]])
NEH 5 5 pcwk כִּבְשַׂ֤ר אַחֵ֨ינוּ֙ בְּשָׂרֵ֔נוּ כִּבְנֵיהֶ֖ם בָּנֵ֑ינוּ 1 You could move this sentence to the end of the verse, since it is the culmination of the argument.
NEH 5 5 w1ot bita-hq אַחֵ֨ינוּ֙ 1 Here **brother** figuratively describes the Jews who are exploiting their poor and vulnerable fellow Jews. Alternate translation: “And we are Jews, just like the people who are doing these things to us!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-hq]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 5 5 1guf וְהִנֵּ֣ה 1 **Behold** is a term meant to focus the attention of the listener on what the speaker is about to say. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could use some emphatic term or expression in your language that would have this same effect.
NEH 5 5 rdp9 figs-explicit אֲנַ֣חְנוּ כֹ֠בְשִׁים אֶת־בָּנֵ֨ינוּ וְאֶת־בְּנֹתֵ֜ינוּ לַעֲבָדִ֗ים וְיֵ֨שׁ מִבְּנֹתֵ֤ינוּ נִכְבָּשׁוֹת֙ 1 In this context, the construction **are putting** likely indicates that the poor are on the verge of selling their children into slavery. The next sentence shows that they have already done this just in some instances. It appears that in this culture, in dire situations, girls were sold before boys, perhaps because they could become either domestic servants or concubines. A concubine was a woman who was both a slave and a secondary wife to her master. If it would be clearer in your language, you could express this statement that way. Alternate translation: “We are on the verge of selling our children into slavery. In fact, we have already sold some of our daughters as servants and concubines.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 5 5 z783 grammar-connect-logic-result וְאֵ֣ין לְאֵ֣ל יָדֵ֔נוּ וּשְׂדֹתֵ֥ינוּ וּכְרָמֵ֖ינוּ לַאֲחֵרִֽים 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, because the second phrase gives the reason why the first phrase is true. Alternate translation: “because our creditors took the fields and vineyards we pledged as security for loans, there is nothing else we can do in this situation.” (See: \[\[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result\]\])
NEH 5 5 y2mq figs-idiom וְאֵ֣ין לְאֵ֣ל יָדֵ֔נוּ 1 “My hand is to God” is an [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]] that means that the speaker has the power to do what they are describing. Here the poor are saying that this is not the case. Alternate translation: “there is nothing else we can do in this situation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
NEH 5 5 jr7j figs-explicit וּשְׂדֹתֵ֥ינוּ וּכְרָמֵ֖ינוּ לַאֲחֵרִֽים 1 The implication is that when the poor could not pay back their loans, their creditors took the fields and vineyards they had pledged as collateral. If it would make things clearer in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “because our creditors took the fields and vineyards we pledged as security for loans.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 5 6 7cm3 bita-phenom וַיִּ֥חַר לִ֖י מְאֹ֑ד 1 Here Nehemiah says that his anger was a fire that burned inside of him. Alternate translation: “I got very angry” (See: <br>[[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-phenom]]<br>and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 5 6 ryx1 figs-abstractnouns כַּאֲשֶׁ֤ר שָׁמַ֨עְתִּי֙ אֶת־זַֽעֲקָתָ֔ם 1 **Outcry** is an abstract noun that refers to complaints that the poorer Jews made to Nehemiah about how the wealthier and more powerful Jews were treating them. You can translate the idea behind this word with a verb such as “complain.” Alternate translation: “when I heard how they were complaining” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])<br><br><br>
NEH 5 6 some figs-doublet אֶת־זַֽעֲקָתָ֔ם וְאֵ֖ת הַדְּבָרִ֥ים 1 These two short phrases mean similar things. They are used together to emphasize the urgency and severity of these complaints. You do not need to repeat both phrases in your translation if that would be confusing for your readers. Alternate translation: “everything that they were complaining about” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
NEH 5 7 7k8g figs-personification וַיִּמָּלֵ֨ךְ לִבִּ֜י עָלַ֗י 1 Here Nehemiah is speaking about his heart as if it were a living thing that could act like a king and rule over him. However, he is not saying that his feelings commanded his actions. (He says in the previous verse that he became very angry, but in the next verse he describes acting in a careful and deliberate manner.) Instead, this means that his heart “took counsel” with him, the way a king would take counsel with advisors. In effect, Nehemiah is saying that he talked the matter over with himself. Alternate translation: “I thought hard about what to do” (See: \[\[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification\]\])
NEH 5 7 wxyz figs-metaphor וַיִּמָּלֵ֨ךְ לִבִּ֜י עָלַ֗י 1 Here the **heart** figuratively represents the thoughts and the will. Alternate translation: “I thought hard about what to do” (See: \[\[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor\]\])
NEH 5 7 jawz וָאָרִ֨יבָה֙ 1 **Contended** is a technical term that means “to bring charges.” It means to initiate a lawsuit that would require the defendants to answer for themselves publicly, in the presence of their fellow citizens. Alternate translation: “Then I brought charges”
NEH 5 7 o23t figs-metaphor הַחֹרִ֣ים…הַסְּגָנִ֔ים 1 See how you translated these terms in [2:16](../02/16.md). Alternate translation: “the leading citizens and the city officials”
NEH 5 7 dy73 figs-idiom מַשָּׁ֥א…אַתֶּ֣ם נֹשִׁ֑ים 1 This expression means to charge interest when loaning money to another person. Alternate translation: "You are charging interest" <br>(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
NEH 5 7 sn56 figs-explicit מַשָּׁ֥א אִישׁ־בְּאָחִ֖יו 1 The Law of Moses specifically forbade charging interest on a loan to a fellow Jew. So this was not just an exploitive business practice, it was a violation of God’s Law. The rich and powerful Jews would certainly have been expected to know this. If it would make things clearer in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “You are charging interest on loans to your fellow Jews. You know that is forbidden in the Law of Moses.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 5 7 f66g figs-idiom אִישׁ־בְּאָחִ֖יו 1 In this context, “a man” means “each person.” It does not mean only an adult male. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
NEH 5 7 9ibe bita-hq אִישׁ־בְּאָחִ֖יו 1 Here **brother** could conceivably include even biological brothers, but in context it likely refers figuratively to fellow Jews. Alternate translation: “to your fellow Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-hq]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])<br><br><br>
NEH 5 7 r7yl translate-unknown וָאֶתֵּ֥ן עֲלֵיהֶ֖ם קְהִלָּ֥ה גְדוֹלָֽה 1 This means that, as part of conducting the lawsuit against these wealthy and powerful Jews, Nehemiah brought together a large group of their fellow citizens to hear the charges against them. This group was the “assembly.” Alternate translation: “I put them on trial in front of their fellow citizens” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
NEH 5 7 u9u2 figs-events וָאֶתֵּ֥ן עֲלֵיהֶ֖ם קְהִלָּ֥ה גְדוֹלָֽה 1 To present the events in chronological order, if that would be helpful to your readers, you could put this before the previous sentence, which describes the first charge that Nehemiah brought at this trial. <br>(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-events]])
NEH 5 8 o7o9 figs-explicit **We** likely means Nehemiah and his relatives, as in 4:23. If it would make things clearer in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “My relatives and I” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 5 8 a1b2 figs-events קָ֠נִינוּ אֶת־אַחֵ֨ינוּ הַיְּהוּדִ֜ים הַנִּמְכָּרִ֤ים לַגּוֹיִם֙ 1 To present the events in chronological order, if that would be helpful to your readers, you could put the information that some Jews had to sell themselves into slavery before the information that Nehemiah and his relatives bought their freedom. Alternate translation: “Whenever our Jewish relatives have had to sell themselves into slavery to people from other nations … we have been buying them back.” (See: Order of Events)
NEH 5 8 o6o8 כְּדֵ֣י בָ֔נוּ 1 Alternate translation: “to the best of our ability”
NEH 5 8 q123 figs-doublet אַחֵ֨ינוּ הַיְּהוּדִ֜ים 1 These two short phrases mean similar things. They are used together to emphasize that buying them back was an honorable and expected action. You do not need to repeat both phrases in your translation if that would be confusing for your readers. Alternate translation: “our Jewish relatives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
NEH 5 8 bszc bita-hq אַחֵ֨ינוּ 1 Here **brother** likely refers figuratively to fellow Jews. Alternate translation: “our fellow Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-hq]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 5 8 t5y7 figs-activepassive הַיְּהוּדִ֜ים הַנִּמְכָּרִ֤ים 1 You can say this with an active form, and you can say who did the action. Alternate translation: “our fellow Jews have had to sell themselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
NEH 5 8 pzy8 figs-explicit אַתֶּ֛ם תִּמְכְּר֥וּ אֶת־אֲחֵיכֶ֖ם וְנִמְכְּרוּ־לָ֑נוּ 1 This means that they are selling their family members, both men and women, as slaves to their fellow Jews. The full meaning of this statement can be made clear. Alternate translation: “Now you are selling your own people to be slaves of your fellow Jews, so that they might later sell them back to us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 5 8 kn82 figs-activepassive הַנִּמְכָּרִ֤ים לַגּוֹיִם֙ 1 This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “who people had sold as slaves to the nations” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
NEH 5 8 b1a1 וְגַם־אַתֶּ֛ם 1 Malkijah This is an emphatic expression. Nehemiah uses it to show how serious the offense is. If it would be clearer in your language, you could indicate this emphasis in some way in your translation. Alternate translation: “you are actually”
NEH 5 8 b1a3 figs-explicit תִּמְכְּר֥וּ אֶת־אֲחֵיכֶ֖ם 1 This means that the creditors were selling the debtors into slavery to recover the money they owed. If it would make things clearer in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “you are actually selling your fellow Jews into slavery to get back the money they owe you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 5 8 b1a5 bita-hq אֲחֵיכֶ֖ם 1 Here **brother** likely refers figuratively to fellow Jews. Alternate translation: “your fellow Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-hq]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 5 8 b1a7 figs-activepassive וְנִמְכְּרוּ־לָ֑נוּ 1 You can say this with an active form, and you can say who did the action. Alternate translation: “They are some of the very people we have been buying back!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
NEH 5 8 b1a9 figs-explicit וַֽיַּחֲרִ֔ישׁוּ וְלֹ֥א מָצְא֖וּ דָּבָֽר 1 The implication is that the accused said nothing because they knew that Nehemiah’s charges were true. If it would be clearer in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “They knew that these charges were true, so they were silent. They could not answer a single word.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 5 8 ecd1 figs-parallelism וַֽיַּחֲרִ֔ישׁוּ וְלֹ֥א מָצְא֖וּ דָּבָֽר 1 These two phrases mean similar things. Nehemiah uses the repetition to emphasize how completely guilty the accused people were. If it would be clearer in your language, you could combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “there was absolutely nothing they could say in response.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
NEH 5 9 lm7c לֹא־ט֥וֹב הַדָּבָ֖ר אֲשֶׁר־אַתֶּ֣ם עֹשִׂ֑ים 1 In this context, **good** does have a moral connotation. Nehemiah is saying more than that this is not a good idea. Alternate translation: “What you are doing is wrong!”
NEH 5 9 kr1t figs-rquestion הֲל֞וֹא בְּיִרְאַ֤ת אֱלֹהֵ֨ינוּ֙ תֵּלֵ֔כוּ מֵחֶרְפַּ֖ת הַגּוֹיִ֥ם אוֹיְבֵֽינוּ 1 Nehemiah is making a statement, not asking a question. He does not expect the accused to give him reasons why they should not obey God. Instead, he is using the question form to emphasize how important it is for these wealthy and powerful Jews to stop doing these wrong things. Alternate translation: “You really ought to live your life in a way that honors God!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
NEH 5 9 v6ux figs-idiom הֲל֞וֹא בְּיִרְאַ֤ת אֱלֹהֵ֨ינוּ֙ תֵּלֵ֔כוּ 1 In this context, **fear** does not mean to be afraid. It means to show respect and reverence, specifically by obeying instead of disobeying. Alternate translation: “live your life in a way that honors God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
NEH 5 9 b1b1 figs-idiom תֵּלֵ֔כוּ 1 Here **walk** is an idiom that describes a person’s conduct in life. Alternate translation: “live your life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
NEH 5 9 b1b3 מֵחֶרְפַּ֖ת הַגּוֹיִ֥ם אוֹיְבֵֽינוּ 1 This may be a reference to the way the enemies of the Jews were already mocking them, or to the way they would mock them if they learned of what was happening. It could mean both things. Alternate translation: “Otherwise, our enemies will mock us even more”
NEH 5 9 s7qt figs-abstractnouns מֵחֶרְפַּ֖ת הַגּוֹיִ֥ם אוֹיְבֵֽינוּ 1 **Reproach** is an abstract noun that refers to the way the enemies of the Jews were mocking them. If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate the same idea with a verb such as “mock.” Alternate translation: “to keep the nations who are our enemies from mocking us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
NEH 5 9 b1b5 figs-doublet הַגּוֹיִ֥ם אוֹיְבֵֽינוּ 1 These two short phrases mean similar things. Nehemiah uses them together to emphasize the identity and hostility of the people who are opposing the Jews. If it would be clearer in your language, you could combine them. Alternate translation: “our enemies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
NEH 5 10 b1b7 bita-hq וְגַם־אֲנִי֙ אַחַ֣י וּנְעָרַ֔י 1 As in [4:23](../04/23.md), this means, “I myself, my relatives, and my servants.” The term “brother” here likely includes one or more of Nehemiah’s biological brothers, but more generally it refers figuratively to his close relatives. Alternate translation: “I myself, my relatives, and my servants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-hq]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 5 10 xbp5 נֹשִׁ֥ים בָּהֶ֖ם כֶּ֣סֶף וְדָגָ֑ן 1 The implication is that Nehemiah and his companions are lending without charging any interest. If it would make things clearer in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “have been lending money and grain to those in need without charging interest” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 5 10 b1b9 figs-metonymy כֶּ֣סֶף 1 **Silver** here means “money.” Nehemiah is describing money figuratively by reference to the commodity that is being used as a means of exchange, silver. Alternate translation: “money” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
NEH 5 10 j3dq נַֽעַזְבָה־נָּ֖א אֶת־הַמַּשָּׁ֥א הַזֶּֽה 1 It is clear from the context that **us** in this sentence does not mean Nehemiah and his companions, but rather the entire Jewish community, of which they are a part. Nehemiah could say to the defendants, accusingly, “You must stop charging interest!” But he includes himself and the entire community as a way of being encouraging rather than condemning. (This would be a use of “we/us” that includes the addressees. You should make this clear in your translation if your language makes that distinction.) Alternate translation: “All of us should stop charging interest on loans.”
NEH 5 11 vkz7 הָשִׁיבוּ֩ נָ֨א לָהֶ֜ם 1 This is worded as a polite request, but it is really a demand. If it would be clearer in your language, you could express it with an imperative. “Give them back”
NEH 5 11 dim5 figs-idiom כְּהַיּ֗וֹם 1 This does not necessarily mean on this same day, but without waiting. Alternate translation: “Do it right away!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
NEH 5 11 b1c1 translate-fraction וּמְאַ֨ת 1 In this context, this expression means “the hundredth part,” or one per cent. In this culture, this was likely charged monthly, so it would have amounted to 12% annual interest. In an economy that was based more on commodities than on cash, this would have been an exorbitant amount. If your culture typically calculates interest at an annual rate, you could express it that way here to help your readers understand the likely meaning. Alternate translation: “the 12% annual interest” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-fraction]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 5 11 e9y2 figs-metonymy הַכֶּ֤סֶף 1 **Silver** means “money” here, as in verse 10. Alternate translation: “money” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
NEH 5 11 b1c3 figs-idiom נֹשִׁ֥ים בָּהֶֽם 1 Alternate translation: “charging them” or “making them pay” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
NEH 5 12 b1c5 וַיֹּאמְר֣וּ 1 **They** means the leading citizens and the city officials. Alternate translation: “These leaders replied”
NEH 5 12 q7t5 figs-explicit נָשִׁ֗יב 1 The implication is that they will return the fields, vineyards, olive orchards, and houses that they took from the poor, as Nehemiah demanded in [5:11](../05/11.md). If it would make things clearer in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “We will give back their fields, vineyards, olive orchards, and houses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 5 12 i1gi וּמֵהֶם֙ לֹ֣א נְבַקֵּ֔שׁ 1 Alternate translation: “And we will stop charging them interest.”
NEH 5 12 e2yv grammar-connect-logic-result נַעֲשֶׂ֔ה כַּאֲשֶׁ֖ר אַתָּ֣ה אוֹמֵ֑ר 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could put this statement first, since it is the reason for the results that follow, the return of property and the cancelling of interest. Alternate translation: “Yes, we will do what you say” (See: grammar-connect-logic-result)
NEH 5 12 b1c7 figs-explicit וָאֶקְרָא֙ אֶת־הַכֹּ֣הֲנִ֔ים וָֽאַשְׁבִּיעֵ֔ם לַעֲשׂ֖וֹת כַּדָּבָ֥ר הַזֶּֽה 1 The implication is that the priests would have these leaders swear an oath before God. If it would make things clearer in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Then I called the priests, and I made the leaders swear to God in front of them that they would do what they had promised.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 5 13 b1c9 figs-metonymy חָצְנִ֣י נָעַ֗רְתִּי 1 **Bosom** here refers figuratively to Nehemiah’s robe. It refers specifically by association to the part that he could gather together in front of him to form a pouch. Alternate translation: “I shook out the folds of my robe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
NEH 5 13 neg1 translate-symaction חָצְנִ֣י נָעַ֗רְתִּי 1 Nehemiah gathered his robe together in front of him, the way someone would if they wanted to carry something in its folds. Then he flung the robe open and shook it, so that anything that was in it would have scattered. By doing this, he demonstrated symbolically to the Jewish leaders what would happen to them if they broke the promise they made. Alternate translation: “I shook out the folds of my robe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
NEH 5 13 f5p4 כָּ֣כָה יְנַעֵ֪ר הָֽאֱלֹהִ֟ים אֶת־כָּל־הָאִישׁ֩ אֲשֶׁ֨ר לֹֽא־יָקִ֜ים אֶת־הַדָּבָ֣ר הַזֶּ֗ה מִבֵּיתוֹ֙ וּמִ֣יגִיע֔וֹ וְכָ֛כָה יִהְיֶ֥ה נָע֖וּר וָרֵ֑ק 1 Alternate translation: “In the same way, may God take away the home and all the possessions of anyone who does not keep this promise”
NEH 5 13 b1d1 figs-gendernotations כָּל־הָאִישׁ֩ 1 In this context, this expression means “anyone.” It could include women as well as men. Alternate translation: “anyone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
NEH 5 13 b1d3 figs-personification יָקִ֜ים אֶת־הַדָּבָ֣ר הַזֶּ֗ה 1 The **word** means the promise that the leaders have made and the oath they have taken to confirm it. Nehemiah is speaking of this promise figuratively as if it were a living thing that could stand, that is, stay in place rather than go away. Alternate translation: “keep this oath” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
NEH 5 13 b1d5 figs-doublet מִבֵּיתוֹ֙ וּמִ֣יגִיע֔וֹ 1 These two short phrases mean similar things. They are used together to express the totality of what a person owns. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could combine them. Alternate translation: “everything he owns” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
NEH 5 13 b1d7 וּמִ֣יגִיע֔וֹ 1 **Labor** here figuratively refers to the “fruits of labor,” that is, the possessions that a person acquires through labor. Alternate translation: “all his possessions”
NEH 5 13 b1d9 figs-parallelism וְכָ֛כָה יִהְיֶ֥ה נָע֖וּר וָרֵ֑ק 1 This sentence repeats the meaning of the previous one. Nehemiah uses the repetition for emphasis. You would not need to use the same repetition in your translation if it were already clear that Nehemiah is speaking emphatically in the first sentence. However, you could also rephrase the meaning. Alternate translation: “Yes, may that person be separated from everything he owns!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
NEH 5 13 b1e1 figs-doublet נָע֖וּר וָרֵ֑ק 1 These two short phrases mean similar things. They are used together to emphasize how completely Nehemiah wants God to punish anyone who breaks the oath. You do not need to repeat both phrases in your translation if that would be confusing for your readers. Alternate translation: “be separated from everything he owns” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
NEH 5 13 b1e3 כָֽל־הַקָּהָ֜ל 1 This means everyone who was there, both the leaders who were the defendants and the citizens Nehemiah had gathered to hear the charges against them. Alternate translation: “everyone who was there”
NEH 5 13 b1e5 figs-idiom אָמֵ֗ן 1 This is an expression that means, “Truly, it is so.” It expresses agreement with what someone has just said. You could express the meaning with a phrase such as, “We agree!” Or you could use the Hebrew term and explain its meaning: “Amen! It is true.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
NEH 5 13 b1e9 וַיַּ֥עַשׂ הָעָ֖ם כַּדָּבָ֥ר הַזֶּֽה 1 **The people** means “the Jews.” “This word” means the promises they made. Alternate translation: “After that, none of the Jews took houses or fields to guarantee loans, and none of them charged interest”
NEH 5 14 zur1 figs-explicit גַּ֞ם 1 As explained in the note to [3:1](../03/01.md), in this book, Nehemiah is recording everything that he did to help the people of Judah. He hopes and prays that God will bless him for what he did. He has just described how he rescued the poor from foreclosures and interest. Now he is going to describe something further that he did to help them. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Here is something else I did to help the people.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 5 14 b1f1 writing-background מִיּ֣וֹם ׀ אֲשֶׁר־צִוָּ֣ה אֹתִ֗י לִהְי֣וֹת פֶּחָם֮ בְּאֶ֣רֶץ יְהוּדָה֒ מִשְּׁנַ֣ת עֶשְׂרִ֗ים…לְאַרְתַּחְשַׁ֣סְתְּא הַמֶּ֔לֶךְ 1 This is background information that helps explain what Nehemiah will say next. Alternate translation: “Artaxerxes, the king of Persia, had appointed me to be the governor of the province of Judah during the twentieth year of his reign.” (See: Background Information)
NEH 5 14 b1f3 מִיּ֣וֹם…וְ֠עַד שְׁנַ֨ת שְׁלֹשִׁ֤ים וּשְׁתַּ֨יִם֙ לְאַרְתַּחְשַׁ֣סְתְּא הַמֶּ֔לֶךְ 1 Alternate translation: “During the twelve years from that time until the thirty-second year of his reign”
NEH 5 14 b1f5 figs-idiom מִיּ֣וֹם 1 This is an idiom that means “from the time.” Alternate translation: “from that time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
NEH 5 14 ri8l translate-ordinal מִשְּׁנַ֣ת עֶשְׂרִ֗ים וְ֠עַד שְׁנַ֨ת שְׁלֹשִׁ֤ים וּשְׁתַּ֨יִם֙ 1 Alternate translation: “from the 20th year until the 32nd year of the reign of Artaxerxes as king” or “from year 20 until year 32 in the reign of Artaxerxes as king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
NEH 5 14 ga6u translate-numbers שָׁנִ֖ים שְׁתֵּ֣ים עֶשְׂרֵ֑ה 1 Alternate translation: “12 years” or “during those 12 years” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
NEH 5 14 b1f7 אֲנִ֣י וְאַחַ֔י לֶ֥חֶם הַפֶּ֖חָה לֹ֥א אָכַֽלְתִּי 1 As Nehemiah explains in the next verse, he recognized that the people were poor and could not afford to provide very much for the expenses of the governor. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly here. Alternate translation: “Because I knew that the people were poor and could not afford to pay for it, I did not accept the governor’s food allowance, and I did not use it to feed my relatives”
NEH 5 14 i31d אֲנִ֣י…לֹ֥א אָכַֽלְתִּי 1 Alternate translation: “I did not accept”
NEH 5 14 b1f9 figs-synecdoche לֶ֥חֶם הַפֶּ֖חָה 1 Nehemiah is using bread to refer figuratively to the entire food allowance that he was entitled to as the governor of Judah. He is describing all the food by the name of one part of it, the bread. Alternate translation: “the food that the people provided for the governor” or “the governor’s food allowance” (See [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
NEH 5 14 nqt2 bita-hq וְאַחַ֔י 1 As in [4:23](../04/23.md), **brother** here likely refers to Nehemiah’s actual brother Hanani and the other close relatives who were with him. Alternate translation: “and I did not use it to feed my relatives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-hq]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 5 15 uu9k figs-doublet וְהַפַּחוֹת֩ הָרִאשֹׁנִ֨ים אֲשֶׁר־לְפָנַ֜י 1 **Former** and **before my face** mean similar things. If it would be clearer in your language, you could combine them. Alternate translation: “The men who were governors before me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
NEH 5 15 b1g1 figs-synecdoche לְפָנַ֜י 1 Here **face** figuratively describes an entire person by reference to one part of them, the “face.” Alternate translation: “before me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
NEH 5 15 b1g3 figs-metaphor הִכְבִּ֣ידוּ עַל־הָעָ֗ם 1 Here Nehemiah speaks figuratively as if these governors had been a great burden that the people were carrying, making their lives very difficult. Alternate translation: “made life very difficult for the people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 5 15 b1g5 figs-explicit וַיִּקְח֨וּ מֵהֶ֜ם בְּלֶ֤חֶם וָיַ֨יִן֙ אַחַר֙ כֶּֽסֶף־שְׁקָלִ֣ים 1 **After** indicates that the supplies of bread and wine were in addition to the money. Nehemiah is likely describing what the former governors required of the people each day. If it would make things clearer in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “They demanded that they supply them with bread and wine and forty silver shekels every day.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 5 15 w4zk translate-bmoney כֶּֽסֶף־שְׁקָלִ֣ים אַרְבָּעִ֔ים 1 In ancient times, a silver shekel weighed about 11 grams or about a third of an ounce. You could try to express this in terms of modern money values, but if you did, that could cause your Bible translation to become outdated and inaccurate over time, since those values can change from year to year. Instead, you could say something general like “forty silver coins,” or give the equivalent weight, or use the biblical term in the text and give the weight in a note. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
NEH 5 15 b1g7 translate-numbers כֶּֽסֶף־שְׁקָלִ֣ים אַרְבָּעִ֔ים 1 Alternate translation: “forty silver shekels” or “40 pieces of silver” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
NEH 5 15 b1g9 גַּ֥ם נַעֲרֵיהֶ֖ם שָׁלְט֣וּ עַל־הָעָ֑ם 1 Alternate translation: “Even their servants oppressed the people.”
NEH 5 15 egg7 grammar-connect-logic-result וַאֲנִי֙ לֹא־עָשִׂ֣יתִי כֵ֔ן מִפְּנֵ֖י יִרְאַ֥ת אֱלֹהִֽים 1 In this sentence, if it would be clearer in your language, you can put the reason before the result. Alternate translation: “But because of my fear of God, I did not take the food” (See: grammar-connect-logic-result)
NEH 5 15 b1h1 figs-metaphor מִפְּנֵ֖י יִרְאַ֥ת אֱלֹהִֽים 1 Here **face** figuratively represents Nehemiah’s personal perception. “Fearing” God does not mean being afraid of God, but recognizing that God deserves respect and honor. Nehemiah is speaking of this perception figuratively, as if this recognition was always directly in front of him in a place where he could see it. He means that he was always aware of it. Alternate translation: “because I knew I needed to respect God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 5 16 gx42 figs-metaphor בִּמְלֶ֜אכֶת הַחוֹמָ֤ה הַזֹּאת֙ הֶחֱזַ֔קְתִּי 1 Nehemiah describes himself figuratively as **holding fast to***, meaning “holding onto,” the work of rebuilding the wall. This means that he was devoted to it, and he did not pursue other interests, including ones that could have made money for him. Alternate translation: “I devoted myself to the work of rebuilding of the wall” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 5 16 lm7t שָׂדֶ֖ה לֹ֣א קָנִ֑ינוּ 1 **We** likely refers to Nehemiah and his relatives, since he mentions his servants next.
NEH 5 16 b1h3 figs-synecdoche שָׂדֶ֖ה לֹ֣א קָנִ֑ינוּ 1 Nehemiah is using the term **field** figuratively to describe any kind of real property that he and his relatives might have bought. Verse 11 shows that this could have included not just fields but also things like vineyards, olive orchards, and houses. He is describing all real property by reference to one kind, a field. Alternate translation: “My relatives and I did not buy any property” (See [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
NEH 5 16 m3s9 figs-explicit שָׂדֶ֖ה לֹ֣א קָנִ֑ינוּ 1 The implication is that they could have bought property cheaply because the poor were so desperate. If it would make things clearer in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “My relatives and I did not buy any property, even though we could have gotten it cheaply because the poor were so desperate” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 5 16 xpb3 figs-activepassive וְכָל־נְעָרַ֔י קְבוּצִ֥ים שָׁ֖ם עַל־הַמְּלָאכָֽה 1 **There** means at the wall, and **for the work** means the work of rebuilding the wall. If it would be clearer in your language, you can say this with an active form, and you can say who did the action. Alternate translation: “I gathered all of my servants there to work on the wall” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
NEH 5 17 j2af figs-synecdoche וְהַיְּהוּדִ֨ים 1 While this expression means “the Jewish people” in most of the book, in the contexts here and in 2:16 it seems to mean “Jewish leaders.” Nehemiah is describing some members of this people group, its leaders, as if they were the whole group. Alternate translation: “the Jewish leaders” (See [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
NEH 5 17 a1g4 translate-unknown וְהַסְּגָנִ֜ים 1 See how you translated this term in [2:16](../02/16.md). Alternate translation: “city officials” (See [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
NEH 5 17 q9x7 figs-metonymy מֵאָ֧ה וַחֲמִשִּׁ֣ים אִ֗ישׁ…עַל־שֻׁלְחָנִֽי 1 Nehemiah is using the word **table** to refer to the act of feeding people. He is describing that act figuratively by reference to something associated with it, the table that the food was served on. Alternate translation: “every day I was responsible to feed 150 Jewish leaders and officials” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
NEH 5 17 w7i4 figs-explicit וְהַבָּאִ֥ים אֵלֵ֛ינוּ מִן־הַגּוֹיִ֥ם אֲשֶׁר־סְבִיבֹתֵ֖ינוּ 1 This likely refers to Jews who lived in other countries but who came to Jerusalem. Their own communities may have sent them as representatives, or they may have come on their own for business or personal reasons. Alternate translation: “and we also fed the Jewish visitors who came from other countries around us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 5 18 fa32 figs-ellipsis וַאֲשֶׁר֩ הָיָ֨ה נַעֲשֶׂ֜ה לְי֣וֹם אֶחָ֗ד שׁ֣וֹר אֶחָ֞ד צֹ֠אן שֵׁשׁ־בְּרֻר֤וֹת וְצִפֳּרִים֙ נַֽעֲשׂוּ־לִ֔י 1 Nehemiah seems once again to be leaving out some of the words that a sentence would ordinarily need in order to be complete. He probably means something like, “What was prepared for one day is as follows: One bull, six choice sheep, and birds; that is what was prepared for me.” You could simplify the sentence for your readers by not including “were prepared for me” again at the end. Alternate translation: “Each day I told my servants to prepare one ox, six good sheep, and various kinds of poultry” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
NEH 5 18 gqe2 figs-activepassive וַאֲשֶׁר֩ הָיָ֨ה נַעֲשֶׂ֜ה לְי֣וֹם אֶחָ֗ד 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you can say this with an active form, and you can say who did the action. Alternate translation: “Each day I told my servants to prepare” or “Each day I told my servants to serve us the meat from” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
NEH 5 18 sp6n translate-unknown וְצִפֳּרִים֙ 1 It is likely that the birds were domesticated rather than wild, and if it would be helpful to your readers, you could use a term that indicates this. Alternate translation: “and various kinds of poultry” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
NEH 5 18 b1h5 figs-ellipsis וּבֵ֨ין עֲשֶׂ֧רֶת יָמִ֛ים בְּכָל־יַ֖יִן לְהַרְבֵּ֑ה 1 Nehemiah is once again leaving out some words that a sentence would ordinarily need to be complete. To make things clearer for your readers, you express the meaning more fully. Alternate translation: “Every ten days I also had my servants bring in an abundant supply of various kinds of wine” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
NEH 5 18 mil3 figs-idiom וּבֵ֨ין עֲשֶׂ֧רֶת יָמִ֛ים 1 This expression means “every ten days.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
NEH 5 18 b1h9 וְעִם־זֶ֗ה לֶ֤חֶם הַפֶּחָה֙ לֹ֣א בִקַּ֔שְׁתִּי 1 As in [5:14](../05/14.md), “the bread of the governor” means “the governor’s food allowance.” The implication is that Nehemiah paid for all of the things he has just described at his own expense. If it would be clearer in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “I paid for all of these things at my own expense. I did not accept the governor’s food allowance.”
NEH 5 18 b1i1 figs-abstractnouns כָֽבְדָ֥ה הָעֲבֹדָ֖ה עַל־הָעָ֥ם הַזֶּֽה 1 The abstract noun **bondage** refers to the way the people were struggling to survive in difficult times. If it would be clearer in your language, you can translate the idea behind it with a verb such as “struggle.” Alternate translation: “I knew that the people were struggling to survive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
NEH 5 18 b1i3 figs-metaphor כָֽבְדָ֥ה הָעֲבֹדָ֖ה עַל־הָעָ֥ם הַזֶּֽה 1 Here Nehemiah is speaking of ts bondage or struggle as if it were a great burden that the people were carrying, making their lives very difficult. Alternate translation: “I knew that the people were struggling to survive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 5 18 b1i5 grammar-connect-logic-result כָֽבְדָ֥ה הָעֲבֹדָ֖ה עַל־הָעָ֥ם הַזֶּֽה 1 You can put this before Nehemiah’s statement that he did not accept the governor’s food allowance, because it gives the reason why he refused it. Alternate translation: “I knew that the people were struggling to survive, so I did not accept the governor’s food allowance.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
NEH 5 19 b1i7 figs-aside זָכְרָה־לִּ֥י אֱלֹהַ֖י לְטוֹבָ֑ה 1 As in [4:4](../04/04.md), here Nehemiah speaks directly to God. You could indicate this by putting this verse in quotation marks. Review the note at 4:4 about asides like this if that would be helpful. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-aside]])
NEH 5 19 b1i9 figs-idiom זָכְרָה־לִּ֥י…לְטוֹבָ֑ה 1 To remember someone **for good** is an idiom that means to reward someone with good things for the good that they have done. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
NEH 5 19 b1j1 figs-idiom זָכְרָה־לִּ֥י אֱלֹהַ֖י לְטוֹבָ֑ה 1 In this context, **remember** means to think about someone and consider what action you can take on their behalf. Nehemiah is not suggesting that God has forgotten him. Alternate translation: “think of me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
NEH 5 19 b1j3 figs-ellipsis כֹּ֥ל אֲשֶׁר־עָשִׂ֖יתִי עַל־הָעָ֥ם הַזֶּֽה 1 Nehemiah is once again leaving out some words that a sentence would ordinarily need. He is asking God to do good things for him because of all the good things he has done for the people of Judah as their governor. Alternate translation: “reward me because of all the good that I have done for the people of Judah” (See: Ellipsis)
NEH 6 intro k4df 0 # Nehemiah 06 General Notes<br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>The building of the wall is completed in this chapter.<br><br>The ULT sets the lines in 6:6-7 farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text because they are part of a long quotation.<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Miracle<br><br>Completing this city wall in only fifty-two days was considered proof that God had helped the Jews, especially given the opposition that they had experienced from the people in surrounding areas.
NEH 6 1 c1a1 writing-newevent וַיְהִ֣י 1 Nehemiah uses this phrase to introduce the next event in his story. You do not need to represent it in your translation unless your language has a similar expression that it characteristically uses. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
NEH 6 1 c1a3 figs-synecdoche נִשְׁמַ֣ע 1 This means that these enemies learned somehow that the wall was finished. Perhaps someone came and told them, or perhaps they received a written report. Nehemiah figuratively uses hearing, one means of discovering things, to describe these men learning this. Alternate translation: “when our enemies learned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
NEH 6 1 c1a5 figs-activepassive כַאֲשֶׁ֣ר נִשְׁמַ֣ע…וּלְיֶ֣תֶר אֹֽיְבֵ֗ינוּ 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you can say this with an active form, and you can say who did the action. Alternate translation: “when our enemies learned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
NEH 6 1 gd7c translate-names לְסַנְבַלַּ֣ט וְ֠טוֹבִיָּה 1 These are the names of men. See how you translated them in [2:10](../02/10.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 6 1 bxn2 translate-names וּלְגֶ֨שֶׁם 1 This is the name of a man and his people group. See how you translated these names in [2:19](../02/19.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 6 1 vi6v figs-synecdoche בָנִ֨יתִי֙ אֶת־הַ֣חוֹמָ֔ה 1 As in [4:14](../04/14.md), Nehemiah is using himself to represent the entire community that he is a part of. Alternate translation: “that we had finished rebuilding the wall” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
NEH 6 1 ap2q grammar-connect-logic-contrast גַּ֚ם 1 This term expresses a weak contrast between the sentence that comes before and the sentence that comes after. There was no break in the wall, except for the spaces where the doors had not yet been hung in the gates. Alternate translation: “however” (See: Connect - Contrast Relationship)
NEH 6 1 c1a7 figs-synecdoche עַד־הָעֵ֣ת הַהִ֔יא דְּלָת֖וֹת לֹא־הֶעֱמַ֥דְתִּי בַשְּׁעָרִֽים 1 Once again Nehemiah is using himself to represent the entire community that he is a part of. Alternate translation: “we had not yet put the doors in the gates” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
NEH 6 2 n5nu וַיִּשְׁלַ֨ח…אֵלַ֣י 1 Alternate translation: “sent me a messenger to me”
NEH 6 2 c1a9 לְכָ֞ה וְנִֽוָּעֲדָ֥ה יַחְדָּ֛ו 1 These enemies use the word **come** to encourage Nehemiah to accept their invitation. If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate the word as something other than an imperative, to make the message sound inviting. Alternate translation: “We would like to arrange to meet with you”
NEH 6 2 rbv9 translate-names בַּכְּפִירִ֖ים בְּבִקְעַ֣ת אוֹנ֑וֹ 1 Ono is the name of a place about twenty miles from Jerusalem. It is down from the mountains towards the Mediterranean coast, so it can be described as a “valley” or “plain.” Alternate translation: “in one of the villages in the plain of Ono” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 6 2 c1b1 figs-idiom וְהֵ֨מָּה֙ חֹֽשְׁבִ֔ים לַעֲשׂ֥וֹת לִ֖י רָעָֽה 1 In this context, **evil** means “harm.” Alternate translation: “they wanted to harm me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
NEH 6 2 c1b3 figs-explicit וְהֵ֨מָּה֙ חֹֽשְׁבִ֔ים לַעֲשׂ֥וֹת לִ֖י רָעָֽה 1 The implication is that Nehemiah figured this out, even though in their invitation, these enemies pretended to be sincere. If it would make things clearer in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “But I recognized that they were saying this because they wanted to harm me.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 6 3 d84v figs-synecdoche מְלָאכָ֤ה גְדוֹלָה֙ אֲנִ֣י עֹשֶׂ֔ה 1 Nehemiah is once again using himself to represent the whole community and its work of rebuilding of the wall. Alternate translation: “We are doing a great work” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
NEH 6 3 c1b5 וְלֹ֥א אוּכַ֖ל לָרֶ֑דֶת 1 Nehemiah does not mean that he is physically unable to travel to Ono. He means that he cannot leave his supervision of the work for the several days it would take to travel there and back. Alternate translation: “I am not able to travel while it is going on.”
NEH 6 3 c1b7 לָרֶ֑דֶת 1 Nehemiah uses the word **down** because the plain of Ono is at a lower elevation than Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “meet with you”
NEH 6 3 ee8i figs-rquestion לָ֣מָּה תִשְׁבַּ֤ת הַמְּלָאכָה֙ כַּאֲשֶׁ֣ר אַרְפֶּ֔הָ וְיָרַדְתִּ֖י אֲלֵיכֶֽם 1 Nehemiah is making a statement, not asking a question. He does not expect Sanballat and Geshem to give him reasons why the work should stop as he travels to meet with them. Instead, Nehemiah is using the question form to emphasize how important it is for the work of rebuilding the walls to continue. If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate his question as a statement. Alternate translation: “I cannot let the work stop and come down to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
NEH 6 3 t9gf וְיָרַדְתִּ֖י אֲלֵיכֶֽם 1 down to you The word “down” is used here because the plain of Ono where they were requesting Nehemiah to come is at a lower elevation than Jerusalem.
NEH 6 4 c1b9 וַיִּשְׁלְח֥וּ אֵלַ֛י כַּדָּבָ֥ר הַזֶּ֖ה אַרְבַּ֣ע פְּעָמִ֑ים 1 Alternate translation: “They sent me the same message four times”
NEH 6 4 c1c1 figs-explicit וָאָשִׁ֥יב אוֹתָ֖ם 1 **Turned them back** means “refused them.” The implication is that Nehemiah did this each time. If it would be clearer in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “and each time I refused them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 6 4 c1c3 כַּדָּבָ֥ר הַזֶּֽה 1 Alternate translation: “for this same reason”
NEH 6 5 r8xc translate-ordinal וַיִּשְׁלַח֩ אֵלַ֨י סַנְבַלַּ֜ט כַּדָּבָ֥ר הַזֶּ֛ה פַּ֥עַם חֲמִישִׁ֖ית אֶֽת־נַעֲר֑וֹ 1 Alternate translation: “Sanballat sent his servant to me with this same message for a fifth time” or “this was time number five that Sanballat sent his servant to me with this same message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
NEH 6 5 s6ag וְאִגֶּ֥רֶת פְּתוּחָ֖ה בְּיָדֽוֹ 1 This means that this fifth message was written in a letter, but the letter was unsealed. Alternate translation: “This time the message was written, but it was not sealed.”
NEH 6 5 c1c5 figs-explicit וְאִגֶּ֥רֶת פְּתוּחָ֖ה בְּיָדֽוֹ 1 As a diplomatic communication, the letter should have been sealed. Because it was not, others could read it and spread its contents among the people of the region. It appears that Sanballat deliberately left the letter unsealed to pressure Nehemiah to meet with him. If it would be clearer in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Sanballat left the letter unsealed so that others would find out what it said, because he wanted to pressure me to meet with him.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 6 6 rx5j figs-metonymy כָּת֣וּב בָּ֗הּ 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you can say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “The letter said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
NEH 6 6 wy84 figs-activepassive בַּגּוֹיִ֤ם נִשְׁמָע֙ 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you can say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “The rumor in the region is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
NEH 6 6 c1c7 figs-explicit וְגַשְׁמ֣וּ אֹמֵ֔ר 1 The claim appears to be that Geshem has investigated these rumors and told Sanballat that they are true. If it would make things clearer in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “and Geshem confirms that it is true” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 6 6 c1c9 translate-names וְגַשְׁמ֣וּ 1 Gashmu here is an alternate form of the name Geshem found in [6:1](../06/01.md). To make things clearer for your readers, you can translate the name as “Geshem” here as well. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 6 6 z81q figs-explicit אַתָּ֤ה וְהַיְּהוּדִים֙ חֹשְׁבִ֣ים לִמְר֔וֹד עַל־כֵּ֛ן אַתָּ֥ה בוֹנֶ֖ה הַחוֹמָ֑ה 1 This means specifically that the Jews would to rebel against Artaxerxes, the Persian king, who was currently ruling them. If it would make things clearer in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “you and the Jewish people are rebuilding the wall because you are planning to rebel against King Artaxerxes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 6 6 c1d1 וְהַיְּהוּדִים֙ 1 Here this expression means “the Jewish people,” specifically the ones living in Judah and Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “the Jewish people”
NEH 6 6 c1d3 וְאַתָּ֗ה הֹוֶ֤ה לָהֶם֙ לְמֶ֔לֶךְ 1 Alternate translation: “They are also saying that you intend to make yourself the king of the Jews.”
NEH 6 7 n1rj grammar-connect-words-phrases וְגַם־אֲנִי֙ אַחַ֣י וּנְעָרַ֔י 1 This phrase indicates that what follows is more of the report that Sanballat claims he is hearing from the people in the surrounding countries. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could put something in your translation to indicate this. Alternate translation: “These people are also saying that” (See: Connecting Words and Phrases)
NEH 6 7 u185 נְבִיאִ֡ים הֶעֱמַ֣דְתָּ לִקְרֹא֩ עָלֶ֨יךָ בִֽירוּשָׁלִַ֜ם 1 Alternate translation: “you have appointed prophets to make this proclamation about you in Jerusalem”
NEH 6 7 c1d5 לֵאמֹ֗ר מֶ֚לֶךְ בִּֽיהוּדָ֔ה 1 The proclamation can be presented as a direct quotation. “Saying” can be represented by the quotation marks and whatever punctuation your language uses to introduce a quotation. Alternate translation: “The Jews now have a king of their own!”
NEH 6 7 c1d7 וְעַתָּה֙ 1 This is not a reference to time. Sanballat is using this expression to introduce a further inference. Alternate translation: “certainly.”
NEH 6 7 c1d9 figs-activepassive יִשָּׁמַ֣ע לַמֶּ֔לֶךְ כַּדְּבָרִ֣ים הָאֵ֑לֶּה 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you can say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “King Artaxerxes will certainly hear these reports” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
NEH 6 7 c1e1 figs-explicit יִשָּׁמַ֣ע לַמֶּ֔לֶךְ כַּדְּבָרִ֣ים הָאֵ֑לֶּה 1 The implication is that when Artaxerxes hears these reports, he will be very angry with Nehemiah. If it would be clearer in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “King Artaxerxes will certainly hear these reports, and when he does, he will be very angry with you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 6 7 c1e3 grammar-connect-logic-result וְעַתָּ֣ה 1 This is not a reference to time. Sanballat is using this expression to introduce his conclusion. This term expresses that the sentences that came before provide the reason for the sentence that comes after. Alternate translation: “Therefore” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
NEH 6 7 c1e5 לְכָ֔ה וְנִֽוָּעֲצָ֖ה יַחְדָּֽו 1 As in [6:2](../06/02.md), “come” is a word of encouragement rather than a command. Alternate translation: “So we really should meet together and talk about this”
NEH 6 8 ei6j וָאֶשְׁלְחָ֤ה אֵלָיו֙ 1 Alternate translation: “I sent a message back to him”
NEH 6 8 ab7x figs-activepassive לֹ֤א נִֽהְיָה֙ כַּדְּבָרִ֣ים הָאֵ֔לֶּה אֲשֶׁ֖ר אַתָּ֣ה אוֹמֵ֑ר 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you can say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “I have not done any of the things you have written” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
NEH 6 8 ds1y figs-metaphor כִּ֥י מִֽלִּבְּךָ֖ אַתָּ֥ה בוֹדָֽאם 1 Here the **heart** figuratively represents someone’s thoughts and feelings. Sanballat’s thoughts and feelings, in turn, represent him as a person. Alternate translation: “you have made all this up in your own imagination” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
NEH 6 8 c1e7 grammar-connect-logic-contrast כִּ֥י 1 This term expresses a contrast between the clause that comes before and the clause that comes after. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
NEH 6 9 p45k כִּ֣י כֻלָּ֗ם מְיָֽרְאִ֤ים אוֹתָ֨נוּ֙ 1 This likely means, “they were all trying to frighten us.” The implication is that Nehemiah recognized that this was the motive behind the letters. If it would make things clearer in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “I knew that they were all just trying to frighten us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 6 9 b5ij figs-metaphor יִרְפּ֧וּ יְדֵיהֶ֛ם מִן־הַמְּלָאכָ֖ה 1 Here **hand** figuratively represents strength, power, control, or action. Alternate translation: “The workers will stop doing the work on the wall” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 6 9 c1f1 figs-explicit יִרְפּ֧וּ יְדֵיהֶ֛ם מִן־הַמְּלָאכָ֖ה 1 The implication is that the enemies expected the Jews to become so afraid of being accused of rebelling for rebuilding the wall that they would stop doing that. If it would make things clearer in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “The Jews will become so afraid that they will stop working on the wall” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 6 9 c1f3 figs-explicit מִן־הַמְּלָאכָ֖ה 1 This means specifically the work on the wall. If it would make things clearer in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “working on the wall” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 6 9 c1f5 figs-activepassive וְלֹ֣א תֵעָשֶׂ֑ה 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you can say this with an active form, and you can say who will do the action. Alternate translation: “they will never finish rebuilding it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
NEH 6 9 j1dj figs-aside וְעַתָּ֖ה חַזֵּ֥ק אֶת־יָדָֽי 1 Nehemiah speaks directly to God once again here. This instance is like the one in [4:4](../04/04.md), where Nehemiah records what he prayed at the time of the events he is describing. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate this by introducing the prayer with a phrase such as “so I prayed,” by presenting the prayer as a direct quotation, and by having Nehemiah address God directly at the beginning. Alternate translation: “So I prayed, ‘O God, give me courage.’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-aside]])
NEH 6 9 c1f7 figs-metaphor חַזֵּ֥ק אֶת־יָדָֽי 1 Here the strength of a person’s hands figuratively stands for the courage they are feeling inside. Alternate translation: “strengthen me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 6 10 c1f9 grammar-connect-time-simultaneous וַאֲנִי 1 Nehemiah uses this phrase to introduce something else that happened around this same time. Alternate translation: “Around this time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]])
NEH 6 10 c1g1 בָ֗אתִי בֵּ֣ית 1 Alternate translation: “I went to visit”
NEH 6 10 ybj6 translate-names שְֽׁמַֽעְיָ֧ה בֶן־דְּלָיָ֛ה בֶּן־מְהֵֽיטַבְאֵ֖ל 1 Shemaiah is the name of a man, Delaiah is the name of his father, and Mehetabel is the name of his grandfather. Alternate translation: “Shemaiah, the son of Delaiah and grandson of Mehetabel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 6 10 k8xd figs-activepassive וְה֣וּא עָצ֑וּר 1 You can say this with an active form, and you can say who did the action. Alternate translation: “he was not leaving his house.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
NEH 6 10 c1g3 translate-symaction וְה֣וּא עָצ֑וּר 1 Nehemiah does not say why Shemaiah was not leaving his house. He could have been sick, or he could have been ceremonially unclean. So you might choose not to specify any reason. However, the context suggests that Shemaiah may have been trying to symbolize that it was not safe for Jewish leaders to go around in public. A man by the name of Shemaiah is listed in [10:8](../10/08.md) as one of the priests who signed the community agreement. This could be the same person, since he has access to the temple and is therefore likely a priest. If it would make things clearer in your language, you could suggest this reason explicitly. Alternate translation: “He was a priest, and he was trying to show that it was not safe for Jewish leaders to go out in public, so he was not leaving his house.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 6 10 c1g5 figs-explicit נִוָּעֵד֩ אֶל־בֵּ֨ית הָאֱלֹהִ֜ים אֶל־תּ֣וֹךְ הַֽהֵיכָ֗ל 1 Shemaiah seems to be proposing that he and Nehemiah move their meeting to the temple, suggesting that they are not even safe in his house. Alternate translation: “We are not safe even here. We need to go into the temple, to the sacred place inside the temple.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 6 10 c1g7 figs-parallelism אֶל־בֵּ֨ית הָאֱלֹהִ֜ים אֶל־תּ֣וֹךְ הַֽהֵיכָ֗ל 1 These two phrases mean similar things. Shemaiah uses the repetition to emphasize the danger he is suggesting they are in. You do not need to repeat both phrases in your translation if that would be confusing for your readers. Alternate translation: “into the temple” (See [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
NEH 6 10 c1g9 figs-metaphor בֵּ֨ית הָאֱלֹהִ֜ים 1 Shemaiah is referring to the temple figuratively as the “house of God,” as if it were God’s dwelling place. Alternate translation: “the temple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 6 10 c1h1 וְנִסְגְּרָה֙ דַּלְת֣וֹת הַהֵיכָ֔ל 1 This means not just close the doors but lock them. Alternate translation: “and lock the doors”
NEH 6 10 c1h3 כִּ֚י בָּאִ֣ים לְהָרְגֶ֔ךָ 1 Shemaiah does not say who these people are. It would be possible to say something based on what can reasonably be inferred, for example, “Your enemies have hired people to kill you.” However, the vagueness seems to be part of Shemaiah’s strategy to frighten Nehemiah. So it might be more effective to leave this indefinite. Alternate translation: “because people are trying to kill you”
NEH 6 10 c1h5 וְלַ֖יְלָה בָּאִ֥ים לְהָרְגֶֽךָ 1 Shemaiah’s confidence in the detail of “at night” seems designed to make Nehemiah even more afraid, because this means that the killers will come in the dark when he is asleep, so he won’t be able to protect himself. It could be helpful to your readers for your translation to reflect this confidence. Alternate translation: “I know that one night they are going to come and kill you”
NEH 6 11 syw3 figs-rquestion הַאִ֤ישׁ כָּמ֨וֹנִי֙ יִבְרָ֔ח 1 Nehemiah is making a statement, not asking a question. He does not expect Shemiah to tell him whether or not he should run away. Instead, Nehemiah is using the question form to emphasize that he is not going to do what Shemaiah has suggested. If it would be clearer in your language, you can translate this question as a statement. Alternate translation: “A man like me would not run away.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
NEH 6 11 c1h9 figs-rquestion וּמִ֥י כָמ֛וֹנִי אֲשֶׁר־יָב֥וֹא אֶל־הַהֵיכָ֖ל וָחָ֑י 1 Once again Nehemiah is making a statement, not asking a question. He does not expect Shemiah to tell him whether going into the temple would save his life. Alternate translation: “A man like me would not go into the temple just to hide to stay alive.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
NEH 6 11 c1i1 figs-explicit וּמִ֥י כָמ֛וֹנִי אֲשֶׁר־יָב֥וֹא אֶל־הַהֵיכָ֖ל וָחָ֑י 1 It is not entirely clear what Nehemiah means by this. He could be saying that he should not go into the temple because he is not a priest. However, the Bible records instances of other people who were not priests going into the temple to seek sanctuary. So Nehemiah may be saying instead that because he is the governor, he is too well known to escape from assassins by hiding in the temple. You could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Besides, I am the governor, and everyone knows me, so I could not save my life by trying to hide in the temple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 6 11 c1i3 לֹ֖א אָבֽוֹא 1 Alternate translation: “I refuse to do it!”
NEH 6 12 c1i5 וָאַכִּ֕ירָה וְהִנֵּ֥ה 1 The term “behold” is used to focus attention on the words that follow. Within this episode as a whole, it creates the impression of Nehemiah suddenly realizing something that had not been clear to him before. Alternate translation: “All of a sudden I realized”
NEH 6 12 c1i7 figs-explicit לֹֽא־אֱלֹהִ֖ים שְׁלָח֑וֹ 1 Shemaiah seems to have been pretending that God had revealed to him prophetically that people would be coming secretly at night to kill Nehemiah. If it would make things clearer in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “God had not given Shemaiah a prophetic message for me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 6 12 s2sf כִּ֤י הַנְּבוּאָה֙ דִּבֶּ֣ר עָלַ֔י וְטוֹבִיָּ֥ה וְסַנְבַלַּ֖ט שְׂכָרֽוֹ 1 Alternate translation: “Instead, he was saying these things to hinder my work, because Tobiah and Sanballat had paid him to say them.”
NEH 6 13 c1i9 grammar-connect-logic-result לְמַ֤עַן שָׂכוּר֙ ה֔וּא לְמַֽעַן־אִירָ֥א 1 This is the reason behind the result that Nehemiah’s enemies hoped for. If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “The reason they had hired him was to scare me. They hoped that as a result” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
NEH 6 13 c1j1 grammar-connect-logic-goal לְמַ֤עַן 1 This term introduces the purpose for the sentence contained in the verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
NEH 6 13 c1j3 grammar-connect-logic-goal וְאֶֽעֱשֶׂה־כֵּ֖ן וְחָטָ֑אתִי 1 This phrase expresses the goal for the sentence contained in the verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
NEH 6 13 b27k figs-explicit וְאֶֽעֱשֶׂה־כֵּ֖ן וְחָטָ֑אתִי 1 It is not entirely clear why Nehemiah says it would have been a sin for him to hide in the temple, since it was a time-honored tradition in Israel to allow people to seek sanctuary there. Perhaps the explanation is that Nehemiah knew God had sent him to Judah on a special mission to help and protect the Jewish community there. And so if he had abandoned that mission to save his life, he would have been disobeying God. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say something like that explicitly. Alternate translation: “They were hoping they could make me sin by abandoning my responsibilities and hiding in the temple.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 6 13 ji1g bita-hq וְהָיָ֤ה לָהֶם֙ לְשֵׁ֣ם רָ֔ע לְמַ֖עַן יְחָֽרְפֽוּנִי 1 Here **name** is a figurative way of referring to the fame or reputation of a person. If he hid in the temple to save his own life, Nehemiah would get a bad reputation as a coward who was concerned only for himself. Alternate translation: “this would give me a bad reputation, and they could say bad things about me to everyone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-hq]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
NEH 6 13 c1j5 grammar-connect-logic-goal לְמַ֖עַן 1 This term expresses that the clause that comes after is the goal for the clause that comes before. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
NEH 6 14 c1j7 אֱלֹהַ֛י 1 As in [4:4](../04/04.md) and [6:9](../06/09.md), Nehemiah records here what he prayed at the time of the events he is describing. You can indicate this by introducing these words as a prayer and presenting the prayer as a direct quotation. Alternate translation: “So I prayed, ‘My God …’ ”
NEH 6 14 nau4 figs-idiom זָכְרָ֧ה…לְטוֹבִיָּ֥ה וּלְסַנְבַלַּ֖ט כְּמַעֲשָׂ֣יו אֵ֑לֶּה 1 **His** refers to both Sanballat and Tobiah. In this context, “remember” means to think about someone and consider what action you should take in their regard. Nehemiah is not suggesting that God has forgotten about Tobiah and Sanballat. Alternate translation: “treat Tobiah and Sanballat the way they deserve for what they have done” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
NEH 6 14 c1j9 וְגַ֨ם לְנוֹעַדְיָ֤ה הַנְּבִיאָה֙ וּלְיֶ֣תֶר הַנְּבִיאִ֔ים אֲשֶׁ֥ר הָי֖וּ מְיָֽרְאִ֥ים אוֹתִֽי 1 Alternate translation: “Do the same for the female prophet Noadiah and all the other prophets who are trying to make me afraid.”
NEH 6 14 g3ch translate-names לְנוֹעַדְיָ֤ה 1 This is the name of a woman. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 6 15 m52s figs-activepassive וַתִּשְׁלַם֙ הַֽחוֹמָ֔ה 1 You can say this with an active form, and you can say who did the action. Alternate translation: “We finished rebuilding the wall” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
NEH 6 15 g17x translate-hebrewmonths בְּעֶשְׂרִ֥ים וַחֲמִשָּׁ֖ה לֶאֱל֑וּל 1 Elul is the sixth month of the Hebrew calendar. Alternate translation: “on the twenty-fifth day of the month of Elul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths]])
NEH 6 15 c1k1 translate-ordinal בְּעֶשְׂרִ֥ים וַחֲמִשָּׁ֖ה לֶאֱל֑וּל 1 Alternate translation: “on day 25 of the month of Elul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
NEH 6 15 ara3 translate-numbers לַחֲמִשִּׁ֥ים וּשְׁנַ֖יִם יֽוֹם 1 Alternate translation: “after working on it for 52 days” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
NEH 6 16 c1k3 writing-newevent וַיְהִ֗י 1 Nehemiah uses this phrase to introduce the next event in his story. You do not need to represent it in your translation unless your language has a similar expression that it characteristically uses. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
NEH 6 16 c1k5 figs-synecdoche כַּאֲשֶׁ֤ר שָֽׁמְעוּ֙ כָּל־א֣וֹיְבֵ֔ינוּ 1 This means that these enemies learned by some means that work had been completed. Nehemiah figuratively uses hearing, one means of discovering things, to describe the enemies learning this. Alternate translation: “when all of our enemies learned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
NEH 6 16 c1k7 figs-explicit כַּאֲשֶׁ֤ר שָֽׁמְעוּ֙ כָּל־א֣וֹיְבֵ֔ינוּ 1 This means specifically, “When all our enemies learned that we had completed the rebuilding in such a short time.” If it would be clearer in your language, you could say that explicitly. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 6 16 c1k9 figs-parallelism וַיִּֽרְא֗וּ כָּל־הַגּוֹיִם֙ אֲשֶׁ֣ר סְבִֽיבֹתֵ֔ינוּ וַיִּפְּל֥וּ מְאֹ֖ד בְּעֵינֵיהֶ֑ם 1 These two phrases mean similar things. Nehemiah uses the repetition to emphasize how intimidated the people in the surrounding countries felt. You do not need to repeat both phrases in your translation if that would be confusing for your readers. Alternate translation: “they thought much less of themselves” or “they lost confidence in themselves,” otherwise “they became afraid and felt humiliated” (See [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
NEH 6 16 t54c bita-part1 וַיִּפְּל֥וּ מְאֹ֖ד בְּעֵינֵיהֶ֑ם 1 Here **fall** is a figurative way of saying “become less.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-part1]])
NEH 6 16 c1l1 bita-hq וַיִּפְּל֥וּ מְאֹ֖ד בְּעֵינֵיהֶ֑ם 1 Here **eyes** stand for “seeing,” and “seeing” figuratively means judgment. This means that these people were no longer so great or powerful in their own estimation. Alternate translation: “they lost confidence in themselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-hq]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 6 16 py4c grammar-connect-logic-result וַיֵּ֣דְע֔וּ כִּ֚י מֵאֵ֣ת אֱלֹהֵ֔ינוּ נֶעֶשְׂתָ֖ה הַמְּלָאכָ֥ה הַזֹּֽאת 1 You can put this right before the statement that the enemies were afraid and thought less of themselves, because it it is the reason that explains that result. Alternate translation: “They realized that our God had helped us complete this work” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
NEH 6 16 c1l3 figs-activepassive מֵאֵ֣ת אֱלֹהֵ֔ינוּ נֶעֶשְׂתָ֖ה הַמְּלָאכָ֥ה הַזֹּֽאת 1 You can say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “our God had helped us complete this work” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
NEH 6 17 c1l5 grammar-connect-time-simultaneous גַּ֣ם ׀ בַּיָּמִ֣ים הָהֵ֗ם 1 Nehemiah uses this phrase to introduce something else that was happening at the same time as the other events he has just described. Alternate translation: “During this time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]])
NEH 6 17 c1l7 figs-idiom בַּיָּמִ֣ים הָהֵ֗ם 1 The term **days** is used figuratively here to refer a particular period of time. Alternate translation: “at this time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
NEH 6 17 c1l9 חֹרֵ֤י יְהוּדָה֙ 1 See how you translated this term in [2:16](../02/16.md). Alternate translation: “the leading citizens of Judah”
NEH 6 17 zw37 figs-explicit מַרְבִּ֞ים…אִגְּרֹ֣תֵיהֶ֔ם 1 The implication is these citizens were sending information to Tobiah about Nehemiah. If it would make things clearer in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “sent many messengers with letters to Tobiah to give him information about me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 6 17 rx81 figs-personification וַאֲשֶׁ֥ר לְטוֹבִיָּ֖ה בָּא֥וֹת אֲלֵיהֶֽם 1 Here Nehemiah speaks of Tobiah’s letters as if they could come on their own to the people he was answering. Alternate translation: “Tobiah sent letters” or “Tobiah sent many messengers with letters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
NEH 6 17 c1m1 figs-explicit וַאֲשֶׁ֥ר לְטוֹבִיָּ֖ה בָּא֥וֹת אֲלֵיהֶֽם 1 The implication is Tobiah was sending back instructions to his allies. If it would make things clearer in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Tobiah sent many messengers with letters back to them with instructions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 6 17 rcx8 translate-names טוֹבִיָּ֑ה 1 This is the name of a man. See how you translated it in [2:10](../02/10.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 6 18 z2uq figs-idiom כִּי־רַבִּ֣ים בִּֽיהוּדָ֗ה בַּעֲלֵ֤י שְׁבוּעָה֙ ל֔וֹ 1 This means that many Judeans were “owners of oaths” to Tobiah. That is, they had sworn oaths to be loyal to him. Alternate translation: “Many people in Judah had sworn an oath to be loyal to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
NEH 6 18 c1m3 grammar-connect-logic-result כִּי־רַבִּ֣ים בִּֽיהוּדָ֗ה בַּעֲלֵ֤י שְׁבוּעָה֙ ל֔וֹ 1 You can put this information last in the verse, because it is a result, and the rest of the verse gives the reason why the people swore these oaths. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
NEH 6 18 c1m5 figs-explicit כִּי־חָתָ֥ן ה֖וּא לִשְׁכַנְיָ֣ה בֶן־אָרַ֑ח 1 This statement means that Tobiah was married to the daughter of Shecaniah. The implication is that Shecaniah was a powerful and influential member of the community. If it would make things clearer in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Tobiah was married to the daughter of a powerful and influential member of the community, Shecaniah the son of Arah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 6 18 rn1q translate-names לִשְׁכַנְיָ֣ה בֶן־אָרַ֑ח 1 Shecaniah is the name of a man, and Arah is the name of his father. This is probably the same Shecaniah who is mentioned in 3:29. See how you translated his name there. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 6 18 c1m7 figs-explicit וִֽיהוֹחָנָ֣ן בְּנ֔וֹ לָקַ֕ח אֶת־בַּת־מְשֻׁלָּ֖ם בֶּ֥ן בֶּֽרֶכְיָֽה 1 The implication is that Meshullam was another powerful and influential member of the community. If it would make things clearer in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Tobiah’s son Jehohanan was married to the daughter of another powerful and influential man, Meshullam the son of Berechiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 6 18 id1x translate-names וִֽיהוֹחָנָ֣ן 1 This is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 6 18 c1m9 בְּנ֔וֹ 1 **His** means that Jehohanan was the son of Tobiah.
NEH 6 18 c1n1 לָקַ֕ח אֶת־בַּת 1 Alternate translation: “was married to the daughter of”
NEH 6 18 y3lg translate-names מְשֻׁלָּ֖ם בֶּ֥ן בֶּֽרֶכְיָֽה 1 Meshullam is the name of a man, and Berechiah is the name of his father. He is mentioned in [3:4](../03/04.md) and [3:30](../03/30.md). See how you translated his name there. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 6 19 mj72 bita-hq טוֹבֹתָ֗יו הָי֤וּ אֹמְרִים֙ לְפָנַ֔י 1 Here **face** figuratively represents the presence of a person. Alternate translation: “told me personally about Tobiah’s good deeds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-hq]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 6 19 c1n3 הָי֤וּ 1 **They** means the people who were loyal to Tobiah.
NEH 6 19 e3zt figs-idiom וּדְבָרַ֕י הָי֥וּ מוֹצִיאִ֖ים ל֑וֹ 1 **Taking out** here is an idiom that means these people were “reporting” Nehemiah’s responses to Tobiah. Alternate translation: “and then told him about my responses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
NEH 7 intro qk4v 0 # Nehemiah 07 General Notes<br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Genealogy<br><br>The people who returned from Persia were counted according to their families. Nehemiah ensured that those who lived in Jerusalem had a completely Jewish ancestry.<br><br>### Different lists<br>This list is paralleled in [Ezra 2](../../ezr/02/01.md). The lists do contain some differences in numbers. This is probably due to the timing of their counting. They were likely counted at different times.
NEH 7 1 d1a1 writing-newevent וַיְהִ֗י 1 This expression introduces a new event in the story. You do not need to represent it in your translation unless your language has a similar expression that it characteristically uses. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
NEH 7 1 g3zz figs-activepassive כַּאֲשֶׁ֤ר נִבְנְתָה֙ הַחוֹמָ֔ה 1 You can say this with an active form, and you can say who did the action. Alternate translation: “when we had finished the wall” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
NEH 7 1 fk6l figs-synecdoche וָאַעֲמִ֖יד הַדְּלָת֑וֹת 1 As in [4:14](../04/14.md) and [6:1,](../06/01.md), Nehemiah is using himself to represent the entire community that he is a part of. Alternate translation: “and we had put the doors in the gates” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
NEH 7 1 wkp3 figs-activepassive וַיִּפָּֽקְד֛וּ הַשּׁוֹעֲרִ֥ים וְהַמְשֹׁרְרִ֖ים וְהַלְוִיִּֽם 1 You can say this with an active form, and you can say who did the action. Nehemiah may have done this personally, or the people in charge of each of these groups may have done it. Because of the uncertainly, a good approach might be to say “we” to indicate the community. Alternate translation: “we assigned the gatekeepers and singers and Levites to their tasks” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
NEH 7 1 lk9v translate-unknown הַשּׁוֹעֲרִ֥ים 1 These were people who were assigned to each gate of Jerusalem. They were responsible for controlling access to the city. They would open and close the gates at times and for reasons set by the city administrators. For example, Shemaiah the son of Shecaniah is named in 3:29 as the keeper of the East Gate. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
NEH 7 1 f8ks translate-unknown וְהַמְשֹׁרְרִ֖ים 1 This means vocal musicians who led in worship, in processions, and ceremonies, producing music and chants that emphasized and enhanced the occasion. Alternate translation: “singers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
NEH 7 2 d1a3 וָאֲצַוֶּ֞ה אֶת־חֲנָ֣נִי אָחִ֗י וְאֶת־חֲנַנְיָ֛ה…עַל־יְרוּשָׁלִָ֑ם 1 Alternate translation: “I appointed two men to help me govern Jerusalem, my brother Hanani and Hananiah”
NEH 7 2 wf26 חֲנָ֣נִי אָחִ֗י 1 As in [1:2](../01/02.md), **brother** here most likely indicates that Hanani was Nehemiah’s biological brother. Alternate translation: “my brother Hanani”
NEH 7 2 ykr9 translate-names חֲנָ֣נִי 1 This is the name of a man. See how you translated it in [1:2](../01/02.md)(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 7 2 zy5q translate-names חֲנַנְיָ֛ה 1 This is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 7 2 iqf3 שַׂ֥ר הַבִּירָ֖ה 1 Alternate translation: “who was in charge of the fortress”
NEH 7 2 he4e כִּי־הוּא֙ כְּאִ֣ישׁ אֱמֶ֔ת 1 **He** means Hananiah. “He was as a faithful man” is a way of saying “he was such as only a faithful man would be.” Alternate translation: “I appointed Hananiah because he was trustworthy”
NEH 7 2 dx6d figs-idiom וְיָרֵ֥א אֶת־הָאֱלֹהִ֖ים מֵרַבִּֽים 1 Here **fear** does not mean to be afraid of God, but to show God reverence and respect. Alternate translation: “because he showed God more reverence and respect than most people do.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
NEH 7 3 y2jk figs-activepassive לֹ֣א יִפָּֽתְח֞וּ שַׁעֲרֵ֤י יְרוּשָׁלִַ֨ם֙ 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you can say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “Do not order the gates of Jerusalem to be opened” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
NEH 7 3 n55g figs-explicit לֹ֣א יִפָּֽתְח֞וּ שַׁעֲרֵ֤י יְרוּשָׁלִַ֨ם֙ 1 Hanani and Hananiah would not have opened the gates physically themselves. Rather, they would have ordered this to be done. Alternate translation: “Do not order the gates of Jerusalem to be opened” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 7 3 w3hi figs-metonymy עַד־חֹ֣ם הַשֶּׁ֔מֶשׁ 1 Here Nehemiah probably uses the heat of the sun to represent the light of the sun. His intent is to open the gates some time after the sun rises regardless of how hot the sun shines on any particular day. Alternate translation: “until broad daylight” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
NEH 7 3 ed9m figs-explicit עַד־חֹ֣ם הַשֶּׁ֔מֶשׁ 1 The implication is that the gatekeepers should not open the gates at sunrise, as would have been customary, because the enemies of the Jews could launch a surprise attack in the dim light before most of the city was up and ready for the day. If it would make things clearer in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “until broad daylight. That way we will be able to see anything our enemies are doing.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 7 3 b2es וְעַ֨ד הֵ֥ם עֹמְדִ֛ים יָגִ֥יפוּ הַדְּלָת֖וֹת וֶאֱחֹ֑זוּ 1 **They** means the gatekeepers, and “standing” means keeping guard.Alternate translation: “Order the doors to be shut and locked while the gatekeepers are still on guard”
NEH 7 3 mir9 figs-idiom וְהַעֲמֵ֗יד מִשְׁמְרוֹת֙ יֹשְׁבֵ֣י יְרוּשָׁלִַ֔ם אִ֚ישׁ בְּמִשְׁמָר֔וֹ וְאִ֖ישׁ נֶ֥גֶד בֵּיתֽוֹ 1 In this context, **a man** means “each man.” It is likely that adult males were intended for this dangerous night duty. “A man in his watch” means that each man should take a turn, and “a man in front of his house” means that each man should keep watch in his own neighborhood. Alternate translation: “Have the men who live in Jerusalem take turns keeping watch in their own neighborhoods” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
NEH 7 4 d1a5 figs-doublet וְהָעִ֞יר רַחֲבַ֤ת יָדַ֨יִם֙ וּגְדוֹלָ֔ה 1 These two short phrases mean similar things. Nehemiah uses them together to emphasize how large Jerusalem was. If it would be clearer in your language, you can combine them. Alternate translation: “The city of Jerusalem covered a large area” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
NEH 7 4 d1a7 bita-hq רַחֲבַ֤ת יָדַ֨יִם֙ 1 Here **hand** figuratively means “side.” The image is that if you stood in the city, there would be a lot of it on both sides of you. Alternate translation: “covered a large area” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-hq]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
NEH 7 4 d1a9 וְהָעָ֥ם מְעַ֖ט בְּתוֹכָ֑הּ 1 Alternate translation: “but not many people lived there”
NEH 7 4 y6y8 figs-activepassive וְאֵ֥ין בָּתִּ֖ים בְּנוּיִֽם 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you can say this with an active form, and you can say who did the action. Alternate translation: “the people had not yet rebuilt the houses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
NEH 7 5 d1b1 figs-explicit וַיִּתֵּ֤ן אֱלֹהַי֙ אֶל־לִבִּ֔י 1 The implication is that registering the people was a first step toward filling Jerusalem with people again, a process that Nehemiah will describe in chapter 11. If it would be clearer in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “as a first step towards filling Jerusalem with people again, God led me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 7 5 wjd3 figs-metonymy וַיִּתֵּ֤ן אֱלֹהַי֙ אֶל־לִבִּ֔י 1 As in [2:12](../02/12.md), Nehemiah’s **heart** figuratively represents his thoughts and will. Alternate translation: “God inspired me” or “led me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 7 5 d1b3 grammar-connect-logic-result וָאֶקְבְּצָ֞ה 1 This word indicates that what Nehemiah did was in response to the situation just described. Alternate translation: “so I gathered together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
NEH 7 5 d1b5 translate-unknown אֶת־הַחֹרִ֧ים וְאֶת־הַסְּגָנִ֛ים 1 See how you translated these terms in [2:16](../02/16.md). Alternate translation: “the leading citizens and the city officials” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
NEH 7 5 d1b7 וְאֶת־הָעָ֖ם 1 In context this likely means “the other people living in the city.”
NEH 7 5 pzu6 figs-activepassive לְהִתְיַחֵ֑שׂ 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you can say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “and to register them by genealogies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
NEH 7 5 d1b9 לְהִתְיַחֵ֑שׂ 1 Alternate translation: “to be enrolled according to their family histories”
NEH 7 5 avw2 translate-unknown וָֽאֶמְצָ֗א סֵ֤פֶר הַיַּ֨חַשׂ֙ הָעוֹלִ֣ים בָּרִאשׁוֹנָ֔ה 1 This means a list of the first group of Jews who had returned from exile, about a hundred years earlier. Alternate translation: “I also found a book containing the records of the first group of people who had returned to Jerusalem from the exile.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
NEH 7 5 bz2p figs-activepassive וָאֶמְצָ֖א כָּת֥וּב בּֽוֹ 1 You can say this with an active form, and you can say who did the action. Alternate translation: “I found that those people had written the following in it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
NEH 7 6 ud5m figs-personification בְּנֵ֣י הַמְּדִינָ֗ה 1 The document speaks here of the province of Judah as if it were the ancestor of all the Jews who lived there. Alternate translation: “the people from the province of Judah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
NEH 7 6 vx13 figs-metonymy הַמְּדִינָ֗ה 1 **The province** means the province of Judah. The document is referring to Judah by something associated with it, its status as a province. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
NEH 7 6 r578 figs-idiom הָעֹלִים֙ 1 **Went up** means “traveled from Babylon back to Judah,” since that involves going from a river valley up into the mountains. Alternate translation: “returned to Judah from Babylon” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
NEH 7 6 hb7v figs-abstractnouns מִשְּׁבִ֣י הַגּוֹלָ֔ה אֲשֶׁ֣ר הֶגְלָ֔ה נְבוּכַדְנֶצַּ֖ר מֶ֣לֶךְ בָּבֶ֑ל 1 **Captivity** and **exile** are abstract nouns. If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate the idea behind them with verbs. Alternate translation: “Nebuchadnezzar, the king of Babylon, captured their ancestors and took them away” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
NEH 7 6 d1c1 figs-doublet מִשְּׁבִ֣י הַגּוֹלָ֔ה 1 **Captivity** and **exile** mean basically the same thing. You do not need to repeat both phrases in your translation if that would be confusing for your readers. Alternate translation: “after being taken away” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
NEH 7 6 d1c3 אִ֥ישׁ לְעִירֽוֹ 1 Here **a man** means “each one” or “each person” Alternate translation: “They went to live in the same towns where their families had lived before.”
NEH 7 7 d1c5 הַבָּאִ֣ים עִם 1 This phrase introduces a list of the men who led this group back to Judah. Alternate translation: “The leaders of this group were”
NEH 7 7 mu5h translate-names זְרֻבָּבֶ֗ל יֵשׁ֡וּעַ נְחֶמְיָ֡ה עֲ֠זַרְיָה רַֽעַמְיָ֨ה נַחֲמָ֜נִי מָרְדֳּכַ֥י בִּלְשָׁ֛ן מִסְפֶּ֥רֶת בִּגְוַ֖י נְח֣וּם בַּעֲנָ֑ה 1 Zerubbabel…Jeshua…Nehemiah…Azariah…Raamiah…Nahamani…Mordecai…Bilshan…Mispereth…Bigvai…Nehum…Baanah These are the names of twelve men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 7 7 fz51 מִסְפַּ֕ר אַנְשֵׁ֖י עַ֥ם יִשְׂרָאֵֽל 1 In keeping with the practices of the time, the totals in the list that follows likely include just the men and not also the women and children. While all of these people were from Judah, they were from the Israelite people group. Alternate translation: “This is how many men came back from each Israelite clan and town”
NEH 7 8 r3xa בְּנֵ֣י פַרְעֹ֔שׁ אַלְפַּ֕יִם מֵאָ֖ה וְשִׁבְעִ֥ים וּשְׁנָֽיִם 1 This means, “From the descendants of Parosh, 2,172 returned.” To help make this clear for your readers, you could say something like “returned” throughout verses 8–45, after the name of each group and the number that is given.
NEH 7 8 d1c7 bita-hq בְּנֵ֣י פַרְעֹ֔שׁ 1 **Sons** figuratively means “descendants” Alternate translation: “from the descendants of Parosh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-hq]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 7 8 l98v translate-names פַרְעֹ֔שׁ 1 Parosh Parosh is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 7 9 jc4a bita-hq בְּנֵ֣י שְׁפַטְיָ֔ה 1 **Sons** figuratively means “descendants” Alternate translation: “from the descendants of Shephatiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-hq]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 7 9 gy8k translate-names שְׁפַטְיָ֔ה 1 Shephatiah Shephatiah is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 7 10 d1c9 bita-hq בְּנֵ֣י אָרַ֔ח 1 **Sons** figuratively means “descendants” Alternate translation: “from the descendants of Arah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-hq]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 7 10 nq9e translate-names אָרַ֔ח 1 Arah Arah is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 7 11 my8s bita-hq בְּנֵֽי־פַחַ֥ת מוֹאָ֛ב לִבְנֵ֥י יֵשׁ֖וּעַ וְיוֹאָ֑ב 1 **Sons** figuratively means “descendants” Alternate translation: “from the descendants of Pahath-Moab who were descendants of Jeshua and Joab” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-hq]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 7 11 v6jn translate-names פַחַ֥ת מוֹאָ֛ב…יֵשׁ֖וּעַ וְיוֹאָ֑ב 1 Pahath-Moab…Jeshua…Joab Pahath-Moab is the name of a man, and Jeshua and Joab are the names of two of his descendants. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 7 12 d1d1 bita-hq בְּנֵ֣י עֵילָ֔ם 1 **Sons** figuratively means “descendants” Alternate translation: “from the descendants of Elam” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-hq]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 7 12 d7wf translate-names עֵילָ֔ם 1 Elam Elam is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 7 13 d1d3 bita-hq בְּנֵ֣י זַתּ֔וּא 1 **Sons** figuratively means “descendants” Alternate translation: “from the descendants of Zattu” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-hq]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 7 13 sbz7 translate-names זַתּ֔וּא 1 Zattu Zattu is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 7 14 d1d5 bita-hq בְּנֵ֣י זַכָּ֔י 1 **Sons** figuratively means “descendants” Alternate translation: “from the descendants of Zakkai” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-hq]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 7 14 v5zr translate-names זַכָּ֔י 1 Zakkai Zakkai is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 7 15 a26a bita-hq בְּנֵ֣י בִנּ֔וּי 1 **Sons** figuratively means “descendants” Alternate translation: “from the descendants of Binnui” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-hq]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 7 15 x1bd translate-names בִנּ֔וּי 1 Binnui Binnui is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 7 16 d1d7 bita-hq בְּנֵ֣י בֵבָ֔י 1 **Sons** figuratively means “descendants” Alternate translation: “from the descendants of Bebai” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-hq]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 7 16 ay45 translate-names בֵבָ֔י 1 Bebai Bebai is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 7 17 d1d9 bita-hq בְּנֵ֣י עַזְגָּ֔ד 1 **Sons** figuratively means “descendants” Alternate translation: “from the descendants of Azgad” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-hq]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 7 17 h84y translate-names עַזְגָּ֔ד 1 Azgad Azgad is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 7 18 d1e1 bita-hq בְּנֵי֙ אֲדֹ֣נִיקָ֔ם 1 **Sons** figuratively means “descendants” Alternate translation: “from the descendants of Adonikam” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-hq]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 7 18 b95k translate-names אֲדֹ֣נִיקָ֔ם 1 Adonikam Adonikam is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 7 19 lhq4 bita-hq בְּנֵ֣י בִגְוָ֔י 1 **Sons** figuratively means “descendants” Alternate translation: “from the descendants of Bigvai” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-hq]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 7 19 iy74 translate-names בִגְוָ֔ 1 Bigvai Bigvai is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 7 20 d1e3 bita-hq בְּנֵ֣י עָדִ֔ין 1 **Sons** figuratively means “descendants” Alternate translation: “from the descendants of Adin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-hq]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 7 20 d5wk translate-names עָדִ֔ין 1 Adin Adin is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 7 21 l797 bita-hq בְּנֵֽי־אָטֵ֥ר לְחִזְקִיָּ֖ה 1 **Sons** figuratively means “descendants” Alternate translation: “from the descendants of Ater who were descendants of Hezekiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-hq]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 7 21 mxg1 translate-names אָטֵ֥ר 1 Ater Ater is the name of a man, and Hezekiah is the name of one of his descendants. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 7 22 d1e5 bita-hq בְּנֵ֣י חָשֻׁ֔ם 1 **Sons** figuratively means “descendants” Alternate translation: “from the descendants of Hashum” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-hq]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 7 22 r3ee translate-names חָשֻׁ֔ם 1 Hashum Hashum is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 7 23 yyf7 bita-hq בְּנֵ֣י בֵצָ֔י 1 **Sons** figuratively means “descendants” Alternate translation: “from the descendants of Bezai” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-hq]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 7 23 v6eh translate-names בֵצָ֔י 1 Bezai Bezai is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 7 24 i39d bita-hq בְּנֵ֣י חָרִ֔יף 1 **Sons** figuratively means “descendants” Alternate translation: “from the descendants of Hariph” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-hq]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 7 24 j9rb translate-names חָרִ֔יף 1 Hariph Hariph is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 7 25 xmr1 bita-hq בְּנֵ֥י גִבְע֖וֹן 1 **Sons** figuratively means “descendants” Alternate translation: “from the descendants of Gibeon” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-hq]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 7 25 sj6p translate-names גִבְע֖וֹן 1 Gibeon Gibeon is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 7 26 sde6 translate-names בֵֽית־לֶ֨חֶם֙ וּנְטֹפָ֔ה 1 Bethlehem and Netophah Bethlehem and Netophah are the names of towns. Alternate translation: “from the towns of Bethlehem and Netophah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 7 27 v2tb translate-names עֲנָת֔וֹת 1 Anathoth Anathoth is the name of a town. Alternate translation: “from the town of Anathoth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 7 28 b1sd translate-names בֵית־עַזְמָ֖וֶת 1 Beth Azmaveth Beth Azmaveth is the name of a town. Alternate translation: “from the town of Beth Azmaveth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 7 29 y9ek translate-names קִרְיַ֤ת יְעָרִים֙ כְּפִירָ֣ה וּבְאֵר֔וֹת 1 Kiriath Jearim, Kephirah, and Beeroth Kiriath Jearim, Kephirah, and Beeroth are the names of towns. Alternate translation: “from the towns of Kiriath Jearim, Kephirah, and Beeroth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 7 30 ncc2 translate-names הָֽרָמָה֙ וָגָ֔בַע 1 Ramah and Geba Ramah and Geba are the names of towns. Alternate translation: “from the towns of Ramah and Geba” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 7 31 ty2q translate-names מִכְמָ֔ס 1 Michmas Michmas is the name of a town. Alternate translation: “from the town of Michmas” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 7 32 b4qw translate-names בֵֽית־אֵל֙ וְהָעָ֔י 1 Bethel and Ai Bethel and Ai are the names of towns. Alternate translation: “from the towns of Bethel and Ai” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 7 33 dbu1 translate-names נְב֛וֹ 1 Nebo Nebo is the name of a town. Alternate translation: “from another town called Nebo” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 7 34 wz53 translate-names עֵילָ֣ם אַחֵ֔ר 1 Elam is the name of a town. Alternate translation: “from another town called Elam” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 7 34 d1vy figs-personification עֵילָ֣ם 1 Elam The document speaks here of the town of Elam as if it were the ancestor of all the people who lived there. It is saying figuratively that these men were from families that had originally lived in that town. Alternate translation: “from another town called Elam” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
NEH 7 35 d1e7 figs-personification בְּנֵ֣י חָרִ֔ם 1 The document speaks here of the town of Harim as if it were the ancestor of all the people who lived there. It is saying figuratively that these men were from families that had originally lived in that town. Alternate translation: “from the town of Harim” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
NEH 7 35 s9ek translate-names חָרִ֔ם 1 Harim Harim is the name of a town. See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 7 36 d1e9 figs-personification בְּנֵ֣י יְרֵח֔וֹ 1 The document speaks here of the city of Jericho as if it were the ancestor of all the people who lived there. It is saying figuratively that these men were from families that had originally lived in that city. Alternate translation: “from the city of Jericho” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
NEH 7 36 avk6 translate-names יְרֵח֔וֹ 1 Jericho Jericho is the name of a city. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 7 37 d1f1 figs-personification בְּנֵי־לֹד֙ חָדִ֣יד וְאוֹנ֔וֹ 1 The document speaks here of the towns of Lod, Hadid, and Ono as if they were the ancestors of all the people who lived in them. It is saying figuratively that these men were from families that had originally lived in those towns. Alternate translation: “from towns of Lod, Hadid, and Ono” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
NEH 7 37 b9f2 translate-names לֹד֙ חָדִ֣יד וְאוֹנ֔וֹ 1 Lod, Hadid, and Ono Lod, Hadid, and Ono are the names of towns. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 7 38 d1f3 figs-personification בְּנֵ֣י סְנָאָ֔ה 1 The document speaks here of the town of Senaah as if it were the ancestor of all the people who lived there. It is saying figuratively that these men were from families that had originally lived in that town. Alternate translation: “from the town of Senaah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
NEH 7 38 rla1 translate-names סְנָאָ֔ה 1 Senaah Senaah is the name of a town. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 7 39 x7hb הַֽכֹּהֲנִ֑ים 1 Alternate translation: “This is how many men returned from each family of priests”
NEH 7 39 xwy8 bita-hq בְּנֵ֤י יְדַֽעְיָה֙ לְבֵ֣ית יֵשׁ֔וּעַ 1 **Sons** figuratively means “descendants” “Alternate translation: “from the descendants of Jedaiah who were descendants of Jeshua”” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-hq]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 7 39 d1f5 translate-names יְדַֽעְיָה֙…יֵשׁ֔וּעַ 1 Jedaiah is the name of a man, and Jeshua is the name of one of his descendants. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 7 39 mk8g figs-metonymy לְבֵ֣ית יֵשׁ֔וּעַ 1 Here the word **house** describes all the people descended from a particular person. The document is describing all of the descendants of Jeshua figuratively as if they were one household living together. Alternate translation: “who were descendants of Jeshua” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-manmade]])
NEH 7 40 d1f7 bita-hq בְּנֵ֣י אִמֵּ֔ר 1 **Sons** figuratively means “descendants” Alternate translation: “from the descendants of Immer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-hq]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 7 40 kd29 translate-names אִמֵּ֔ר 1 Immer Immer is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 7 41 d1f9 bita-hq בְּנֵ֣י פַשְׁח֔וּר 1 **Sons** figuratively means “descendants” Alternate translation: “from the descendants of Pashhur” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-hq]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 7 41 xd2z translate-names פַשְׁח֔וּר 1 Pashhur Pashhur is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 7 42 f1g1 bita-hq בְּנֵ֣י חָרִ֔ם 1 **Sons** figuratively means “descendants” Alternate translation: “from the descendants of Harim” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-hq]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 7 42 ias1 translate-names חָרִ֔ם 1 Harim Harim is the name of a man. Alternate translation: “from the descendants of Harim” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 7 43 h37e הַלְוִיִּ֑ם 1 Alternate translation: “Some of the descendants of Levi also returned.”
NEH 7 43 d1g3 bita-hq בְּנֵֽי־יֵשׁ֧וּעַ לְקַדְמִיאֵ֛ל לִבְנֵ֥י לְהוֹדְוָ֖ה 1 **Sons** figuratively means “descendants” Alternate translation: “from the descendants of Jeshua and Kadmiel, who were descended from Hodevah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-hq]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 7 43 v5s3 translate-names יֵשׁ֧וּעַ לְקַדְמִיאֵ֛ל…לְהוֹדְוָ֖ה 1 Jeshua and Kadmiel are men’s names, and Hodevah is the name of their ancestor. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 7 44 v68g translate-unknown הַֽמְשֹׁרְרִ֑ים 1 As in [7:1](../07/01.md), this refers to vocal musicians who led in worship, in processions, and ceremonies, producing music and chants that emphasized and enhanced the occasion. Alternate translation: “singers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
NEH 7 44 d1g5 הַֽמְשֹׁרְרִ֑ים 1 Alternate translation: “Some of the descendants of the singers also returned.”
NEH 7 44 d1g7 bita-hq בְּנֵ֣י אָסָ֔ף 1 **Sons** figuratively means “descendants” Alternate translation: “from the descendants of Asaph” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-hq]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 7 44 ht7l translate-names אָסָ֔ף 1 Asaph Asaph is a man’s name. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 7 45 b7ne translate-unknown הַשֹּֽׁעֲרִ֗ים 1 See how you translated this term in [7:1](../07/01.md). Alternate translation: “Some of the descendants of the gatekeepers also returned.”
NEH 7 45 h78b bita-hq בְּנֵֽי־שַׁלּ֤וּם בְּנֵֽי־אָטֵר֙ בְּנֵֽי־טַלְמֹ֣ן בְּנֵֽי־עַקּ֔וּב בְּנֵ֥י חֲטִיטָ֖א בְּנֵ֣י שֹׁבָ֑י 1 **Sons** figuratively means “descendants” Alternate translation: “from the descendants of Shallum, Ater, Talmon, Akkub, Hatita, and Shobai” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-hq]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 7 45 wy4p translate-names שַׁלּ֤וּם…אָטֵר֙…טַלְמֹ֣ן…עַקּ֔וּב…חֲטִיטָ֖א…שֹׁבָ֑י 1 Shallum…Ater…Talmon…Akkub…Hatita…Shobai These are the names of six men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 7 46 t2j5 translate-unknown הַנְּתִינִ֑ים 1 As in [3:26](../03/26.md), the term “Nethinim” describes servants who worked in the temple. Alternate translation: “the temple servants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
NEH 7 46 cd4k הַנְּתִינִ֑ים 1 Alternate translation: “Some of the descendants of the temple servants also returned”
NEH 7 46 d6np bita-hq בְּנֵי־צִחָ֥א בְנֵי־חֲשֻׂפָ֖א בְּנֵ֥י טַבָּעֽוֹת 1 **Sons** figuratively means “descendants” Alternate translation: “from the descendants of Shallum, Ater, Talmon, Akkub, Hatita, and Shobai” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-hq]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 7 46 st75 translate-names צִחָ֥א…חֲשֻׂפָ֖א…טַבָּעֽוֹת 1 Ziha…Hasupha…Tabbaoth These are the names of three men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 7 47 mn22 bita-hq בְּנֵי־קֵירֹ֥ס בְּנֵי־סִיעָ֖א בְּנֵ֥י פָדֽוֹן 1 **Sons** figuratively means “descendants.” If you continue the sentence from [7:46](../07/46.md), you can just list the names of these three men. Alternate translation: “Keros, Sia, Padon,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-hq]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 7 48 ln8l bita-hq בְּנֵי־לְבָנָ֥ה בְנֵי־חֲגָבָ֖ה בְּנֵ֥י שַׁלְמָֽי 1 **Sons** figuratively means “descendants.” If you continue the sentence from [7:46](../07/46.md), you can just list the names of these three men. Alternate translation: “Lebana, Hagaba, Shalmai,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-hq]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 7 49 zpn7 bita-hq בְּנֵי־חָנָ֥ן בְּנֵי־גִדֵּ֖ל בְּנֵי־גָֽחַר 1 **Sons** figuratively means “descendants.” If you continue the sentence from [7:46](../07/46.md), you can just list the names of these three men. Alternate translation: “Hanan, Giddel, Gahar,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-hq]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 7 50 s8hz bita-hq בְּנֵי־רְאָיָ֥ה בְנֵי־רְצִ֖ין בְּנֵ֥י נְקוֹדָֽא 1 **Sons** figuratively means “descendants.” If you continue the sentence from [7:46](../07/46.md), you can just list the names of these three men. Alternate translation: “Reaiah, Rezin, Nekoda,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-hq]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 7 51 u8ea bita-hq בְּנֵי־גַזָּ֥ם בְּנֵי־עֻזָּ֖א בְּנֵ֥י פָסֵֽחַ 1 **Sons** figuratively means “descendants.” If you continue the sentence from [7:46](../07/46.md), you can just list the names of these three men. Alternate translation: “Gazzam, Uzza, Paseah,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-hq]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 7 52 i1dd bita-hq בְּנֵי־בֵסַ֥י בְּנֵי־מְעוּנִ֖ים בְּנֵ֥י נפושסים 1 **Sons** figuratively means “descendants.” If you continue the sentence from [7:46](../07/46.md), you can just list the names of these three men. Alternate translation: “Besai, Meunim, Nephushesim,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-hq]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 7 53 u7qn bita-hq בְּנֵי־בַקְבּ֥וּק בְּנֵֽי־חֲקוּפָ֖א בְּנֵ֥י חַרְחֽוּר 1 **Sons** figuratively means “descendants.” If you continue the sentence from [7:46](../07/46.md), you can just list the names of these three men. Alternate translation: “Bakbuk, Hakupha, Harhur,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-hq]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 7 54 jat5 bita-hq בְּנֵי־בַצְלִ֥ית בְּנֵֽי־מְחִידָ֖א בְּנֵ֥י חַרְשָֽׁא 1 **Sons** figuratively means “descendants.” If you continue the sentence from [7:46](../07/46.md), you can just list the names of these three men. Alternate translation: “Bazluth, Mehida, Harsha,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-hq]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 7 55 w15p bita-hq בְּנֵי־בַרְק֥וֹס בְּֽנֵי־סִֽיסְרָ֖א בְּנֵי־תָֽמַח 1 **Sons** figuratively means “descendants.” If you continue the sentence from [7:46](../07/46.md), you can just list the names of these three men. Alternate translation: “Barkos, Sisera, Temah,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-hq]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 7 56 i1b4 bita-hq בְּנֵ֥י נְצִ֖יחַ בְּנֵ֥י חֲטִיפָֽא 1 **Sons** figuratively means “descendants.” If you continue the sentence from [7:46](../07/46.md, you can just list the names of these two men, and end the series in this verse. Alternate translation: “Neziah, and Hatipha.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-hq]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 7 57 w9sx translate-unknown בְּנֵ֖י עַבְדֵ֣י שְׁלֹמֹ֑ה 1 By **servants of Solomon**, this document does not mean officials who served in Solomon’s court. Rather, this phrase refers to people whom Solomon first conscripted as laborers. They were descendants of the groups that were living in the land of Canaan before the Israelites occupied it. They and their descendants remained conscripted laborers under later kings. You could call these people “the laborers that King Solomon first conscripted.” Alternate translation: “laborers who had worked for the kingdom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
NEH 7 57 ei9x bita-hq בְּנֵ֖י עַבְדֵ֣י שְׁלֹמֹ֑ה 1 **Sons** figuratively means “descendants” Alternate translation: “Some of the descendants of the laborers who had worked for the kingdom also returned.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-hq]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 7 57 xb5j bita-hq בְּנֵי־סוֹטַ֥י בְּנֵי־סוֹפֶ֖רֶת בְּנֵ֥י פְרִידָֽא 1 **Sons** figuratively means “descendants” Alternate translation: “They were from the descendants of Sotai, Sophereth, Perida” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-hq]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 7 57 ma7v translate-names סוֹטַ֥י…סוֹפֶ֖רֶת…פְרִידָֽא 1 Sotai…Sophereth…Perida These are the names of three men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 7 58 y1jl bita-hq בְּנֵי־יַעְלָ֥א בְנֵי־דַרְק֖וֹן בְּנֵ֥י גִדֵּֽל 1 **Sons** figuratively means “descendants.” If you continue the sentence from [7:57](../05/57.md), you can just list the names of these three men. Alternate translation: “Jaala, Darkon, Giddel,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-hq]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 7 59 vwg5 bita-hq בְּנֵ֧י שְׁפַטְיָ֣ה בְנֵֽי־חַטִּ֗יל בְּנֵ֛י פֹּכֶ֥רֶת הַצְּבָיִ֖ים בְּנֵ֥י אָמֽוֹן 1 **Sons** figuratively means “descendants.” If you continue the sentence from [7:57](../07/57.md), you can just list the names of these four men, and end the series in this verse. Alternate translation: “Shephatiah, Hattil, Pochereth Hazzebaim, and Amon” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-hq]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 7 60 a15h כָּל־הַ֨נְּתִינִ֔ים וּבְנֵ֖י עַבְדֵ֣י שְׁלֹמֹ֑ה שְׁלֹ֥שׁ מֵא֖וֹת תִּשְׁעִ֥ים וּשְׁנָֽיִם 1 Alternate translation: “Altogether 392 men returned who were descendants of temple servants or of laborers who had worked for the kingdom.”
NEH 7 61 bgx3 figs-idiom וְאֵ֗לֶּה הָֽעוֹלִים֙ 1 As in [7:6](../07/06.md), “went up” means “traveled from Babylon back to Judah,” since that involves going from a river valley up into the mountains. Alternate translation: “Some others returned to Judah from Babylon” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
NEH 7 61 c7ta translate-names מִתֵּ֥ל מֶ֨לַח֙ תֵּ֣ל חַרְשָׁ֔א כְּר֥וּב אַדּ֖וֹן וְאִמֵּ֑ר 1 These are the names of five towns in Babylonia. Alternate translation: “who had been living in the towns of Tel Melah, Tel Harsha, Kerub, Addon, and Immer.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 7 61 d1g9 וְלֹ֣א יָכְל֗וּ לְהַגִּ֤יד 1 Alternate translation: “They had no records to prove”
NEH 7 61 d1h1 figs-parallelism בֵּית־אֲבוֹתָם֙ וְזַרְעָ֔ם אִ֥ם מִיִּשְׂרָאֵ֖ל הֵֽם 1 These two longer phrases mean similar things. The second phrase explains the meaning of the first for clarity and emphasis. If it would be clearer in your language, you could combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “that their ancestors had been Israelites,” otherwise “what clan they were from or who their ancestors were, whether they were really Israelites” (See [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
NEH 7 61 d1h3 figs-doublet בֵּית־אֲבוֹתָם֙ וְזַרְעָ֔ם 1 These two short phrases mean similar things. They are used together to emphasize that accurate records would be required to prove a person’s lineage. You do not need to repeat both phrases in your translation if that would be confusing for your readers. Alternate translation: “what their lineage was” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
NEH 7 61 d1h5 bita-manmade בֵּית־אֲבוֹתָם֙ וְזַרְעָ֔ם 1 Among the Israelites, the expression **father’s house** or **house of the father** originally described an extended-clan. It later came to be used more generally to refer to a larger clan within a tribe. (For example, the two expressions are used interchangeably in Exodus 6:14, “These were the heads of their fathers’ houses: The sons of Reuben, the firstborn of Israel, were Hanok, Pallu, Hezron, and Karmi. These were the clan ancestors of Reuben.”) In this expression, the word **house** figuratively describes all the people descended from a particular person. The term views all of those descendants as if they were one household living together. Alternate translation: “what clan they were from” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-manmade]])
NEH 7 61 d1h7 bita-plants וְזַרְעָ֔ם 1 Here **seed** is ametaphor meaning “offspring.” It is a comparison: Just as plants produce seeds that grow into many more plants, so people can have many offspring. In the Bible, the term refers most often to a person’s descendants. But here it is describing the ancestors of these people, that is, “whose seed they were.” Alternate translation: “who their ancestors were” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-plants]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 7 62 d1h9 בְּנֵי־דְלָיָ֥ה בְנֵֽי־טוֹבִיָּ֖ה בְּנֵ֣י נְקוֹדָ֑א שֵׁ֥שׁ מֵא֖וֹת וְאַרְבָּעִ֥ים וּשְׁנָֽיִם 1 Alternate translation: “Altogether 642 men returned who were from the descendants of Delaiah, Tobiah, and Nekoda”
NEH 7 62 d1i1 bita-hq בְּנֵי־דְלָיָ֥ה בְנֵֽי־טוֹבִיָּ֖ה בְּנֵ֣י נְקוֹדָ֑א 1 **Sons** figuratively means “descendants” Alternate translation: “They were from the descendants of Delaiah, Tobiah, and Nekoda” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-hq]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 7 62 np4h translate-names דְלָיָ֥ה…טוֹבִיָּ֖ה…נְקוֹדָ֑א 1 Delaiah…Tobiah…Nekoda These are the names of three men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 7 63 d1i3 וּמִן־הַכֹּ֣הֲנִ֔ים 1 Alternate translation: “Some of the men who returned from those towns were descendants of the priests.”
NEH 7 63 d1i5 bita-hq בְּנֵ֥י חֳבַיָּ֖ה בְּנֵ֣י הַקּ֑וֹץ בְּנֵ֣י בַרְזִלַּ֗י 1 **Sons** figuratively means “descendants.” Alternate translation: “They were from the descendants of Habaiah, Hakkoz, and Barzillai” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-hq]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 7 63 i59a translate-names חֳבַיָּ֖ה…הַקּ֑וֹץ…בַרְזִלַּ֗י 1 Habaiah…Hakkoz…Barzillai These are the names of three men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 7 63 d1i7 translate-names בַּרְזִלַּ֤י הַגִּלְעָדִי֙ 1 Barzillai is the name of a man, and Gileadite means that he was from the region of Gilead. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 7 63 d1i9 אֲשֶׁ֣ר לָ֠קַח מִבְּנ֞וֹת בַּרְזִלַּ֤י הַגִּלְעָדִי֙ אִשָּׁ֔ה 1 Alternate translation: “Barzillai married a woman who was one of the descendants of Barzillai the Gileadite”
NEH 7 63 iyy1 bita-hq מִבְּנ֞וֹת בַּרְזִלַּ֤י הַגִּלְעָדִי֙ 1 **Daughters** figuratively means “descendants.” Alternate translation: “the descendants of Barzillai the Gileadite” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-hq]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 7 63 bl4n וַיִּקָּרֵ֖א עַל־שְׁמָֽם 1 Alternate translation: “and he took the name of her clan as his own name”
NEH 7 64 m2qd אֵ֗לֶּה בִּקְשׁ֧וּ כְתָבָ֛ם הַמִּתְיַחְשִׂ֖ים וְלֹ֣א נִמְצָ֑א 1 Alternate translation: “They were not able to find any mention of their names in the lists of people who were descendants of the priests”
NEH 7 64 n9vy וַיְגֹֽאֲל֖וּ מִן־הַכְּהֻנָּֽה 1 Alternate translation: “So they were not allowed to serve as priests.”
NEH 7 65 av51 translate-unknown הַתִּרְשָׁ֨תָא֙ 1 This was the formal Persian title of the governor. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the title and then explain it. Alternate translation: “The Tirshatha, that is, the governor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
NEH 7 65 j9fe translate-unknown וַיֹּ֤אמֶר הַתִּרְשָׁ֨תָא֙ לָהֶ֔ם אֲשֶׁ֥ר לֹא־יֹאכְל֖וּ מִקֹּ֣דֶשׁ הַקֳּדָשִׁ֑ים 1 In this case, **the holy of holies** does not refer to the inmost part of the Temple. Rather, it refers to the most sacred part of the food offerings, which was reserved for the priests. Alternate translation: “told them that they would not be allowed to eat the most sacred food” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
NEH 7 65 qnn2 figs-metaphor עַ֛ד עֲמֹ֥ד הַכֹּהֵ֖ן לְאוּרִ֥ים וְתוּמִּֽים 1 Here **stand** is a figurative way of saying that a person has assumed the duties of their office. The priest means specifically the high priest, since he had the objects described. Alternate translation: “Until the high priest was once again on duty” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 7 65 cij9 translate-unknown לְאוּרִ֥ים וְתוּמִּֽים 1 This was a pair of objects that the high priest kept in the breastpiece of his robe. It is unknown exactly what type of objects they were, but they were used to answer yes-or-no questions and to decide between two alternatives. If the priest, without looking, pulled out the Urim, that meant one answer, while if he pulled out the Thummim, that meant the other answer. If it would be clearer in your language, you could describe these objects by their function rather than by their names. Alternate translation: “and could use the sacred objects to decide their cases.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
NEH 7 66 t4xj כָּל־הַקָּהָ֖ל כְּאֶחָ֑ד אַרְבַּ֣ע רִבּ֔וֹא אַלְפַּ֖יִם שְׁלֹשׁ־מֵא֥וֹת וְשִׁשִּֽׁים 1 Alternate translation: “The total number of men who returned was 42,360”
NEH 7 67 se3x מִ֠לְּבַד עַבְדֵיהֶ֤ם וְאַמְהֹֽתֵיהֶם֙ אֵ֔לֶּה שִׁבְעַ֣ת אֲלָפִ֔ים שְׁלֹ֥שׁ מֵא֖וֹת שְׁלֹשִׁ֣ים וְשִׁבְעָ֑ה 1 Alternate translation: “not counting their 7,337 male and female servants”
NEH 7 67 d1j1 translate-unknown וְלָהֶ֗ם מְשֹֽׁרֲרִים֙ וּמְשֹׁ֣רֲר֔וֹת מָאתַ֖יִם וְאַרְבָּעִ֥ים וַחֲמִשָּֽׁה 1 This is a different group from “the ones who sang” in [7:44](../07/44.md). Those were Levites who sang in connection with Israel’s worship. The group here is a class of servants who were employed to provide music for public and private events. Alternate translation: “and the 245 male and female singers they employed.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
NEH 7 68 d1j3 1 Alternate translation: “The group also brought back with them 736 horses, 245 mules”
NEH 7 70 e1e9 figs-ellipsis רָאשֵׁ֣י הָֽאָב֔וֹת 1 This seems to be an abbreviated way of saying “the heads of father’s houses.” The full expression “father’s house” or “house of the father” is used in verse 61. See how you translated it there, and review the note there if that would be helpfull. Alternate translation: “some of the clan leaders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
NEH 7 70 gdj2 bita-hq רָאשֵׁ֣י 1 **Head** here is a figurative way of saying “leader.” Alternate translation: “the leaders of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-hq]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 7 70 le3g translate-unknown נָתַ֣ן לָאוֹצָ֗ר 1 Even though in the book of Nehemiah **the work** typically means the work of rebuilding the wall of Jerusalem, in this document it refers to the work of re-establishing the temple. That was the project that Zerubbabel and the group that returned under his leadership worked on. Alternate translation: “gave gifts towards the costs of re-establishing the temple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
NEH 7 70 b1s5 הַתִּרְשָׁ֜תָא נָתַ֣ן לָאוֹצָ֗ר זָהָ֞ב דַּרְכְּמֹנִ֥ים אֶ֨לֶף֙ מִזְרָק֣וֹת חֲמִשִּׁ֔ים כָּתְנוֹת֙ כֹּֽהֲנִ֔ים שְׁלֹשִׁ֖ים וַחֲמֵ֥שׁ מֵאֽוֹת 1 Alternate translation: “The Tirshatha, that is, the governor, donated to the temple treasury 1,000 gold coins, 50 bowls to be used in the temple, and 530 garments for the priests to wear.”
NEH 7 70 c7ug translate-unknown הַתִּרְשָׁ֜תָא 1 As in [7:65](../07/65.md), this was the formal Persian title of the governor. Alternate translation: “The Tirshatha, that is, the governor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
NEH 7 70 wf3a translate-bmoney זָהָ֞ב דַּרְכְּמֹנִ֥ים אֶ֨לֶף֙ 1 In ancient times, a gold daric weighed about 8 or 8.5 grams or about a quarter of an ounce. You could try to express this in terms of modern money values, but if you did, that could cause your Bible translation to become outdated and inaccurate over time, since those values can change from year to year. Instead, you could say something general like “1,000 gold coins,” or give the equivalent weight, or use the biblical term in the text and give the weight in a note. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney]])
NEH 7 70 bu8p translate-unknown מִזְרָק֣וֹת חֲמִשִּׁ֔ים 1 These were large, flat bowls that were used in the temple to collect the blood of sacrifices. When the Law called for some of this blood to be sprinkled on the altar, in the air, or on a person or a garment, that would be done from one of these bowls. Alternate translation: “50 bowls to be used in the temple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
NEH 7 70 bu22 translate-unknown כָּתְנוֹת֙ כֹּֽהֲנִ֔ים שְׁלֹשִׁ֖ים וַחֲמֵ֥שׁ מֵאֽוֹת 1 These were the special garments that priests would wear while performing their duties in the temple. Alternate translation: “530 garments for the priests to wear” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
NEH 7 71 znc4 figs-ellipsis וּמֵֽרָאשֵׁ֣י הָֽאָב֗וֹת נָֽתְנוּ֙ לְאוֹצַ֣ר הַמְּלָאכָ֔ה 1 As in [7:70](../07/70.md), **the heads of the fathers** seems to be an abbreviated way of saying “the heads of father’s houses.” See how you translated that expression in [7:61](../07/61.md), and review the note there if that would be helpful. Alternate translation: “Some of the clan leaders donated to the temple treasury.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
NEH 7 71 g529 bita-hq וּמֵֽרָאשֵׁ֣י 1 **Head** here is a figurative way of saying “leader.” Alternate translation: “leaders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-hq]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 7 71 kzg2 translate-bmoney זָהָ֕ב דַּרְכְּמוֹנִ֖ים שְׁתֵּ֣י רִבּ֑וֹת 1 See the note about **darics** in verse [7:70](../07/70.md). Alternate translation: “20,000 gold coins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney]])
NEH 7 71 jxn7 translate-bmoney וְכֶ֕סֶף מָנִ֖ים אַלְפַּ֥יִם וּמָאתָֽיִ 1 In ancient times, a silver mina weighed about half a kilogram or about 1.25 pounds. However, as in the case of darics, it would probably be best to say something general like “2,200 silver bars,” or give the equivalent weight, or use the biblical term and give the equivalent weight in a note. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney]])
NEH 7 72 zg2v translate-bmoney וַאֲשֶׁ֣ר נָתְנוּ֮ שְׁאֵרִ֣ית הָעָם֒ זָהָ֗ב דַּרְכְּמוֹנִים֙ שְׁתֵּ֣י רִבּ֔וֹא וְכֶ֖סֶף מָנִ֣ים אַלְפָּ֑יִם וְכָתְנֹ֥ת כֹּֽהֲנִ֖ים שִׁשִּׁ֥ים וְשִׁבְעָֽה 1 See the notes in [7:70](../07/70.md) and [7:71](../07/71.md) about “darics,” “minas,” and “tunics.” Alternate translation: “The rest of the people donated 20,000 gold coins, 2,000 silver bars, and 67 garments for the priests to wear.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
NEH 7 73 jaj3 grammar-connect-time-sequential וַיֵּשְׁב֣וּ 1 At the end of [7:72](../07/72.md), Nehemiah stops quoting from the document about the first group of people who returned to Judah. The story now goes on to tell what happened next. You could introduce this verse with a word or phrase that indicates this. Alternate translation: “And so…dwelt” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
NEH 7 73 e7np translate-unknown הַכֹּהֲנִ֣ים וְהַלְוִיִּ֡ם וְהַשּׁוֹעֲרִים֩ וְהַמְשֹׁרְרִ֨ים וּמִן־הָעָ֧ם וְהַנְּתִינִ֛ים וְכָל־יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל 1 Five of the groups in this list are also named in the document about the people who returned from exile: the priests (verses 39–43), the Levites (verse 43), the gatekeepers (verse 45), the singers (verse 44), and the temple servants (verses 46–56). You can use those same names for these groups here. It is not immediately clear who “some from the people” are, and why they are not included in “all Israel.” You could just say “many ordinary people.” However, there is very similar list in [10:28](../10/28.md) that names these same five groups and also describes people who dedicated themselves to following the law of God. That would unfortunately not have included all of Israel at this point, so that may be the distinction that is in view here. Alternate translation: “the priests, the Levites, the gatekeepers, the singers, the temple servants, some people who dedicated themselves to follow the law, and the rest of the Israelites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
NEH 7 73 a2ub figs-explicit וַיֵּשְׁב֣וּ…בְּעָרֵיהֶ֑ם וַיִּגַּע֙ הַחֹ֣דֶשׁ הַשְּׁבִיעִ֔י וּבְנֵ֥י יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל בְּעָרֵיהֶֽם 1 The rebuilding of the wall was completed that year near the end of Elul, the sixth month of the Hebrew calendar. The implication is that everyone who had come to Jerusalem to work on the wall was then allowed to return home. Within about a week, by the beginning of the seventh month, they were all back home. If it would make things clearer in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “So…returned to their homes, because the rebuilding of the wall had been completed. By the beginning of the next month, they were all back home.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 8 intro w38v 0 # Nehemiah 08 General Notes<br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Reading of the law<br><br>During the exile, the Hebrew language was no longer spoken. Only the priests and Levites still understood it. Ezra read the book of the law to the people in Hebrew and the Levites walked among the crowd translating it into Aramaic for the people to understand. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/priest]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])<br><br>### Festival of Shelters<br><br>After they heard Ezra read the law of Moses, the people obeyed it by making temporary shelters for themselves with tree branches. They did this to remember that their ancestors slept in shelters when they came out of slavery in Egypt.
NEH 8 1 q5ih figs-hyperbole כָל־הָעָם֙ 1 The word **all** is a generalization that indicates that everyone who was able and available came to Jerusalem for this occasion. By “the people,” Nehemiah means the groups he described in the previous verse who had come back to live in Judah and Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “The people of Judah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
NEH 8 1 e1a1 figs-explicit וַיֵּאָסְפ֤וּ…כְּאִ֣ישׁ אֶחָ֔ד 1 Verses 8 and 9 explain that the people had gathered for a festival, and [8:2](../08/02.md) states that this was the first day of the seventh month, which means that the people had gathered in Jerusalem for the Festival of Trumpets. In the Law of Moses, Yahweh had commanded the people to observe this celebration on this date. If it would be helpful to your readers to know why the people came together on this day, you could say that specifically. Alternate translation: “gathered in Jerusalem in a huge crowd for a special celebration known as the Festival of Trumpets.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 8 1 e1a3 figs-idiom כְּאִ֣ישׁ אֶחָ֔ד 1 **As one man** is an idiom that means “as if they were a single person,” that is, all in once place at the same time. Alternate translation: “gathered in a huge crowd” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
NEH 8 1 e1a5 translate-unknown אֶל־הָ֣רְח֔וֹב 1 This means a “plaza” or “square” in the city where there were no buildings and so where public events like this could be held. Alternate translation: “in the square” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
NEH 8 1 f6t8 figs-metonymy לִפְנֵ֣י שַֽׁעַר־הַמָּ֑יִם 1 Here “face” figuratively means the front of an object. Alternate translation: “in front of the Water Gate” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 8 1 e1a7 translate-names שַֽׁעַר־הַמָּ֑יִם 1 This is the name of one of the gates of Jerusalem. See how you translated it in [3:26](../03/26.md). Alternate translation: “the Water Gate” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 8 1 e1a9 figs-explicit וַיֹּֽאמְרוּ֙ לְעֶזְרָ֣א הַסֹּפֵ֔ר לְהָבִ֗יא אֶת־סֵ֨פֶר֙ תּוֹרַ֣ת מֹשֶׁ֔ה 1 **They** means the crowd, though they likely made this request to Ezra through their leaders. The implication is that they wanted him not just to bring the book forward, but to read to them from it out loud (as [8:3](../08/03.md) indicates he did). This was because they wanted to learn what was in it. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “The crowd had asked Ezra the scribe to read to them from a scroll that contained the Law of Moses, because they wanted to know what it commanded.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 8 1 e1b1 figs-explicit וַיֹּֽאמְרוּ֙ לְעֶזְרָ֣א הַסֹּפֵ֔ר לְהָבִ֗יא אֶת־סֵ֨פֶר֙ תּוֹרַ֣ת מֹשֶׁ֔ה 1 Since the rest of the chapter describes arrangements that the leaders must have made in advance, the crowd did not start shouting spontaneously, once they gathered, for Ezra to come forward and read. Rather, they had made this request in advance. Alternate translation: “the crowd had asked” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 8 1 e1b3 writing-participants לְעֶזְרָ֣א הַסֹּפֵ֔ר 1 This introduces Ezra as a new character in the story. The expression “the scribe” identifies him as a teacher who had carefully studied the Law of Moses. Since he is a new participant, if it would be helpful to your readers, you could call him something like “a man named Ezra, who was a teacher of the Law of Moses.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
NEH 8 1 e1b5 figs-explicit לְעֶזְרָ֣א הַסֹּפֵ֔ר 1 The biblical book of Ezra indicates that this man returned to Jerusalem from exile in Babylon thirteen years before Nehemiah did. He led many reforms in the community. But in this book, Nehemiah does not say whether Ezra had remained in the city all that time, or whether he had gone back to Babylon and had recently returned to Jerusalem again. Even if your language, in telling a story, ordinarily accounts for how a person came to be on the scene, it might be best not to try to address that question here in your translation. Even though Nehemiah seems to expect that his readers will know where Ezra had been, Nehemiah does not say specifically where he was, and so the answer is unknown. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 8 1 fdh4 translate-unknown אֶת־סֵ֨פֶר֙ תּוֹרַ֣ת מֹשֶׁ֔ה 1 This **book** was most likely a scroll, and it most likely contained what is now known as the Torah or the “five books of Moses.” Alternate translation: “a scroll that contained the law of Moses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
NEH 8 1 e1b7 אֲשֶׁר־צִוָּ֥ה יְהוָ֖ה אֶת־יִשְׂרָאֵֽל 1 Alternate translation: “These were the commandments that Yahweh had told Israel to follow.”
NEH 8 2 e1b9 figs-explicit עֶזְרָ֣א הַ֠כֹּהֵן 1 This information serves to introduce Ezra further. In addition to being a teacher and learned student of the Law of Moses, he was also a priest whose duties would have included offering sacrifices in the temple and helping people make sure they were following the law in everyday matters. It might be helpful to your readers to explain that here, because it shows why Ezra would have been such an effective teacher for everyone on this occasion. Alternate translation: “Ezra was also a priest who served in the temple and helped people follow the law.” (See: Introduction of New and Old Participants and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 8 2 e1c1 figs-metonymy וַיָּבִ֣יא…אֶֽת־הַתּוֹרָ֞ה לִפְנֵ֤י הַקָּהָל֙ 1 Here **face** figuratively means the front of a group. Alternate translation: “He read the law out loud in front of the whole crowd.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 8 2 j8yl figs-idiom מֵאִ֣ישׁ וְעַד־אִשָּׁ֔ה וְכֹ֖ל מֵבִ֣ין לִשְׁמֹ֑עַ 1 **All who were understanding to hear** is an idiom that means “everyone who could hear with understanding,” that is, “who understood what they were hearing.” This phrase likely refers to children and it would mean “children who were old enough to understand.” Alternate translation: “for the men, the women, and the children who were old enough to understand.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
NEH 8 2 e89a figs-explicit בְּי֥וֹם אֶחָ֖ד לַחֹ֥דֶשׁ הַשְּׁבִיעִֽי 1 Since Nehemiah does not say otherwise, the implication is that this happened in the same year that the wall was rebuilt. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “He did this on the first day of the seventh month of that same year.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 8 2 id7q translate-hebrewmonths בְּי֥וֹם אֶחָ֖ד לַחֹ֥דֶשׁ הַשְּׁבִיעִֽי 1 Alternate translation: “On day 1 of month 7” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
NEH 8 3 pkz7 וַיִּקְרָא־בוֹ֩ 1 Here **it** means the book of the law of Moses.
NEH 8 3 iv9y figs-metonymy לִפְנֵ֨י הָרְח֜וֹב אֲשֶׁ֣ר ׀ לִפְנֵ֣י שַֽׁעַר־הַמַּ֗יִם 1 Here **face** figuratively means the front of both places, the square and the gate. Alternate translation: “from the front of the square that is in front of the Water Gate” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
NEH 8 3 e1c3 translate-names שַֽׁעַר־הַמַּ֗יִם 1 This is the name of one of the gates of Jerusalem. See how you translated it in [3:26](../03/26.md) and [8:1](../08/01.md). Alternate translation: “the Water Gate” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 8 3 e1c5 translate-unknown מִן־הָאוֹר֙ עַד־מַחֲצִ֣ית הַיּ֔וֹם 1 **The light** means sunrise, that is, the time of morning when the sun itself becomes visible above the horizon. “The middle of the day” means noon. Alternate translation: “from sunrise until noon” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
NEH 8 3 e1c7 figs-merism מִן־הָאוֹר֙ עַד־מַחֲצִ֣ית הַיּ֔וֹם 1 Verse [8:7](../08/07.md) explains that other teachers circulated within the crowd to answer questions that people had about what Ezra was reading. It is unlikely that they did this while he was still talking. Instead, he probably paused from time to time to allow this. So this expression is actually referring to a whole time period by describing its beginning and ending, but it does not mean that the activity took place without interruption the whole time. If it would be clearer in your language, you could express this meaning with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “throughout the morning” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-unknown]])
NEH 8 3 e1c9 נֶ֛גֶד הָאֲנָשִׁ֥ים וְהַנָּשִׁ֖ים וְהַמְּבִינִ֑ים 1 This is the same group that was described in [8:2](../08/02.md). Many of the phrases here in verse 3 echo similar phrases in verse 2. The repetition emphasizes the importance and solemnity of this occasion. However, you do not need to repeat this phrase a second time in your translation if that would be confusing for your readers.
NEH 8 3 e1d1 figs-synecdoche וְאָזְנֵ֥י כָל־הָעָ֖ם 1 Here Nehemiah uses the **ears** of the people to represent the people themselves, in the act of listening. Alternate translation: “all the people listened carefully” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
NEH 8 4 e1d3 figs-explicit עַֽל־מִגְדַּל־עֵץ֮ 1 As [8:5](../08/05.md) explains, this was a raised platform that allowed the large crowd to see and hear Ezra as he read. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly here. Alternate translation: “a raised wooden platform” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 8 4 e1d5 figs-explicit אֲשֶׁ֣ר עָשׂ֣וּ לַדָּבָר֒ 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could say who built this platform, and what the purpose was. Alternate translation: “that the people had built so that they could see and hear Ezra as he read” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 8 4 e1d7 figs-metonymy אֶצְל֡וֹ…עַל־יְמִינ֑וֹ 1 Here **hand** is a metonym that means “side.” Alternate translation: “next to him, on his right side” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
NEH 8 4 lk8k translate-names מַתִּתְיָ֡ה וְשֶׁ֡מַע וַ֠עֲנָיָה וְאוּרִיָּ֧ה וְחִלְקִיָּ֛ה וּמַעֲשֵׂיָ֖ה 1 These are the names of six men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 8 4 e1d9 וּמִשְּׂמֹאל֗וֹ 1 Alternate translation: “and next to him, on his left side”
NEH 8 4 e1e1 translate-names פְּ֠דָיָה וּמִֽישָׁאֵ֧ל וּמַלְכִּיָּ֛ה וְחָשֻׁ֥ם וְחַשְׁבַּדָּ֖נָה זְכַרְיָ֥ה מְשֻׁלָּֽם 1 These are the names of seven men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 8 5 t5lf grammar-connect-logic-result וַיִּפְתַּ֨ח עֶזְרָ֤א הַסֵּ֨פֶר֙ לְעֵינֵ֣י כָל־הָעָ֔ם כִּֽי־מֵעַ֥ל כָּל־הָעָ֖ם 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the first phrase gives the reason for the result that is described in the second phrase. Alternate translation: “Ezra was up on the platform above the people, so they were able to see him when he opened the book.” (See: grammar-connect-logic-result)
NEH 8 5 yv2u figs-synecdoche לְעֵינֵ֣י כָל־הָעָ֔ם 1 Here Nehemiah uses the **eyes** of the people to represent the people themselves, in the act of observing. Alternate translation: “where all the people could see” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
NEH 8 5 wqg8 translate-symaction עָֽמְד֥וּ כָל־הָעָֽם 1 The people stood up as a symbolic way of showing respect for Yahweh and his law. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the people stood up to show their respect for Yahweh and his law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
NEH 8 5 ln1z כָל־הָעָֽם 1 In this verse, **all** is not a generalization as it is in verse 1. Rather, it means “all the people who were there.” Alternate translation: “the people”
NEH 8 6 x9v8 figs-explicit וַיְבָ֣רֶךְ עֶזְרָ֔א אֶת־יְהוָ֥ה הָאֱלֹהִ֖ים הַגָּד֑וֹל 1 This means that before Ezra read from the law, he prayed out loud. If it would be clearer in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Before he read from the law, Ezra prayed to Yahweh, the great God.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 8 6 e1e3 figs-events וַיַּֽעֲנ֨וּ כָל־הָעָ֜ם אָמֵ֤ן ׀ אָמֵן֙ 1 Since the people lifted their hands to show that they were joining Nehemiah in prayer, they would have done this before they said “Amen” at the end of his prayer. If it would be clearer in your language, you could describe the events in that order. Alternate translation: “The people lifted their hands to show that they were praying with Ezra, and when he finished praying, they shouted, ‘Amen! Amen!’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-events]])
NEH 8 6 e1e5 figs-idiom אָמֵ֤ן ׀ אָמֵן֙ 1 As in [5:13](../05/13.md), **Amen** is a Hebrew word that means, “Truly, it is so.” The word expresses agreement with what someone has just said. If it would be clearer in your language, you could express that meaning with a phrase such as, “We agree!” Or you could use the Hebrew term and explain what it means in this context: “Amen! Yahweh is truly great!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
NEH 8 6 e1e7 translate-symaction בְּמֹ֣עַל יְדֵיהֶ֔ם 1 In ancient Israel, lifted hands were the posture of prayer. By this gesture, the people showed that they were joining Nehemiah in prayer before he read from the law. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
NEH 8 6 e1e9 figs-synecdoche וַיִּקְּד֧וּ וַיִּשְׁתַּחֲוֻּ֛ לַיהוָ֖ה אַפַּ֥יִם אָֽרְצָה 1 **Nostrils** here represent the nose, and the nose represents all of the face. Alternate translation: “they knelt down and then lay down with their faces on the ground to worship Yahweh.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
NEH 8 7 e1f1 translate-names וְיֵשׁ֡וּעַ וּבָנִ֡י וְשֵׁרֵ֥בְיָ֣ה ׀ יָמִ֡ין עַקּ֡וּב שַׁבְּתַ֣י ׀ הֽוֹדִיָּ֡ה מַעֲשֵׂיָ֡ה קְלִיטָ֣א עֲזַרְיָה֩ יוֹזָבָ֨ד חָנָ֤ן פְּלָאיָה֙ 1 These are the names of thirteen men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 8 7 e1f3 וְהַלְוִיִּ֔ם 1 This expression could mean something like, “yes, the Levites,” indicating that all of these men were Levites. That means that they were descendants of Levi and had a special assignment of helping the priests. Alternate translation: “who were Levites.”
NEH 8 7 e1f5 figs-explicit מְבִינִ֥ים אֶת־הָעָ֖ם לַתּוֹרָ֑ה וְהָעָ֖ם עַל־עָמְדָֽם 1 The implication is that Ezra paused regularly throughout the morning to allow this. If it would be clearer in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “explained the meaning of the Law to the people as they stood in their places in the crowd. Ezra paused regularly to allow this.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 8 8 s5er וַֽיִּקְרְא֥וּ בַסֵּ֛פֶר בְּתוֹרַ֥ת הָאֱלֹהִ֖ים מְפֹרָ֑שׁ 1 This probably indicates that each of the Levites who circulated among the crowd likely had his own written copy of the Law of Moses and used that to teach the people. If it would be clearer in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Each of these Levites had his own the scroll of the law of God and read aloud from it”
NEH 8 8 e1f7 מְפֹרָ֑שׁ 1 The exact meaning of this Hebrew term is unknown. This expression could mean that the Levites read loudly and clearly so that the groups they were talking to within the crowd could hear and understand them. It could also mean that they went over one section at a time with the people, after Ezra had read that section to everyone. It might also imply that the people could not understand the language in which the book of the Law was written, so the Levites needed to interpret it into the language that the people could understand. However, none of these possibilities are certain. Alternate translation: “clearly” or “one section at a time”
NEH 8 8 e1f9 figs-doublet בַסֵּ֛פֶר בְּתוֹרַ֥ת הָאֱלֹהִ֖ים 1 These two phrases mean similar things. You do not need to repeat both of them in your translation if that would be confusing for your readers. Alternate translation: “from the Law of Moses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
NEH 8 8 e1g1 translate-unknown וְשׂ֣וֹם שֶׂ֔כֶל 1 The exact meaning of this phrase in Hebrew is unknown. Most likely, it means either (1) that the Levites were interpreting from one language into another, because the people could not understand the language in which the book of the Law was written, or (2) that the Levites were explaining the meaning of the Law to the people because it was difficult to understand. Alternate translateion: “and they explained what it meant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
NEH 8 8 vsq9 figs-abstractnouns שֶׂ֔כֶל 1 **Interpretation** is an abstract noun that refers to the meaning of the Law of Moses. If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate the idea behind it with a phrase that uses a verb such as “mean.” Alternate translation: “what it meant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
NEH 8 8 e1g3 וַיָּבִ֖ינוּ בַּמִּקְרָֽא 1 Here **they** refers to the people in the crowd. Alternate translation: “That way the people in the crowd could understand what Ezra was reading.”
NEH 8 9 e1g5 translate-unknown נְחֶמְיָ֣ה ה֣וּא הַתִּרְשָׁ֡תָא 1 As in [7:65](../07/65.md) and [7:70](../07/70.md), **Tirshatha** is the formal Persian title of the governor. If it would be clearer in your language, you could simply say “governor,” or you could state the title and then explain it. Alternate translation: “Nehemiah the governor” or “Nehemiah the Tirshatha (that is, the governor)” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
NEH 8 9 e1g7 writing-participants נְחֶמְיָ֣ה ה֣וּא הַתִּרְשָׁ֡תָא 1 This is the first time that Nehemiah appears as a character while someone else is telling the story. Previously in the book, he has been the one telling the story, and so he has referred to himself as “I.” To give him more of an introduction here, you could say something like, “Nehemiah, who was the governor” or “Nehemiah, who was the Tirshatha (that is, the governor).” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
NEH 8 9 e1g9 figs-informremind וְעֶזְרָ֣א הַכֹּהֵ֣ן ׀ הַסֹּפֵ֡ר 1 Here the book repeats some background information to remind readers who Ezra was. Alternate translation: “Ezra, who was a priest and a scribe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-informremind]])
NEH 8 9 e1h1 וְהַלְוִיִּם֩ הַמְּבִינִ֨ים אֶת־הָעָ֜ם 1 See how you translated this phrase in [8:7](../08/07.md). Alternate translation: “The Levites who were explaining the meaning of the Law to the people.”
NEH 8 9 e1h3 figs-explicit הַיּ֤וֹם קָדֹֽשׁ־הוּא֙ לַיהוָ֣ה 1 As a note to verse [8:1](../08/01.md) explains, this particular holiday was the Festival of Trumpets. If it would make things clearer for your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “This is a holy day, set apart to worship Yahweh. It is the Festival of Trumpets.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 8 9 e1h5 figs-doublet הַיּ֤וֹם קָדֹֽשׁ־הוּא֙ לַיהוָ֣ה 1 These two phrases mean similar things. The leaders were reminding the people that this was one of the festival days that Yahweh had told them to set apart as special times of worship and celebration. If it would be clearer in your language, you could combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “This is a special day for worshipping Yahweh.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
NEH 8 9 e1h7 grammar-connect-logic-result אַל־תִּֽתְאַבְּל֖וּ וְאַל־תִּבְכּ֑וּ 1 The leaders are saying that since this is a day for celebration, it is not appropriate for the people to be weeping. If it would be clearer in your language, you can show this connection by beginning this sentence with a word such as “so.” Alternate translation: “So do not mourn or cry.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
NEH 8 9 e1h9 figs-doublet אַל־תִּֽתְאַבְּל֖וּ וְאַל־תִּבְכּ֑וּ 1 **Mourn** and **weep** mean the same thing. The leaders use both words together to emphasize that the people should be cheerful, not sad, on a festival day. If it would be clearer in your language, you could combine these words in a single expression. Alternate translation: “So you should not be crying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
NEH 8 9 e1i1 grammar-connect-logic-result בוֹכִים֙ כָּל־הָעָ֔ם כְּשָׁמְעָ֖ם אֶת־דִּבְרֵ֥י הַתּוֹרָֽה 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could put this sentence first in the verse, since it gives the reason for the results that are described in the rest of the verse. Alternate translation: “The people in the crowd began to weep when they heard what was in the Law of Moses.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
NEH 8 9 e1i3 figs-explicit בוֹכִים֙ כָּל־הָעָ֔ם כְּשָׁמְעָ֖ם אֶת־דִּבְרֵ֥י הַתּוֹרָֽה 1 The implication is that the people began to weep because they recognize that they had not been obeying what God had commanded them in the Law of Moses. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “The people in the crowd began to weep when they heard what was in the Law of Moses, because they recognized that they had not been obeying what it commanded.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 8 9 wky3 figs-hyperbole כָּל־הָעָ֔ם 1 This is a generalization that indicates there was great weeping among the people. Alternate translation: “the people in the crowd” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
NEH 8 10 e1i5 figs-explicit וַיֹּ֣אמֶר לָהֶ֡ם 1 The story does not specify who said this. However, it is probably either Nehemiah or Ezra, since they are named at the beginning of the previous verse. And since what follow are instructions for how to observe a religious occasion, it is most likely Ezra. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could suggest that. Alternate translation: “Ezra told them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 8 10 e1i7 figs-metaphor לְכוּ֩ אִכְל֨וּ מַשְׁמַנִּ֜ים וּשְׁת֣וּ מַֽמְתַקִּ֗ים 1 This could mean, “Go home” and do this, since the people would likely have their holiday meals at home. Or it could figuratively mean, “Go ahead” and do this, even though you are feeling sad. Alternate translation: “Go home and celebrate with a good meal” or “Go ahead, celebrate with a good meal.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 8 10 smq2 figs-metonymy אִכְל֨וּ מַשְׁמַנִּ֜ים וּשְׁת֣וּ מַֽמְתַקִּ֗ים 1 **The fat** and **the sweet** are figurative ways of referring to food and drink that is particularly tasty and shared in celebrations. The speaker is describing this food and drink by things associated with it, the fatness and the sweetness. Alternate translation: “Celebrate with a good meal.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
NEH 8 10 e1i9 figs-doublet אִכְל֨וּ מַשְׁמַנִּ֜ים וּשְׁת֣וּ מַֽמְתַקִּ֗ים 1 Eating and drinking are used together here to convey a single idea, celebrating. If it would be clearer in your language, you could combine them into a single phrase. Alternate translation: “Celebrate with a good meal.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
NEH 8 10 e1j1 figs-activepassive וְשִׁלְח֤וּ מָנוֹת֙ לְאֵ֣ין נָכ֣וֹן ל֔וֹ 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “Share some of your meal with those who have not prepared anything for themselves.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
NEH 8 10 e1j3 figs-explicit וְשִׁלְח֤וּ מָנוֹת֙ לְאֵ֣ין נָכ֣וֹן ל֔וֹ 1 This may actually refer to the poor and indicate that they would not be able to afford rich food and drink. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “share some of your meal with the poor, who cannot afford rich food and drink.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 8 10 e1j5 figs-doublet כִּֽי־קָד֥וֹשׁ הַיּ֖וֹם לַאֲדֹנֵ֑ינוּ 1 These two phrases mean similar things. As in [8:9](../08/09.md), together they mean, “This is a special day for worshipping our Lord.” If it would be clearer in your language, you could combine these phrases like that. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
NEH 8 10 e1j7 grammar-connect-logic-result כִּֽי־קָד֥וֹשׁ הַיּ֖וֹם לַאֲדֹנֵ֑ינוּ 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could move this phrase to the beginning of the quotation, because it gives the reason for the resulting actions that are described in the rest of the quotation. You could also connect this phrase to the ones that would then follow with a word like “so,” to show the connection. Alternate translation: “Today is a holy day set apart to worship our Lord. So …” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
NEH 8 10 ach1 figs-activepassive וְאַל־תֵּ֣עָצֵ֔בוּ 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could express this same idea with an active form, and you can say what is causing the action. Alternate translation: “You have recognized that you have not obeyed the Law of Moses, but do not let that make you sad.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
NEH 8 10 e1j9 figs-explicit כִּֽי־חֶדְוַ֥ת יְהוָ֖ה הִ֥יא מָֽעֻזְּכֶֽם 1 The implication is that if a person is truly sorry for disobeying, Yahweh does not want that person to fear punishment or to grieve for the way they have offended. Instead, Yahweh wants them to be encouraged that they can live in a new way and to be happy about that. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “because Yahweh wants you to be happy and encouraged about living in a new way.”
NEH 8 10 sni7 figs-abstractnouns חֶדְוַ֥ת…מָֽעֻזְּכֶֽם 1 for the joy of Yahweh is your strength If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate the ideas behind the abstract nouns “joy” and “strength” with adjectives. Alternate translation: “happy … encouraged” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
NEH 8 11 e1k1 figs-hyperbole מַחְשִׁ֤ים לְכָל־הָעָם֙ 1 These are two overstatements that emphasize how encouraging the Levites were trying to be. **All the people** does not mean everyone in the crowd, but those who were crying. **Be silent** does not mean “say nothing” or “make no noise,” but “stop crying.” (Certainly the Levites hoped that these people would soon be talking and laughing with others at celebration meals.) Alternate translation: “encouraged the people who were weeping to stop crying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
NEH 8 11 e1k3 grammar-connect-logic-result הַ֔סּוּ כִּ֥י הַיּ֖וֹם קָדֹ֑שׁ וְאַל־תֵּעָצֵֽבוּ 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could put your translation of “for today is holy” first, since it gives the reason for the resulting actions in the other two phrases. You could also show the connection by using a word such as “so.” Alternate translation: “This is a day of celebration, so stop crying now, and do not be sad.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
NEH 8 11 sxx6 הַ֔סּוּ 1 This is a word that signals to a person that they should be quiet. If your language has a similar expression, you can use it in your translation. You could also give the meaning in this context, if that would be clearer to your readers. Alternate translation: “Shhh!” or “Stop crying, now.”
NEH 8 11 fjz6 figs-activepassive וְאַל־תֵּעָצֵֽבוּ 1 Do not be grieved If you expressed the idea behind this phrase with an active form in [8:10](../08/10.md) and you said there what was causing the action, you would not need to repeat that information here. Alternate translation: “do not be sad” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
NEH 8 12 e1k5 grammar-connect-logic-result יֵּלְכ֨וּ כָל־הָעָ֜ם לֶאֱכֹ֤ל וְלִשְׁתּוֹת֙ וּלְשַׁלַּ֣ח מָנ֔וֹת וְלַעֲשׂ֖וֹת שִׂמְחָ֣ה גְדוֹלָ֑ה 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could put the last phrase at the beginning of the sentence, since it gives the reason for the rest of the actions. Alternate translation: “So the people celebrated by eating and drinking and sharing with the poor.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
NEH 8 12 e1k7 figs-explicit לֶאֱכֹ֤ל וְלִשְׁתּוֹת֙ 1 The implication is that they enjoyed the special food and drink described in [8:10](.//08/10.md). If it would be clearer in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “eating rich foods and drinking sweet drinks” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 8 12 e1k9 figs-doublet לֶאֱכֹ֤ל וְלִשְׁתּוֹת֙ 1 Eating and drinking are used together here to convey a single idea, celebrating. If it would be clearer in your language, you could combine them into a single phrase. Alternate translation: “celebrating with festive meals” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
NEH 8 12 e1l1 figs-explicit לֶאֱכֹ֤ל וְלִשְׁתּוֹת֙ 1 The implication is that they enjoyed the special food and drink described in [8:10](../08/10.md). If it would be clearer in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “enjoying special meals” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 8 12 e1l3 figs-explicit וּלְשַׁלַּ֣ח מָנ֔וֹת 1 The implication is that they sent these portions to the poor, who would not have been able to afford rich food and drink, as described in [8:10](../08/10.md). If it would be clearer in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “sharing with the poor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 8 12 z1gc figs-abstractnouns וְלַעֲשׂ֖וֹת שִׂמְחָ֣ה גְדוֹלָ֑ה 1 The abstract noun **rejoicing** can be expressed as a verb. Alternate translation: “and to rejoice greatly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
NEH 8 12 e1l5 figs-explicit כִּ֤י הֵבִ֨ינוּ֙ בַּדְּבָרִ֔ים אֲשֶׁ֥ר הוֹדִ֖יעוּ לָהֶֽם 1 The implication is that the leaders helped the people recognize that being able to understand Yahweh’s law should be a source of joy and encouragement to them. They should not be sad or discouraged because they had disobeyed in the past, because now they would know how to obey. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “because now that they were able to understand God’s law, they would be able to obey it in the future.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 8 12 e1l7 grammar-connect-logic-result כִּ֤י הֵבִ֨ינוּ֙ בַּדְּבָרִ֔ים אֲשֶׁ֥ר הוֹדִ֖יעוּ לָהֶֽם 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could put this phrase at the beginning of the verse, since it gives the reason for the rest of the actions that the verse describes. You could show the connection by using a word like “so” after this phrase. Alternate translation: “the people realized that they would be able to obey God’s law in the future, because now they were able to understand it. So …” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
NEH 8 12 e1l9 figs-activepassive הֵבִ֨ינוּ֙ בַּדְּבָרִ֔ים אֲשֶׁ֥ר הוֹדִ֖יעוּ לָהֶֽם 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you can say who did the action. Alternate translation: “they understood God’s law when Ezra and the Levites explained it to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
NEH 8 13 uj5j translate-ordinal וּבַיּ֣וֹם הַשֵּׁנִ֡י 1 On the second day Alternate translations: “On day 2” or “On the next day” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
NEH 8 13 e1m1 figs-activepassive נֶאֶסְפוּ֩…אֶל 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “gathered to meet with” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
NEH 8 13 e1m3 figs-ellipsis רָאשֵׁ֨י הָאָב֜וֹת לְכָל־הָעָ֗ם 1 As in [7:70](../07/70.md), this seems to be an abbreviated way of saying “the heads of father’s houses.” The full expression “father’s house” or “house of the father” is used in [7:61](../07/61.md). See how you translated it there, and review the note there if that would be helpful. Alternate translation: “some clan leaders from throughout Judah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
NEH 8 13 e1m5 bita-hq רָאשֵׁ֨י 1 **Head** here is a figurative way of saying “leader.” Alternate translation: “leaders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-hq]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 8 13 e1m7 figs-informremind עֶזְרָ֖א הַסֹּפֵ֑ר 1 Here the book repeats some background information to remind readers who Ezra was. Alternate translation: “Ezra, who was a scribe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-informremind]])
NEH 8 13 e1m9 grammar-connect-logic-result וּלְהַשְׂכִּ֖יל אֶל־דִּבְרֵ֥י הַתּוֹרָֽה 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could put this phrase at the beginning of the verse, since it gives the reason for the rest of the actions that the verse describes. You could show the connection by using a word like “so” after this phrase. Alternate translation: “the people realized that they needed to understand God’s law much better. So …” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
NEH 8 13 e1n1 figs-explicit וּלְהַשְׂכִּ֖יל אֶל־דִּבְרֵ֥י הַתּוֹרָֽה 1 The implication is that while the people realized this, they also realized it would not be practical for large crowds to gather in Jerusalem every day so that all the people could receive Ezra’s teaching at once. Instead, they asked the family and religious leaders in Judah to meet with Ezra and learn from him, so that they could then pass the teachings along. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “The people realized that they needed to understand God’s law much better, so they asked their family and religious leaders to meet with Ezra and learn more things from him that they could then pass along.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 8 14 e1n3 figs-idiom וַֽיִּמְצְא֖וּ כָּת֣וּב בַּתּוֹרָ֑ה אֲשֶׁ֨ר צִוָּ֤ה יְהוָה֙ בְּיַד־מֹשֶׁ֔ה 1 **Found** does not mean that these leaders were looking for something, but that they learned this as they were studying with Ezra. Alternate translation: “they learned that in the Law, Yahweh had commanded through Moses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
NEH 8 14 e1n5 figs-explicit וַֽיִּמְצְא֖וּ כָּת֣וּב בַּתּוֹרָ֑ה אֲשֶׁ֨ר צִוָּ֤ה יְהוָה֙ בְּיַד־מֹשֶׁ֔ה 1 Because it was already the seventh month, it seems likely that Ezra showed this passage to the leaders intentionally, because it was something they could and should obey immediately. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Ezra showed them something that Yahweh had commanded through Moses that they could do right away” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 8 14 e1n7 figs-metaphor בְּיַד־מֹשֶׁ֔ה 1 Here **hand** figuratively represents control and action. Alternate translation: “through Moses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 8 14 e1n9 אֲשֶׁר֩ יֵשְׁב֨וּ בְנֵֽי־יִשְׂרָאֵ֧ל בַּסֻּכּ֛וֹת בֶּחָ֖ג בַּחֹ֥דֶשׁ הַשְּׁבִיעִֽי 1 This refers to the commandment establishing the Festival of Tabernacles. The purpose of this festival was to remind the Israelites that their ancestors had lived in temporary shelters when they traveled through the wilderness from Egypt to Canaan. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “The people of Israel should live in temporary shelters during the Festival of Tabernacles to remind them that their ancestors lived in shelters when they traveled through the wilderness from Egypt to Canaan.”
NEH 8 14 e1o1 bita-hq בְנֵֽי־יִשְׂרָאֵ֧ל 1 **Sons** here figuratively means “descendants.” In this context it includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “the people of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-hq]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 8 14 ur1h יֵשְׁב֨וּ…בַּסֻּכּ֛וֹת 1 As [8:15](../08/15.md) explains, these “huts” or temporary shelters were to be made from leafy tree branches. The people were supposed to live in these shelters as their home for a week. This was a way of remembering and celebrating the way Yahweh had protected their ancestors when they had only temporary shelters to live in. Alternate translation: “stay in temporary shelters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
NEH 8 14 e1o3 translate-unknown בֶּחָ֖ג בַּחֹ֥דֶשׁ הַשְּׁבִיעִֽי 1 This means the Festival of Tabernacles, which Yahweh commanded the people to celebrate in the seventh month of the Hebrew calendar. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
NEH 8 14 efg4 translate-ordinal בַּחֹ֥דֶשׁ הַשְּׁבִיעִֽי 1 This means the seventh month of the Hebrew calendar. Alternate translation: “month 7” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths]])
NEH 8 15 rq6s figs-parallelism וַאֲשֶׁ֣ר יַשְׁמִ֗יעוּ וְיַעֲבִ֨ירוּ ק֥וֹל 1 These two phrases mean similar things. They describe how the family and religious leaders were supposed to send a message to everyone in Judah. You do not need to repeat both phrases in your translation if that would be confusing for your readers. Alternate translation: “they should publicly proclaim” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
NEH 8 15 es8r figs-merism בְּכָל־עָרֵיהֶם֮ וּבִירוּשָׁלִַ֣ם 1 Here the story describes the whole population of the province of Judah by referring to its smaller cities and towns and to its large capital city of Jerusalem. The expression includes everything in between these two extremes. Alternate translation: “to everyone in Judah,” otherwise “both in Jerusalem and in all the towns” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
NEH 8 15 e1o5 צְא֣וּ הָהָ֗ר וְהָבִ֨יאוּ֙ עֲלֵי־זַ֨יִת֙ וַעֲלֵי־עֵ֣ץ שֶׁ֔מֶן וַעֲלֵ֤י הֲדַס֙ וַעֲלֵ֣י תְמָרִ֔ים וַעֲלֵ֖י עֵ֣ץ עָבֹ֑ת לַעֲשֹׂ֥ת סֻכֹּ֖ת כַּכָּתֽוּב 1 This is the content of the message that the leaders sent out to the people of Judah. Alternate translation: “The Law of Moses commands us to go out into the hill country and get branches from olive, wild olive, myrtle, palm, and other leafy trees to make shelters.”
NEH 8 15 f9c2 figs-synecdoche הָהָ֗ר 1 The phrase can refer either to a single mountain or to a range of mountains and hills, which seems to be the meaning here. In this case one mountain would be used figuratively to represent the entire range. Alternate translation: “into the hill country” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
NEH 8 15 jb2s figs-activepassive כַּכָּתֽוּב 1 as it is written If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you can say what is doing the action. Alternate translation: “as the Law of Moses commands us to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
NEH 8 16 e1o7 figs-ellipsis וַיֵּצְא֣וּ הָעָם֮ וַיָּבִיאוּ֒ 1 Here the story is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would ordinarily need in order to be complete. The meaning is clear from the context. Alternate translation: “the people went out and got branches” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
NEH 8 16 dl2y figs-idiom וַיַּעֲשׂוּ֩ לָהֶ֨ם סֻכּ֜וֹת אִ֤ישׁ עַל־גַּגּוֹ֙ 1 In this context, **a man** is an idiom that means “each person” and likely “each family.” It does not mean only an adult male. Alternate translation: “and each family built shelters on their roofs” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
NEH 8 16 e1o9 figs-explicit עַל־גַּגּוֹ֙ 1 In this culture, roofs were flat and stairs led up to them from outside the house. So a shelter could stand on the flat roof and the family could use it as a temporary home. Alternate translation: “on their flat roofs” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 8 16 e1p1 figs-explicit וּבְחַצְרֹ֣תֵיהֶ֔ם 1 In this culture, houses were built around an open courtyard. So a shelter could be set up there, within the walls of the house. Alternate translation: “and in the courtyards within the walls of their homes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 8 16 krx4 figs-metaphor בְחַצְר֖וֹת בֵּ֣ית הָאֱלֹהִ֑ים 1 As in [6:10](../06/10.md), here the book speaks of the temple figuratively as the “house of God,” as if it were God’s dwelling place. Alternate translation: “and in the temple courtyards” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 8 16 b74m figs-ellipsis וּבִרְח֖וֹב שַׁ֥עַר אֶפְרָֽיִם 1 Here the story is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would ordinarily need in order to be complete. The meaning is clear from the context, since this same location is described in [8:1](../08/01.md) and [8:3](../08/03.md). Alternate translation: “the square in front of the Water Gate” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
NEH 8 16 e1p3 translate-names שַׁ֣עַר הַמַּ֔יִם 1 This is the name of one of the gates of Jerusalem. See how you translated it in [3:26](../03/26.md), [8:1](../08/01.md), and [8:3](../08/03.md). Alternate translation: “the Water Gate” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 8 16 e1p5 figs-ellipsis וּבִרְח֖וֹב שַׁ֥עַר אֶפְרָֽיִם 1 Here the story is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would ordinarily need in order to be complete. The meaning is clear from the context. Alternate translation: “the square in front of the Ephraim Gate” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
NEH 8 16 e1p7 translate-names שַׁ֥עַר אֶפְרָֽיִם 1 This is the name of another one of the gates of Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “the Ephraim Gate” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 8 17 e1p9 figs-parallelism כָֽל־הַ֠קָּהָל הַשָּׁבִ֨ים מִן־הַשְּׁבִ֥י 1 These two phrases mean similar things. They refer to the people of Judah who had returned to their homeland from the exile. If it would be clearer in your language, you could combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “all the people of Judah who had returned home from exile” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
NEH 8 17 n31n figs-metaphor הַ֠קָּהָל 1 The Old Testament often uses this expression to refer figuratively to the main body of the people of Israel. The expression envisions the way God called them out of Egypt and brought them together as a nation. At this point in their history, this main body was the people who had returned to Judah from exile. Alternate translation: “all the people of Judah who had returned home from exile” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 8 17 e1q1 לֹֽא־עָשׂ֡וּ מִימֵי֩ יֵשׁ֨וּעַ בִּן־נ֥וּן כֵּן֙ בְּנֵ֣י יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל עַ֖ד הַיּ֣וֹם הַה֑וּא 1 Alternate translation: “the people of Israel had never before celebrated the Feast of Tabernacles by living in shelters, going all the way back to the time of Joshua the son of Nun”
NEH 8 17 e1q3 figs-explicit מִימֵי֩ יֵשׁ֨וּעַ בִּן־נ֥וּן…עַ֖ד הַיּ֣וֹם הַה֑וּא 1 Since it was Joshua who led the people of Israel into the land of Canaan, his time was the earliest time when they could have celebrated the Feast of Tabernacles to commemorate the journey from Egypt to Canaan. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “from the time that Joshua the son of Nun had first led them into this land until the present day” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 8 17 e1q5 figs-merism מִימֵי֩ יֵשׁ֨וּעַ בִּן־נ֥וּן…עַ֖ד הַיּ֣וֹם הַה֑וּא 1 Here the story is describing an entire time period by speaking of its beginning and ending in order to include everything in between. If it would be clearer in your language, you could express this meaning with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “for the entire time they had lived in this land” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
NEH 8 17 e1q7 figs-idiom מִימֵי֩ יֵשׁ֨וּעַ בִּן־נ֥וּן 1 The term **day** is used figuratively here to refer to a period of time. Alternate translation: “from the time of Joshua the son of Nun” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
NEH 8 17 e32u translate-names יֵשׁ֨וּעַ בִּן־נ֥וּן 1 Joshua is the name of a man, and Nun is the name of his father. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 8 17 cey3 bita-hq בְּנֵ֣י יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל 1 **Sons** here figuratively means “descendants.” In this context it includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “the people of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-hq]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 8 17 wyd6 figs-abstractnouns וַתְּהִ֥י שִׂמְחָ֖ה גְּדוֹלָ֥ה מְאֹֽד 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **rejoicing** with an adjective. Alternate translation: “the people were very joyful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
NEH 8 18 sfx4 figs-explicit וַ֠יִּקְרָא בְּסֵ֨פֶר תּוֹרַ֤ת הָאֱלֹהִים֙ 1 **He** means Ezra, as stated explicitly in [8:3](../08/03.md) and [8:13](../-8/13.md). The implication is that Ezra continued to read to the family and religious leaders who had asked him to keep teaching them. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Each day throughout the festival, Ezra continued to read to the leaders from the Law of Moses.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 8 18 g9rl figs-idiom י֣וֹם ׀ בְּי֔וֹם 1 This is an idiom that means “each day” or “every single day.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
NEH 8 18 j9aj figs-merism מִן־הַיּוֹם֙ הָֽרִאשׁ֔וֹן עַ֖ד הַיּ֣וֹם הָאַחֲר֑וֹן 1 The story is describing the entire festival by speaking of two extreme parts of it, its first day and its last day. If it would be clearer in your language, you could express this meaning with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “throughout the entire festival” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
NEH 8 18 c1cp figs-explicit וַיַּֽעֲשׂוּ־חָג֙ שִׁבְעַ֣ת יָמִ֔ים וּבַיּ֧וֹם הַשְּׁמִינִ֛י עֲצֶ֖רֶת כַּמִּשְׁפָּֽט 1 **They** means the people of Judah. The **ordinance** refers to the command in the Law of Moses to end the Festival of Tabernacles by gathering all of the Israelites together for a closing ceremony after seven days. Alternate translation: “The people of Judah celebrated the Festival of Tabernacles for seven days, and on the eighth day they held a closing ceremony together, as the Law of Moses commanded.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 9 intro sj1h 0 # Nehemiah 09 General Notes<br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>This chapter and the next one form a single section.<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Prayer to God<br><br>The people prayed and thanked God for his care for them and the blessings he gave to them. They also confessed their sin of disobeying him. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/bless]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/confess]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])<br><br>### Learning from their ancestor’s mistakes<br>This chapter teaches that the Jews learned from the mistakes of their ancestors. They became determined to worship Yahweh alone, to not intermarry with other peoples, and to worship Yahweh as the law of Moses instructed them. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])<br><br>### Recalling the great power of God<br>It was common to recall the great things God did for Israel. This is a reminder to Israel of God’s power. It is intended to bring the people to repentance and proper worship of Yahweh. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/repent]])
NEH 9 1 w8w8 translate-hebrewmonths וּבְיוֹם֩ עֶשְׂרִ֨ים וְאַרְבָּעָ֜ה לַחֹ֣דֶשׁ הַזֶּ֗ה 1 **This month** means the seventh month of that year according to the Hebrew calendar, as specified in [8:2](../08/02.md) and [8:14](../08/14.md). The Law of Moses said to observe the Festival of Tabernacles from the fifteenth through the twenty-second days of that month. The implication is that after that joyful celebration, the people were given one full day to rest and prepare for the gathering that this chapter describes. It had a different and more solemn purpose. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “On the twenty-fourth day of the seventh month of that year, two days after the joyful Festival of Tabernacles had ended” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 9 1 lm7m figs-activepassive נֶאֶסְפ֤וּ בְנֵֽי־יִשְׂרָאֵל֙ 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the people of Israel gathered together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
NEH 9 1 f1a3 figs-explicit נֶאֶסְפ֤וּ בְנֵֽי־יִשְׂרָאֵל֙ 1 The implication is that people from all the cities and towns the province of Judah gathered together again in Jerusalem. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “people from all over Judah gathered together again in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 9 1 f1a5 bita-hq בְנֵֽי־יִשְׂרָאֵל֙ 1 **Sons** here figuratively means “descendants.” In this context it includes both men and women, and it refers specifically to the Israelites who were now living in Judah. Alternate translation: “the people of Israel” or “people from all over Judah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-hq]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 9 1 irv4 translate-symaction וּבְשַׂקִּ֔ים וַאֲדָמָ֖ה עֲלֵיהֶֽם 1 The people did these things to show symbolically how sorry they were for their sins. If it would be clearer in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “The people refrained from eating, wore rough clothing, and put dust on their heads to show that they were sorry for their sins.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 9 1 f1a7 figs-synecdoche וַאֲדָמָ֖ה עֲלֵיהֶֽם 1 **Them** in this sentence refers to the people, but it does not mean that they covered themselves entirely in dust. The story is using the whole person to refer figuratively to one part of the person, the head, which is where people in this culture put dust to express sorrow. Alternate translation: “the people … put dust on their heads” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
NEH 9 2 f1a9 figs-explicit וַיִּבָּֽדְלוּ֙ זֶ֣רַע יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל מִכֹּ֖ל בְּנֵ֣י נֵכָ֑ר 1 The Israelites were conducting this ceremony as a special act of repentance for how they and their ancestors had disobeyed God. They were acknowledging how they had failed to fulfill the special assignment God had given them of modeling the blessings of living according to his ways. So it would not have been appropriate for people from other nations to take part in the ceremony. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “The people of Israel did not allow anyone from any other nation to take part in this ceremony, because it was going to be a time of repentance for how they and their ancestors had disobeyed Yahweh.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 9 2 xbs1 bita-plants זֶ֣רַע יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל 1 Here **seed** is a metaphor meaning “offspring.” It is a comparison: Just as plants produce seeds that grow into many more plants, so people can have many offspring. So the term refers figuratively to a person’s descendants. Here it means the descendants of Israel. Alternate translation: “the people of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-plants]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 9 2 qx58 bita-hq מִכֹּ֖ל בְּנֵ֣י נֵכָ֑ר 1 **Sons** here figuratively means “descendants.” Alternate translation: “all people from other nations” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-hq]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 9 2 vhc6 figs-metaphor וַיַּעַמְד֗וּ וַיִּתְוַדּוּ֙ עַל־חַטֹּ֣אתֵיהֶ֔ם וַעֲוֺנ֖וֹת אֲבֹתֵיהֶֽם 1 **Stood** here probably does not mean “standing up,” since the next verse says that they “rose up,” which probably means that they got up from kneeling. As they were showing sorrow for their sins, they would likely have knelt to worship God, as in [8:6](../08/06.md). So **stood** probably means instead that they remained in place, by implication for some time, and made a thorough confession. Alternate translation: “they remained in place as they confessed all the wrong things that they and their ancestors had done” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 9 3 q5p1 translate-symaction וַיָּק֨וּמוּ֙ עַל־עָמְדָ֔ם 1 **Rose up** here likely means “stood up.” As in [8:5](../08/05.md), the people would have stood up to show respect as they listened to the reading from the Law of Moses. Alternate translation: “Then the people stood up where they were” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
NEH 9 3 f1b3 וַֽיִּקְרְא֗וּ בְּסֵ֨פֶר 1 The people themselves did not read from the book. “They” here likely means Ezra and the Levites, who read similarly to the crowd that gathered on the occasion described in 8:1–12. Alternate translation: “as their leaders read to them”
NEH 9 3 qe6e translate-unknown בְּסֵ֨פֶר תּוֹרַ֧ת יְהוָ֛ה אֱלֹהֵיהֶ֖ם 1 This is another of the various ways that this story describes a book containing the Law of Moses. Alternate translation: “from the Law of Moses” or “from the law that Yahweh had given through Moses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
NEH 9 3 je9t translate-unknown רְבִעִ֣ית הַיּ֑וֹם וּרְבִעִית֙ 1 In this culture the day and the night were each divided into four equal parts of three hours each. So this means that the people listened to a reading of the Law for three hours, and then they spent the next three hours in prayer and confession. Alternate translation: “for three hours, and then for another three hours” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
NEH 9 4 bc94 figs-explicit וַיָּ֜קָם עַֽל־מַֽעֲלֵ֣ה הַלְוִיִּ֗ם יֵשׁ֨וּעַ וּבָנִ֜י קַדְמִיאֵ֧ל שְׁבַנְיָ֛ה בֻּנִּ֥י שֵׁרֵבְיָ֖ה בָּנִ֣י כְנָ֑נִי 1 The name of the stairs suggests that the men listed were Levites. That is, they were descendants of Levi who had the special assignment of helping the priests. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could suggest this in your translation. Alternate translation: “Eight Levites named Jeshua, Bani, Kadmiel, Shebaniah, Bunni, Sherebiah, Bani, and Kenani climbed up the stairs leading to the platform.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 9 4 f1b5 translate-unknown וַיָּ֜קָם עַֽל־מַֽעֲלֵ֣ה הַלְוִיִּ֗ם 1 In context, the **stairs of the Levites** seem to be stairs that led up to the platform that was built for the occasion described in chapter 8, or to another platform or platforms similar to it that allowed religious leaders to be seen and heard during large gatherings. The stairs likely had this name because they enabled the Levites to move back and forth from up on the platform to down among the people. Here they also serve as a raised platform of their own, on which the Levites can stand and be seen and heard. Alternate translation: “climbed up onto the stairs to the platform” or “the stairs that had been built for the Levites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
NEH 9 4 f1b7 figs-idiom וַיָּ֜קָם עַֽל 1 **Rose up** in this context seems to mean that these men climbed up onto the stairs and stood on them. Alternate translation: “climbed up onto” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
NEH 9 4 f1b9 grammar-connect-time-simultaneous וַיָּ֜קָם 1 It seems that in this verse the story is describing something that happened during the second three-hour period, at the same time when the people were praying and confessing. You could indicate this with an introductory phrase. Alternate translation: “While the people were doing this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]])
NEH 9 4 zl5j translate-names יֵשׁ֨וּעַ וּבָנִ֜י קַדְמִיאֵ֧ל שְׁבַנְיָ֛ה בֻּנִּ֥י שֵׁרֵבְיָ֖ה בָּנִ֣י כְנָ֑נִי 1 These are the names of eight men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 9 4 u4pu figs-explicit וַֽיִּזְעֲקוּ֙ בְּק֣וֹל גָּד֔וֹל אֶל־יְהוָ֖ה אֱלֹהֵיהֶֽם 1 The implication is that they did this to offer public prayers of confession on behalf of the people, and perhaps also to guide the people to pray themselves on particular topics. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “They prayed to Yahweh their God on behalf of the people, speaking loudly so that everyone could hear them.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 9 5 j96x הַלְוִיִּ֡ם 1 This phrase indicates that the eight men listed were Levites. If you said in your translation that the eight men listed in [8:4](../08/04.md) were also Levites, here you could say, “Eight more Levites named.”
NEH 9 5 yk5b translate-names יֵשׁ֣וּעַ וְ֠קַדְמִיאֵל בָּנִ֨י חֲשַׁבְנְיָ֜ה שֵׁרֵֽבְיָ֤ה הֽוֹדִיָּה֙ שְׁבַנְיָ֣ה פְתַֽחְיָ֔ה 1 These are the names of eight men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 9 5 m3eu translate-symaction ק֗וּמוּ 1 Here **rise up** seems to mean “get up from a kneeling posture.” This would have symbolized that a new part of the ceremony was beginning. The people were to move from sorrowful confession to a resolute and joyful rededication of their community to God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
NEH 9 5 f1c1 figs-idiom בָּרֲכוּ֙ אֶת־יְהוָ֣ה אֱלֹֽהֵיכֶ֔ם מִן־הָעוֹלָ֖ם עַד־הָעוֹלָ֑ם 1 The Levites speak these words to the people. They are not telling the people to praise God during all the time from eternity past to eternity future. Rather, they are using an idiom, “from eternity to eternity,” to mean that Yahweh is the God who has always existed and will always exist. If it would be clearer in your language, you could put it in those terms. Alternate translation: “Praise Yahweh, your God, who has always existed and will always exist.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
NEH 9 5 tve4 figs-aside וִיבָֽרְכוּ֙ שֵׁ֣ם כְּבוֹדֶ֔ךָ 1 In this sentence, the Levite who is speaking turns abruptly from addressing the people to addressing God. (“Your” in the previous sentence meant the people, while **your** here refers to God.) This is somewhat like the places earlier in the book where Nehemiah stops addressing his readers and speaks directly to God in prayer. However, here the people are meant to hear and do what is being described. So if it would be clearer in your language, you could express these as words that continue to be directed to the people, as in the previous sentence. Alternate translation: “Praise his glorious name” (See: Aside)
NEH 9 5 f1c3 bita-hq וִיבָֽרְכוּ֙ שֵׁ֣ם כְּבוֹדֶ֔ךָ 1 As in [1:9](../01/09.md), **name** is a figurative way of referring to the fame or reputation of a person. This is described by something associated with it, how well known someone’s name is and how people react to hearing it. God’s reputation, in turn, is based on what he has done and what this reveals about who he is, and so his “name” would also represent that. Alternate translation: “praise you for who you are and what you have done” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-hq]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
NEH 9 5 f1c5 figs-metaphor וּמְרוֹמַ֥ם עַל־כָּל־בְּרָכָ֖ה וּתְהִלָּֽה 1 Here God’s name is described in a spatial metaphor as being higher than or lifted up above blessing and praise. This means figuratively that all of the things that people could do to honor and praise God could never be sufficient to acknowledge how much honor and praise he actually deserves. Alternate translation: “we can never bless you and praise you as much as you deserve” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 9 5 f1c7 figs-abstractnouns עַל־כָּל־בְּרָכָ֖ה וּתְהִלָּֽה 1 **Blessing** and **praise** are abstract nouns that refer to the act of openly honoring someone for their character and actions. If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate the idea behind these words with the verb forms of these words. Alternate translation: “we can never bless you and praise you as much as you deserve” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
NEH 9 5 f1c9 figs-doublet עַל־כָּל־בְּרָכָ֖ה וּתְהִלָּֽה 1 In this context, **blessing** and **praise** mean basically the same thing. If it would be clearer in your language, you could combine these words. Alternate translation: “we can never acknowledge you sufficiently” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
NEH 9 6 f1d1 figs-explicit אַתָּה־ה֣וּא יְהוָה֮ לְבַדֶּךָ֒ 1 At the end of the previous verse, the Levites started speaking to God, but they still meant for the people to hear their words and do what they said. Now the Levites are addressing God directly in prayer. If it would be clearer in your language, you could indicate this with an introductory phrase. Alternate translation: “Then these Levites prayed to God and said, ‘Yahweh, you are the only true God.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 9 6 f1d3 figs-idiom אַתָּה־ה֣וּא יְהוָה֮ לְבַדֶּךָ֒ 1 This means “you alone are the one” or “you are the only one.” Alternate translation: “You, Yahweh, are the only true God.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
NEH 9 6 f1d5 translate-unknown הַשָּׁמַיִם֩ שְׁמֵ֨י הַשָּׁמַ֜יִם 1 In the ancient Hebrew cosmology, the first phrase likely referred to the sky, which was envisioned as a solid dome above the earth (see the note to [1:9](../01/09.md)). The second phrase likely referred to the realm beyond the sky, which was understood to be the dwelling place of God. Alternate translation: “the sky and everything beyond it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
NEH 9 6 k5l3 figs-metaphor וְכָל־צְבָאָ֗ם 1 **Host** means army. The “host of heaven” is likely a figurative expression for the stars, which seem like a large army in the sky. However, this phrase might refer to heavenly beings which dwell in heaven with God. Alternate translation: “and all the stars” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 9 6 f1d7 וְאַתָּ֖ה מְחַיֶּ֣ה אֶת־כֻּלָּ֑ם 1 **Them** means everything living on the land and in the seas. Alternate translation: “You give life to all of these creatures” or “you are the one who created all of these living things”
NEH 9 6 f1d9 figs-metaphor וּצְבָ֥א הַשָּׁמַ֖יִם לְךָ֥ מִשְׁתַּחֲוִֽים 1 Earlier in the sentence the **host of heaven** was a figurative way of describing the stars as if they were an army. Now here the stars themselves figuratively represent the angels of heaven. Alternate translation: “all the angels bow down and worship you.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 9 7 f1e1 figs-explicit בָּחַ֨רְתָּ֙ בְּאַבְרָ֔ם 1 Abram was the ancestor of the Israelites. God chose to make him and his descendants a community that would model for the whole world the blessings of living according to his ways. The Levites mention this first because it is the very beginning of the Israelites’ history as God’s chosen people. They will describe the rest of this history, up to their present day, in the rest of their prayer. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could explain this. Alternate translation: “chose Abram to be the ancestor of your people.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 9 8 us45 figs-explicit וְהוֹצֵאת֖וֹ מֵא֣וּר כַּשְׂדִּ֑ים 1 Throughout their prayer, the Levites assume that the people listening will understand the significance of the details they mention for the Israelites’ history as God’s chosen people. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could give the reason why God brought Abram out of this city. Alternate translation: “He was living among the Chaldean people in the city of Ur, but you told him to leave there and go to a land that you would give to his descendants.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 9 8 f1e5 translate-names מֵא֣וּר כַּשְׂדִּ֑ים 1 This is the name of a city and a people group. Alternate translation: “the city of Ur, where the Chaldean people lived” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 9 8 f1e7 figs-explicit וְשַׂ֥מְתָּ שְּׁמ֖וֹ אַבְרָהָֽם 1 Once again the Levites assume that their listeners will understand the significance of this detail. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could give the reason why God changed Abram’s name to Abraham. Alternate translation: “You changed his name to Abraham, ‘father of a multitude,’ because he would be like a father to many nations.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 9 8 f1e9 figs-metaphor וּמָצָ֣אתָ אֶת־לְבָבוֹ֮ נֶאֱמָ֣ן לְפָנֶיךָ֒ 1 Here **found** is an idiom for someone discovering something to be true. It does not mean that God was looking for something he had lost. Alternate translation: “You recognized that he was completely loyal to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 9 8 f1f1 figs-metaphor וּמָצָ֣אתָ אֶת־לְבָבוֹ֮ נֶאֱמָ֣ן לְפָנֶיךָ֒ 1 Here Abraham’s **heart** figuratively represents his thoughts and will, that is, his inner being. Alternate translation: “You recognized that he was completely loyal to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 9 8 ej7e figs-metaphor וּמָצָ֣אתָ אֶת־לְבָבוֹ֮ נֶאֱמָ֣ן לְפָנֶיךָ֒ 1 Here **face** is a metaphor for a person’s perception, referring figuratively to God’s perception of Abraham. Alternate translation: “You recognized that he was completely loyal to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 9 8 f1f3 figs-idiom וְכָר֨וֹת עִמּ֜וֹ הַבְּרִ֗ית 1 To **cut** a covenant is a Hebrew idiom for making a solemn agreement with a person. The expression comes from the way animals were cut into pieces during covenant ceremonies to show what the parties wanted God to do to anyone who broke the agreement. But the meaning here is idiomatic. It is not a direct reference to such a ceremony, only to the making of the covenant. Alternate translation: “you made an agreement with him” or “you made a promise to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
NEH 9 8 f1f5 bita-plants לָתֵ֡ת אֶת־אֶרֶץ֩…לָתֵ֣ת לְזַרְע֑וֹ 1 **Seed** is a metaphor meaning “offspring.” Alternate translation: “to give his descendants the land” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-plants]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 9 8 vbx8 translate-names הַכְּנַעֲנִ֨י הַחִתִּ֜י הָאֱמֹרִ֧י וְהַפְּרִזִּ֛י וְהַיְבוּסִ֥י וְהַגִּרְגָּשִׁ֖י 1 These are the names of six people groups. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 9 8 f1f7 figs-personification וַתָּ֨קֶם֙ אֶת־דְּבָרֶ֔יךָ 1 As in [5:13](../05/13.md), **words** means the promises that God made to Abraham, and **stand** means stay in place rather than go away. The Levites are speaking of God’s promises figuratively as if they were a living thing that could move around or not. Alternate translation: “you have kept all of your promises” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
NEH 9 8 f1f9 כִּ֥י צַדִּ֖יק אָֽתָּה 1 Alternate translation: “because you always do what is right”
NEH 9 9 p3f4 figs-merism וַתֵּ֛רֶא אֶת־עֳנִ֥י אֲבֹתֵ֖ינוּ בְּמִצְרָ֑יִם וְאֶת־זַעֲקָתָ֥ם שָׁמַ֖עְתָּ עַל־ יַם־סֽוּף 1 Here the Levites are describing how, centuries later, God rescued their ancestors, who were Abraham’s descendants, from slavery in Egypt. In this verse they describe that entire experience generally by reference to its first episode and its final episode, to include everything in between. (In [9:10](../09/10.md) and [9:11](../09/11.md) they will add further specific details.) If it would be clearer in your language, you could describe the entire experience in a single phrase here. (However, you could also explain these episodes separately. See the next two notes.) Alternate translation: “You rescued our fathers from slavery in Egypt by defeating Pharaoh.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
NEH 9 9 vp1y figs-abstractnouns וַתֵּ֛רֶא אֶת־עֳנִ֥י אֲבֹתֵ֖ינוּ בְּמִצְרָ֑יִם 1 **Affliction** is an abstract noun that refers to the way the Israelites suffered when Pharaoh, the king of Egypt, forced them to serve him as slaves. If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate the idea behind it with a verb such as “suffer.” Alternate translation: “you saw how badly our ancestors were suffering as slaves in Egypt” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
NEH 9 9 f1g1 figs-explicit וַתֵּ֛רֶא אֶת־עֳנִ֥י אֲבֹתֵ֖ינוּ בְּמִצְרָ֑יִם 1 The implication is that God not only saw how the Israelites were suffering, God was moved to action out of compassion for them. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “you saw how badly our ancestors were suffering as slaves in Egypt, and so you delivered them from slavery” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 9 9 f1g3 bita-hq אֲבֹתֵ֖ינוּ 1 **Fathers** here figuratively means “ancestors.” Alternate translation: “our ancestors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-hq]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 9 9 j256 figs-explicit אֶת־זַעֲקָתָ֥ם שָׁמַ֖עְתָּ עַל־ יַם־סֽוּף 1 The Levites continue to rehearse the details of Israelite history without explaining their significance because they assume their listeners will already understand this. This is a reference to something that happened after God had freed their ancestors from slavery and they had left Egypt. Pharaoh regretted letting them go and pursued them with his army. The Israelites were trapped helplessly against the shores of the Red Sea as Pharaoh’s army approached. So they cried out to God for rescue. Alternate translation: “you answered their prayer when they cried to you for help from the shores of the Red Sea” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 9 9 f1g5 figs-idiom אֶת־זַעֲקָתָ֥ם שָׁמַ֖עְתָּ 1 **Heard** is an idiom that means that God both heard and answered the Israelites’ prayer, in the way described in [9:11](../09/11.md). Alternate translation: “you answered their prayer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
NEH 9 9 f1g7 translate-names יַם־סֽוּף 1 This is the name of a body of water near Egypt. Alternate translation: “the Red Sea” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 9 10 ge61 figs-explicit וַ֠תִּתֵּן אֹתֹ֨ת וּמֹֽפְתִ֜ים בְּפַרְעֹ֤ה וּבְכָל־עֲבָדָיו֙ וּבְכָל־עַ֣ם אַרְצ֔וֹ 1 If it would be helpful to your readers, you could explain why God did this. Alternate translation: “You did amazing things that were signs to Pharaoh, his officials, and the people of Egypt that you are the one true God and that they should not have enslaved your people.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 9 10 s54a figs-doublet וַ֠תִּתֵּן אֹתֹ֨ת וּמֹֽפְתִ֜ים 1 **Signs** and **wonders** are words that mean similar things. They both describe powerful things that God did. If it would be clearer in your language, you could combine these words. Alternate translation: “you did miracles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
NEH 9 10 i7c3 grammar-connect-logic-result כִּ֣י יָדַ֔עְתָּ כִּ֥י הֵזִ֖ידוּ עֲלֵיהֶ֑ם 1 **They** means Pharaoh, his officials, and the people of Egypt. **Them** means the Israelites. If it would be clearer in your language, you could put this sentence first in the verse, since it gives the reason for the results that are described in the rest of the verse. You could show the connection by using a word like “so” after this sentence. Alternate translation: “You knew that Pharaoh, his officials, and the people of Egypt were oppressing our ancestors, and so.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
NEH 9 10 m6zr figs-metonymy וַתַּֽעַשׂ־לְךָ֥ שֵׁ֖ם כְּהַיּ֥וֹם הַזֶּֽה 1 As in [9:5](../09/05.md), **name** is a figurative way of referring to the fame or reputation of a person. Alternate translation: “When you did this, you won the reputation that you sill have today” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-hq]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
NEH 9 11 n7jm figs-explicit וְהַיָּם֙ בָּקַ֣עְתָּ לִפְנֵיהֶ֔ם 1 In [9:10](../09/10.md) the Levites provided more specific details about how God delivered the Israelites from slavery in Egypt. In this verse they focus on the details of the final episode in the deliverance experience. Still, they assume that their readers will be familiar with these details and understand their significance. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could explain these details more fully. Alternate translation: “When the Israelites left Egypt, Pharaoh pursued them with his army, and they were trapped by the shores of the Red Sea. But you opened up the sea in front of them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 9 11 d1kp translate-unknown וְהַיָּם֙ 1 As in [9:9](../09/09.md), this refers to the Red Sea, a body of water near Egypt. Alternate translation: “the Red Sea” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
NEH 9 11 f1g9 figs-metaphor לִפְנֵיהֶ֔ם 1 Here **face** figuratively refers the front of a group. Alternate translation: “in front of them.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 9 11 f1h1 וַיַּֽעַבְר֥וּ בְתוֹךְ־הַיָּ֖ם בַּיַּבָּשָׁ֑ה 1 **They** refers to the Israelites. Alternate translation: “so that they were able escape through the Red Sea by walking on dry ground”
NEH 9 11 f1h3 figs-metaphor וְֽאֶת־רֹ֨דְפֵיהֶ֜ם הִשְׁלַ֧כְתָּ בִמְצוֹלֹ֛ת 1 This is a figurative way of describing how that God made the waters of the Red Sea come back over the Egyptian army so that all of its soldiers were drowned. It was as if God had thrown them into deep water. Alternate translation: “but you made the waters come back and drown the army that was chasing them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 9 11 f1h5 translate-unknown רֹ֨דְפֵיהֶ֜ם 1 Alternate translation: “the soldiers of the Egyptian army, who were chasing them.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
NEH 9 11 l5ar figs-simile כְּמוֹ־אֶ֖בֶן בְּמַ֥יִם עַזִּֽים 1 In this image, the Levites describe God throwing the Egyptians into the sea the way a person would throw a stone into water. The picture is that just as a stone would disappear completely under the water, the Egyptian soldiers did the same. Alternate translation: “They disappeared completely, the way a stone would that was thrown into deep water.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 9 12 n4i2 grammar-connect-logic-result וּבְעַמּ֣וּד עָנָ֔ן הִנְחִיתָ֖ם יוֹמָ֑ם וּבְעַמּ֥וּד אֵשׁ֙ לַ֔יְלָה לְהָאִ֣יר לָהֶ֔ם אֶת־הַדֶּ֖רֶךְ אֲשֶׁ֥ר יֵֽלְכוּ־בָֽהּ 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the first phrase gives the reason for the result that is described in the second phrase. Alternate translation: “To show the people the way that they should go, you sent a pillar of cloud to go ahead of them during the day and a pillar of fire to light up the way at night.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
NEH 9 12 m7vx figs-explicit וּבְעַמּ֣וּד עָנָ֔ן הִנְחִיתָ֖ם יוֹמָ֑ם וּבְעַמּ֥וּד אֵשׁ֙ לַ֔יְלָה לְהָאִ֣יר לָהֶ֔ם אֶת־הַדֶּ֖רֶךְ אֲשֶׁ֥ר יֵֽלְכוּ־בָֽהּ 1 If it would be helpful to your readers, you could explain why did this. Alternate translation: “To get from Egypt to the land you had promised them, the Israelites had to cross a trackless desert. To show them what way they should go, you went ahead of them in a pillar of cloud during the day and a pillar of fire by night. The pillar of fire lit up the way ahead.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 9 13 z2ds figs-idiom וְעַ֤ל הַר־סִינַי֙ יָרַ֔דְתָּ וְדַבֵּ֥ר עִמָּהֶ֖ם 1 **Came down** is a way of saying that God appeared to the people. Since God spoke to them from heaven, he did not actually come down from heaven to earth. So this is a figurative expression. Alternate translation: “you appeared to the people of Israel at Mount Sinai, where you spoke to them from heaven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
NEH 9 13 f1h7 translate-names הַר־סִינַי֙ 1 This is the name of a mountain. Alternate translation: “Mount Sinai” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 9 13 zut5 figs-doublet מִשְׁפָּטִ֤ים יְשָׁרִים֙ וְתוֹר֣וֹת אֱמֶ֔ת חֻקִּ֥ים וּמִצְוֺ֖ת טוֹבִֽים 1 **Just judgments** and **laws of truth** mean similar things. The expressions **good statutes** and **commandments** also mean something similar to each other and to the first two expressions. If it would be clearer in your language, you could combine all of these phrases into one comprehensive phrase. Alternate translation: “many trustworthy instructions about how to live in the right way,” otherwise “instructions and rules that are just and reliable, and laws and commands that are good” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
NEH 9 13 f1h9 מִשְׁפָּטִ֤ים 1 This term refers to Yahweh giving the Israelites instructions in the law. It may or may not include a sense of Yahweh passing sentence as a judge. Alternate translation: “instructions”
NEH 9 14 w3q6 figs-explicit וְאֶת־שַׁבַּ֥ת קָדְשְׁךָ֖ הוֹדַ֣עַתָ לָהֶ֑ם 1 If it would be helpful to your readers, you could explain what the Sabbath was. Alternate translation: “You commanded them to set apart the seventh day of the week as the Sabbath, a special day for rest and worship” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 9 14 h9f4 figs-doublet וּמִצְו֤וֹת וְחֻקִּים֙ וְתוֹרָ֔ה צִוִּ֣יתָ לָהֶ֔ם 1 **Commandments**, **statutes**, and **law** mean similar things. Together they are a comprehensive description of the Law of Moses. If it would be clearer in your language, you could combine them in a single phrase. Alternate translation: “You told them to obey everything you had commanded,” otherwise “you gave them commands and rules and laws” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]. A doublet can involve the use of more than two words.)
NEH 9 14 f1i3 figs-metaphor בְּיַ֖ד מֹשֶׁ֥ה 1 Here **hand** figuratively represents control and action. Alternate translation: “you gave them to Moses to give to the people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 9 14 f1i5 figs-metaphor עַבְדֶּֽךָ 1 The Old Testament often describes Moses by the title “servant of Yahweh.” While Moses was also God’s servant in a more literal sense, this title is a figurative expression that indicates that God used Moses to give his Law to his people, the way a master would have a servant deliver a message. Alternate translation: “your special messenger” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 9 15 f1i7 grammar-connect-logic-result וְ֠לֶחֶם מִשָּׁמַ֜יִם נָתַ֤תָּה לָהֶם֙ לִרְעָבָ֔ם 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the first phrase gives the reason for the resulting action that is described in the second phrase. Alternate translation: “because they were hungry, you provided a special food for them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
NEH 9 15 f1i9 figs-explicit וְ֠לֶחֶם מִשָּׁמַ֜יִם נָתַ֤תָּה לָהֶם֙ לִרְעָבָ֔ם 1 If it would be helpful to your readers, you could explain why the people were hungry. Alternate translation: “because they were hungry in the desert where no crops could grow, you provided a special food for them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 9 15 f1j1 translate-unknown וְ֠לֶחֶם מִשָּׁמַ֜יִם 1 This is a figurative way of describing the special food that God provided for the Israelites in the desert. Because it had not grown from the ground, it was as if God had sent it from heaven. The Israelites gave this food the name “manna.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could call it by this name after providing a non-figurative description. Alternate translation: “and a special food, manna.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
NEH 9 15 f1j3 figs-synecdoche וְ֠לֶחֶם מִשָּׁמַ֜יִם 1 This expression used bread to refer figuratively to food in general. It describes all food by the name of one kind of good, bread. Alternate translation: “special food” (See [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
NEH 9 15 f1j5 grammar-connect-logic-result מַ֗יִם מִסֶּ֛לַע הוֹצֵ֥אתָ לָהֶ֖ם לִצְמָאָ֑ם 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the first phrase gives the reason for the resulting action that is described in the second phrase. Alternate translation: “because they were thirsty, you made water flow out of a rock for them to drink” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
NEH 9 15 f1j7 figs-explicit מַ֗יִם מִסֶּ֛לַע הוֹצֵ֥אתָ לָהֶ֖ם לִצְמָאָ֑ם 1 If it would be helpful to your readers, you could explain why the people were thirsty. Alternate translation: “because they were thirsty in the desert where there was no water, you made water flow out of a rock for them to drink” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 9 15 f1j9 וַתֹּ֣אמֶר לָהֶ֗ם לָבוֹא֙ לָרֶ֣שֶׁת 1 Alternate translation: “you commanded them to enter and occupy”
NEH 9 15 f1k1 translate-symaction הָאָ֔רֶץ אֲשֶׁר־נָשָׂ֥אתָ אֶת־יָדְךָ֖ לָתֵ֥ת לָהֶֽם 1 In this culture, a person would raise their hand when they swore an oath. Here the Levites are describing the action of swearing an oath figuratively by referring to the gesture associated with that action, raising a hand. Alternate translation: “the land that you swore to give them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
NEH 9 15 f1k3 figs-explicit הָאָ֔רֶץ אֲשֶׁר־נָשָׂ֥אתָ אֶת־יָדְךָ֖ לָתֵ֥ת לָהֶֽם 1 The Levites assume that their listeners will understand that this means the land of Canaan. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the land of Canaan, which you swore to give them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 9 16 g6tt וְהֵ֥ם וַאֲבֹתֵ֖ינוּ הֵזִ֑ידוּ 1 **They** could mean the Israelites at the time of Moses, and “our fathers” could mean the Israelites after the time of Moses. However, the next verse says that the people who showed this pride and stubbornness disobeyed God’s command to enter Canaan and instead chose a leader to take them back to Egypt. So this expression could also mean “they, yes, our fathers.” Alternate translation: “they, our own ancestors, were arrogant.”
NEH 9 16 m753 bita-hq וַאֲבֹתֵ֖ינוּ 1 **Fathers** here figuratively means “ancestors.” Alternate translation: “our ancestors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-hq]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 9 16 t1he figs-parallelism וַיַּקְשׁוּ֙ אֶת־עָרְפָּ֔ם וְלֹ֥א שָׁמְע֖וּ 1 These two phrases mean similar things. The Levites are using the repetition to acknowledge how serious it was that their own ancestors disobeyed God’s command. If it would be clearer in your language, you could combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “they stubbornly refused to obey,” otherwise “they were proud and stubborn, so they refused to obey” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
NEH 9 16 v9ib figs-idiom וַיַּקְשׁוּ֙ אֶת־עָרְפָּ֔ם 1 This is a figurative way of saying that the people stubbornly refused to obey. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 9 16 f1k5 figs-idiom וְלֹ֥א שָׁמְע֖וּ אֶל־מִצְוֺתֶֽיךָ 1 **Listen** in this context is an idiom that means not just to hear a commandment, but to obey it. Alternate translation: “They refused to obey what you commanded them to do.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
NEH 9 17 f1k7 וַיְמָאֲנ֣וּ לִשְׁמֹ֗עַ 1 Alternate translation: “And they would not obey”
NEH 9 17 f1k9 וַיְמָאֲנ֣וּ לִשְׁמֹ֗עַ 1 This is a reference to the command that is described in [9:15](../09/15.md). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “they would not obey your command to enter and occupy the land of Canaan”
NEH 9 17 f1l1 figs-explicit וְלֹא־זָכְר֤וּ נִפְלְאֹתֶ֨יךָ֙ אֲשֶׁ֣ר עָשִׂ֣יתָ עִמָּהֶ֔ם 1 The implication is that if they had done this, they would not have been afraid to go into Canaan and fight to take possession of it. They would have realized that the same God who defeated Pharaoh to deliver them from slavery could also defeat the nations living in Canaan. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “They did not remember the miracles that you had done to deliver them from Egypt, and so they were afraid that the nations that lived in Canaan would defeat them.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 9 17 f1l3 figs-metaphor וַיַּקְשׁוּ֙ אֶת־עָרְפָּ֔ם 1 As in [9:16](../09/16.md), this is a metaphor meaning that the people stubbornly refused to obey. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
NEH 9 17 gd2b figs-explicit וַיִּתְּנוּ־רֹ֛אשׁ לָשׁ֥וּב לְעַבְדֻתָ֖ם בְּמִרְיָ֑ם 1 The Israelites would know that this referred to their ancestors wanting to return to Egypt. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “they disobeyed God and appointed a leader to take them back to Egypt where they had been slaves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 9 17 f1l5 bita-hq רֹ֛אשׁ 1 **Head** here is a figurative way of saying “leader.” Alternate translation: “leader” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-hq]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 9 17 f1l7 figs-abstractnouns לָשׁ֥וּב לְעַבְדֻתָ֖ם 1 **Servitude** is an abstract noun that refers to the condition of slavery that the Israelites experienced in Egypt. If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate the idea behind this word with a concrete noun such as “slave.” Alternate translation: “back to Egypt where they had been slaves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
NEH 9 17 f1l9 figs-abstractnouns אֱל֨וֹהַּ סְלִיח֜וֹת 1 **Forgiveness** is an abstract noun that represents a readiness not to hold a person’s offenses against them. If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate the idea behind this word with a verb such as “forgive.” Alternate translation: “a God who is always ready to forgive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
NEH 9 17 f1m1 figs-doublet חַנּ֧וּן וְרַח֛וּם 1 **Gracious** and **compassionate** mean similar things. The Levites use them together to emphasize how merciful God is. If it would be clearer in your language, you could combine these words into a single expression. Alternate translation: “genuinely merciful,” otherwise “who acts kindly and mercifully toward us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
NEH 9 17 f1m3 figs-metaphor אֶֽרֶךְ־אַפַּ֥יִם 1 This is a figurative way of saying that a person does not lose their temper easily or quickly. Alternate translation: “very patient” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 9 17 f1m5 figs-abstractnouns וְרַב־חֶ֖סֶד 1 **Faithfulness** is an abstract noun that describes the quality of a person who will dependably keep their word and fulfill their responsibilities. **Covenant faithfulness** refers specifically to God keeping all the promises he made to the people of Israel. If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate the idea behind this word with an expression such as “keep promises.” Alternate translation: “you always keep the promises you make to your people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 9 17 c986 figs-metaphor וְרַב־חֶ֖סֶד 1 Here the Levites speak of this quality of Yahweh as if it were an abundant food crop that he could share with people. Alternate translation: “who loves his people very much” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 9 17 ncd6 figs-explicit וְלֹ֥א עֲזַבְתָּֽם 1 If it would be helpful to your readers, you could elaborate on what this means. Alternate translation: “so you did not abandon them there in the desert” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 9 18 hw32 figs-explicit אַ֗ף כִּֽי־עָשׂ֤וּ לָהֶם֙ עֵ֣גֶל מַסֵּכָ֔ה וַיֹּ֣אמְר֔וּ זֶ֣ה אֱלֹהֶ֔יךָ אֲשֶׁ֥ר הֶעֶלְךָ֖ מִמִּצְרָ֑יִם 1 The Levites continue to recount details of Israelite history and assume that their listeners will understand the significance of these details. This was a particularly grievous act of disobedience, which is why the Levites say “even when.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could explain the significance in your translation. Alternate translation: “Even when the Israelites made an idol in the shape of a calf and gave it credit for delivering them from slavery in Egypt, right at Mount Sinai where you were giving Moses the Ten Commandments” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 9 18 ind6 translate-unknown וַֽיַּעֲשׂ֔וּ נֶאָצ֖וֹת גְּדֹלֽוֹת 1 **Blasphemy** means to worship or honor something other than God as divine. The Old Testament stresses repeatedly that this is offensive and insulting to God. Alternate translation: “When they did this, they insulted you horribly.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
NEH 9 19 eqh4 וְאַתָּה֙ בְּרַחֲמֶ֣יךָ הָֽרַבִּ֔ים לֹ֥א עֲזַבְתָּ֖ם בַּמִּדְבָּ֑ר 1 Alternate translation: “Even so, because you are always merciful, you did not abandon them in the desert.”
NEH 9 19 x6bf grammar-connect-logic-result אֶת־עַמּ֣וּד הֶ֠עָנָן לֹא־סָ֨ר מֵעֲלֵיהֶ֤ם בְּיוֹמָם֙ לְהַנְחֹתָ֣ם בְּהַדֶּ֔רֶךְ וְאֶת־עַמּ֨וּד הָאֵ֤שׁ בְּלַ֨יְלָה֙ לְהָאִ֣יר לָהֶ֔ם וְאֶת־הַדֶּ֖רֶךְ אֲשֶׁ֥ר יֵֽלְכוּ־בָֽהּ 1 See how you translated the similar sentence in [10:12](../10/12.md). If it would be clearer in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the first phrase gives the reason for the result that is described in the second phrase. Alternate translation: “To show the people the way that they should go, the pillar of cloud continued to go ahead of them during the day, and the pillar of fire continued to light up the way ahead at night.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
NEH 9 20 buh1 וְרוּחֲךָ֨ הַטּוֹבָ֔ה 1 This seems to be a reference to God in person. If your language uses capitalization or some other convention to indicate that a word is referring to God, you could use it here. Alternate translation: “your good Spirit”
NEH 9 20 e7m4 grammar-connect-logic-result וּמַנְךָ֙ לֹא־מָנַ֣עְתָּ מִפִּיהֶ֔ם וּמַ֛יִם נָתַ֥תָּה לָהֶ֖ם לִצְמָאָֽם 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could reverse the order of the phrases in each clause, since in both cases the first phrase gives the reason for the result that is described in the second phrase. Alternate translation: “Because they were hungry, you continued to feed them with manna, and because they were thirsty, you gave them water.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
NEH 9 20 f1m7 translate-unknown וּמַנְךָ֙ 1 This was the special food that Yahweh provided for the Israelites in the desert. See the note in [9:15](../09/15.md). Alternate translation: “special food” or “that special food, manna.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
NEH 9 20 qka1 לֹא־מָנַ֣עְתָּ מִפִּיהֶ֔ם 1 Here the Levites describe being nourished by food by referring figuratively to something associated with it, the mouth that eats the food. If it would be clearer in your language, you could describe this more generally. Alternate translation: “you continued to feed them”
NEH 9 20 gyd6 figs-litotes לֹא־מָנַ֣עְתָּ מִפִּיהֶ֔ם 1 This is a figure of speech that expresses a strong positive meaning by using a negative word with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. Alternate translation: “you generously gave them manna” (See: Litotes)
NEH 9 21 f1m9 grammar-connect-logic-result וְאַרְבָּעִ֥ים שָׁנָ֛ה כִּלְכַּלְתָּ֥ם בַּמִּדְבָּ֖ר לֹ֣א חָסֵ֑רוּ 1 The first phrase is implicitly giving a reason for the result that is described in the second phrase. If it would be clearer in your language, you could make that explicit. “Because you took care of them for forty years in the desert, they did not lack anything all that time.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
NEH 9 21 f1n1 figs-explicit וְרַגְלֵיהֶ֖ם לֹ֥א בָצֵֽקוּ 1 If it would be helpful to your readers, you could explain why the feet of the Israelites would otherwise have swollen as they traveled through the desert. Alternate translation: “their feet did not swell up, even though they were walking all the time.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 9 22 f462 וַתִּתֵּ֨ן לָהֶ֤ם מַמְלָכוֹת֙ וַעֲמָמִ֔ים 1 If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say explicitly how Yahweh did this. Alternate translation: “You helped our ancestors to defeat stronger armies so that they could conquer kingdoms and the people who lived in them.”
NEH 9 22 xc6v figs-doublet וַתִּתֵּ֨ן לָהֶ֤ם מַמְלָכוֹת֙ וַעֲמָמִ֔ים 1 **Kingdoms** and **peoples** mean similar things. They are two different ways of describing the groups that the Israelites defeated. The repetition emphasizes how remarkable it was for Yahweh to enable the Israelites to defeat these stronger opponents. If it would be clearer in your language, you could combine these words into a single expression. Alternate translation: “you enabled them to defeat the nations that were living there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
NEH 9 22 kgg1 figs-metaphor וַֽתַּחְלְקֵ֖ם לְפֵאָ֑ה 1 Here the land of Canaan is described figuratively as if it were a regular shape that had defined corners. Alternate translation: “you enabled them to possess every part of the land” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 9 22 zt5p figs-parallelism אֶת־אֶ֣רֶץ סִיח֗וֹן וְאֶת־אֶ֨רֶץ֙ מֶ֣לֶךְ חֶשְׁבּ֔וֹן 1 These two phrases mean the same thing. The repetition is used for clarity. You do not need to repeat both phrases in your translation if that would be confusing for your readers. Alternate translation: “the land over which King Sihon ruled from the city of Heshbon” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
NEH 9 22 xf4v translate-names סִיח֗וֹן…ע֥וֹג 1 These are the names of two kings. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 9 22 bkk3 translate-names חֶשְׁבּ֔וֹן…הַבָּשָֽׁן 1 These are names of the places where these two kings ruled. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 9 23 w96j figs-simile וּבְנֵיהֶ֣ם הִרְבִּ֔יתָ כְּכֹכְבֵ֖י הַשָּׁמָ֑יִם 1 **Their** refers to the Israelites. This is a comparison, a figure of speech that says the number of children the Israelites had was like the number of stars in the sky. Alternate translation: “You enabled them to have as many children as there are stars in the sky.” (See: Simile)
NEH 9 23 t5pb figs-hyperbole וּבְנֵיהֶ֣ם הִרְבִּ֔יתָ כְּכֹכְבֵ֖י הַשָּׁמָ֑יִם 1 This is an exaggeration for emphasis. Alternate translation: “You enabled them to have a very large number of children.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
NEH 9 23 f1n5 bita-hq וּבְנֵיהֶ֣ם 1 **Sons** here figuratively means “descendants.” In this context it includes both boys and girls. Alternate translation: “and children” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-hq]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
NEH 9 23 f1n7 figs-explicit וַתְּבִיאֵם֙ אֶל־הָאָ֔רֶץ אֲשֶׁר־אָמַ֥רְתָּ לַאֲבֹתֵיהֶ֖ם לָב֥וֹא לָרָֽשֶׁת 1 This is the same **land** described in verse 15, the land of Canaan. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “You brought them back to the land of Canaan, the land that you had commanded the previous generation to enter and occupy.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 9 23 f1n9 figs-gendernotations לַאֲבֹתֵיהֶ֖ם 1 While **fathers** figuratively means “ancestors” throughout much of this prayer, in this case the word is intended more literally. It means the previous generation of Israelites, who had disobeyed when God told them the first time to occupy the land. But since both men and women were involved in the disobedience, you could use a term that would not limit the meaning to men, if that would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “to the previous generation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
NEH 9 24 f1o1 figs-parallelism וַיָּבֹ֤אוּ הַבָּנִים֙ וַיִּֽירְשׁ֣וּ אֶת־הָאָ֔רֶץ וַתַּכְנַ֨ע לִפְנֵיהֶ֜ם אֶת־יֹשְׁבֵ֤י הָאָ֨רֶץ֙ הַכְּנַ֣עֲנִ֔ים 1 These two phrases mean similar things. The Israelites of the next generation possessing the land is equivalent to Yahweh defeating its inhabitants when they fought against them. If it would be clearer in your language, you could combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “You enabled the next generation of Israelites to defeat the people who were living in the land of Canaan so that they could occupy the land themselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
NEH 9 24 qpd4 figs-gendernotations הַבָּנִים֙ 1 This means literally the children of the generation that refused to enter the land. But since both men and women were involved in occupying the land, you could use a term that would not limit the meaning to men, if that would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “the next generation of Israelites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
NEH 9 24 it8a figs-metonymy וַתַּכְנַ֨ע לִפְנֵיהֶ֜ם אֶת־יֹשְׁבֵ֤י הָאָ֨רֶץ֙ 1 Here **face** figuratively means the front of a group, in this case the Israelite army that was fighting against the Canaanites. Alternate translation: “when the Israelites opposed them in battle, you defeated the people who were living in the land.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
NEH 9 24 l77q figs-doublet יֹשְׁבֵ֤י הָאָ֨רֶץ֙ הַכְּנַ֣עֲנִ֔ים 1 These two phrases mean similar things. The repetition is used for clarity. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could combine them. Alternate translation: “the Canaanites who lived there,” otherwise “the people who lived here in this land, the descendants of Canaan” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
NEH 9 24 vz5v figs-explicit וַֽתִּתְּנֵ֖ם בְּיָדָ֑ם וְאֶת־מַלְכֵיהֶם֙ וְאֶת־עַֽמְמֵ֣י הָאָ֔רֶץ לַעֲשׂ֥וֹת בָּהֶ֖ם כִּרְצוֹנָֽם 1 The Levites continue to recount details of Israelite history and assume that their listeners will understand the significance of these details. This sentence means, “You gave the Canaanites into the hands of the Israelites, that is, you gave their kings and the Canaanite people into the hands of the Israelites.” The implication is that once the Israelites had defeated the armies that the kings were leading, they could then do anything they wanted with the people who were living in the land. In other words, Yahweh gave the kings “into their hands” by defeating them, and as a result, the people were “in their hands” to do with whatever they wanted. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “You enabled them to defeat the armies that the Canaanite kings were leading, and then they could do whatever they wanted with the people of Canaan.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 9 24 v454 figs-metaphor וַֽתִּתְּנֵ֖ם בְּיָדָ֑ם 1 Here **hand** figuratively represents power and control. To give something into a person’s hand is to give that person control over that thing. Alternate translation: “enabled the Israelites to defeat them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 9 25 yzu6 וַֽיִּלְכְּד֞וּ עָרִ֣ים בְּצֻרוֹת֮ וַאֲדָמָ֣ה שְׁמֵנָה֒ 1 **They** means the Israelites who were entering Canaan.
NEH 9 25 gs7a figs-metonymy וַאֲדָמָ֣ה שְׁמֵנָה֒ 1 This means land that can produce abundantly and make its inhabitants fat (as described later in this verse). The rich character of the soil is being described figuratively by something associated with it, the well-fed character of the people it sustains. Alternate translation: “fertile land” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
NEH 9 25 ac3r וַיִּֽירְשׁ֡וּ 1 This means that they took possession of the things on the list that follows from people who had already built or planted them. Alternate translation: “they took possession of”
NEH 9 25 y6gx figs-activepassive בֹּר֨וֹת חֲצוּבִ֜ים 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you can say who did the action. (This verse is not saying that the Israelites did three things, capture cities, possess houses, and dig cisterns.) Alternate translation: “cisterns that someone else had already dug” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
NEH 9 25 ke4u translate-unknown בֹּר֨וֹת 1 Cisterns are underground reservoirs where people store water. In this area they were typically hewn out of the underlying rock. Alternate translation: “water storage areas” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
NEH 9 25 f1o3 translate-unknown וְעֵ֥ץ מַאֲכָ֖ל 1 This means trees that grow things that are good to eat. In this area, these would have included both fruit and nut trees. Alternate translation: “and fruit and nut trees” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
NEH 9 25 s544 figs-metaphor וַֽיִּשְׂבְּעוּ֙ 1 It is clear from the context that this was likely true literally, but this statement could also be a figurative way of saying that just as a person who has more than enough to eat stops being concerned, so the Israelites became complacent and stopped thinking about Yahweh. Alternate translation: “and they became complacent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 9 26 t19v figs-doublet וַיַּמְר֨וּ וַֽיִּמְרְד֜וּ בָּ֗ךְ 1 **Disobeyed** and **rebelled** mean similar things. The Levites use them together to emphasize how serious an offense it was for the Israelites to turn against Yahweh after he had blessed them so greatly. If it would be clearer in your language, you could combine these words. Alternate translation: “they turned against you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
NEH 9 26 q9sz figs-metaphor וַיַּשְׁלִ֤כוּ אֶת־תּוֹרָֽתְךָ֙ אַחֲרֵ֣י גַוָּ֔ם 1 The Levites are saying that figuratively the Israelites treated the law as if it were a worthless item that a person would toss away. Alternate translation: “They considered your law worthless and paid no attention to it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 9 26 vbj5 הֵעִ֥ידוּ בָ֖ם 1 Alternate translation: “warned them about all the wrong things they were doing”
NEH 9 26 rr76 translate-unknown וַֽיַּעֲשׂ֔וּ נֶאָצ֖וֹת גְּדוֹלֹֽת 1 As in [9:18](../09/18.md), **blasphemy** means to worship or honor something other than God as divine. This is likely a reference to the way the Israelites started worshipping other gods. (That is why the prophets needed to try to “bring them back” to Yahweh.) Alternate translation: “they worshipped other gods” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
NEH 9 27 k998 וַיָּצֵ֖רוּ לָהֶ֑ם 1 **They** means the enemies, and “them” means the Israelites. Alternate translation: “The enemies of the Israelites made them suffer.”
NEH 9 27 tz5a כְרַחֲמֶ֣יךָ הָֽרַבִּ֗ים 1 Alternate translation: “because of your great mercy” or “because you are very merciful”
NEH 9 27 z213 translate-unknown תִּתֵּ֤ן לָהֶם֙ מֽוֹשִׁיעִ֔ים 1 This is a reference to the time in Israelite history when God sent the judges to lead the Israelite tribes in fighting back against their enemies. Alternate translation: “you sent the judges to rescue them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
NEH 9 27 ku2m figs-metaphor וְיוֹשִׁיע֖וּם מִיַּ֥ד צָרֵיהֶֽם 1 Here **hand** figuratively represents power and control. Alternate translation: “they rescued them from their enemies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 9 28 u77m grammar-connect-logic-contrast וּכְנ֣וֹחַ לָהֶ֔ם יָשׁ֕וּבוּ לַעֲשׂ֥וֹת רַ֖ע לְפָנֶ֑יךָ 1 This sentence draws a contrast between how the Israelites should have responded when God delivered them and how they actually responded. You could begin the sentence with a word like “but” or “however” or “nevertheless” to indicate this contrast. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
NEH 9 28 ds4w figs-abstractnouns וּכְנ֣וֹחַ לָהֶ֔ם 1 **Rest** is an abstract noun that indicates that the Israelites had relief from suffering and that there was no more war in the land after they defeated their enemies. If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate the same idea with a different phrase. Alternate translation: “after they had defeated their enemies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
NEH 9 28 s2tc figs-metaphor יָשׁ֕וּבוּ לַעֲשׂ֥וֹת רַ֖ע לְפָנֶ֑יךָ 1 Here **face** seems to refer figuratively to a person’s opinion or judgment, by association with the way they use the eyes in their face to see things and the way their facial expression shows what they think of those things. So this would mean that the Israelites did things that Yahweh considered to be wrong. Alternate translation: “they went back to doing things that you consider wrong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 9 28 ml8w figs-metaphor וַתַּֽעַזְבֵ֞ם בְּיַ֤ד אֹֽיְבֵיהֶם֙ וַיִּרְדּ֣וּ בָהֶ֔ם 1 Here **hand** figuratively represents power and control. Alternate translation: “you allowed their enemies to defeat them, and they ruled over them harshly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 9 28 puz2 grammar-connect-logic-result וַתַּֽעַזְבֵ֞ם 1 This phrase indicates that the sentence it introduces explains the results of what the previous sentence described. Alternate translation: “and so you left them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
NEH 9 28 t9wx figs-doublet וַיָּשׁ֨וּבוּ֙ וַיִּזְעָק֔וּךָ 1 **They** means the Israelites. **Returned** and **cried out** mean similar things. Both terms describe how the Israelites realized that they should have remained loyal to Yahweh and that they desperately needed his help. If it would be clearer in your language, you could use one expression for both terms. Alternate translation: “The Israelites asked you again to help them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
NEH 9 28 y9f7 כְּֽרַחֲמֶ֖יךָ 1 Alternate translation: “because of your mercy” or “because you are merciful”
NEH 9 29 pm9h figs-metonymy וַתָּ֨עַד בָּהֶ֜ם 1 Yahweh did not personally tell the Israelites all the wrong things they were doing. Rather, as [9:26](../09/26.md) explains by using the same expression, Yahweh sent prophets to do this. The Levites are describing the prophets figuratively by association with Yahweh, whose message they were bringing. Alternate translation: “you sent prophets to warn the Israelites about all the wrong things they were doing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
NEH 9 29 un5i figs-metonymy לַהֲשִׁיבָ֣ם אֶל־תּוֹרָתֶ֗ךָ 1 The prophets were actually trying to make the people loyal to Yahweh himself once again, by calling them to obey Yahweh’s law. The Levites are describing Yahweh by reference to something associated with him, his law. If it would be clearer in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “to make them loyal to you once again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
NEH 9 29 e4dt figs-idiom וְלֹא־שָׁמְע֤וּ לְמִצְוֺתֶ֨יךָ֙ 1 As in [9:16](../09/16.md), **listen** in this context is an idiom that means not just to hear a command, but to obey it. If your language has a word for “listen” that also means “obey,” you could use it here. Alternate translation: “did not heed your commands” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
NEH 9 29 una2 figs-metonymy וּבְמִשְׁפָּטֶ֣יךָ חָֽטְאוּ־בָ֔ם 1 The people were actually sinning against Yahweh himself. The Levites are describing Yahweh by reference to something associated with him, his “judgments,” meaning the instructions in his law. If it would be clearer in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “they sinned against you by disobeying your instructions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
NEH 9 29 gh1m וּבְמִשְׁפָּטֶ֣יךָ 1 As in [9:13](../09/13.md), this term refers to Yahweh giving the Israelites instructions in the law. It may or may not include a sense of Yahweh passing sentence as a judge. Alternate translation: “And concerning your instructions”
NEH 9 29 x7ep figs-metaphor אֲשֶׁר־יַעֲשֶׂ֥ה אָדָ֖ם וְחָיָ֣ה בָהֶ֑ם 1 **Live** here does not mean physically live or die. Rather, “live” figuratively means to be spiritually alive in relationship with God and to be happy and blessed as a result. The difference between being alive in this way and being separated from God is like the difference between being alive and being dead. Alternate translation: “If a person follows your law, then he is spiritually alive and happy and blessed.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 9 29 k1ew figs-metaphor וַיִּתְּנ֤וּ כָתֵף֙ סוֹרֶ֔רֶת וְעָרְפָּ֥ם הִקְשׁ֖וּ 1 These are images of an ox refusing to allow its owner to put a yoke on its shoulders. Here they are a metaphor that represents the people being stubborn. Alternate translation: “They became stubborn” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 9 29 n3zk figs-idiom וְלֹ֥א שָׁמֵֽעוּ 1 Like **listen** earlier in this verse, “hear” in this context is an idiom that means not just to hear a command, but to obey it. If your language has a word for “hear” that also means “obey,” you could use it here. Alternate translation: “did not heed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
NEH 9 30 gf8r figs-metonymy שָׁנִ֣ים רַבּ֔וֹת 1 This is a figurative expression for “a long time.” The Levites are describing time figuratively by referring to something associated with it, the years in which time is measured. Alternate translation: “for a long time.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
NEH 9 30 hbe9 וַתָּ֨עַד בָּ֧ם בְּרוּחֲךָ֛ בְּיַד־נְבִיאֶ֖יךָ 1 As in [9:20](../09/20.md), **spirit** here seems to be a reference to God in person. If your language uses capitalization or some other convention to indicate that a word is referring to God, you could use it here. Alternate translation: “you spoke through the prophets by your Spirit to warn the Israelites about all the wrong things they were doing.”
NEH 9 30 f3le figs-metaphor בְּיַד־נְבִיאֶ֖יךָ 1 This is a figurative way of saying that God had the prophets deliver his message to the Israelites, the way a servant would carry a message in his hand. Alternate translation: “through the prophets” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 9 30 k9y7 figs-metonymy וְלֹ֣א הֶאֱזִ֑ינוּ 1 The Levites are describing the act of listening figuratively here by reference to something associated with it, the ear that hears. Alternate translation: “but they refused to listen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
NEH 9 30 n169 figs-idiom וְלֹ֣א הֶאֱזִ֑ינוּ 1 Listening in this context means not just to hear but to obey. Alternate translation: “but they refused to obey” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
NEH 9 30 tqa5 figs-metaphor וַֽתִּתְּנֵ֔ם בְּיַ֖ד עַמֵּ֥י הָאֲרָצֹֽת 1 Here **hand** represents power and control. See how you translated this expression in verse 27, where it occurs twice. Alternate translation: “you allowed the neighboring peoples to defeat them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 9 30 ym8i grammar-connect-logic-result וַֽתִּתְּנֵ֔ם 1 This word indicates that the sentence it introduces explains the results of what the previous sentence described. Alternate translation: “As a result, you gave them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
NEH 9 31 neh8 grammar-connect-logic-result וּֽבְרַחֲמֶ֧יךָ 1 This sentence draws a contrast between what God could have done to the people, based on what they deserved, and what God actually did in his mercy. You could begin the sentence with a word like “but” or “however” to indicate this contrast. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
NEH 9 31 cl3n figs-parallelism לֹֽא־עֲשִׂיתָ֥ם כָּלָ֖ה וְלֹ֣א עֲזַבְתָּ֑ם 1 These two phrases do not describe separate things. They mean something similar. They describe what the people deserved for refusing to obey Yahweh. The first phrase describes what the people would have experienced in their lives. They would have been completely destroyed. The second phrase describes what they would have experienced in their relationship with Yahweh. He would have given up on them. If it would be clearer in your language, you could combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “You did not abandon them to complete destruction.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
NEH 9 31 l7xw וְלֹ֣א עֲזַבְתָּ֑ם 1 Alternate translation: “you did not give up on them”
NEH 9 31 xk1s figs-doublet חַנּ֥וּן וְרַח֖וּם 1 **Gracious** and **merciful** mean similar things. The Levites use them together to emphasize that God did not punish the Israelites the way they deserved. You do not need to repeat both words in your translation if that would make the meaning less clear for your readers. Alternate translation: “very merciful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
NEH 9 32 m4l9 grammar-connect-logic-result וְעַתָּ֣ה 1 This phrase indicates that the Levites believe that what they are about to ask for should be the results of what they have just described. Specifically, God helped the Israelites in the past, even though they did not deserve it, because he is merciful. And so the Levites are praying for God to be merciful and help the Israelites now, even though they do not deserve it. Alternate translation: “and that is why we are praying this now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
NEH 9 32 d4hq figs-doublet הָאֵ֨ל הַגָּד֜וֹל הַגִּבּ֣וֹר וְהַנּוֹרָא֮ 1 As in [1:5](../01/05.md), **great** and **fearsome** mean similar things. “Mighty” also means something similar. The Levites use all of these words together to emphasize how much respect God deserves. You do not need to repeat all three words in your translation if that would be confusing for your readers. However, there is a slight difference in meaning, and you could also bring that out in your translation. “Great” and “mighty” refer to how powerful God is objectively. “Fearsome” reflects how people should respond to God’s greatness subjectively. They should “fear” God. This does not mean that they should be afraid of him, but that they should show him respect and reverence. Alternate translation: “the God who deserves total respect” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]. A doublet can involve the use of more than two words.)
NEH 9 32 r379 figs-parallelism שׁוֹמֵ֣ר הַבְּרִ֣ית וְהַחֶסֶד֒ 1 As in [1:5](../01/05.md), **covenant** and **covenant faithfulness** mean similar things. The Levites the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to emphasize how certain it is that God will keep his promises. You do not need to repeat both phrases in your translation if that would be confusing for your readers. However, there is a slight difference in meaning, and you could bring that out in your translation even if you combine the phrases. The “covenant” is God’s promise to Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob and their descendants. “Covenant faithfulness” is a character quality of God. He is inwardly disposed to keep all of his promises, and so he always does so faithfully. So you could say something like, “you always keep your promises faithfully because of who you are.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
NEH 9 32 j5fk figs-metaphor אַל־יִמְעַ֣ט לְפָנֶ֡יךָ אֵ֣ת כָּל־הַתְּלָאָ֣ה 1 Here the Levites speak figuratively of something being small to mean that it is insignificant and not worthy of being noticed and addressed. Alternate translation: “do not regard our sufferings as insignificant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 9 32 ta8y figs-metonymy אַל־יִמְעַ֣ט לְפָנֶ֡יךָ אֵ֣ת כָּל־הַתְּלָאָ֣ה 1 As in [9:28](../09/28.md), **face** refers figuratively to a person’s opinion or judgment, by association with the way they use the eyes in their face to see things and the way their facial expression shows what they think of those things. So the Levites would be praying that God would not regard their suffering as insignificant. Alternate translation: “do not regard our sufferings as insignificant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
NEH 9 32 f7a5 figs-personification הַתְּלָאָ֣ה אֲֽשֶׁר־מְ֠צָאַתְנוּ 1 Here the Levites speak of the suffering that the Israelites have experienced as if it were a living thing that has looked for them and found them in order to cause them harm. Alternate translation: “the sufferings we have experienced” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
NEH 9 32 q7fm figs-abstractnouns הַתְּלָאָ֣ה אֲֽשֶׁר־מְ֠צָאַתְנוּ 1 **Hardship** is an abstract noun that refers to the suffering that the Israelites have experienced as a result of being conquered and dominated by foreign nations. If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate the idea behind it with a verb such as “suffer.” Alternate translation: “how much we have suffered” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
NEH 9 32 u6i9 bita-hq וְלַאֲבֹתֵ֖ינוּ 1 **Fathers** here figuratively means “ancestors.” Alternate translation: “our ancestors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-hq]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 9 32 pl1f figs-explicit מִימֵי֙ מַלְכֵ֣י אַשּׁ֔וּר עַ֖ד הַיּ֥וֹם הַזֶּֽה 1 The implication is that the Levites are talking about the suffering that the Israelites have experienced specifically because foreign nations have conquered them, beginning with the Assyrians who first conquered the northern part of Israel. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “from the time Israel was first conquered by the Assyrian kings until now.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 9 32 r5ha figs-merism מִימֵי֙ מַלְכֵ֣י אַשּׁ֔וּר עַ֖ד הַיּ֥וֹם הַזֶּֽה 1 This is a figure of speech in which the Levites are describing an entire time period by reference to its beginning and end, in order to include everything in between. Alternate translation: “the entire time we have been under foreign domination” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
NEH 9 33 ctq5 וְאַתָּ֣ה צַדִּ֔יק עַ֖ל כָּל־הַבָּ֣א עָלֵ֑ינוּ 1 Here the word **righteous** refers to God’s actions, as a reflection of his character. Alternate translation: “we acknowledge you have done the right thing in allowing all this to happen to us”
NEH 9 33 ac1s figs-personification כָּל־הַבָּ֣א עָלֵ֑ינוּ 1 Here the Levites speak of the suffering that the Israelites have experienced as if it were a living thing that has come up to them in order to cause them harm. Alternate translation: “everything we have suffered” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
NEH 9 33 z3i5 grammar-connect-logic-result כִּֽי־אֱמֶ֥ת עָשִׂ֖יתָ וַאֲנַ֥חְנוּ הִרְשָֽׁעְנוּ 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could put this sentence before the previous one, since it gives the reason for the results that are described in that other sentence. You could show the connection by using a word like “so” after this sentence. Alternate translation: “You have always done what you said you would do, and you have never abandoned us. But we have done many wrong things. And so” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
NEH 9 34 w8h1 bita-hq וַאֲבֹתֵ֔ינוּ 1 **Fathers** here figuratively means “ancestors.” Alternate translation: “our ancestors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-hq]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 9 34 fh22 figs-parallelism לֹ֥א עָשׂ֖וּ תּוֹרָתֶ֑ךָ וְלֹ֤א הִקְשִׁ֨יבוּ֙ אֶל־מִצְוֺתֶ֔יךָ וּלְעֵ֣דְוֺתֶ֔יךָ 1 These two phrases mean similar things. The Levites use the repetition to confess how completely the people have disobeyed what God told them to do. If it would be clearer in your language, you could combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “have completely disobeyed everything you told them to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
NEH 9 34 z9gd figs-idiom וְלֹ֤א הִקְשִׁ֨יבוּ֙ אֶל 1 Not paying attention to a command, like not listening to it, is a figurative way of saying not obeying it. Alternate translation: “have disobeyed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
NEH 9 34 x4lc figs-doublet מִצְוֺתֶ֔יךָ וּלְעֵ֣דְוֺתֶ֔יךָ 1 These two terms mean similar things. You do not need to repeat both of them in your translation if that would make the meaning less clear for your readers. Alternate translation: “everything you told them to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
NEH 9 34 z9wl וּלְעֵ֣דְוֺתֶ֔יךָ אֲשֶׁ֥ר הַעִידֹ֖תָ בָּהֶֽם 1 As in [9:26](../09/26.md), [9:29](../09/29.md), and [9:30](../09/30), this expression means to warn someone about what they are doing. So here it is referring to “the warnings that you gave them to warn them.” You do not need to repeat the idea of “warn” twice in your translation if that would be confusing for your readers. Alternate translation: “the many warnings you gave them”
NEH 9 35 af8m figs-explicit וְהֵ֣ם בְּמַלְכוּתָם֩…לֹ֣א עֲבָד֑וּךָ 1 **Them** means the people and their leaders, as listed in [9:32](../09/32/.md) and [9:34](../09/34.md). **Serve** is another way of saying “obey.” The implied meaning is that the Israelites did not obey Yahweh even when they had a kingdom of their own, before other nations conquered them. Alternate translation: “They did not obey you even while they had a kingdom of their own.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 9 35 nxv9 figs-abstractnouns וּבְטוּבְךָ֨ הָרָ֜ב אֲשֶׁר־נָתַ֣תָּ לָהֶ֗ם 1 **Goodness** is an abstract noun that refers to all the good things that God gave to the Israelites. If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate the idea behind it with an adjective such as “good.” Alternate translation: “even while they enjoyed the good things you gave them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
NEH 9 35 ibf9 figs-doublet וּבְאֶ֨רֶץ הָרְחָבָ֧ה וְהַשְּׁמֵנָ֛ה 1 These two terms mean similar things. They both indicate that the land gave to the Israelites was good for growing crops. There was a lot of room in it, and the soil was good. If it would be clearer in your language, you could combine these terms. Alternate translation: “the fertile land” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
NEH 9 35 h9n5 figs-metonymy וּבְאֶ֨רֶץ…וְהַשְּׁמֵנָ֛ה 1 As in [9:25](../09/25.md), “fat” means land that can produce abundantly and feed its inhabitants well. The rich character of the soil is being described figuratively by something associated with it, the well-fed character of the people it sustains. Alternate translation: “fertile land” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
NEH 9 35 z2vd figs-metaphor אֲשֶׁר־נָתַ֥תָּ לִפְנֵיהֶ֖ם 1 Here **face** figuratively means the front of a person. This expression is saying that God “put this land right in front of” the Israelites, emphasizing that God enabled them to defeat their enemies to get it. It was a gift from God, not something that the Israelites got for themselves. Alternate translation: “that you freely gave to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 9 35 gdm7 figs-metaphor וְֽלֹא־שָׁ֔בוּ מִמַּֽעַלְלֵיהֶ֖ם הָרָעִֽים 1 Here **turning away from** something is a figurative expression that means giving it up. Alternate translation: “they would not stop doing wrong things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 9 36 q7xj הִנֵּ֛ה 1 **Behold** is a term meant to focus the attention of the listener on what the speaker is about to say. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could use some emphatic term or expression in your language that would have this same effect.
NEH 9 36 qh7f figs-idiom הַיּ֖וֹם 1 This does not necessarily mean on this particular day, but rather at this time. Alternate translation: “This is how things are now.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
NEH 9 36 qai2 bita-hq לַאֲבֹתֵ֗ינוּ 1 **Fathers** here figuratively means “ancestors.” Alternate translation: “our ancestors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-hq]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 9 36 xzc8 figs-doublet אֶת־פִּרְיָהּ֙ וְאֶת־טוּבָ֔הּ 1 These two expressions mean similar things. They both refer to the crops that grow in the land the Israelites were promised. If it would be clearer in your language, you could combine these expressions. Alternate translation: “all the good things that grow here” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
NEH 9 36 bdr6 figs-synecdoche פִּרְיָהּ֙ 1 This means all the crops of the land, not just the fruit that grew on the trees. The Levites are using one particular food to refer figuratively to all food. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
NEH 9 36 g6hs figs-abstractnouns טוּבָ֔הּ 1 **Goodness** is an abstract noun that refers to the tasty and nourishing food that grows in the land. If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate the idea behind it with a different phrase. Alternate translation: “the good things that grow here” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
NEH 9 36 lw6u הִנֵּ֛ה 1 **Behold** is a term meant to focus the attention of the listener on what the speaker is about to say. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could use some emphatic term or expression in your language that would have this same effect.
NEH 9 37 d5cr figs-abstractnouns וּתְבוּאָתָ֣הּ מַרְבָּ֗ה 1 **Produce** (pró-duce) is an abstract noun that refers to the crops that grow in the land. If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate the idea behind it with a verb such as “produce” (pro-dúce). Alternate translation: “all that this land produces” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
NEH 9 37 q3dz figs-explicit לַמְּלָכִ֛ים אֲשֶׁר־נָתַ֥תָּה עָלֵ֖ינוּ בְּחַטֹּאותֵ֑ינוּ 1 The implication is that foreign kings now rule over the Israelites because Yahweh is punishing the Israelites for disobeying him. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the kings who now rule over us because you are punishing us for disobeying you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 9 37 x15l figs-parallelism לַמְּלָכִ֛ים אֲשֶׁר־נָתַ֥תָּה עָלֵ֖ינוּ…וְעַ֣ל גְּ֠וִיֹּתֵינוּ מֹשְׁלִ֤ים וּבִבְהֶמְתֵּ֨נוּ֙ 1 These two phrases mean similar things. In each phrase, the Levites are describing how foreign kings now rule over the Israelites. The second phrase intensifies the first by specifying that the Israelites serve these kings as slaves, and that the Israelites do not even own the animals they work with. You do not need to repeat both phrases in your translation if that might be confusing for your readers. Alternate translation: “You have allowed foreign kings to rule over us as slaves who own nothing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
NEH 9 38 g7s3 grammar-connect-logic-result וּבְכָל־זֹ֕את 1 This phrase indicates that the sentence it introduces explains the actions that the people are taking in response to everything that the Levites have just said. That is, they are doing this because they and their ancestors had disobeyed and Yahweh had punished them. Alternate translation: “In light of all this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
NEH 9 38 t4ag אֲנַ֛חְנוּ כֹּרְתִ֥ים אֲמָנָ֖ה 1 The word “faithful’ here does not mean that the covenant will act in a certain way, but that the people themselves are promising to be faithful to this covenant. Alternate translation: “we are making a covenant that we promise to keep”
NEH 9 38 xee9 אֲנַ֛חְנוּ כֹּרְתִ֥ים 1 As in [9:8](../09/08.md), to “cut” a covenant is a Hebrew [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]] for making a solemn agreement with a person. Review the note there if that would be helpful. Alternate translation: “we are making a covenant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
NEH 9 38 l6qa figs-explicit וְכֹתְבִ֑ים וְעַל֙ הֶֽחָת֔וּם שָׂרֵ֥ינוּ לְוִיֵּ֖נוּ כֹּהֲנֵֽינוּ 1 The implication is that the Israelites had scribes write this covenant on a scroll, the leaders wrote their names on it representing all the people, and then the Israelites sealed the document to make it official and to preserve it. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “We are writing this covenant on a scroll. The community leaders, the Levites, and the priests will sign it. And then we will seal it.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 9 38 wj7b שָׂרֵ֥ינוּ 1 This means the community leaders. From the document itself, it appears that these included both Nehemiah as the governor (10:1) and various tribal and extended-family leaders (10:14–27).
NEH 10 intro m17y 0 # Nehemiah 10 General Notes<br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>This chapter concludes the passage beginning in chapter 9.<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### The vow<br><br>By signing this document, the people vowed or agreed to obey God, not to buy things on the Sabbath and to pay their temple tax. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/vow]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sabbath]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/temple]])
NEH 10 1 ijh7 וְעַ֖ל הַחֲתוּמִ֑ים 1 Alternate translation: “These are the names that the leaders signed on the scroll before it was sealed.”
NEH 10 1 jc8x translate-unknown נְחֶמְיָ֧ה הַתִּרְשָׁ֛תָא בֶּן־חֲכַלְיָ֖ה 1 As in [7:65](../07/65.md) and [7:70](../07/70.md), this was the formal Persian title of the governor. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the title and then explain it. Alternate translation: “Nehemiah son of Hakiliah, the Tirshatha (that is, the governor)” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
NEH 10 1 j4ny translate-names נְחֶמְיָ֧ה…בֶּן־חֲכַלְיָ֖ה 1 As in [1:1](../01/01.md), Nehemiah is the name of a man, and Hakaliah is the name of his father. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 10 1 mu7u figs-explicit וְצִדְקִיָּֽה 1 This could mean the same man who is called “Zadok the scribe” in [13:13](../13/13.md). That man seems to have been the official secretary for Nehemiah. Other documents from this time suggest that the name of the scribe would have come second in a list like this, right after the government official in charge. Alternate translation: “Zedekiah the scribe” or “Zedekiah the secretary.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 10 2 r4sg translate-names שְׂרָיָ֥ה עֲזַרְיָ֖ה יִרְמְיָֽה 1 These are the names of three men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 10 3 b2lc translate-names פַּשְׁח֥וּר אֲמַרְיָ֖ה מַלְכִּיָּֽה 1 These are the names of three men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 10 4 uqt4 translate-names חַטּ֥וּשׁ שְׁבַנְיָ֖ה מַלּֽוּךְ 1 These are the names of three men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 10 5 qbj9 translate-names חָרִ֥ם מְרֵמ֖וֹת עֹֽבַדְיָֽה 1 These are the names of three men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 10 6 del4 translate-names דָּנִיֵּ֥אל גִּנְּת֖וֹן בָּרֽוּךְ 1 These are the names of three men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 10 7 yd6r translate-names מְשֻׁלָּ֥ם אֲבִיָּ֖ה מִיָּמִֽן 1 These are the names of three men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 10 8 mt1s translate-names מַֽעַזְיָ֥ה בִלְגַּ֖י שְׁמַֽעְיָ֑ה 1 These are the names of three men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 10 8 iv3c אֵ֖לֶּה הַכֹּהֲנִֽים 1 Alternate translation: “These are the names of the priests who signed the covenant.”
NEH 10 8 ppp7 grammar-connect-logic-result אֵ֖לֶּה הַכֹּהֲנִֽים 1 If it would be helpful to your readers, you could put this sentence at the beginning of verse 2, since it introduces the list of priests. That way the list of priests would be like the list of Levites in verses 9–13 and the list of leaders in verses 14–27. Both of those lists have an introductory phrase like this at the beginning. Alternate translation: “These are the names of the priests who signed the covenant.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
NEH 10 9 b29e וְֽהַלְוִיִּ֑ם 1 Alternate translation: “These are the names of the Levites who signed the covenant.”
NEH 10 9 i6e3 figs-explicit וְֽהַלְוִיִּ֑ם 1 From the contexts in which the names of these men appear elsewhere in the book of Nehemiah, it seems that they were leaders of the Levites. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “These are the names of the Levites who signed the covenant. First, their leaders:” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 10 9 si66 translate-names וְיֵשׁ֨וּעַ֙ בֶּן־אֲזַנְיָ֔ה 1 Jeshua is the name of a man, and Azaniah is the name of his father. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 10 9 pi28 translate-names בִּנּ֕וּי 1 Binnui is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 10 9 j952 bita-hq בִּנּ֕וּי מִבְּנֵ֥י חֵנָדָ֖ד 1 **Sons** here figuratively means “descendants.” Alternate translation: “Binnui, one of the descendants of Henadad.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-hq]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 10 9 km8e translate-names קַדְמִיאֵֽל 1 Kadmiel is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 10 10 yg6h bita-hq וַאֲחֵיהֶ֑ם 1 Here **brother** likely refers figuratively to the rest of the Levites who signed the covenant as fellow Levites of the three leaders. Alternate translation: “Next, their fellow Levites:” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-hq]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 10 10 cfy7 translate-names שְׁבַנְיָ֧ה הֽוֹדִיָּ֛ה קְלִיטָ֖א פְּלָאיָ֥ה חָנָֽן 1 These are the names of five men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 10 11 x5wd translate-names מִיכָ֥א רְח֖וֹב חֲשַׁבְיָֽה 1 These are the names of three men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 10 12 vuf7 translate-names זַכּ֥וּר שֵׁרֵֽבְיָ֖ה שְׁבַנְיָֽה 1 These are the names of three men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 10 13 t4nx translate-names הוֹדִיָּ֥ה בָנִ֖י בְּנִֽינוּ 1 These are the names of three men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 10 14 uar6 רָאשֵׁ֖י הָעָ֑ם 1 Alternate translation: “These are the names of the community leaders who signed the covenant.”
NEH 10 14 c75b bita-hq רָאשֵׁ֖י הָעָ֑ם 1 Here **head** is a figurative way of saying “leader.” Alternate translation: “community leaders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-hq]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 10 14 d729 translate-names פַּרְעֹשׁ֙ פַּחַ֣ת מוֹאָ֔ב עֵילָ֥ם זַתּ֖וּא בָּנִֽי 1 These are the names of five men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 10 16 dda2 translate-names אֲדֹנִיָּ֥ה בִגְוַ֖י עָדִֽין 1 These are the names of three men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 10 17 ybp4 translate-names אָטֵ֥ר חִזְקִיָּ֖ה עַזּֽוּר 1 These are the names of three men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 10 18 ssa2 translate-names הוֹדִיָּ֥ה חָשֻׁ֖ם בֵּצָֽי 1 These are the names of three men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 10 19 rbs7 translate-names חָרִ֥יף עֲנָת֖וֹת נֵיבָֽי 1 These are the names of three men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 10 20 xbs6 translate-names מַגְפִּיעָ֥שׁ מְשֻׁלָּ֖ם חֵזִֽיר 1 These are the names of three men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 10 21 bjm2 translate-names מְשֵׁיזַבְאֵ֥ל צָד֖וֹק יַדּֽוּעַ 1 These are the names of three men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 10 22 rm3j translate-names פְּלַטְיָ֥ה חָנָ֖ן עֲנָיָֽה 1 These are the names of three men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 10 23 kcs6 translate-names הוֹשֵׁ֥עַ חֲנַנְיָ֖ה חַשּֽׁוּב 1 These are the names of three men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 10 24 p99a translate-names הַלּוֹחֵ֥שׁ פִּלְחָ֖א שׁוֹבֵֽק 1 These are the names of three men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 10 25 t6u9 translate-names רְח֥וּם חֲשַׁבְנָ֖ה מַעֲשֵׂיָֽה 1 These are the names of three men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 10 26 ab18 translate-names וַאֲחִיָּ֥ה חָנָ֖ן עָנָֽן 1 These are the names of three men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 10 28 g1a1 figs-explicit וּשְׁאָ֣ר הָעָ֡ם 1 This means everyone else in the groups that are listed next, even if they did not sign the covenant personally. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “And everyone else in the following groups, whether or not they signed their name of the scroll” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 10 28 w2rt translate-unknown הַשּׁוֹעֲרִ֨ים 1 This means the people who were responsible to open and close the gates that controlled access to the city and the temple. See how you translated this term in 7:1. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
NEH 10 28 f1n8 translate-unknown הַמְשֹׁרְרִ֜ים 1 As in [7:1](../07/01.md), this means vocal musicians who led in worship, in processions, and ceremonies, producing music and chants that emphasized and enhanced the occasion. Alternate translation: “the singers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
NEH 10 28 g1a3 translate-unknown הַנְּתִינִ֗ים 1 As in [3:26](../03/26.md), the term **Nethinim** describes servants who worked in the temple. Alternate translation: “the temple servants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
NEH 10 28 qej9 figs-explicit וְֽכָל־הַנִּבְדָּ֞ל מֵעַמֵּ֤י הָאֲרָצוֹת֙ אֶל־תּוֹרַ֣ת הָאֱלֹהִ֔ים 1 This could mean one of two things. (1) It could be referring to people from other nations who had converted and become Jews. Alternate translation: “people from other nations who had become Jews and would now obey the law of God” (2) It might not be a reference to a distinct group, but rather a description of something that was true of everyone who agreed to the covenant, from any of the previously named groups. As in [9:2](../09/02.md), it would be a description of how the Israelites needed to reject the influence and practices of other people groups in order to follow the law of God faithfully. Alternate translation: “that is, everyone who resolved to reject foreign influences and obey the law of God.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]].)
NEH 10 28 g1a5 figs-metaphor הַנִּבְדָּ֞ל מֵעַמֵּ֤י הָאֲרָצוֹת֙ 1 **Separate** is a figurative way of describing the act of rejecting an influence, as if this were a physical separation. In [9:2](../09/02.md) the separation actually was physical (only Israelites could attend that assembly), but here it would be figurative. Alternate translation: “resolved to reject foreign influences” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 10 28 g1a7 figs-idiom בְּנֵיהֶ֣ם וּבְנֹתֵיהֶ֑ם כֹּ֖ל יוֹדֵ֥עַ מֵבִֽין 1 Like the similar phrases in [8:2](../08/02.md) and [8:3](../08/03.md), this is likely an idiom that refers to children who could understand what the covenant was about. Alternate translation: “their children who were old enough to understand the covenant” or “all who were old enough to understand what promising to obey God meant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
NEH 10 29 l6ns figs-metaphor מַחֲזִיקִ֣ים עַל 1 Here **clinging to** is a figurative way of describing people who did not actually sign the scroll, as their leaders did, but who agreed with them and joined in the same purpose. Alternate translation: “agreed with” or “joined in the same purpose with” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 10 29 x6i9 bita-hq אֲחֵיהֶם֮ 1 Here **brother** likely means figuratively that the leaders who signed the scroll were fellow Jews of the rest of the people. Alternate translation: “their fellow Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-hq]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 10 29 k971 אַדִּירֵיהֶם֒ 1 See how you translated this term in [2:16](../02/16.md). Alternate translation: “the leading citizens”
NEH 10 29 p6ry figs-metonymy וּבָאִ֞ים בְּאָלָ֣ה וּבִשְׁבוּעָ֗ה 1 Here the story describes the covenant figuratively by two things associated with it. As part of the covenant, the people swore an oath to keep its terms, and they also said that anyone who broke its terms should be cursed. (That is, God should punish them.) If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the meaning behind this figure. Alternate translation: “they made a serious agreement” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
NEH 10 29 ny6b figs-metaphor וּבָאִ֞ים בְּאָלָ֣ה וּבִשְׁבוּעָ֗ה 1 **Entering** is a figurative way of saying that the people became parties to this agreement with God. The expression speaks as if the covenant were something that the people could physically go inside of, in order to become a part of it. Alternate translation: “they became parties to the covenant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 10 29 g1a9 figs-idiom לָלֶ֨כֶת֙ בְּתוֹרַ֣ת הָאֱלֹהִ֔ים 1 As in [5:9](../05/09.md), **walk** is an idiom that describes a person’s conduct in life. Alternate translation: “to live their lives in obedience to the law of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
NEH 10 29 t8sp figs-activepassive אֲשֶׁ֣ר נִתְּנָ֔ה בְּיַ֖ד מֹשֶׁ֣ה 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “which Moses gave to the people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
NEH 10 29 g1b1 bita-hq בְּיַ֖ד מֹשֶׁ֣ה 1 As in [9:14](../09/14.md), here **hand** figuratively represents control and action. Alternate translation: “Moses gave to the people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-hq]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 10 29 g1b3 figs-metaphor מֹשֶׁ֣ה עֶֽבֶד־הָֽאֱלֹהִ֑ים 1 As in [9:14](../09/14.md), Moses is called the **servant** of God. While Moses was also God’s servant in a more literal sense, this title is a figurative expression in the Old Testament that indicates that God used Moses to give his Law to his people, the way a master would have a servant deliver a message. Alternate translation: “your special messenger” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 10 29 g1b5 figs-doublet וְלִשְׁמ֣וֹר וְלַעֲשׂ֗וֹת 1 **Keep** and **do** mean similar things. The repetition emphasizes the people’s resolve to keep God’s law. If it would be clearer in your language, you could combine these terms. Alternate translation: “carefully follow” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
NEH 10 29 m39f figs-doublet כָּל־מִצְוֺת֙ יְהוָ֣ה אֲדֹנֵ֔ינוּ וּמִשְׁפָּטָ֖יו וְחֻקָּֽיו 1 As in [1:7](../01/07.md), **commandments**, **judgments**, and **statutes** mean basically the same thing. They refer to provisions in the Law of Moses. Here again the repetition emphasizes the people’s resolve to obey everything in God’s law. If it would be clearer in your language, you could combine them into a single phrase. Alternate translation: “everything Yahweh our Lord has commanded,” otherwise “the commands, rules, and laws of Yahweh our Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]. A doublet can involve the use of more than two words.)
NEH 10 30 s4sx figs-parallelism וַאֲשֶׁ֛ר לֹא־נִתֵּ֥ן בְּנֹתֵ֖ינוּ לְעַמֵּ֣י הָאָ֑רֶץ וְאֶת־בְּנֹ֣תֵיהֶ֔ם לֹ֥א נִקַּ֖ח לְבָנֵֽינוּ 1 These two phrases mean similar things. They both indicate that the Jews are promising here not to let their children marry people from the other groups living in the area. If it would be clearer in your language, you could combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “We promise that we will not allow any one of our children to marry someone from another people group” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
NEH 10 30 lx8c figs-exclusive נִתֵּ֥ן 1 Here and through to the end of this chapter, the pronoun “we” includes Nehemiah and the Jewish people, but not the readers of this book. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
NEH 10 30 iqq1 figs-explicit לְעַמֵּ֣י הָאָ֑רֶץ 1 This refers to other people groups who live in the land and who do not worship Yahweh. The implication is that intermarriage with these groups would lead the Israelites to compromise their loyalty to Yahweh. Alternate translation: “the people of this land who do not worship Yahweh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 10 31 g1b7 grammar-connect-logic-result עַמֵּ֣י הָאָ֡רֶץ הַֽמְבִיאִים֩ אֶת־הַמַּקָּח֨וֹת וְכָל־שֶׁ֜בֶר בְּי֤וֹם הַשַּׁבָּת֙ לִמְכּ֔וֹר לֹא־נִקַּ֥ח מֵהֶ֛ם בַּשַּׁבָּ֖ת 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that is described in the first phrase. Alternate translation: “If people from other groups bring goods or grain to sell on the Sabbath, we will not buy any from them.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
NEH 10 31 g1b9 figs-explicit בַּשַּׁבָּ֖ת 1 The implication is that the Israelites are promising not to buy anything because the Sabbath is a day for rest and worship, not for buying and selling. If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “on the Sabbath, we will not buy any from them, because Yahweh has told us not to buy or sell on the Sabbath” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 10 31 g1c1 וּבְי֣וֹם קֹ֑דֶשׁ 1 Alternate translation: “on a festival day” or “during a festival”
NEH 10 31 g1c3 figs-ellipsis וְנִטֹּ֛שׁ אֶת־הַשָּׁנָ֥ה הַשְּׁבִיעִ֖ית 1 Here the covenant leaves out one or more words that a sentence would ordinarily need in order to be complete. **Leave alone** means “leave our fields alone,” that is, do not plant or harvest any crops, and **the seventh year** means “in the seventh year.” Alternate translation: “we will not grow anything in our fields every seventh year” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
NEH 10 31 bh3h figs-explicit וְנִטֹּ֛שׁ אֶת־הַשָּׁנָ֥ה הַשְּׁבִיעִ֖ית 1 **The seventh year** refers to the commandment in the Law of Moses to allow fields to rest one year out of every seven. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “We will leave our fields alone and not work them during the seventh year, because the law commands us not to grow any crops then.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 10 31 hf7z וְנִטֹּ֛שׁ…וּמַשָּׁ֥א כָל־יָֽד 1 This could mean one of several things. (1) As in [5:7–12](../05/07.md), it could be a promise not to charge any interest on loans to fellow Israelites. (2) It could mean that during the seventh year, no loan payments would be collected. (3) It could mean that during the seventh year, all debts would be cancelled. Alternate translation: “we will not charge interest on loans to our fellow Israelites” or “during the seventh year, we will not collect loan payments” or “during the seventh year, we will cancel all the debts of our fellow Israelites.”
NEH 10 31 ur3t figs-metonymy וּמַשָּׁ֥א כָל־יָֽד 1 Here **hand** seems to refer figuratively to a debt by reference to something associated with it, the way debts were formalized by the borrower grasping the hand of the lender. Alternate translation: “interest on any debt” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
NEH 10 32 h9gt figs-personification וְהֶעֱמַ֤דְנוּ עָלֵ֨ינוּ֙ מִצְוֺ֔ת 1 As in [5:13](../05/13.md), the covenant speaks figuratively of the commitments the people are making as if they were living things that could **stand**, that is, stay in place rather than go away. The people are saying that they will make sure this commitment does not “go away.” Alternate translation: “we are making a firm commitment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
NEH 10 32 ljm2 figs-idiom לָתֵ֥ת עָלֵ֛ינוּ 1 Alternate translation: “each one of us will contribute” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
NEH 10 32 ad47 translate-bmoney שְׁלִשִׁ֥ית הַשֶּׁ֖קֶל 1 In ancient times, a silver shekel weighed about 11 grams or about a third of an ounce. You could try to express this in terms of modern money values, but if you did, that could cause your Bible translation to become outdated and inaccurate over time, since those values can change from year to year. Instead, you could give the equivalent weight, or use the biblical term in the text and give the weight in a note. Alternate translation: “a third of a shekel each year” or “four grams of silver each year” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-fraction]])
NEH 10 32 g1c5 translate-fraction שְׁלִשִׁ֥ית הַשֶּׁ֖קֶל 1 A **third** means one part out of three equal parts. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-fraction]])
NEH 10 32 pw6w figs-abstractnouns לַעֲבֹדַ֖ת בֵּ֥ית אֱלֹהֵֽינוּ 1 The abstract noun **service** describes all the things needed for worship in the temple, as listed in the next verse. If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate the idea behind this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “everything that is needed for worship in the temple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
NEH 10 32 g1c7 bita-manmade בֵּ֥ית אֱלֹהֵֽינוּ 1 As in [6:10](../06/10.md) and [8:16](../08/16.md), here the covenant speaks of the temple figuratively as the **house of God**, as if it were God’s dwelling place. Alternate translation: “the temple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-manmade]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 10 33 ehf4 translate-unknown לְלֶ֣חֶם הַֽמַּעֲרֶ֡כֶת 1 This refers to the 12 unleavened cakes made of fine flour that the law required to be set out freshly every Sabbath day in two rows of six on the table in the Holy Place. This is sometimes called the “showbread.” Alternate translation: “the bread that is set out in rows” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
NEH 10 33 xu3y translate-unknown וּמִנְחַ֣ת הַתָּמִ֣יד וּלְעוֹלַ֣ת הַ֠תָּמִיד 1 This likely refers to a grain offering and an animal offering that were burned on the temple altar each day. Alternate translation: “the daily grain and animal offerings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
NEH 10 33 g1c9 figs-metonymy הַשַּׁבָּת֨וֹת הֶחֳדָשִׁ֜ים לַמּוֹעֲדִ֗ים 1 This actually refers to the offerings that would be made at these times. The offerings are being described figuratively by something associated with them, the occasions on which they are offered. Alternate translation: “offerings made on the Sabbath, on the new moon festival, and during other festivals” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
NEH 10 33 g1d1 translate-unknown וְלַקֳּדָשִׁים֙ 1 This likely refers to offerings that would be dedicated and offered to God on behalf of the people on other occasions. Alternate translation: “and offerings needed for any other occasion” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
NEH 10 33 g1d3 figs-metaphor וְלַ֣חַטָּא֔וֹת לְכַפֵּ֖ר עַל־יִשְׂרָאֵ֑ל 1 As Nehemiah does in [4:5](.//04/05.md), the covenant speaks here of sins as if they were an object that could be physically hidden. Alternate translation: “offerings made to ask God to forgive the sins of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 10 33 g1d5 translate-unknown וְכֹ֖ל מְלֶ֥אכֶת בֵּית־אֱלֹהֵֽינוּ 1 This seems to refer to the ongoing work of cleaning, maintaining, and repairing all of the furnishings and equipment used in the temple worship. Alternate translation: “and anything else needed to maintain worship in the temple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
NEH 10 33 g1d7 bita-manmade בֵּית־אֱלֹהֵֽינוּ 1 Here again the covenant speaks of the temple figuratively as the **house of God**, as if it were God’s dwelling place. Alternate translation: “the temple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-manmade]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 10 34 s6yz וְהַגּוֹרָל֨וֹת הִפַּ֜לְנוּ עַל־קֻרְבַּ֣ן הָעֵצִ֗ים הַכֹּהֲנִ֣ים הַלְוִיִּם֮ וְהָעָם֒ לְ֠הָבִיא לְבֵ֨ית אֱלֹהֵ֧ינוּ לְבֵית־אֲבֹתֵ֛ינוּ 1 Alternate translation: “We agree to determine by lot what time each year the various extended families among the priests, the Levites, and the people will be responsible for bringing an offering of wood to the temple.”
NEH 10 34 l42k translate-unknown וְהַגּוֹרָל֨וֹת הִפַּ֜לְנוּ 1 A **lot** was a physical object that was used in various ways to make a selection among different possibilities. Use the term in your language that would best describe such an object for your readers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
NEH 10 34 ph9q bita-manmade לְבֵ֨ית אֱלֹהֵ֧ינוּ 1 Here again the covenant speaks of the temple figuratively as the “house of God,” as if it were God’s dwelling place. Alternate translation: “the temple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-manmade]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 10 34 g1d9 figs-ellipsis לְבֵית־אֲבֹתֵ֛ינוּ 1 This seems to be an abbreviated way of saying “our father’s houses.” The full expression “father’s house” or “house of the father” is used in [7:61](..07/61.md). See how you translated it there, and review the note there if that would be helpful. Alternate translation: “taking turns by clan” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
NEH 10 34 g1e1 figs-idiom שָׁנָ֣ה בְשָׁנָ֑ה 1 This is an idiom that means “each year” or “every year.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
NEH 10 34 g1e3 figs-abstractnouns לְבַעֵ֗ר 1 **Burning** is an abstract noun that describes how the wood these families agreed to bring to the temple would be used for fuel for the sacrifices offered on the altar. If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate the idea behind it with a verb such as “burn.” You could also say who would do the action. Alternate translation: “for the Levites to burn” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
NEH 10 34 g1e5 figs-activepassive כַּכָּת֖וּב בַּתּוֹרָֽה 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “as the law commands” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
NEH 10 35 vp1p figs-metonymy בִּכּוּרֵ֣י אַדְמָתֵ֗נוּ 1 Here the covenant speaks figuratively of the soil of the land as if it were a tree that would bear fruit. Alternate translation: “the first crops that grow in our fields” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
NEH 10 35 g1e7 figs-idiom שָׁנָ֣ה בְשָׁנָ֑ה 1 This is an idiom that means “each year” or “every year.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
NEH 10 35 g1e9 bita-manmade לְבֵ֖ית יְהוָֽה 1 The covenant continues to speak of the temple figuratively as the **house of God**, as if it were God’s dwelling place. Here the expression is modified slightly and it says “Yahweh” instead of “our God.” Alternate translation: “to the temple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-manmade]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 10 36 g1f1 figs-explicit וְאֶת־בְּכֹר֤וֹת בָּנֵ֨ינוּ֙ וּבְהֶמְתֵּ֔ינוּ…וְאֶת־בְּכוֹרֵ֨י בְקָרֵ֜ינוּ וְצֹאנֵ֗ינוּ לְהָבִיא֙ לְבֵ֣ית אֱלֹהֵ֔ינוּ 1 **Firstborn** means specifically the firstborn male offspring in every case, as the law specifies. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could explain that the law required the Israelites to bring the firstborn males from their families to the temple for a different reason than the reason for which it required them to bring the firstborn males from among their domesticated animals. Alternate translation: “We promise to bring our firstborn sons to the temple to dedicate them to God, and we promise to bring the first male offspring of all of our animals to the temple so that the priests can offer them to God as sacrifices.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 10 36 g1f3 figs-activepassive כַּכָּת֖וּב בַּתּוֹרָ֑ה 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “as the law commands” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
NEH 10 36 g1f5 bita-manmade לְבֵ֣ית אֱלֹהֵ֔ינוּ…בְּבֵ֥ית אֱלֹהֵֽינוּ 1 The covenant continues to speak of the temple figuratively as the **house of God**, as if it were God’s dwelling place. Alternate translation: “the temple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-manmade]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 10 36 uc2w figs-doublet לַכֹּ֣הֲנִ֔ים הַמְשָׁרְתִ֖ים בְּבֵ֥ית אֱלֹהֵֽינוּ 1 These two phrases mean the same thing. The covenant uses the repetition for clarity. If it would be clearer in your language, you could combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “the priests who serve in the temple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
NEH 10 37 j9sj וְאֶת־רֵאשִׁ֣ית עֲרִיסֹתֵ֣ינוּ וּ֠תְרוּמֹתֵינוּ וּפְרִ֨י כָל־עֵ֜ץ תִּיר֣וֹשׁ וְיִצְהָ֗ר 1 The words **the first of** at the start of this list apply to every item on the list. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could repeat that idea throughout the list. Alternate translation: “the first of the flour that we make, a first portion of the food offerings we bring to the temple, the first fruit from each of our fruit trees, and the first of the wine and oil that we produce each year.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
NEH 10 37 rk7x translate-unknown עֲרִיסֹתֵ֣ינוּ 1 Possible meanings are that this refers to (1) dough made from coarse flour, (2) coarse flour, or (3) ground grain. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
NEH 10 37 e92l translate-unknown אֶל־לִשְׁכ֣וֹת בֵּית־אֱלֹהֵ֔ינוּ 1 This phrase explains where the people are agreeing to deliver the items on the preceding list, which are special contributions for the priests. Alternate translation: “to the rooms where things are stored in the temple” or “to the storehouses in the temple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
NEH 10 37 s7s2 bita-manmade בֵּית־אֱלֹהֵ֔ינוּ 1 The covenant continues to speak of the temple figuratively as the “house of God,” as if it were the place where God lived, since God’s presence was in the temple. Alternate translation: “the temple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 10 37 r776 figs-metonymy וּמַעְשַׂ֥ר אַדְמָתֵ֖נוּ 1 Here the covenant speaks figuratively of the soil as a way of referring to the crops that grow in the soil. Alternate translation: “one tenth of the crops that grow in our fields” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
NEH 10 37 g1f7 translate-fraction וּמַעְשַׂ֥ר 1 This means a tenth (1/10) or one part out of ten equal parts. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-fraction]])
NEH 10 37 g1f9 וְהֵם֙ הַלְוִיִּ֔ם הַֽמְעַשְּׂרִ֔ים בְּכֹ֖ל עָרֵ֥י עֲבֹדָתֵֽנוּ 1 This phrase explains where the people are agreeing to deliver this tithe of crops, which is a special contribution for the Levites. Alternate translation: “The Levites can collect this contribution of one tenth of our crops right in the cities where we live and work.”
NEH 10 37 g1g1 figs-abstractnouns בְּכֹ֖ל עָרֵ֥י עֲבֹדָתֵֽנוּ 1 The abstract noun **labor** refers to how the people would work the land in order to grow crops. If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate the idea behind it with a verb such as “work.” Alternate translation: “the cities where we live and work” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
NEH 10 38 g1g3 figs-explicit וְהָיָ֨ה הַכֹּהֵ֧ן בֶּֽן־אַהֲרֹ֛ן עִם־הַלְוִיִּ֖ם בַּעְשֵׂ֣ר הַלְוִיִּ֑ם 1 If it would be helpful to your readers, you could explain why a priest will be present. Alternate translation: “a priest will be present to supervise when the people give their tithes to the Levites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 10 38 g1g5 figs-informremind הַכֹּהֵ֧ן בֶּֽן־אַהֲרֹ֛ן 1 Here the book repeats some background information to remind readers who the priests were. Alternate translation: “one of the priests, who are descendants of Aaron” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-informremind]])
NEH 10 38 g1g7 bita-hq בֶּֽן־אַהֲרֹ֛ן 1 **Son** here figuratively means “descendant.” Alternate translation: “a descendant of Aaron” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-hq]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 10 38 by9z figs-explicit בַּעְשֵׂ֣ר הַלְוִיִּ֑ם 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could state from whom the Levites will receive these tithes. Alternate translation: “when the people give their tithes to the Levites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 10 38 eb51 translate-fraction בַּעְשֵׂ֣ר…מַעֲשַׂ֤ר הַֽמַּעֲשֵׂר֙ 1 A “tithe” means a tenth (1/10) or one part out of ten equal parts. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-fraction]])
NEH 10 38 zl4a figs-explicit וְהַלְוִיִּ֞ם יַעֲל֨וּ אֶת־מַעֲשַׂ֤ר הַֽמַּעֲשֵׂר֙ לְבֵ֣ית אֱלֹהֵ֔ינוּ 1 The implication is that in this way the Levites will help support the priests, in the same way that the people will support the priests through the tithes described in verse 37. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the Levites will bring one tenth of the tithes they receive to the temple, to help support the priests” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 10 38 g1g9 bita-manmade לְבֵ֣ית אֱלֹהֵ֔ינוּ 1 The covenant continues to speak of the temple figuratively as the **house of God**, as if it were God’s dwelling place. Alternate translation: “the temple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-manmade]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 10 38 g1h1 translate-unknown אֶל־הַלְּשָׁכ֖וֹת לְבֵ֥ית הָאוֹצָֽר 1 Like the similar phrase in [10:37](../09/37.md), this phrase explains where the Levites are to deliver the ten percent of the tithes that they will contribute. Alternate translation: “to the rooms where things are stored in the temple” or “the rooms in the temple treasury” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
NEH 10 39 g1h3 figs-ellipsis הַ֠לְּשָׁכוֹת 1 This is an abbreviated way of saying “the chambers of the house of the treasury” as in [10:38](../10/38). Alternate translation: “the rooms where things are stored in the temple” or “the rooms in the temple treasury” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
NEH 10 39 qzf8 bita-hq בְנֵי־יִשְׂרָאֵ֜ל וּבְנֵ֣י הַלֵּוִ֗י 1 **Sons** here figuratively means “descendants.” The term is referring to the groups that were descended from the men named Israel and Levi. Alternate translation: “the Israelites and the Levites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-hq]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 10 39 ss5h figs-ellipsis וְשָׁם֙ כְּלֵ֣י הַמִּקְדָּ֔שׁ וְהַכֹּהֲנִים֙ הַמְשָׁ֣רְתִ֔ים וְהַשּׁוֹעֲרִ֖ים וְהַמְשֹׁרְרִ֑ים 1 **There** means in those same storerooms. The phrase **the vessels for** at the start of this list applies to every item on the list. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could repeat that idea throughout the list. Alternate translation: “In those same rooms we will also store equipment for the temple, equipment that the priests use when they are on duty, tools that the gatekeepers use, and instruments for the musicians.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
NEH 10 39 g1h5 figs-synecdoche כְּלֵ֣י 1 Here the covenant uses one type of equipment that the storerooms would hold, **vessels** or “jars” or “containers,” to refer figuratively to all the different types of equipment on the list in this verse. Alternate translation: “equipment” (See [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
NEH 10 39 u1sq figs-litotes וְלֹ֥א נַעֲזֹ֖ב אֶת־בֵּ֥ית אֱלֹהֵֽינוּ 1 This is a figure of speech that expresses a strong positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. Alternate translation: “we will make sure that we provide for the temple” (See [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
NEH 10 39 b23h bita-manmade בֵּ֥ית אֱלֹהֵֽינוּ 1 The covenant continues to speak of the temple figuratively as the **house of God**, as if it were God’s dwelling place. Alternate translation: “the temple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-manmade]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 11 intro xja1 0 # Nehemiah 11 General Notes<br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### The places where the Jews lived<br><br>Some people lived in Jerusalem, but most people lived in villages and towns away from Jerusalem. They lived there in order to farm the land raise their animals. The city with its walls was there to provide all of the people with protection if enemies attacked them.
NEH 11 1 e2yg הִפִּ֨ילוּ גוֹרָל֜וֹת 1 As in [10:34](../10/34.md), a **lot** was a physical object that was used in various ways to make a selection among different possibilities. Use the term in your language that would best describe such an object for your readers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
NEH 11 1 beq5 אֶחָ֣ד מִן־הָעֲשָׂרָ֗ה 1 This means “one out of ten people.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
NEH 11 1 h1a1 figs-informremind בִּֽירוּשָׁלִַ֨ם֙ עִ֣יר הַקֹּ֔דֶשׁ 1 Here the book repeats some background information to remind readers about the special status that Jerusalem had, which was why it was so important for that city to be well populated. As in [1:9](../01/09.md), the list is acknowledging Jerusalem as the place from which God chose to start making himself famous throughout the world, and as the city where God chose to put his temple. Alternate translation: “Jerusalem, the special city that God chose ” (See [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-informremind]])
NEH 11 1 h1a3 figs-synecdoche וְתֵ֥שַׁע הַיָּד֖וֹת בֶּעָרִֽים 1 Here the list is using the term **hand** to refer figuratively to an entire person. Alternate translation: “the other nine out of ten people remained in the cities and towns where they had been living” (See [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
NEH 11 2 h1a5 figs-idiom לְכֹל֙ הָֽאֲנָשִׁ֔ים 1 In this context, **a man** means “everyone.” Alternate translation: “everyone who” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
NEH 11 3 h1a7 bita-hq רָאשֵׁ֣י הַמְּדִינָ֔ה 1 **Head** here is a figurative way of saying “leader.” Alternate translation: “provincial leaders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-hq]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 11 3 h1a9 grammar-connect-logic-contrast וּבְעָרֵ֣י יְהוּדָ֗ה 1 This sentence explains a contrasting idea before story goes on to develop the idea that the previous sentence introduces. This chapter is a list of the provincial leaders, priests, Levites, gatekeepers, temple servants, and singers who lived in Jerusalem. The previous sentence introduces the first part of that list. But before the list gives the names of the provincial leaders, it explains that most of the people who had returned to the province of Judah kept on living on their ancestral lands in other cities and towns. You could begin this sentence with a word like “but” to indicate this contrast. (See: Connect - Contrast Relationship)
NEH 11 3 h1b1 וּבְעָרֵ֣י יְהוּדָ֗ה…בְּעָ֣רֵיהֶ֔ם 1 These two phrases mean the same thing and you do not need to repeat both of them if that would be confusing for your readers.
NEH 11 3 h1b3 figs-idiom אִ֤ישׁ בַּאֲחֻזָּתוֹ֙ 1 In this context, **a man** means “each person,” and the expression may be understood to indicate “each family.” Alternate translation: “each family on its own property” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
NEH 11 3 l7mb figs-personification יִשְׂרָאֵ֤ל 1 Here the list refers to all of the Israelites figuratively as if they were a single person, their ancestor, Israel. Alternate translation: “the Israelites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
NEH 11 3 h1b5 translate-unknown וְהַנְּתִינִ֔ים 1 As in [3:26](../03/26.md), the term **Nethinim** describes servants who worked in the temple. Alternate translation: “the temple servants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
NEH 11 3 h1b7 bita-hq וּבְנֵ֖י עַבְדֵ֥י שְׁלֹמֹֽה 1 **Sons** figuratively means “descendants.” Alternate translation: “the descendants of the laborers who had worked for the kingdom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-hq]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 11 3 h1b9 translate-unknown עַבְדֵ֥י שְׁלֹמֹֽה 1 As in [7:57](../07/57.md), this phrase refers to people whom Solomon first conscripted as laborers. They and their descendants remained conscripted laborers under later kings. Review the note to [7:57](../07/57.md) if that would be helpful. Alternate translation: “laborers who had worked for the kingdom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
NEH 11 4 h1c1 writing-background וּבִֽירוּשָׁלִַ֨ם֙ 1 This sentence provides further information about the situation the book is describing here. In addition to the people who were living in various other cities and towns in the province of Judah, there were other people already living in Jerusalem. So the city was not empty, but it did need to be more fully populated. You could use a word like “moreover” to show that this is further background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
NEH 11 4 n2a7 bita-hq מִבְּנֵ֥י יְהוּדָ֖ה וּמִבְּנֵ֣י בִנְיָמִ֑ן 1 **Sons** here figuratively means “descendants.” Alternate translation: “some people from the tribes of Judah and Benjamin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-hq]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 11 4 nm8y bita-hq מִבְּנֵ֣י יְ֠הוּדָה 1 **Sons** here figuratively means “descendants.” Alternate translation: “those from the tribe of Judah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-hq]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 11 4 wl7r translate-names עֲתָיָ֨ה בֶן־עֻזִּיָּ֜ה בֶּן־זְכַרְיָ֧ה בֶן־אֲמַרְיָ֛ה בֶּן־שְׁפַטְיָ֥ה בֶן־מַהֲלַלְאֵ֖ל 1 These are the names of six men. In this context, **son** means literally that the next man named is the father of the man just named. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 11 4 l727 figs-explicit עֲתָיָ֨ה 1 The implication is that Athaiah was one of the leaders of the people from the tribe of Judah who lived in Jerusalem. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Their leader, Athaiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 11 4 vx6k מִבְּנֵי־פָֽרֶץ 1 **Sons** here figuratively means “descendants.” Alternate translation: “one of the descendants of Perez” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-hq]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 11 5 ml8b translate-names וּמַעֲשֵׂיָ֣ה בֶן־בָּר֣וּךְ בֶּן־כָּל־חֹ֠זֶה בֶּן־חֲזָיָ֨ה בֶן־עֲדָיָ֧ה בֶן־יוֹיָרִ֛יב בֶּן־זְכַרְיָ֖ה 1 These are the names of seven men. In this context, **son** means literally that the next man named is the father of the man just named. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 11 5 h1c3 figs-explicit וּמַעֲשֵׂיָ֣ה 1 The implication is that Maaseiah was another leader of the people from the tribe of Judah who lived in Jerusalem. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “another leader, Maaseiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 11 5 dxb8 bita-hq בֶּן־הַשִּׁלֹנִֽי 1 The Shiloni were the clan descended from Judah’s son Shelah. Here the phrase **son of** indicates that Maaseiah shared in the quality of belonging to this clan. Alternate translation: “one of the descendants of Shelah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-hq]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 11 6 h1c5 כָּל־בְּנֵי־פֶ֕רֶץ הַיֹּשְׁבִ֖ים בִּירוּשָׁלִָ֑ם אַרְבַּ֥ע מֵא֛וֹת שִׁשִּׁ֥ים וּשְׁמֹנָ֖ה אַנְשֵׁי־חָֽיִל 1 Alternate translation: “The total number of the descendants of Perez who settled in Jerusalem who were able to fight in the army was 468.”
NEH 11 6 y8t2 bita-hq בְּנֵי־פֶ֕רֶץ הַיֹּשְׁבִ֖ים בִּירוּשָׁלִָ֑ם 1 **Sons** here figuratively means “descendants.” Alternate translation: “the descendants of Perez who lived in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-hq]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 11 6 ej3g figs-abstractnouns אַרְבַּ֥ע מֵא֛וֹת שִׁשִּׁ֥ים וּשְׁמֹנָ֖ה אַנְשֵׁי־חָֽיִל 1 The abstract noun **strength** refers to the way these men were able to use weapons and fight to defend the city if necessary. If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate the idea behind it with a verb such as “fight.” Alternate translation: “468 men who were able to fight in the army” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
NEH 11 7 m8mp bita-hq בְּנֵ֣י בִנְיָמִ֑ן 1 **Sons** here figuratively means “descendants.” Alternate translation: “the people from the tribe of Benjamin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-hq]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 11 7 md67 figs-ellipsis בְּנֵ֣י בִנְיָמִ֑ן 1 This means specifically the people from the tribe of Benjamin who lived in Jerusalem. The list is speaking in abbreviated form here. Alternate translation: “the people from the tribe of Benjamin who lived in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
NEH 11 7 w8c5 translate-names סַלֻּ֡א בֶּן־מְשֻׁלָּ֡ם בֶּן־יוֹעֵ֡ד בֶּן־פְּדָיָה֩ בֶן־ק֨וֹלָיָ֧ה בֶן־מַעֲשֵׂיָ֛ה בֶּן־אִֽיתִיאֵ֖ל בֶּן־יְשַֽׁעְיָֽה 1 These are the names of eight men. In this context, **son** means literally that the next man named is the father of the man just named. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 11 7 h1c7 figs-explicit סַלֻּ֡א 1 The implication is that Sallu was one of the leaders of the people from the tribe of Benjamin who lived in Jerusalem. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Their main leader was Sallu” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 11 8 h1c9 figs-metaphor וְאַחֲרָ֖יו גַּבַּ֣י סַלָּ֑י 1 **After** is a figurative way of saying that these two men were also leaders, but they were subordinate to Sallu. Alternate translation: “Two other leaders who assisted him were Gabbai and Sallai” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 11 8 bzh9 translate-names גַּבַּ֣י סַלָּ֑י 1 These are the names of two men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 11 8 h1d1 figs-ellipsis תְּשַׁ֥ע מֵא֖וֹת עֶשְׂרִ֥ים וּשְׁמֹנָֽה 1 As in [11:6](../11/06.md), the number given represents the total number of men from this tribe who were able to use weapons and fight to defend the city if necessary. The list is speaking in abbreviated form here. Alternate translation: “The total number of the men from the tribe of Benjamin living in Jerusalem who were able to fight in the army was 928.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
NEH 11 9 z3xl translate-names וְיוֹאֵ֥ל בֶּן־זִכְרִ֖י 1 Joel is the name of a man, and Zichri is the name of his father. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 11 9 h1d3 translate-unknown פָּקִ֣יד עֲלֵיהֶ֑ם 1 This means that when these men from the tribe of Benjamin formed a fighting unit, Joel was their commander. Alternate translation: “the commander of the troops from the tribe of Benjamin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
NEH 11 9 h1d5 translate-names וִיהוּדָ֧ה בֶן־הַסְּנוּאָ֛ה 1 Judah is the name of a man, and Hassenuah is the name of his father. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 11 9 h1d7 figs-metonymy עַל־הָעִ֖יר מִשְׁנֶֽה 1 This phrase could mean a number of things. (1) Since this list does not name the person who was first in charge of the city, and it also does not describe other parts of the city and who was responsible for them, this phrase most likely means that Judah was second in command, after Joel, over the forces that would be formed from men living in the city. If that is the meaning, then the list is describing these troops figuratively by reference to something associated with them, the city they would come from. (2) However, it could mean that Judah was something like the deputy mayor of the whole city. (3) It could also mean that Judah was responsible for one part of the city. Alternate translation: “second in command over troops from the city” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
NEH 11 10 h1d9 figs-explicit מִן־הַֽכֹּהֲנִ֑ים 1 The implication is that this next section of the list will name the men who were leaders of the priests. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Here are the names of the leaders of the priests who settled in Jerusalem.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 11 10 ft7m translate-names יְדַֽעְיָ֥ה בֶן־יוֹיָרִ֖יב 1 Jedaiah is the name of a man, and Joiarib is the name of his father. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 11 10 h1e1 translate-names יָכִֽין 1 This is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 11 11 d8ph translate-names שְׂרָיָ֨ה בֶן־חִלְקִיָּ֜ה בֶּן־מְשֻׁלָּ֣ם בֶּן־צָד֗וֹק בֶּן־מְרָיוֹת֙ בֶּן־אֲחִיט֔וּב 1 These are the names of six men. In this context, **son** means literally that the next man named is the father of the man just named. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 11 11 h1e3 writing-background נְגִ֖ד בֵּ֥ית הָאֱלֹהִֽים 1 This is background information that helps identify Seraiah further. Alternate translation: “the priest in charge of the temple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
NEH 11 11 h1e5 bita-manmade בֵּ֥ית הָאֱלֹהִֽים 1 Here the list speaks of the temple figuratively as the **house of God** as if it were God’s dwelling place. Alternate translation: “the temple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-manmade]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 11 12 j7vp וַאֲחֵיהֶ֗ם עֹשֵׂ֤י הַמְּלָאכָה֙ לַבַּ֔יִת שְׁמֹנֶ֥ה מֵא֖וֹת עֶשְׂרִ֣ים וּשְׁנָ֑יִם 1 Alternate translation: “The total number of their fellow priests who were serving in the temple was 822.”
NEH 11 12 nl7h bita-hq וַאֲחֵיהֶ֗ם 1 Here **brother**, in general, is a figurative way of saying “fellow priest,” although it is possible that some of the biological brothers of Joiarib, Jakin, and Seraiah were included in this group. Alternate translation: “their fellow priests” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-hq]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 11 12 z6pc figs-ellipsis עֹשֵׂ֤י הַמְּלָאכָה֙ לַבַּ֔יִת 1 Here **house** is an abbreviated way of saying “house of God.” and that is a figurative way of referring to the temple. Alternate translation: “who served in the temple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 11 12 h1e7 figs-explicit וַ֠עֲדָיָה 1 The implication is that Adaiah was another leader of the priests who settled in Jerusalem. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Another leader of the priests who settled in Jerusalem was Adaiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 11 12 h1e9 translate-names וַ֠עֲדָיָה בֶּן־יְרֹחָ֤ם בֶּן־פְּלַלְיָה֙ בֶּן־אַמְצִ֣י בֶן־זְכַרְיָ֔ה בֶּן־פַּשְׁח֖וּר בֶּן־מַלְכִּיָּֽה 1 These are the names of seven men. In this context, **son** means literally that the next man named is the father of the man just named. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 11 13 wd9q bita-hq וְאֶחָיו֙ רָאשִׁ֣ים לְאָב֔וֹת 1 In this case **his brothers** seems to be a figurative way of saying “his fellow leaders,” since the list specifies that these associates of Adaiah were leaders of clans. Alternate translation: “the family leaders who helped him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-hq]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 11 13 u4gn figs-ellipsis רָאשִׁ֣ים לְאָב֔וֹת 1 As in [7:70](../07/70.md) and [8:13](../08/13.md), this seems to be an abbreviated way of saying “the heads of father’s houses.” The full expression “house of the father” or “father’s house” is used in 7:61. See how you translated it there, and review the note there if that would be helpful. Alternate translation: “clan leaders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
NEH 11 13 h1f1 bita-hq רָאשִׁ֣ים 1 Here **head** is a figurative way of saying “leader.” Alternate translation: “leaders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-hq]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 11 13 h1f3 figs-explicit מָאתַ֖יִם אַרְבָּעִ֣ים וּשְׁנָ֑יִם 1 It seems unlikely that there were 242 family leaders assisting Adaiah. Rather, in context, this seems to be the number of priests that Adaiah and the family leaders who helped him were responsible for. Alternate translation: “They were responsible for 242 priests.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 11 13 h1f5 figs-explicit וַעֲמַשְׁסַ֧י 1 The implication is that Amashsai was another leader of the priests who settled in Jerusalem. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Another leader of the priests who settled in Jerusalem was Amashsai” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 11 13 l51b translate-names וַעֲמַשְׁסַ֧י בֶּן־עֲזַרְאֵ֛ל בֶּן־אַחְזַ֥י בֶּן־מְשִׁלֵּמ֖וֹת בֶּן־אִמֵּֽר 1 These are the names of five men. In this context, “son” means literally that the next man named is the father of the man just named. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 11 14 jrq7 figs-explicit וַאֲחֵיהֶם֙ גִּבּ֣וֹרֵי חַ֔יִל מֵאָ֖ה עֶשְׂרִ֣ים וּשְׁמֹנָ֑ה 1 The implication is that this is the total number of priests that Amashsai was responsible for. If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Amashsai was responsible for 128 priests who were capable of working in the temple.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 11 14 h1f7 bita-hq וַאֲחֵיהֶם֙ 1 Here, in context, **brother** is a figurative way of saying “fellow priest,” as in [11:12](../11/12.md), although it is possible that some of the biological brothers of Amashsai were included in this group. “Their” is plural because it is describing this group in reference to all of the other priests, not just to Amashsai. Alternate translation: “their fellow priests” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-hq]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 11 14 h1f9 figs-abstractnouns גִּבּ֣וֹרֵי חַ֔יִל 1 In this context, the abstract noun **strength** likely refers to the way these men were physically capable of doing the required work in the temple. If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate the idea behind it with an adjective such as “capable.” Alternate translation: “men who were capable of working in the temple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
NEH 11 14 h1g1 figs-explicit וּפָקִ֣יד עֲלֵיהֶ֔ם 1 This appears to mean that while Amashsai was responsible overall for this group of priests, Zabdiel supervised their day-to-day work. Alternate translation: “Zabdiel was their supervisor.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 11 14 h1g3 translate-names זַבְדִּיאֵ֖ל בֶּן־הַגְּדוֹלִֽים 1 Zabdiel is the name of a man, and Haggedolim is the name of his father. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 11 15 h1g5 figs-explicit וּמִֽן־הַלְוִיִּ֑ם 1 The implication is that this next section of the list will name the men who were leaders of the Levites. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Here are the names of the leaders of the Levites who settled in Jerusalem. One of them was” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 11 15 f71n translate-names שְׁמַעְיָ֧ה בֶן־חַשּׁ֛וּב בֶּן־עַזְרִיקָ֥ם בֶּן־חֲשַׁבְיָ֖ה בֶּן־בּוּנִּֽי 1 These are the names of five men. In this context, **son** means literally that the next man named is the father of the man just named. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 11 16 q6zj translate-names וְשַׁבְּתַ֨י וְיוֹזָבָ֜ד 1 These are the names of two men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 11 16 if3q bita-hq מֵרָאשֵׁ֖י הַלְוִיִּֽם 1 **Head** here is a figurative way of saying “leader.” Alternate translation: “who were also leaders of the Levites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-hq]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 11 16 h1g7 figs-metaphor עַל־הַמְּלָאכָ֤ה הַחִֽיצֹנָה֙ לְבֵ֣ית הָאֱלֹהִ֔ים 1 Here the list speaks of the temple figuratively as the **house of God** as if it were God’s dwelling place. **Outside** refers to all of the duties that Levites had that did not involve working inside the temple itself. (For example, collecting offerings, as described in [10:37–38](../10/37.md).) Alternate translation: “supervised all the work that the Levites did outside the temple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 11 17 ix77 translate-names וּמַתַּנְיָ֣ה בֶן־מִ֠יכָה בֶּן־זַבְדִּ֨י בֶן־אָסָ֜ף 1 These are the names of four men. In this context, “son” means literally that the next man named is the father of the man just named. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 11 17 h1g9 figs-explicit וּמַתַּנְיָ֣ה 1 The implication is that Mattaniah was another leader of the Levites who settled in Jerusalem. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Another leader of the Levites who settled in Jerusalem was” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 11 17 sm9t bita-hq רֹ֗אשׁ הַתְּחִלָּה֙ יְהוֹדֶ֣ה לַתְּפִלָּ֔ה 1 **Head** here is a figurative way of saying “leader.” Alternate translation: “the director of the Levite choir” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-hq]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 11 17 h1h1 figs-metonymy רֹ֗אשׁ הַתְּחִלָּה֙ 1 This expression seems to indicate that Mattaniah told the Levite musicians who sang in the temple when to begin singing, that is, he was the director of their choir. He would have done many other things as well as the choir director, for example, keeping the tempo, having the choir sing louder or softer, and telling the choir when to stop singing. Here the list is describing the work of directing the choir figuratively by reference to one aspect of it, starting the singing. Alternate translation: “the director” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
NEH 11 17 h1h3 figs-metonymy יְהוֹדֶ֣ה לַתְּפִלָּ֔ה 1 Here the book is describing the choir figuratively by reference to one kind of thing it was associated with, the prayers of thanksgiving that it sang. Alternate translation: “of the choir” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
NEH 11 17 h1h5 figs-synecdoche יְהוֹדֶ֣ה לַתְּפִלָּ֔ה 1 While the list says that Mattaniah offered this prayer, really the whole choir did so, with him as its director. The list is referring to the entire choir figuratively by the name of one member, Mattaniah. Alternate translation: “of the choir” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
NEH 11 17 h1h7 figs-explicit וּבַקְבֻּקְיָ֖ה…וְעַבְדָּא֙ 1 The implication is that Bakbukiah and Abda were further leaders of the Levites who settled in Jerusalem. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Two other leaders of the priests who settled in Jerusalem were” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 11 17 djg7 translate-names וּבַקְבֻּקְיָ֖ה 1 This is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 11 17 h1h9 bita-hq מִשְׁנֶ֣ה מֵאֶחָ֑יו 1 Here **brother** likely refers figuratively to the other the Levites in this division. The expression means that Bakbukiah was another leader who assisted Mattaniah with the Levite choir. It could also possibly mean that he directed a second group of singers. Alternate translation: “who assisted Mattaniah with the Levite choir” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-hq]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 11 17 dy1v translate-ordinal מִשְׁנֶ֣ה 1 Alternate translation: “the next in command” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
NEH 11 17 h1i1 translate-names וְעַבְדָּא֙ בֶּן־שַׁמּ֔וּעַ בֶּן־גָּלָ֖ל בֶּן־יְדוּתֽוּן 1 These are the names of four men. In this context, **son** means literally that the next man named is the father of the man just named. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 11 18 h1i3 כָּל־הַלְוִיִּם֙ בְּעִ֣יר הַקֹּ֔דֶשׁ מָאתַ֖יִם שְׁמֹנִ֥ים וְאַרְבָּעָֽה 1 Alternate translation: “The total number of Levites who settled in Jerusalem was 284.”
NEH 11 18 di19 figs-informremind בְּעִ֣יר הַקֹּ֔דֶשׁ 1 As in [11:1](../11/01.md), this phrase describes Jerusalem as the place from which God chose to start making himself famous throughout the world, and as the city where God chose to put his temple. Alternate translation: “Jerusalem, the special city that God chose” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-informremind]])
NEH 11 19 i92r figs-explicit וְהַשּֽׁוֹעֲרִים֙ 1 The implication is that this next section of the list will name the men who were leaders of the gatekeepers. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Here are the names of the leaders of the gatekeepers who settled in Jerusalem.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 11 19 h1i5 translate-unknown וְהַשּֽׁוֹעֲרִים֙ 1 This means the people who were responsible to open and close the gates that controlled access to the city or perhaps the temple. See how you translated this term in [7:1](../07/01.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
NEH 11 19 j7b3 translate-names עַקּ֣וּב טַלְמ֔וֹן 1 These are the names of two men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 11 19 h1i7 figs-ellipsis וַאֲחֵיהֶ֖ם הַשֹּׁמְרִ֣ים בַּשְּׁעָרִ֑ים מֵאָ֖ה שִׁבְעִ֥ים וּשְׁנָֽיִם 1 The list is speaking in abbreviated form here. Alternate translation: “These leaders and their fellow gatekeepers made for a total of 172 gatekeepers who settled in Jerusalem.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
NEH 11 19 h1i9 bita-hq וַאֲחֵיהֶ֖ם הַשֹּׁמְרִ֣ים בַּשְּׁעָרִ֑ים 1 Here, in context, **brother** seems to be a figurative way of saying “fellow gatekeepers,” although it is possible that some of the biological brothers of Akkub and Talmon were included in this group. Alternate translation: “their fellow gatekeepers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-hq]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 11 20 h1j1 figs-metonymy וּשְׁאָ֨ר יִשְׂרָאֵ֜ל 1 Here the list figuratively refers to all of the Israelites by something associated with them, the name of their ancestor, Israel. Alternate translation: “all the other the Israelites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
NEH 11 20 h1j3 figs-idiom בְּכָל־עָרֵ֣י יְהוּדָ֔ה אִ֖ישׁ בְּנַחֲלָתֽוֹ 1 In this context, **a man** means “each person,” and as in [11:3](../11/03.md), it may be understood to indicate “each family.” Alternate translation: “continued to live in all the other cities of Judah, each family on its own ancestral land” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
NEH 11 20 h1j5 figs-abstractnouns אִ֖ישׁ בְּנַחֲלָתֽוֹ 1 The abstract noun **inheritance** refers to the land that was passed down through the generations in each Israelite family. The Levites did not have territory of their own, but they had some towns and surrounding pasturelands as their property. Alternate translation: “each family on its own ancestral land” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
NEH 11 20 jh1j translate-unknown וְהַנְּתִינִ֖ים 1 The term **Nethinim** describes servants who worked in the temple. Alternate translation: “the temple servants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
NEH 11 21 vct4 translate-unknown בָּעֹ֑פֶל 1 This is probably the name of a geographic feature, a fortified extension of the hill that the Jerusalem temple was located on. See how you translated this term in [3:26-27](../03/26.md). Alternate translation: “Ophel Hill” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
NEH 11 21 eu4g translate-names וְצִיחָ֥א וְגִשְׁפָּ֖א 1 These are the names of two men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 11 21 h1j9 bita-part1 עַל־הַנְּתִינִֽים 1 This is a figurative way of saying that Ziha and Gishpa were the leaders of this group. Alternate translation: “were the leaders of the temple servants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-part1]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 11 22 l3ba וּפְקִ֤יד הַלְוִיִּם֙ בִּיר֣וּשָׁלִַ֔ם 1 Alternate translation: “the supervisor of the Levites who settled in Jerusalem”
NEH 11 22 rr5e translate-names עֻזִּ֤י בֶן־בָּנִי֙ בֶּן־חֲשַׁבְיָ֔ה בֶּן־מַתַּנְיָ֖ה בֶּן־מִיכָ֑א 1 These are the names of five men. In this context, **son** means literally that the next man named is the father of the man just named. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 11 22 h1k1 bita-hq מִבְּנֵ֤י אָסָף֙ 1 **Sons** here figuratively means “descendants.” Alternate translation: “who were descendants of Asaph” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-hq]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 11 22 h1k3 figs-informremind הַמְשֹׁ֣רְרִ֔ים 1 Here the list supplies some background information that reminds readers what the Levites in the temple were primarily responsible for. Alternate translation: “and who performed music” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-informremind]])
NEH 11 22 h1k5 figs-metaphor לְנֶ֖גֶד מְלֶ֥אכֶת בֵּית־הָאֱלֹהִֽים 1 Here the list speaks of the temple figuratively as the **house of God** as if it were God’s dwelling place. By contrast with the Levites described in [11:16](../11/16.md), these Levites were responsible for all the duties that had to be performed inside the temple itself. Alternate translation: “who were responsible for the work that was done inside the temple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 11 23 h1k7 writing-background כִּֽי 1 This word indicates that the information that follows provides further background information about this situation. You could express the same meaning with a word that indicates this in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
NEH 11 23 km8l figs-personification מִצְוַ֥ת הַמֶּ֖לֶךְ עֲלֵיהֶ֑ם 1 Here the list speaks figuratively of the commandment as if it rested upon the Levite singers. Alternate translation: “the king had given orders concerning them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
NEH 11 23 a9fz figs-abstractnouns וַאֲמָנָ֥ה עַל־הַמְשֹׁרְרִ֖ים 1 The abstract noun **support** refers to an order that the king had given for his own kingdom to pay for the costs of worship in the temple. If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate the same idea with a verb such as “subsidize.” Alternate translation: “to subsidize the expenses of the Levite singers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
NEH 11 23 h1k9 figs-idiom דְּבַר־י֥וֹם בְּיוֹמֽוֹ 1 This is an idiom that means “as each day required.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
NEH 11 24 aee9 translate-names וּפְתַֽחְיָ֨ה בֶּן־מְשֵֽׁיזַבְאֵ֜ל 1 Pethahiah is the name of a man, and Meshezabel is the name of his father. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 11 24 h1l1 bita-hq מִבְּנֵי־זֶ֤רַח 1 **Sons** here figuratively means “descendants.” Alternate translation: “one of the descendants of Zerah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-hq]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 11 24 h1l3 translate-names זֶ֤רַח בֶּן־יְהוּדָה֙ 1 Zerah is the name of a man, and Judah is the name of his father. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 11 24 h1l5 bita-hq לְיַ֣ד הַמֶּ֔לֶךְ 1 Here **hand** figuratively means “side.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-hq]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
NEH 11 24 h1l7 figs-metonymy לְיַ֣ד הַמֶּ֔לֶךְ 1 The list is figuratively describing Zerah as the king’s advisor by reference to something associated with that role, the place that he would usually occupy next to the king. Alternate translation: “was an advisor to the king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
NEH 11 24 dqa4 figs-explicit לְכָל־דָּבָ֖ר לָעָֽם 1 **People** here means the Jewish people. Alternate translation: “for all matters concerning the Jewish people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 11 25 h1l9 וְאֶל 1 After describing the various groups that settled in Jerusalem and their leaders, the list said in [11:20](../11/20.md) that all the other the Israelites continued to live in the other cities of Judah. In [111:21–24](../11/24.md) the list gave additional details about some other things, but it is now returning to speak about those cities and towns outside of Jerusalem. If it would be clearer in your language, you could indicate this with a phrase such as “and as for.”
NEH 11 25 h1m1 figs-metaphor הַחֲצֵרִ֖ים בִּשְׂדֹתָ֑ם 1 This refers to settlements and the adjacent agricultural land. It is as if the villages are **in** the fields because the fields surround the villages. Alternate translation: “the towns where there was farmland” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 11 25 h1m3 figs-explicit הַחֲצֵרִ֖ים בִּשְׂדֹתָ֑ם 1 The implication is that these are the places where people lived who did not settle in Jerusalem. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the towns outside Jerusalem where there was farmland.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 11 25 h1m5 figs-metaphor מִבְּנֵ֣י יְהוּדָ֗ה 1 **Sons** here figuratively means “descendants.” Alternate translation: “some of the descendants of Judah” or “some of the people of Judah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-hq]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 11 25 rg1f translate-names בְּקִרְיַ֤ת הָֽאַרְבַּע֙…וּבְדִיבֹן֙…וּבִֽיקַּבְצְאֵ֖ל 1 These are the names of three towns. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 11 25 h1m7 bita-hq בְּקִרְיַ֤ת הָֽאַרְבַּע֙ וּבְנֹתֶ֔יהָ וּבְדִיבֹן֙ וּבְנֹתֶ֔יהָ וּבִֽיקַּבְצְאֵ֖ל וַחֲצֵרֶֽיהָ 1 In this context, referring to the **daughters** of a town is a figurative way of describing the small communities that have grown up around it. (These communities were likely started by people from the town, and they depended on the town the way a child depends on a parent.) Here and in verses [27](../11/27.md), [28](../11/28.md), [30](../11/30.md), and [31](../11/31.md), use whatever term would convey this concept most clearly in your language. But be careful to distinguish between this term and the one that is used generally for the places in this part of the list. For example, if you translate “daughters” as “villages,” then use a word like “town” for the places named on the list and other places that the list describes with the same word. Alternate translation: “in Kiriath Arba and its villages, in Dibon and its villages, and in Jekabzeel and the surrounding towns.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-hq]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 11 26 d9f4 translate-names וּבְיֵשׁ֥וּעַ וּבְמוֹלָדָ֖ה וּבְבֵ֥ית פָּֽלֶט 1 These are the names of three towns. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 11 27 nu5z translate-names וּבַחֲצַ֥ר שׁוּעָ֛ל וּבִבְאֵ֥ר שֶׁ֖בַע 1 These are the names of two towns. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 11 28 dl5v translate-names וּבְצִֽקְלַ֥ג וּבִמְכֹנָ֖ה 1 These are the names of two towns. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 11 29 t41a translate-names וּבְעֵ֥ין רִמּ֛וֹן וּבְצָרְעָ֖ה וּבְיַרְמֽוּ 1 These are the names of three towns. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 11 30 vn2z translate-names זָנֹ֤חַ עֲדֻלָּם֙ וְחַצְרֵיהֶ֔ם לָכִישׁ֙ וּשְׂדֹתֶ֔יהָ עֲזֵקָ֖ה וּבְנֹתֶ֑יהָ 1 These are the names of cities or towns. Alternate translation: “in Zanoah and Adullam and the nearby towns, in Lachish and the surrounding farmland, and in Azekah and its villages.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 11 30 h1m9 figs-metaphor וַיַּחֲנ֥וּ מִבְּאֵֽר־שֶׁ֖בַע עַד־גֵּֽיא־הִנֹּֽם 1 **Encamped** is a figurative way of saying that the people of Judah lived throughout this area. They were no longer living in tents, but in permanent houses. Alternate translation: “And so the people of Judah were living throughout the area from Beersheba to the valley of Hinnom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 11 30 mzq1 grammar-connect-logic-result וַיַּחֲנ֥וּ 1 This phrase indicates that the sentence it introduces explains the results of what the previous sentences have described. If the people from the tribe of Judah lived in all these towns, then they were spread out over the whole area that the next phrase indicates. Alternate translation: “and so” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
NEH 11 30 h1n1 figs-explicit וַיַּחֲנ֥וּ 1 **They** refers to the people of Judah, looking back to the start of this part of the list in [11:25](../11/25.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 11 30 h1n3 grammar-connect-logic-contrast וּבְנֵ֥י 1 This phrase indicates that a different group will now be in focus, the people of the tribe of Benjamin. If it would be clearer in your language, you could indicate this contrast with an expression such as “for their part.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
NEH 11 31 n61t bita-hq וּבְנֵ֥י בִנְיָמִ֖ן 1 **Sons** here figuratively means “descendants.” Alternate translation: “the people of the tribe of Benjamin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-hq]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 11 31 h1n5 figs-ellipsis מִגָּ֑בַע 1 Here the list is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would ordinarily need in order to be complete. The meaning is that the people of the tribe of Benjamin lived in different towns, beginning with Geba and including the rest of the towns that the list names afterwards. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “lived in other towns, including Geba” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
NEH 11 31 uha3 translate-names מִגָּ֑בַע מִכְמָ֣שׂ וְעַיָּ֔ה וּבֵֽית־אֵ֖ל 1 These are the names of four towns. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 11 31 lm1q bita-hq וּבֵֽית־אֵ֖ל וּבְנֹתֶֽיהָ 1 As in [11:25](../11/25.md) (and also in verses [27](../11/27.md), [28](../11/28.md), [30](../11/30.md), and [31](../11/31.d)), **daughters** is a figurative way of speaking of the small communities that grow up around a town. Review the note to [11:25](../11/25.md) if that would be helpful. Alternate translation: “Bethel and its villages” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-hq]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 11 32 ucv8 translate-names עֲנָת֥וֹת נֹ֖ב עֲנָֽנְיָֽה 1 These are the names of three towns. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 11 33 jwf7 translate-names חָצ֥וֹר׀ רָמָ֖ה גִּתָּֽיִם 1 These are the names of three towns. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 11 34 e1ls translate-names חָדִ֥יד צְבֹעִ֖ים נְבַלָּֽט 1 These are the names of three towns. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 11 35 h1n9 figs-informremind גֵּ֥י הַחֲרָשִֽׁים 1 Here the list supplies some background information that reminds readers what town of Ono was known for. It was a center for craftsmen. Alternate translation: “which was a center for craftsmen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-informremind]])
NEH 11 36 h1o1 grammar-connect-logic-contrast וּמִן 1 This phrase indicates that yet another group will now be in focus. If it would be clearer in your language, you could indicate this contrast with an expression such as “finally” (since this is also the last group on the list). Alternate translation: “Finally, from” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
NEH 11 36 h1o3 figs-ellipsis וּמִן־הַלְוִיִּ֔ם מַחְלְק֥וֹת יְהוּדָ֖ה לְבִנְיָמִֽין 1 Here the list is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would ordinarily need in order to be complete. The meaning seems to be that certain sections of the Levite community that had previously lived in the territory that had belonged to the tribe of Judah went to live in the territory that had belonged to the tribe of Benjamin, rather than returning to their former homeland. Alternate translation: “some of the Levites whose families had lived in the territory of Judah now went to live in the territory of Benjamin.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
NEH 11 36 y212 figs-explicit וּמִן־הַלְוִיִּ֔ם מַחְלְק֥וֹת יְהוּדָ֖ה לְבִנְיָמִֽין 1 The book does not say explicitly why these Levites moved to a different area. However, one reasonable inference in light of the overall themes of the book of Nehemiah is that they did this so that there would be people throughout the entire area where the Israelites were living who could explain the law to them. If that would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “some of the Levites whose families had lived in the territory of Judah now went to live in the territory of Benjamin so that they could teach God’s law to the people living there.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 12 intro xmt3 0 # Nehemiah 12 General Notes<br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Dedication of the wall<br><br>In the ancient Near East, it was common to dedicate an important structure to a god. When it was completed, the wall was dedicated to Yahweh. Long lists of people are present, indicating that “everyone” was present for this and praised Yahweh. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/falsegod]])
NEH 12 1 i1a1 וְאֵ֨לֶּה֙ הַכֹּהֲנִ֣ים וְהַלְוִיִּ֔ם אֲשֶׁ֥ר עָל֛וּ עִם־זְרֻבָּבֶ֥ל בֶּן־שְׁאַלְתִּיאֵ֖ל וְיֵשׁ֑וּעַ 1 The implication of the list in verses 1–25 of this chapter is that the priests and Levites had dependable records of their ancestry. So when Nehemiah called them back into service for the dedication of the wall and the collection of offerings, as described in the rest of this chapter, he was employing the people with exactly the lineage that the law required. Throughout this book, Nehemiah stresses how he made sure that the people of Judah were not only organized and well-protected, but also obedient to the law. This is one more example of that latter concern. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Here is a record that shows that the priests and Levites had dependable records of their ancestry. It begins with the priests who first returned to Judah with Zerubbabel the son of Shealtiel, their governor, and with Joshua the high priest.”
NEH 12 1 ixs5 figs-idiom עָל֛וּ 1 As in [7:6](../07/06.md) and [7:61](../07/61.md), **went up** means “traveled from Babylon back to Judah,” since that involves going from a river valley up into the mountains. Alternate translation: “returned to Judah from Babylon” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
NEH 12 1 b4x7 figs-explicit עִם־זְרֻבָּבֶ֥ל בֶּן־שְׁאַלְתִּיאֵ֖ל 1 This was the man who led the first group of Jews who returned to the province of Judah, about a hundred years before the time of Nehemiah. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate this more explicitly. Alternate translation: “under the leadership of Zerubbabel the son of Shealtiel, their governor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 12 1 i1a3 translate-names עִם־זְרֻבָּבֶ֥ל בֶּן־שְׁאַלְתִּיאֵ֖ל 1 Zerubbabel is the name of a man, and Shealtiel is the name of his father. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 12 1 myj6 figs-explicit וְיֵשׁ֑וּעַ 1 Jeshua This was the other leader of the first group of Jews who returned to the province of Judah. While Zerubbabel was the governor and civil authority, Joshua was the high priest and religious authority. Alternate translation: “and under the leadership of Joshua the high priest” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 12 1 b8ry figs-explicit שְׂרָיָ֥ה יִרְמְיָ֖ה עֶזְרָֽא 1 The list now names the priests who returned to Judah in this first group. Alternate translation: “The priests were:” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 12 1 cd2t translate-names שְׂרָיָ֥ה יִרְמְיָ֖ה עֶזְרָֽא 1 These are names of three men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 12 2 p4ml translate-names אֲמַרְיָ֥ה מַלּ֖וּךְ חַטּֽוּשׁ 1 Amariah…Malluk…Hattush These are names of three men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 12 3 gwk1 translate-names שְׁכַנְיָ֥ה רְחֻ֖ם מְרֵמֹֽת 1 Shecaniah…Rehum…Meremoth These are names of three men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 12 4 qt5n translate-names עִדּ֥וֹא גִנְּת֖וֹי אֲבִיָּֽה 1 Iddo…Ginnethon…Abijah These are names of three men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 12 5 x3ri translate-names מִיָּמִ֥ין מַֽעַדְיָ֖ה בִּלְגָּֽה 1 Mijamin…Moadiah…Bilgah These are names of three men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 12 6 udm2 translate-names שְׁמַֽעְיָ֥ה וְיוֹיָרִ֖יב יְדַֽעְיָֽה 1 Shemaiah…Joiarib…Jedaiah These are names of three men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 12 7 g43p translate-names סַלּ֣וּ עָמ֔וֹק חִלְקִיָּ֖ה יְדַֽעְיָ֑ה 1 These are names of four men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 12 7 i1a5 figs-informremind אֵ֣לֶּה רָאשֵׁ֧י הַכֹּהֲנִ֛ים וַאֲחֵיהֶ֖ם בִּימֵ֥י יֵשֽׁוּעַ 1 This is a summary statement about the twenty-two men who have just been named. Alternate translation: “These men were the leaders of the priests in their own divisions while Joshua was the high priest.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-informremind]])
NEH 12 7 i1a7 bita-hq רָאשֵׁ֧י הַכֹּהֲנִ֛ים וַאֲחֵיהֶ֖ם 1 **Head** here is a figurative way of saying “leader.” Alternate translation: “the leaders of the priests in their own divisions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-hq]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 12 7 i1a9 bita-hq רָאשֵׁ֧י הַכֹּהֲנִ֛ים וַאֲחֵיהֶ֖ם 1 In this context, **and** means “that is,” so the full expression means, “the leaders of the priests, that is, the ones who were their ‘brothers.’” **Brother** itself is a figurative way of saying “fellow priests,” and specifically in this context it means “the priests in their own divisions.” (King David had divided the priests into divisions so that they could rotate their responsibilities, and the Israelites reconstituted these divisions after the exile.) It is possible that some of the people in each division were the biological brothers of the leaders named, since the divisions were created based on close kinship ties, but the word “brother” is essentially figurative. Alternate translation: “their fellow priests” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-hq]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 12 7 i1b1 figs-idiom בִּימֵ֥י יֵשֽׁוּעַ 1 The term **days** is used figuratively here to refer a particular period of time. Alternate translation: “in the time of Joshua” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
NEH 12 8 i1b3 figs-ellipsis וְהַלְוִיִּ֗ם 1 Here the list is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would ordinarily need in order to be complete. Alternate translation: “And these were the leaders of the Levites who first returned to Judah with Zerubbabel the governor and with Joshua the high priest.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
NEH 12 8 xy1h translate-names יֵשׁ֧וּעַ בִּנּ֛וּי קַדְמִיאֵ֥ל שֵׁרֵבְיָ֖ה יְהוּדָ֣ה מַתַּנְיָ֑ה 1 These are the names of six men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 12 8 i1b5 bita-hq עַֽל־הֻיְּד֖וֹת ה֥וּא וְאֶחָֽיו 1 **He** refers to Mattaniah. **Brothers** figuratively means “fellow Levite leaders.” Alternate translation: “Mattaniah and his fellow Levite leaders were responsible for directing the choir.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-hq]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 12 8 i1b7 figs-metonymy עַֽל־הֻיְּד֖וֹת 1 As in [11:17](../11/17.md), here the book is describing the choir figuratively by reference to one kind of thing it was associated with, the songs of thanksgiving that it sang. Alternate translation: “directed the choir” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
NEH 12 8 i1b9 bita-part1 עַֽל־הֻיְּד֖וֹת 1 **Over** is a figurative way of saying that Mattaniah and his colleagues were responsible for this group. Alternate translation: “were responsible for directing the choir” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-part1]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 12 8 i1c1 figs-metonymy הֻיְּד֖וֹת 1 One responsibility of the Levite choir was to sing prayers of thanksgiving. But it sang many other things as well. Here the list is describing everything the choir sang figuratively by reference to one kind of thing it sang, prayers of thanksgiving. Alternate translation: “the choir” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
NEH 12 9 nnn1 translate-names וּבַקְבֻּֽקְיָ֨ה וְעֻנִּ֧י 1 These are the names of two men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 12 9 i1c3 bita-hq אֲחֵיהֶ֛ם 1 **Brothers** here figuratively means “their fellow Levite leaders.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-hq]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 12 9 nhn4 figs-explicit לְנֶגְדָּ֖ם לְמִשְׁמָרֽוֹת 1 This phrase could mean one of two things. (1) It could mean that Mattaniah and his associates directed one choir, and Bakbukiah and Unni directed a second choir that stood opposite to this first one and sang responses to what it sang. (2) It could mean that Bakbukiah and Unni took turns with Mattaniah and his associates in assuming the responsibilities of directing a single Levite choir. Alternate translation: “led a second choir that sang responses” or “took turns with them directing the Levite choir.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 12 10 ri33 figs-ellipsis וְיֵשׁ֖וּעַ הוֹלִ֣יד אֶת־יֽוֹיָקִ֑ים וְיֽוֹיָקִים֙ הוֹלִ֣יד אֶת־אֶלְיָשִׁ֔יב וְאֶלְיָשִׁ֖יב אֶת־יוֹיָדָֽע 1 Here the book is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would ordinarily need in order to be complete. Alternate translation: “Joshua was the father of Joiakim, Joiakim was the father of Eliashib, Eliashib was the father of Joiada,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
NEH 12 10 xd69 וְיֵשׁ֖וּעַ הוֹלִ֣יד אֶת־יֽוֹיָקִ֑ים וְיֽוֹיָקִים֙ הוֹלִ֣יד אֶת־אֶלְיָשִׁ֔יב וְאֶלְיָשִׁ֖יב אֶת־יוֹיָדָֽע 1 Since this list actually continues into the next verse, for clarity you may wish to end this verse with the punctuation that your language uses to indicate that a series is continuing, rather than with the punctuation it uses to show that a sentence is ending.
NEH 12 10 i1c5 figs-explicit וְיֵשׁ֖וּעַ הוֹלִ֣יד אֶת־יֽוֹיָקִ֑ים וְיֽוֹיָקִים֙ הוֹלִ֣יד אֶת־אֶלְיָשִׁ֔יב וְאֶלְיָשִׁ֖יב אֶת־יוֹיָדָֽע 1 This is a record of the succession of the Jewish high priests for several generations, beginning with Joshua, the high priest who accompanied the first group that returned to Judah from exile. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “When Joshua died, his son Joiakim succeeded him as high priest. When Joiakim died, his son Eliashib succeeded him as high priest. When Eliashib died, his son Joiada succeeded him as high priest.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 12 11 a7yv וְיוֹיָדָע֙ הוֹלִ֣יד אֶת־יוֹנָתָ֔ן וְיוֹנָתָ֖ן הוֹלִ֥יד אֶת־יַדּֽוּעַ 1 Alternate translation, if continuing the sentence from the previous verse: “Joiada was the father of Jonathan, and Jonathan was the father of Jaddua.” Alternate translation, if making explicit that this is the succession of high priests: “When Joiada died, his son Jonathan succeeded him as high priest. When Jonathan died, his son Jaddua succeeded him as high priest.”
NEH 12 11 i1c7 translate-names וְיוֹיָדָע֙…יוֹנָתָ֔ן…יַדּֽוּעַ 1 These are the names of three men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 12 12 h3jl figs-ellipsis וּבִימֵי֙ יֽוֹיָקִ֔ים הָי֥וּ כֹהֲנִ֖ים רָאשֵׁ֣י הָאָב֑וֹת 1 Here the book is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would ordinarily need in order to be complete. “Priests were” is an abbreviated way of saying “these are the priests who were.” Alternate translation: “These are the priests who were clan leaders while Joiakim was the high priest.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
NEH 12 12 pa3k figs-idiom וּבִימֵי֙ יֽוֹיָקִ֔ים 1 The term **days** is used figuratively here to refer a particular period of time. Alternate translation: “while Joiakim was the high priest” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
NEH 12 12 uae6 figs-ellipsis רָאשֵׁ֣י הָאָב֑וֹת 1 This seems to be an abbreviated way of saying “the heads of father’s houses.” The full expression “house of the father” or “father’s house” is used in [7:61](../07/61.md). See how you translated it there, and review the note there if that would be helpful. Alternate translation: “clan leaders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
NEH 12 12 l4u9 bita-hq רָאשֵׁ֣י 1 **Head** here is a figurative way of saying “leader.” Alternate translation: “leaders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-hq]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 12 12 j9qv figs-ellipsis לִשְׂרָיָ֣ה מְרָיָ֔ה לְיִרְמְיָ֖ה חֲנַנְיָֽה 1 In this list the book continues to leave out some of the words that a sentence would ordinarily need in order to be complete. Alternate translation: “Meraiah was the leader of the clan whose ancestor was Saraiah. Hananiah was the leader of the clan whose ancestor was Jeremiah.”
NEH 12 12 vv32 translate-names יֽוֹיָקִ֔ים…לִשְׂרָיָ֣ה מְרָיָ֔ה לְיִרְמְיָ֖ה חֲנַנְיָֽה 1 These are the names of five men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 12 13 uwn8 לְעֶזְרָ֣א מְשֻׁלָּ֔ם לַאֲמַרְיָ֖ה יְהוֹחָנָֽן 1 Alternate translation: “Meshullam was the leader of the clan whose ancestor was Ezra. Jehohanan was the leader of the clan whose ancestor was Amariah.”
NEH 12 13 hm77 translate-names לְעֶזְרָ֣א מְשֻׁלָּ֔ם לַאֲמַרְיָ֖ה יְהוֹחָנָֽן 1 These are the names of four men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 12 14 vig4 למלוכי יֽוֹנָתָ֔ן לִשְׁבַנְיָ֖ה יוֹסֵֽף 1 Alternate translation: “Jonathan was the leader of the clan whose ancestor was Malluk. Joseph was the leader of the clan whose ancestor was Shebaniah.”
NEH 12 14 tum7 translate-names למלוכי יֽוֹנָתָ֔ן לִשְׁבַנְיָ֖ה יוֹסֵֽף 1 These are the names of four men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 12 15 z68b לְחָרִ֣ם עַדְנָ֔א לִמְרָי֖וֹת חֶלְקָֽי 1 Alternate translation: “Adna was the leader of the clan whose ancestor was Harim. Helkai was the leader of the clan whose ancestor was Meremoth.”
NEH 12 15 a64p translate-names לְחָרִ֣ם עַדְנָ֔א לִמְרָי֖וֹת חֶלְקָֽי 1 These are the names of four men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 12 16 hb4y לְעִדּ֥וֹא זְכַרְיָ֖ה לְגִנְּת֥וֹן מְשֻׁלָּֽם 1 Alternate translation: “Zechariah was the leader of the clan whose ancestor was Iddo. Meshullam was the leader of the clan whose ancestor was Ginnethon.”
NEH 12 16 u64u translate-names לְעִדּ֥וֹא זְכַרְיָ֖ה לְגִנְּת֥וֹן מְשֻׁלָּֽם 1 These are the names of four men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 12 17 em6c לַאֲבִיָּ֖ה זִכְרִ֑י לְמִ֨נְיָמִ֔ין לְמוֹעַדְיָ֖ה פִּלְטָֽי 1 It appears that the name of the leader of the Miniamin clan has accidentally been lost from the text. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Zichri was the leader of the clan whose ancestor was Abijah. Piltai was the leader of the clan whose ancestor was Moadiah. It is no longer known who was the leader at this time of the clan whose ancestor was Miniamin.”
NEH 12 17 e7rx translate-names לַאֲבִיָּ֖ה זִכְרִ֑י לְמִ֨נְיָמִ֔ין לְמוֹעַדְיָ֖ה פִּלְטָֽי 1 These are the names of five men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 12 18 zd3p לְבִלְגָּ֣ה שַׁמּ֔וּעַ לִֽשְׁמַעְיָ֖ה יְהוֹנָתָֽן 1 Alternate translation: “Shammua was the leader of the clan whose ancestor was Bilgah. Jehonathan was the leader of the clan whose ancestor was Shemaiah.”
NEH 12 18 t8yy translate-names לְבִלְגָּ֣ה שַׁמּ֔וּעַ לִֽשְׁמַעְיָ֖ה יְהוֹנָתָֽן 1 These are the names of four men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 12 19 u373 לְיוֹיָרִ֣יב מַתְּנַ֔י לִֽידַֽעְיָ֖ה עֻזִּֽי 1 Alternate translation: “Mattenai was the leader of the clan whose ancestor was Joiarib. Uzzi was the leader of the clan whose ancestor was Jedaiah.”
NEH 12 19 s8n3 translate-names לְיוֹיָרִ֣יב מַתְּנַ֔י לִֽידַֽעְיָ֖ה עֻזִּֽי 1 These are the names of four men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 12 20 y23c לְסַלַּ֥י קַלָּ֖י לְעָמ֥וֹק עֵֽבֶר 1 Alternate translation: “Kallai was the leader of the clan whose ancestor was Sallai. Eber was the leader of the clan whose ancestor was Amok.”
NEH 12 20 p8dg translate-names לְסַלַּ֥י קַלָּ֖י לְעָמ֥וֹק עֵֽבֶר 1 These are the names of four men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 12 21 v16d לְחִלְקִיָּ֣ה חֲשַׁבְיָ֔ה לִֽידַֽעְיָ֖ה נְתַנְאֵֽל 1 Alternate translation: “Hashabiah was the leader of the clan whose ancestor was Hilkiah. Nethanel was the leader of the clan whose ancestor was Jedaiah.”
NEH 12 21 vwp6 translate-names לְחִלְקִיָּ֣ה חֲשַׁבְיָ֔ה לִֽידַֽעְיָ֖ה נְתַנְאֵֽל 1 These are the names of four men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 12 22 i1c9 figs-ellipsis הַלְוִיִּם֩ בִּימֵ֨י אֶלְיָשִׁ֜יב יוֹיָדָ֤ע וְיוֹחָנָן֙ וְיַדּ֔וּעַ כְּתוּבִ֖ים רָאשֵׁ֣י אָב֑וֹת 1 Here the book leaves out some of the words that a sentence would ordinarily need in order to be complete. The meaning seems to be, “During the times when Eliashib, Joiada, Johanan, and Jaddua served as high priest, the Israelites kept records of which Levites were the clan leaders.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
NEH 12 22 i1d1 figs-idiom בִּימֵ֨י אֶלְיָשִׁ֜יב יוֹיָדָ֤ע וְיוֹחָנָן֙ וְיַדּ֔וּעַ 1 The term **days** is used figuratively here to refer a particular period of time. Alternate translation: “the times when Eliashib, Joiada, Johanan, and Jaddua served as high priest” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
NEH 12 22 snj3 translate-names אֶלְיָשִׁ֜יב יוֹיָדָ֤ע וְיוֹחָנָן֙ וְיַדּ֔וּעַ 1 These are the names of four men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 12 22 i1d3 figs-activepassive כְּתוּבִ֖ים 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you can say who did the action. Alternate translation: “the Israelites kept records” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
NEH 12 22 i1d5 figs-ellipsis רָאשֵׁ֣י אָב֑וֹת 1 This seems to be an abbreviated way of saying “the heads of father’s houses.” The full expression “house of the father” or “father’s house” is used in [7:61](../07/61.md). See how you translated it there, and review the note there if that would be helpful. Alternate translation: “clan leaders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
NEH 12 22 i1d7 bita-hq רָאשֵׁ֣י 1 **Head** here is a figurative way of saying “leader.” Alternate translation: “leaders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-hq]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 12 22 cr6d figs-ellipsis וְהַכֹּ֣הֲנִ֔ים עַל־מַלְכ֖וּת דָּרְיָ֥וֶשׁ הַפָּֽרְסִֽי 1 Here again the book leaves out some of the words that a sentence would ordinarily need in order to be complete. The meaning seems to be, “The Israelites also made records during the reign of Darius III of which priests were the heads of their clans.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
NEH 12 22 i1d9 figs-explicit דָּרְיָ֥וֶשׁ הַפָּֽרְסִֽי 1 The Persian king named Darius who reigned at the time of Jaddua, who is the last high priest mentioned in this verse, was Darius III Codomannus. The implication is therefore that the phrase “Darius the Persian” refers to him. (Since he reigned about a hundred years after Nehemiah lived, it is probable that scribes added this information to the book later on, to bring it up to date.) If it would be helpful to your readers, you could make this likely identification explicit. Alternate translation: “Darius III” or “Darius Codomannus” or “Darius III Codomannus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 12 23 q9hz figs-activepassive בְּנֵ֤י לֵוִי֙ רָאשֵׁ֣י הָֽאָב֔וֹת כְּתוּבִ֕ים 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you can say who did the action. Alternate translation: “Scribes recorded the names of the Levites who were clan leaders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
NEH 12 23 i1e1 figs-metaphor בְּנֵ֤י לֵוִי֙ רָאשֵׁ֣י הָֽאָב֔וֹת כְּתוּבִ֕ים 1 **Sons** here figuratively means “descendants,” so this phrase refers to the descendants of Levi or the Levites. Alternate translation: “the Levites who were clan leaders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-hq]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 12 23 i1e3 figs-ellipsis רָאשֵׁ֣י הָֽאָב֔וֹת 1 This seems to be an abbreviated way of saying “the heads of father’s houses.” The full expression “house of the father” or “father’s house” is used in [7:61](../07/61.md). See how you translated it there, and review the note there if that would be helpful. Alternate translation: “clan leaders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
NEH 12 23 i1e5 bita-hq רָאשֵׁ֣י 1 **Head** here is a figurative way of saying “leader.” Alternate translation: “leaders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-hq]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 12 23 i1e7 figs-idiom עַל־סֵ֖פֶר דִּבְרֵ֣י הַיָּמִ֑ים 1 This is an idiom that describes a regular record of the events. Alternate translation: “in their chronicles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
NEH 12 23 d2rp figs-idiom וְעַד־יְמֵ֖י יֽוֹחָנָ֥ן 1 The term **days** is used figuratively here to refer a particular period of time. Alternate translation: “through the time when Johanan was the high priest” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
NEH 12 23 i1e9 translate-names יֽוֹחָנָ֥ן 1 **Johanan** is the name of a man. The context indicates that he was a Jewish high priest, and so he seems to be the same man who is called “Jonathan” in verse 11. If you think it would make things clearer for your readers, you could use the same name both here and in verse 11, either “Johanan” or “Jonathan.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 12 23 i1f1 bita-hq בֶּן־אֶלְיָשִֽׁיב 1 **Eliashib** is the name of a man. Verse [12:10](../12/10.md) shows that Johanan/Jonathan was not actually his son, but his grandson. So **son** here figuratively means “descendant.” Alternate translation: “the grandson of Eliashib” or “the descendant of Eliashib” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-hq]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 12 24 kx4z figs-ellipsis וְרָאשֵׁ֣י הַ֠לְוִיִּם…לְהַלֵּ֣ל לְהוֹד֔וֹת 1 Here the book leaves out some of the words that a sentence would ordinarily need in order to be complete. This sentence seems to mean, “The Levite leaders who directed the choir that sang songs of praise and thanksgiving were …” You could say something like that as an alternate translation if it would be helpful to your readers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
NEH 12 24 d373 bita-hq רָאשֵׁ֣י הַ֠לְוִיִּם 1 **Head** here is a figurative way of saying “leader.” Alternate translation: “the leaders of the Levites” or “the Levite leaders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-hq]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 12 24 i1f3 translate-names חֲשַׁבְיָ֨ה שֵֽׁרֵבְיָ֜ה 1 These are the names of two men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 12 24 e1ls translate-names וְיֵשׁ֤וּעַ בֶּן־קַדְמִיאֵל֙ 1 Jeshua is the name of a man, and Kadmiel is the name of his father. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 12 24 i1f5 figs-explicit וַאֲחֵיהֶ֣ם לְנֶגְדָּ֔ם…מִשְׁמָ֖ר לְעֻמַּ֥ת מִשְׁמָֽר 1 As in [12:9](../12/09.md), this could mean one of two things. (1) It could mean that Hashabiah, Sherebiah, and Jeshua directed one choir, and other Levite leaders directed a second choir that stood opposite to this first one and sang responses to what it sang. (2) It could mean that other Levite leaders took turns with these three men in assuming the responsibilities of directing a single Levite choir. Alternate translation: “Their fellow Levite leaders directed a second choir that sang responses” or “their fellow Levite leaders took turns with them directing the choir.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 12 24 i1f7 bita-hq וַאֲחֵיהֶ֣ם 1 **Brothers** here figuratively means “their fellow Levite leaders.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-hq]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 12 24 i1f9 לְהַלֵּ֣ל לְהוֹד֔וֹת 1 Alternate translation: “the choir that sang songs of praise and thanksgiving”
NEH 12 24 j1a1 figs-informremind בְּמִצְוַ֖ת דָּוִ֣יד אִישׁ־הָאֱלֹהִ֑ים 1 Here the book offers some background information to remind readers of the character of David, who had been a great founding king of Israel. Alternate translation: “as King David, that godly man, had commanded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-informremind]])
NEH 12 25 p55l translate-names מַתַּנְיָ֧ה וּבַקְבֻּֽקְיָ֛ה עֹבַדְיָ֥ה מְשֻׁלָּ֖ם טַלְמ֣וֹן עַקּ֑וּב 1 Mattaniah, Bakbukiah, Obadiah, Meshullam, Talmon, and Akkub These are names of six men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 12 25 j1a3 translate-unknown שֹׁמְרִ֤ים שֽׁוֹעֲרִים֙ מִשְׁמָ֔ר בַּאֲסֻפֵּ֖י הַשְּׁעָרִֽים 1 Since in context these men appear to have been Levites, the **gates** described are likely the gates of the temple. It seems that there were rooms above the temple gateways that were used as storehouses or treasuries, and these men were responsible for overseeing and protecting them. Alternate translation: “guarded the store rooms above the gateways to the temple.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
NEH 12 26 j1a5 figs-ellipsis אֵ֕לֶּה 1 Here the book leaves out some of the words that a sentence would ordinarily need in order to be complete. This seems to mean, “These are the names of the men who served in this capacity.” You could say something like that if it would be helpful to your readers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
NEH 12 26 j1a7 figs-idiom בִּימֵ֛י יוֹיָקִ֥ים 1 The term **days** is used figuratively here to refer a particular period of time. Alternate translation: “during the time when Joiakim … was the high priest” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
NEH 12 26 wk2z translate-names יוֹיָקִ֥ים בֶּן־יֵשׁ֖וּעַ בֶּן־יוֹצָדָ֑ק 1 Joiakim is the name of a man, Joshua is the name of his father, and Jozadak is the name of his grandfather. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 12 26 k9bk figs-explicit וּבִימֵי֙ נְחֶמְיָ֣ה הַפֶּחָ֔ה 1 This would have been one generation later, since [3:1](../03/01.md) says that Eliashib was the high priest during the time of Nehemiah, and [12:10](../12/10.md) says that Eliashib was the son of Joiakim. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “and also in the next generation, during the time when Nehemiah was the governor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 12 26 j1a9 figs-idiom וּבִימֵי֙ נְחֶמְיָ֣ה הַפֶּחָ֔ה 1 The term **days** is used figuratively here to refer a particular period of time. Alternate translation: “and also during the time when Nehemiah was the governor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
NEH 12 26 j1b1 figs-informremind וְעֶזְרָ֥א הַכֹּהֵ֖ן הַסּוֹפֵֽר 1 Here the book repeats some background information to remind readers who Ezra was. Alternate translation: “and he worked with Ezra, who was a priest and a scribe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-informremind]])
NEH 12 27 e63y grammar-connect-time-sequential וּבַחֲנֻכַּ֞ת חוֹמַ֣ת יְרוּשָׁלִַ֗ם 1 In this book, Nehemiah tells his personal story from [1:1](../01/01.md) through [7:5](../07/05.md). In that story, he explains how he was concerned not just to restore the city of Jerusalem physically by rebuilding its wall, but also to restore its population by bringing in people who were genuine Israelites, and to restore worship by making sure that the priests and Levites who were doing assigned tasks had dependable records of their ancestry. He includes the long series of lists from [7:6](../07/06.md) through [12:26](../12/26.md) to document that these priests, Levites, and Israelites had the lineage that the Law of Moses required. Now Nehemiah resumes his personal story, and he tells what he did next. He organized a worship ceremony to dedicate the city wall. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could put some introductory and transitional sentence here to show how the book is progressing. Alternate translation: “Once we had brought many more Israelites to live in Jerusalem, and once we had established the priests and Levites in their tasks, we held a ceremony to dedicate the rebuilt wall of Jerusalem.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
NEH 12 27 j1b3 figs-abstractnouns וּבַחֲנֻכַּ֞ת חוֹמַ֣ת יְרוּשָׁלִַ֗ם 1 The abstract noun **dedication** refers to the way the wall would be set apart for a special purpose. If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate the idea behind this word with a verb such as “set apart.” Alternate translation: “to set apart the wall of Jerusalem for a special purpose” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
NEH 12 27 j1b5 translate-symaction וּבַחֲנֻכַּ֞ת חוֹמַ֣ת יְרוּשָׁלִַ֗ם 1 Dedicating the wall was a symbolic way of dedicating, or rather rededicating, the entire city to the special purpose that God had chosen it for. The rebuilt wall now defined Jerusalem once again as a distinct place, the place from which God had chosen to start making himself famous throughout the world. Alternate translation: “to set apart the wall of Jerusalem for a special purpose, to show that God had set apart the city for a special purpose” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
NEH 12 27 j1b7 figs-explicit בִּקְשׁ֤וּ אֶת־הַלְוִיִּם֙ מִכָּל־מְק֣וֹמֹתָ֔ם לַהֲבִיאָ֖ם לִֽירוּשָׁלִָ֑ם לַעֲשֹׂ֨ת חֲנֻכָּ֤ה 1 **All their places** means all the other places in the province of Judah besides Jerusalem where the Levites were living. As [11:20](../11/20.md) explained, other than the people who agreed to settle in Jerusalem, all of the other Israelites, including the Levites, lived in other cities and towns in the province of Judah, on their family properties. Alternate translation: “We brought the Levites back to Jerusalem from all the places where they were living so that they could take part in the dedication ceremony.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 12 27 j1b9 figs-123person בִּקְשׁ֤וּ 1 **They** refers to the people who organized the dedication ceremony. Since Nehemiah is resuming his own story here, and since he was one of the organizers, if it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this as “we.” “We” would not include the addressees, if your language makes that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
NEH 12 27 j1c1 figs-doublet לַעֲשֹׂ֨ת חֲנֻכָּ֤ה וְשִׂמְחָה֙ וּבְתוֹד֣וֹת 1 **Rejoicing** and **thanksgivings** mean similar things. Together they describe how the Israelites would celebrate as they dedicated the completed wall. If it would be clearer in your language, you could combine these words. Alternate translation: “to lead a celebration to dedicate the wall,” otherwise “to celebrate the dedication by praising and thanking God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
NEH 12 27 j1c3 וּבְשִׁ֔יר מְצִלְתַּ֖יִם נְבָלִ֥ים וּבְכִנֹּרֽוֹת 1 **And with** does not mean “in addition to,” but “by means of.” This next phrase provides further information about how the Levites would conduct the ceremony. Alternate translation: “with songs accompanied by cymbals, harps, and lyres”
NEH 12 27 s6xv translate-unknown מְצִלְתַּ֖יִם 1 These are two thin, round metal plates that are hit together to make a loud sound. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
NEH 12 27 j1c5 translate-unknown נְבָלִ֥ים וּבְכִנֹּרֽוֹת 1 These are two different types of stringed instruments. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
NEH 12 28 j1c7 figs-ellipsis וַיֵּאָ֣סְפ֔וּ 1 Here the book leaves out some of the words that a sentence would ordinarily need in order to be complete. This seems to mean “gathered together in Jerusalem for the dedication ceremony.” You could say something like that if it would be helpful to your readers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
NEH 12 28 j1c9 bita-hq בְּנֵ֖י הַמְשֹׁרְרִ֑ים 1 As in [3:8](../03/08.md) and [3:31](../03/31.md), **son of** here is a figurative expression that indicates that a person shares the qualities of something. In this case, the book is describing people who share the quality of being singers. (Verse [12:27](../12/27.md) indicates that these were specifically Levites.) Alternate translation: “the Levite singers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-hq]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 12 28 j1d1 figs-metaphor וּמִן־הַכִּכָּר֙ סְבִיב֣וֹת יְרוּשָׁלִַ֔ם 1 This is a figurative way of referring to the towns that the singers had built for themselves all around Jerusalem, as [12:29](../12/29.md) describes. These villages seemed to form a circle around the city. Alternate translation: “from the towns they had built around Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 12 28 j1d3 translate-names וּמִן־חַצְרֵ֖י נְטֹפָתִֽי 1 The **Netophati** means the people who lived in the town of Netophath, and so their villages would be all the towns in that area where they lived. Alternate translation: “from the towns around Netophath” or “from the towns of the Netophathites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 12 28 j1d5 figs-explicit וּמִן־חַצְרֵ֖י נְטֹפָתִֽי 1 Netophath was located southeast of Jerusalem. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “from the towns around Netophath, southeast of Jerusalem.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 12 29 lnm1 figs-explicit וּמִבֵּית֙ הַגִּלְגָּ֔ל וּמִשְּׂד֥וֹת גֶּ֖בַע וְעַזְמָ֑וֶת 1 The places listed in this verse are northeast of Jerusalem. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “They also came from three places northeast of Jerusalem, the town of Beth-Gilgal and the rural areas around the towns of Geba and Azmaveth.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 12 29 j1d7 translate-names וּמִבֵּית֙ הַגִּלְגָּ֔ל 1 This is the name of a town. Alternate translation: “from the town of Beth-Gilgal” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 12 29 j1d9 translate-names וּמִשְּׂד֥וֹת גֶּ֖בַע וְעַזְמָ֑וֶת 1 Geba and Azmaveth are the names of towns. Alternate translation: “from the rural areas around the towns of Geba and Azmaveth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 12 29 j1e1 grammar-connect-logic-result כִּ֣י חֲצֵרִ֗ים בָּנ֤וּ לָהֶם֙ הַמְשֹׁ֣רֲרִ֔ים סְבִיב֖וֹת יְרוּשָׁלִָֽם 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could put this sentence at the start of [12:28](../12/28.md), since it gives the reason for the results that are described in the rest of [12:28](../12/28.md) and [12:29](../12/29.md). You could show the connection by using a word like “so” after this phrase. Alternate translation: “The singers were living in towns they had built all around Jerusalem. So …” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
NEH 12 30 j1e3 grammar-connect-logic-contrast וַיִּֽטַּהֲר֔וּ הַכֹּהֲנִ֖ים וְהַלְוִיִּ֑ם וַֽיְטַהֲרוּ֙ אֶת־הָעָ֔ם וְאֶת־הַשְּׁעָרִ֖ים וְאֶֽת־הַחוֹמָֽה 1 This sentence draws a contrast between the joyful celebration that is about to begin in this part of the story and the solemn ceremony that the priests and Levites performed beforehand. You could begin the sentence with a phrase such as “but first” to indicate this contrast. Alternate translation: “But first the priests and Levites performed a ceremony to make themselves clean, and they did the same thing for the people, the gates, and the wall.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
NEH 12 30 j1e5 figs-explicit וַיִּֽטַּהֲר֔וּ 1 Nehemiah expects his readers to know specifically how the priests and Levites did this, but the details are no longer certain. They may have sprinkled themselves, the people, the gates, and the walls with water or with blood, or they may have offered sacrifices. But while the details are uncertain, the purpose of the ceremony is clear. It was to show that the Israelites wanted this place and everyone in it to be acceptable to God. So while it might be best not to suggest how the priests and Levites performed this ceremony, since that is unknown, you could say explicitly what the purpose was, if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “And they performed a ceremony to show that they wanted to be clean and acceptable to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 12 31 j1e7 grammar-connect-time-sequential וָאַעֲלֶה֙ 1 In this context, the conjunction **and** indicates that the events the story will now describe came after the event it has just described. If it would be clearer in your language, you could show this relationship by using a word such as “then.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
NEH 12 31 j1e9 figs-explicit וָאַעֲלֶה֙ אֶת־שָׂרֵ֣י יְהוּדָ֔ה מֵעַ֖ל לַחוֹמָ֑ה וָאַעֲמִ֡ידָה שְׁתֵּ֣י תוֹדֹת֩ גְּדוֹלֹ֨ת וְתַהֲלֻכֹ֤ת 1 The implication here, which is confirmed in [12:32](../12/32.md) and [12:40](../12/40.md), is that Nehemiah had these leaders of Judah go up onto the wall so that they could accompany two large groups that would “process” or march around the city on top of the wall while giving thanks to God. They would march in opposite directions and meet up on the far side of the city. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say something like that explicitly. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 12 31 j1f1 translate-symaction שְׁתֵּ֣י תוֹדֹת֩ גְּדוֹלֹ֨ת וְתַהֲלֻכֹ֤ת 1 Having two groups walk all around the wall of Jerusalem, in semicircles in opposite directions, while sacred musicians played music was a symbolic way of dedicating the rebuilt wall to God. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could also say that explicitly. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
NEH 12 31 j1f3 figs-ellipsis לַיָּמִין֙ מֵעַ֣ל לַחוֹמָ֔ה לְשַׁ֖עַר הָאַשְׁפֹּֽת 1 Here the book leaves out some of the words that a sentence would ordinarily need in order to be complete. This sentence seems to mean, “The first group marched to the right on top of the wall in the direction of the Rubbish Gate.” You could say something like that if it would be helpful to your readers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
NEH 12 31 j1f5 figs-idiom לַיָּמִין֙ 1 Here **hand** figuratively means “side.” Alternate translation: “turned to their right and marched” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-hq]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
NEH 12 31 j1f7 bita-hq לַיָּמִין֙ 1 Based on the information the book provides, the perspective is of a person facing in towards the city from the top of the wall. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “turned to their right, as they faced the city, and marched” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-hq]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
NEH 12 31 j1f9 translate-names לְשַׁ֖עַר הָאַשְׁפֹּֽת 1 This is the name of one of the gates of Jerusalem. See how you translated it in [2:13](../02/13.md) and [3:13–14](../03/13.md). Alternate translation: “the Rubbish Gate” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 12 32 zsj6 וַיֵּ֤לֶךְ אַחֲרֵיהֶם֙ הוֹשַׁ֣עְיָ֔ה וַחֲצִ֖י שָׂרֵ֥י יְהוּדָֽה 1 Alternate translation: “Hoshaiah and half of the leaders of Judah marched behind this group”
NEH 12 32 ni9q translate-names הוֹשַׁ֣עְיָ֔ה 1 This is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 12 32 j1g1 וַעֲזַרְיָ֥ה עֶזְרָ֖א וּמְשֻׁלָּֽם 1 Based on what [12:33–36](../12/33.md) says about the composition of this group, it appears that Ezra walked in front of it ([12:36](../12/36.md)), Hoshaiah and half of the leaders of Judah walked behind it ([12:32](../12/32.md)), and the group itself was made up of a large number of people from the tribes of Judah and Benjamin, along with the other leaders who are named and priests playing musical instruments. In that case, the word **and** would be indicating this sentence, which continues through to most of verse [12:36](../12/36.md), will provide further information about the situation the book has been describing. You could indicate that with a phrase such as “within the group itself were.”
NEH 12 33 x16d translate-names וַעֲזַרְיָ֥ה עֶזְרָ֖א וּמְשֻׁלָּֽם 1 These are the names of three men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 12 34 q33v figs-explicit יְהוּדָה֙ וּבִנְיָמִ֔ן 1 One possibility is that these were individual leaders named Judah and Benjamin. However, in the context of the book, this most likely means “people from the tribes of Judah and Benjamin.” Their counterparts in the other group would be the other “half of the people” mentioned in [12:38](../12/38.md). And since [12:31](../12/31.md) says that these were “great” or large processional groups, you could translate this as “large numbers of people from the tribes of Judah and Benjamin.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 12 35 cp3q bita-hq וּמִבְּנֵ֥י הַכֹּהֲנִ֖ים 1 **Son of** here is a figurative expression that indicates that a person shares the qualities of something. In this case, the book is describing people who share the quality of being priests. Alternate translation: “some from among the priests” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-hq]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 12 35 h1hm translate-names זְכַרְיָ֨ה בֶן־יֽוֹנָתָ֜ן בֶּן־שְׁמַֽעְיָ֗ה בֶּן־מַתַּנְיָה֙ בֶּן־מִ֣יכָיָ֔ה בֶּן־זַכּ֖וּר בֶּן־אָסָֽף 1 These are the names of seven men. In this context, **son** means literally that the next man named is the father of the man just named. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 12 36 j1g3 bita-hq וְֽאֶחָ֡יו 1 Here **brother**, in general, is a figurative way of saying “fellow priest,” although it is possible that some of the biological brothers of Zechariah were included in this group. Alternate translation: “his fellow priests” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-hq]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 12 36 kmk3 translate-names שְֽׁמַעְיָ֡ה וַעֲזַרְאֵ֡ל מִֽלֲלַ֡י גִּֽלֲלַ֡י מָעַ֞י נְתַנְאֵ֤ל וִֽיהוּדָה֙ חֲנָ֔נִי 1 These are the names of eight men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 12 36 j1g5 figs-explicit בִּכְלֵי־שִׁ֥יר דָּוִ֖יד אִ֣ישׁ הָאֱלֹהִ֑ים 1 This likely means the cymbals, harps, and lyres mentioned in [12:27](../12/27.md). Those were the instruments that King David had originally instructed the Levite musicians to play. The people honored that religious tradition on this occasion. Alternate translation: “with cymbals, harps, and lyres, the instruments that King David, that godly man, had originally instructed the Levite musicians to play” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 12 36 j1g7 figs-informremind דָּוִ֖יד אִ֣ישׁ הָאֱלֹהִ֑ים 1 Here the book offers some background information to remind readers of the character of David, who had been a great founding king of Israel. Alternate translation: “King David, that godly man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-informremind]])
NEH 12 36 n2tl bita-hq וְעֶזְרָ֥א הַסּוֹפֵ֖ר לִפְנֵיהֶֽ 1 Here **face** figuratively means the front of a group of people. Alternate translation: “Ezra the scribe walked in front of this group.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-hq]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
NEH 12 36 j1h1 figs-informremind וְעֶזְרָ֥א הַסּוֹפֵ֖ר 1 Here the book repeats some background information to remind readers who Ezra was. Alternate translation: “Ezra, who was a scribe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-informremind]])
NEH 12 37 c38r figs-explicit וְעַל֩ שַׁ֨עַר הָעַ֜יִן וְנֶגְדָּ֗ם עָלוּ֙ עַֽל־מַעֲלוֹת֙ עִ֣יר דָּוִ֔יד בַּֽמַּעֲלֶ֖ה לַחוֹמָ֑ה 1 The implication, which the original audience of the book would apparently have understood, is that when this first procession reached the place described, rather than continue walking on the wall, which was about to follow a winding course around a hill, they took these stairs straight up the hill, and they rejoined the wall at the place where it went up to the top of the hill. Alternate translation: “When they reached the Fountain Gate, they left the wall and went up the stairs that were in front of them that led to the City of David. They came back onto the wall at the place where it reached the top of the hill they had just climbed.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 12 37 j1h3 translate-names שַׁ֨עַר הָעַ֜יִן 1 This is the name of one of the gates of Jerusalem. See how you translated it in [2:14](../02/14.md) and [3:15](../03/15.md). Alternate translation: “the Fountain Gate” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 12 37 j1h5 translate-names עִ֣יר דָּוִ֔יד 1 This was one part of Jerusalem. See how you translated it in [3:15](../03/15.md). Alternate translation: “the City of David” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 12 37 j1h7 figs-explicit מֵעַל֙ לְבֵ֣ית דָּוִ֔יד 1 This means that as the group walked on the top of the wall once again, at this point they were higher than this palace where David had lived. (In [3:25](../03/25.md) this same building is called “the upper house of the king,” meaning the royal palace that was located in a more elevated part of the city.) Alternate translation: “They walked along the wall, above the palace where David had lived” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 12 37 j1h9 figs-metaphor לְבֵ֣ית דָּוִ֔יד 1 This building is figuratively called a **house** because David had lived in it. Alternate translation: “the palace where David had lived” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 12 37 j1i1 figs-ellipsis וְעַ֛ד שַׁ֥עַר הַמַּ֖יִם מִזְרָֽח 1 Here the book leaves out some of the words that a sentence would ordinarily need in order to be complete. This sentence is indicating that once this group reached the Water Gate, it stopped. This left them just to the east of the temple. As [12:39](../12/39.md) explains, the other group stopped just to the west of the temple, and the two groups joined together in the temple area. Alternate translation: “until they reached the Water Gate, and there they stopped, on the east side of the temple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
NEH 12 38 fbi3 grammar-connect-time-simultaneous וְהַתּוֹדָ֧ה 1 This conjunction **And** introduces the description in [12:38](../12/38.md) and [12:39](../12/39.md) of what the second group was doing while the first group was following the route described in [12:31–37](../12/31.md). If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a word such as “meanwhile” to indicate this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]])
NEH 12 38 k1i3 figs-ellipsis וְהַתּוֹדָ֧ה הַשֵּׁנִ֛ית הַהוֹלֶ֥כֶת לְמ֖וֹאל 1 Here the book leaves out some of the words that a sentence would ordinarily need in order to be complete. Alternate translation: “Meanwhile, the second group turned to its left and walked on top of the wall in the opposite direction, with musicians playing songs of thanksgiving as they went.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
NEH 12 38 t11k figs-explicit וַאֲנִ֣י אַחֲרֶ֑יהָ 1 **I** refers to Nehemiah here, as in [12:31](../12/31.md). If you think it would be helpful to your readers, you could state his name explicitly. Alternate translation: “I, Nehemiah, walked behind this second group.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 12 38 k1i5 figs-ellipsis וַחֲצִ֨י הָעָ֜ם מֵעַ֣ל לְהַחוֹמָ֗ה 1 Here the book leaves out some of the words that a sentence would ordinarily need in order to be complete. This seems to be a reference to the counterparts of the people mentioned in [12:34](../12/34.md). Alternate translation: “with the other half of the people from the tribes and Judah and Benjamin who were walking with their leaders on top of the wall to dedicate it to God.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
NEH 12 38 j2zn translate-names מֵעַל֙ לְמִגְדַּ֣ל הַתַּנּוּרִ֔ים 1 This is the name of one of the towers of the Jerusalem wall. See how you translated it in [3:11](../03/11.md). Alternate translation: “They went along the wall above the Tower of the Ovens” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 12 38 a5ww translate-names וְעַ֖ד הַחוֹמָ֥ה הָרְחָבָֽה 1 This is the name of one of the features of the Jerusalem wall. See how you translated it in [3:8](../03/08.md). Alternate translation: “and continued to the Broad Wall” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 12 39 k1i5 translate-names וּמֵעַ֣ל לְשַֽׁעַר־אֶ֠פְרַיִם וְעַל־שַׁ֨עַר הַיְשָׁנָ֜ה וְעַל־שַׁ֣עַר הַדָּגִ֗ים 1 These are the names of three of the gates of Jerusalem. See how you translated them in [8:16](../08/16.md), [3:6](../03/06.md), and [3:3](../03/03.md). Alternate translation: “they went over the Ephraim Gate, the Old Gate, and the Fish Gate” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 12 39 v1ni translate-names וּמִגְדַּ֤ל חֲנַנְאֵל֙ וּמִגְדַּ֣ל הַמֵּאָ֔ה 1 These are the names of two of the towers on the Jerusalem wall. See how you translated them in [3:1](../03/01.md). Alternate translation: “They walked past the Tower of Hananel and the Tower of the Hundred” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 12 39 v264 translate-names וְעַ֖ד שַׁ֣עַר הַצֹּ֑אן 1 This is the name of one of the gates of the Jerusalem wall. See how you translated it in [3:1](../03/01.md) and [3:32](../03/31.md). Alternate translation: “and continued to the Sheep Gate” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 12 39 k1i7 translate-names וְעָ֣מְד֔וּ בְּשַׁ֖עַר הַמַּטָּרָֽה 1 This is apparently the name of one of the gates of the Jerusalem temple. Verse [3:25](../03/25.md) describes repairs that were made to the wall near the “court of the guard,” which was in the temple precincts, so presumably this was the gate that led into that court. “Stood” means “stood still,” that is, “stopped moving.” The people were already standing up to walk. Alternate translation: “This second group stopped when it reached the Gate of the Guard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 12 40 k1i9 figs-explicit וַֽתַּעֲמֹ֛דְנָה שְׁתֵּ֥י הַתּוֹדֹ֖ת בְּבֵ֣ית הָאֱלֹהִ֑ים 1 The implication is that both groups followed routes that led them around the city from their common starting point to places on either side of the temple. They then joined together for a concluding ceremony in or near the temple. Alternate translation: “both groups that had walked around the city to dedicate the wall came down from it and stood in an open area in front of the temple.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 12 40 ai1v grammar-connect-time-sequential וַֽתַּעֲמֹ֛דְנָה 1 This word indicates that the event the story will now describe came after the events it has just described. If it would be clearer in your language, you could show this relationship by using a word such as “then.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
NEH 12 40 bnz5 writing-background וַאֲנִ֕י וַחֲצִ֥י הַסְּגָנִ֖ים עִמִּֽי 1 Nehemiah now provides further details for the second group, which he had accompanied, similar to the details he provided for the first group in verses 32–36. Alternate translation: “My group included the other half of the leaders of Judah.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
NEH 12 41 s4t8 translate-names אֶלְיָקִ֡ים מַעֲשֵׂיָ֡ה מִ֠נְיָמִין מִיכָיָ֧ה אֶלְיוֹעֵינַ֛י זְכַרְיָ֥ה חֲנַנְיָ֖ה 1 These are the names of seven men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 12 42 gqe1 translate-names וּמַעֲשֵׂיָ֨ה וּֽשְׁמַֽעְיָ֜ה וְאֶלְעָזָ֧ר וְעֻזִּ֛י וִֽיהוֹחָנָ֥ן וּמַלְכִּיָּ֖ה וְעֵילָ֣ם וָעָ֑זֶר 1 These are the names of eight men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 12 42 tdc8 וַיַּשְׁמִ֨יעוּ֙ הַמְשֹׁ֣רְרִ֔ים וְיִֽזְרַחְיָ֖ה הַפָּקִֽיד 1 Alternate translation: “The singers sang loudly, with Jezrahiah directing their choir.”
NEH 12 42 y2qj וְיִֽזְרַחְיָ֖ה 1 This is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 12 43 j1l1 grammar-connect-time-simultaneous בַיּוֹם־הַ֠הוּא 1 This is a flexible expression that can mean either “on that same day” or “around that time.” But since this verse continues to describe the celebrations for the dedication of the wall, here it likely means “on that same day.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]])
NEH 12 43 jgp9 figs-abstractnouns כִּ֤י הָאֱלֹהִים֙ שִׂמְּחָם֙ שִׂמְחָ֣ה גְדוֹלָ֔ה 1 The abstract noun **rejoicing** describes how happy the people were as they held this celebration to dedicate the wall. If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate the idea behind this word with an adjective such as “happy.” Alternate translation: “God had made them all very happy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
NEH 12 43 p5fe figs-abstractnouns וַתִּשָּׁמַ֛ע שִׂמְחַ֥ת יְרוּשָׁלִַ֖ם מֵרָחֽוֹק 1 In this case the abstract noun **rejoicing** refers to the loud sound that the singers and the people made as they held the ceremony to dedicate the rebuilt wall. If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate the idea behind this abstract noun with a concrete noun such as “sound.” Alternate translation: “the sound that the people made as they celebrated in Jerusalem was so loud that even other people who were far away could hear it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
NEH 12 43 j1l3 figs-activepassive וַתִּשָּׁמַ֛ע שִׂמְחַ֥ת יְרוּשָׁלִַ֖ם מֵרָחֽוֹק 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you can say who did the action. Alternate translation: “the sound that the people made as they celebrated in Jerusalem was so loud that even other people who were far away could hear it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
NEH 12 43 j1l5 figs-personification שִׂמְחַ֥ת יְרוּשָׁלִַ֖ם 1 Here the story speaks figuratively of Jerusalem as if it were a living thing that could celebrate. Alternate translation: “the sound that the people made as they celebrated in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
NEH 12 44 j1l7 grammar-connect-time-simultaneous בַיּוֹם֩ הַה֨וּא 1 As noted for [12:43](../12/43.md), this is a flexible expression that can mean either “on that same day” or “around that time.” So here it could mean either that men were appointed to be in charge of the store rooms on the same day as the dedication celebration, or else at around the same time, perhaps shortly afterwards, once all of the activity of the celebration was over. Alternate translation: “on the same day that they held the ceremony to dedicate the rebuilt wall” or “around this same time.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]])
NEH 12 44 fsb6 figs-explicit וַיִּפָּקְד֣וּ…אֲנָשִׁ֜ים עַל־הַנְּשָׁכ֗וֹת לָא֨וֹצָר֥וֹת 1 This is referring implicitly to the six Levites whose names are listed in [12:25](../12/25.md). The **chambers** are the storerooms above the gateways to the temple. (Review the note to [12:25](../12/25.md) if that would be helpful.) If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “we appointed six Levites to be in charge of the store rooms above the gateways to the temple.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 12 44 bnw2 figs-activepassive וַיִּפָּקְד֣וּ…אֲנָשִׁ֜ים 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you can say who did the action. In the context of this episode, saying “we” would indicate Nehemiah and his fellow leaders. (“We” would not include the addressee, if your language makes that distinction.) Alternate translation: “we appointed six Levites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
NEH 12 44 j1l9 figs-explicit לַתְּרוּמוֹת֮ לָרֵאשִׁ֣ית וְלַמַּֽעַשְׂרוֹת֒ לִכְנ֨וֹס בָּהֶ֜ם לִשְׂדֵ֤י הֶעָרִים֙ 1 These were the things the people promised in their covenant to provide in order to support the priests and the Levites. (See [10:36–39](../10/36.md).) If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “so that they could collect the offerings, firstfruits, and tithes that the Israelites would bring in from the fields around their cities, as they had promised to do in their covenant.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 12 44 j1m1 figs-abstractnouns מְנָא֣וֹת הַתּוֹרָ֔ה לַכֹּהֲנִ֖ים וְלַלְוִיִּ֑ם 1 The abstract noun **portion** refers to the part of each crop that the law commanded the Israelites to give to the temple to support the priests and Levites. If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate the idea behind this word with a different phrase. Alternate translation: “These were the things that the law commanded the Israelites to give from their harvests to support the priests and Levites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
NEH 12 44 g347 grammar-connect-logic-result כִּ֚י שִׂמְחַ֣ת יְהוּדָ֔ה עַל־הַכֹּהֲנִ֥ים וְעַל־הַלְוִיִּ֖ם הָעֹמְדִֽים 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could put this sentence first in the verse, since it gives the reason for the results that are described in the rest of the verse. You could also show the connection by using a word like “so” after this phrase. Alternate translation: “The people of Judah were very happy that the priests and the Levites were once again serving in the roles that the law had assigned to them. So …” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
NEH 12 44 j1m3 figs-metaphor שִׂמְחַ֣ת…עַל־הַכֹּהֲנִ֥ים וְעַל־הַלְוִיִּ֖ם 1 In this context, **over** is a spatial metaphor that figuratively indicates “for” or “because of.” Alternate translation: “were very happy that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 12 44 g9pg figs-metaphor הָעֹמְדִֽים 1 **Standing** means figuratively that the priests and the Levites were serving in the roles that the law had assigned to them. This meaning can be made explicit. Alternate translation: “serving in the roles that the law had assigned to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 12 45 lm4j grammar-connect-logic-result וַֽיִּשְׁמְר֞וּ 1 In this context, the conjunction **And** indicates that the sentence it introduces explains the results of what the previous verse described. Specifically, the temple personnel were able to perform their duties regularly because the people had organized regular support for them. Alternate translation: “and so” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
NEH 12 45 j1m5 figs-abstractnouns וַֽיִּשְׁמְר֞וּ מִשְׁמֶ֤רֶת אֱלֹֽהֵיהֶם֙ וּמִשְׁמֶ֣רֶת הַֽטָּהֳרָ֔ה 1 **They** means the priests and Levites. The abstract noun **service**, in the phrase **service watch of their God**, refers to the duties that God had commanded the priests and Levites to perform in the law. In the phrase “service of purification,” this abstract noun refers to one of those duties in particular, the duty of performing a ceremony for themselves and for others that expressed a desire to be ceremonially clean, that is, acceptable to God. The story describes in [12:30](../12/30.md) how they performed such a ceremony on this occasion. Alternate translation: “So the priests and Levites were able to perform the duties that God had commanded, including performing ceremonies of purification” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
NEH 12 45 j1m7 figs-ellipsis וְהַמְשֹׁרְרִ֖ים וְהַשֹּׁעֲרִ֑ים 1 Here the book leaves out some of the words that a sentence would ordinarily need in order to be complete. This phrase seems to mean, “The singers and the gatekeepers were also able to perform their assigned duties.” You could say that explicitly if it would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
NEH 12 45 j1m9 writing-background כְּמִצְוַ֥ת דָּוִ֖יד שְׁלֹמֹ֥ה בְנֽוֹ 1 This phrase provides background information that explains that it was King David and King Solomon, his son, who established the duties of the temple singers and gatekeepers. Alternate translation: “as King David and King Solomon, his son, had commanded them to do.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
NEH 12 46 j1n1 writing-background כִּֽי 1 This word indicates that this sentence will provide further information about the situation that the book is describing here. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could use a word or expression in your own language that indicates the same thing. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
NEH 12 46 j1n3 figs-idiom בִימֵ֥י דָוִ֛יד וְאָסָ֖ף מִקֶּ֑דֶם 1 The expression **from before** is an idiom that means “ever since a long time ago.” Alternate translation: “ever since the time of David and Asaph long ago” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
NEH 12 46 j1n5 figs-idiom בִימֵ֥י דָוִ֛יד וְאָסָ֖ף 1 The term **days** is used figuratively here to refer a particular period of time. Alternate translation: “in the time of David and Asaph” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
NEH 12 46 j1n7 translate-names דָוִ֛יד וְאָסָ֖ף 1 These are the names of two men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 12 46 j1n9 figs-explicit וְאָסָ֖ף 1 The book assumes that the original audience would know that Asaph was the man whom David first appointed to be the director of the Levite singers. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “ever since David first appointed Asaph to lead the singers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 12 46 py1c bita-hq ראש הַמְשֹׁ֣רְרִ֔ים 1 **Head** here is a figurative way of saying “leader.” Alternate translation: “the Levite choir has had an appointed director” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-hq]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 12 46 j1o1 figs-ellipsis וְשִׁיר־תְּהִלָּ֥ה וְהֹד֖וֹת לֵֽאלֹהִֽים 1 Here the book leaves out some of the words that a sentence would ordinarily need in order to be complete. Alternate translation: “and they have sung songs of praise and thanksgiving to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
NEH 12 47 j1o3 writing-background וְכָל 1 This word indicates that this sentence will provide further information about the situation that the book is describing here. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could use a word or expression in your own language that indicates the same thing. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
NEH 12 47 flz7 בִּימֵ֨י זְרֻבָּבֶ֜ל וּבִימֵ֣י נְחֶמְיָ֗ה 1 Alternate translation: “Just as they had done in the time of Zerubbabel, so now in the time of Nehemiah”
NEH 12 47 mu9s figs-idiom בִּימֵ֨י זְרֻבָּבֶ֜ל וּבִימֵ֣י נְחֶמְיָ֗ה 1 The term **days** is used figuratively here to refer a particular period of time. Alternate translation: “the time of Zerubbabel … the time of Nehemiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
NEH 12 47 e72p בִּימֵ֨י זְרֻבָּבֶ֜ל 1 As [12:1](../12/01.md) explains, this was the man who led the first group of Jews who returned to the province of Judah, about a hundred years before the time of Nehemiah. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate this more explicitly. Alternate translation: “in the time of Zerubbabel, who led the first group back to the province of Judah from exile” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 12 47 j1o5 translate-names זְרֻבָּבֶ֜ל…נְחֶמְיָ֗ה 1 These are the names of two men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 12 47 j1o7 figs-abstractnouns וְכָל־יִשְׂרָאֵל֩ בִּימֵ֨י זְרֻבָּבֶ֜ל וּבִימֵ֣י נְחֶמְיָ֗ה נֹֽתְנִ֛ים מְנָי֛וֹת הַמְשֹׁרְרִ֥ים 1 As in [12:44](../43/11.md), the abstract noun **portion** refers to the part of each crop that the Israelites contributed to support the temple personnel. If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate the idea behind this word with a different phrase. Alternate translation: “All the Israelites contributed from their harvests to support the singers and the gatekeepers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
NEH 12 47 j1o9 figs-idiom דְּבַר־י֣וֹם בְּיוֹמ֑וֹ 1 As in [11:23](../11/23.md), this is an idiom that means “as each day required.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
NEH 12 47 j1p1 figs-explicit וּמַקְדִּשִׁים֙ לַלְוִיִּ֔ם וְהַלְוִיִּ֔ם מַקְדִּשִׁ֖ים לִבְנֵ֥י אַהֲרֹֽן 1 **They** means the Israelites, as in the previous sentence. **Consecrating** means “setting apart.” This is likely a reference to the tithe or 1/10 of crops that the Israelites promised in their covenant to give to support the Levites, and to the tithe of this tithe that the Levites then contributed to support the priests, as described in [10:37–38](../10/37.md). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “The Israelites also gave a tenth of their crops to support the Levites, just as they had promised, and the Levites gave a tenth of this tenth to support the priests.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 13 intro tm5a 0 # Nehemiah 13 General Notes<br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Nehemiah returns to Jerusalem<br><br>Nehemiah was eager to make sure that the Jews kept their promise to obey the law. When he returned from Persia, he found many things wrong: one of the store rooms in the temple had been converted into a guest room for Tobiah, the Levites had not received their portions for working in the temple, people were working on the Sabbath, and many had married heathen wives. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/promise]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/temple]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sabbath]])
NEH 13 1 k1a1 בַּיּ֣וֹם הַה֗וּא 1 As noted for [12:43](../12/43.md) and [12:44](../12/44.md), this is a flexible expression that can mean either “on that same day” or “around that time.” Either meaning might fit the context here, so you could choose to say either one in your translation.
NEH 13 1 k1a3 figs-activepassive נִקְרָ֛א בְּסֵ֥פֶר מֹשֶׁ֖ה 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you can say who did the action. Alternate translation: “we read from the scroll that contained the Law of Moses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
NEH 13 1 k9za bita-hq בְּאָזְנֵ֣י הָעָ֑ם 1 Here **ears** stand for hearing. Alternate translation: “out loud so that all the people could hear” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-hq]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
NEH 13 1 k1a5 figs-idiom וְנִמְצָא֙ כָּת֣וּב בּ֔וֹ 1 **Found** is an idiom that means “could be found there” or “was there.” The expression means that this was something that was in the law. And since Nehemiah and the other leaders were reading this out loud to the people, their purpose was to show them that this was in the law. Alternate translation: “and we showed them that it said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
NEH 13 1 k1a7 figs-activepassive וְנִמְצָא֙ כָּת֣וּב בּ֔וֹ 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you can say who did the action. Alternate translation: “we showed them that it said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
NEH 13 1 k1a9 translate-names עַמֹּנִ֧י וּמֹאָבִ֛י 1 These are the names of the members of two people groups. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 13 1 k1b1 figs-idiom יָב֨וֹא…בִּקְהַ֥ל הָאֱלֹהִ֖ים 1 The expression **assembly of God** can refer either to the entire Israelite community, as in [7:66](../07/66.md) and [8:17](../08/17.md), or to the community gathered for a legal proceeding, as in [5:7](../05/07.md) and [5:13](../05/13.md), or gathered for a religious ceremony, as in [8:2](../08/02.md) and [8:18](../08/18.md). The last meaning is probably in view here. This statement likely means that Ammonites and Moabites were not allowed to join the Israelites in their worship of Yahweh, either in the temple or in public occasions. For example, [9:2](../09/02.md) describes how the Israelites did not allow any foreigners to take part in their ceremony of national repentance. (Later in this chapter, in [13:23–27](../13/23.md), Nehemiah will describe how he took the further measure of expelling foreigners from the Israelite community itself.) Alternate translation: “could join with the Israelites when they worshipped Yahweh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
NEH 13 1 j6si עַד־עוֹלָֽם 1 This expression means that this was a permanent regulation in the Law of Moses. It was not a regulation that applied just to a specific period and that might change afterwards. Alternate translation: “This was a permanent rule.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
NEH 13 2 tf8z grammar-connect-logic-result כִּ֣י 1 This word indicates that the sentence it introduces explains the reasons for what the previous sentence described. Alternate translation: “They could not come into the assembly because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
NEH 13 2 k1b3 figs-explicit לֹ֧א קִדְּמ֛וּ אֶת־בְּנֵ֥י יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל בַּלֶּ֣חֶם וּבַמָּ֑יִם 1 The assumption is that readers will know what historical incident this statement is referring to. It is a reference to the time when the Israelites were traveling from Egypt to Canaan through the desert. They were basically refugees. It could have been expected, as a basic act of compassion, that the Ammonites and Moabites would help provide for their needs as they passed through their territories. But they refused to do this. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “They did not help meet the needs of the Israelites when they were refugees traveling through their territories.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 13 2 k1b5 bita-hq בְּנֵ֥י יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל 1 **Sons** here figuratively means “descendants.” The descendants of Israel were the Israelites. Alternate translation: “the Israelites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-hq]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 13 2 k1b7 figs-metonymy קִדְּמ֛וּ…בַּלֶּ֣חֶם וּבַמָּ֑יִם 1 Bread stands for food, and water stands for drink, and together both terms probably represent assistance in general. Alternate translation: “provide food and drink” or “provide the help they needed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
NEH 13 2 k1b9 figs-explicit וַיִּשְׂכֹּ֨ר עָלָ֤יו אֶת־בִּלְעָם֙ לְקַֽלְל֔וֹ וַיַּהֲפֹ֧ךְ אֱלֹהֵ֛ינוּ הַקְּלָלָ֖ה לִבְרָכָֽה 1 The assumption once again is that readers will know what historical incident this is referring to. This is a reference to the way the king of Moab hired a prophet named Balaam to curse the Israelites, but instead God made Balaam speak words of blessing about them. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “The Moabites also hired a prophet named Balaam to curse the Israelites, but God made him speak words of blessing instead.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 13 2 k1c1 translate-names בִּלְעָם֙ 1 This is a man’s name. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 13 3 j1c3 grammar-connect-time-sequential וַיְהִ֖י 1 This phrase indicates that the events the story will now describe came after the things it has just described. You can use an expression in your own language that will indicate this clearly. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
NEH 13 3 k1c5 figs-idiom כְּשָׁמְעָ֣ם אֶת־הַתּוֹרָ֑ה 1 As in [9:29](../09/29.md), **hear** in this context is an [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]] that means not just to hear something audibly, but to understand a command and recognize the need to obey it. Alternate translation: “when they realized that this was what the law commanded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
NEH 13 3 k1c7 figs-idiom וַיַּבְדִּ֥ילוּ כָל־עֵ֖רֶב מִיִּשְׂרָאֵֽל 1 **Mixed company** is an expression that describes people who were not Israelites. It indicates that if they were present, then the group would be mixed, part Israelite and part non-Israelite. Alternate translation: “They no longer allowed foreigners to worship with the Israelites.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
NEH 13 4 k1c9 writing-background וְלִפְנֵ֣י מִזֶּ֔ה 1 This phrase indicates that the events the story will now relate came before the events it has just described. If it would be clearer in your language, you could show this relationship by using a phrase such as “but before all this happened.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
NEH 13 4 k1d1 figs-metaphor וְלִפְנֵ֣י מִזֶּ֔ה 1 In this book, the expression **face** often refers figuratively to the front of a person, place, or object. Here the expression has the further figurative significance of “in front of” or “before” a certain time. Alternate translation: “before this time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 13 4 k1d3 translate-names אֶלְיָשִׁיב֙ 1 This is a man’s name. See how you translated it in [3:1](../03/01.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 13 4 k1d5 figs-informremind אֶלְיָשִׁיב֙ הַכֹּהֵ֔ן 1 Here the book repeats some background information to remind readers who Eliashib was. As we learn in [3:1](../03/01.md), [3:20](../03/20.md), and [12:10](../12/10.md), he was actually the Jewish high priest during the time of Nehemiah. Alternate translation: “the high priest” (See: Phrases that Inform or Remind)
NEH 13 4 bq8k figs-activepassive אֶלְיָשִׁיב֙ הַכֹּהֵ֔ן נָת֖וּן 1 If it is clearer in your language, you can translate this in active form. Alternate translation: “they appointed Eliashib the priest” or “the leaders appointed Eliashib the priest” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
NEH 13 4 k1d7 figs-idiom נָת֖וּן בְּלִשְׁכַּ֣ת בֵּית־אֱלֹהֵ֑ינוּ 1 This is most likely a figurative way of saying that as high priest, Eliashib had responsibility for and control over all the rooms in the temple. Alternate translation: “since he had control over” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
NEH 13 4 adq9 קָר֖וֹב לְטוֹבִיָּֽה 1 He was related to Tobiah Since Tobiah was an Ammonite, Eliashib could not have been his close blood relative. So this expression must refer to a connection by marriage. We learn in [6:18](../06/18.md) that both Tobiah and his son had married Jewish women, and one or both of these women may have been relatives of Eliashib. Alternate translation: “who was related to Tobiah by marriage”
NEH 13 4 c9hf figs-synecdoche בְּלִשְׁכַּ֣ת בֵּית־אֱלֹהֵ֑ינוּ 1 Here one **chamber** or room is used figuratively to mean “every chamber” or room in the temple. Alternate translation: “every room in the temple” (See: Synechdoche)
NEH 13 4 k1d9 bita-manmade בֵּית־אֱלֹהֵ֑ינוּ 1 As often in this book, Nehemiah speaks figuratively of the temple here as the **house of God**, as if it were God’s dwelling place. Alternate translation: “the temple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 13 5 xi14 grammar-connect-logic-result וַיַּ֨עַשׂ 1 In this context, the conjunction **and** indicates that the sentence it introduces explains the reason for what the previous sentence described, or what made it possible. Alternate translation: “and so,” unless you used the word “since” to introduce the last phrase in [13:4](../13/04.md), in which case the connection would already be clear and you would not need to use any connecting phrase here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
NEH 13 5 k1de ל֜וֹ 1 Verse [13:7](../13/07.md) indicates that **him** refers to Tobiah. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly here. Alternate translation: “he allowed Tobiah to move into a large room in the temple.”
NEH 13 5 v2in figs-explicit שָׁ֣ם הָי֪וּ לְפָנִ֟ים נֹ֠תְנִים אֶת־הַמִּנְחָ֨ה 1 **They** means the Israelites, and **offerings**, if it is a general term (see next note), means the contributions that they gave to support the priests and Levites, as described in [12:44](../12/44.md). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “This was the room that the Israelites had previously been using to store the offerings they brought to the temple to support the priests and Levites.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 13 5 k1e3 הַמִּנְחָ֨ה 1 The word **offerings** could be referring generally to all of the contributions that the Israelites brought, which would then be listed in the rest of this verse, or it could be the first specific item on the list, the daily grain offering, as described in [10:33](../10/33.md). Alternate translation: “the offerings they brought” or “the daily grain offering.”
NEH 13 5 k1e5 translate-unknown הַלְּבוֹנָ֜ה 1 This term refers to a mixture of fragrant spices that was burned to produce smoke that had a pleasant smell. The law specified a special blend of spices that it said only the priests could use in the temple. Alternate translation: “the sacred incense” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
NEH 13 5 k1e7 figs-synecdoche וְהַכֵּלִ֗ים 1 As in [10:39](../10/39.md), here Nehemiah uses one type of equipment that the storerooms would hold, **vessels** or “jars” or “containers,” to refer figuratively to all the different types of equipment that the priests and Levites would have used in the temple. Alternate translation: “the temple equipment” (See [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
NEH 13 5 k1e9 וּמַעְשַׂ֤ר הַדָּגָן֙ הַתִּיר֣וֹשׁ וְהַיִּצְהָ֔ר 1 This means the portion, one tenth, of their crops and produce that the Israelites had promised to contribute to support the temple personnel, as described in [10:37–38](../10/37.md). Alternate translation: “the tenth of their crops and produce”
NEH 13 5 k1f1 translate-fraction וּמַעְשַׂ֤ר 1 A “tithe” means a tenth (1/10) or one part out of ten equal parts. (See [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-fraction]])
NEH 13 5 k1f3 figs-ellipsis מִצְוַת֙ הַלְוִיִּ֔ם וְהַמְשֹׁרְרִ֖ים וְהַשֹּׁעֲרִ֑ים 1 Here Nehemiah leaves out some of the words that a sentence would ordinarily need in order to be complete. This phrase means “which the law had commanded them to contribute to support the Levites, the singers, and the temple gatekeepers.” You could say that explicitly if it would be helpful to your readers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
NEH 13 5 k1f5 וּתְרוּמַ֖ת הַכֹּהֲנִֽים 1 This likely refers to the tithe or one tenth of what they received that the Levites contributed in turn to the priests, as described in [10:38](../10/38.md). Alternate translation: “and the contributions to support the priests” or “the tithe of the tithe that the Levites gave to support the priests.”
NEH 13 6 k1f7 grammar-connect-time-simultaneous וּבְכָל־זֶ֕ה 1 This expression indicates that the sentence it introduces describes something that was happening at the same time as the events the book has just described. If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a phrase such as “while all of this was happening” to indicate this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]])
NEH 13 6 dpk4 grammar-connect-logic-result כִּ֡י 1 This word indicates that the clause it introduces explains the reason for what the previous clause described. That is, Nehemiah is about to give the reason why he was not in Jerusalem while Eliashib was allowing Tobiah to move into the temple. Alternate translation: “because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
NEH 13 6 k1f9 writing-background בִּשְׁנַת֩ שְׁלֹשִׁ֨ים וּשְׁתַּ֜יִם לְאַרְתַּחְשַׁ֤סְתְּא מֶֽלֶךְ־בָּבֶל֙ בָּ֣אתִי אֶל־הַמֶּ֔לֶךְ 1 Here Nehemiah is providing background information to explain why he was not in Jerusalem. As he indicates in [5:14](../05/14.md), he was governor of Judah for twelve years, from the twentieth to the thirty-second year of the reign of King Artaxerxes. As this verse indicates, he then returned to the royal court. Alternate translation: “I had returned to serve King Artaxerxes in his court in the thirty-second year of his reign” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
NEH 13 6 k1g1 translate-ordinal בִּשְׁנַת֩ שְׁלֹשִׁ֨ים וּשְׁתַּ֜יִם לְאַרְתַּחְשַׁ֤סְתְּא 1 This expression refers to the number of years that Artaxerxes had been reigning as king. Alternate translation: “in year 32 of the reign of Artaxerxes as king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
NEH 13 6 k1g3 writing-background מֶֽלֶךְ־בָּבֶל֙ 1 Artaxerxes was the king of the Persian Empire, but since the Persians had conquered the Babylonians, he also had the right to use the title “king of Babylon.” The fact that Nehemiah describes him by this title may actually indicate that the royal court was located in the city of Babylon at this time and that he returned to that city to resume his duties in the court. Alternate translation: “the king of Persia, whose court was then in Babylon.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
NEH 13 6 k1g5 figs-idiom וּלְקֵ֥ץ יָמִ֖ים 1 The term **days** is used figuratively here to refer a particular period of time. Alternate translation: “after some time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
NEH 13 6 k1g7 figs-explicit נִשְׁאַ֥לְתִּי מִן־הַמֶּֽלֶךְ 1 The implication, as shown explicitly in the next verse, is that Nehemiah requested time off from his responsibilities in the court so that he could travel back to Judah and see how the people there were doing, and that the king gave him permission to do this. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I asked the king if I could take some time off and travel back to Judah to help the people there, and he gave me permission to do that.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 13 7 k1g9 grammar-connect-time-sequential וָאָב֖וֹא לִֽירוּשָׁלִָ֑ם 1 In this context, the conjunction **And** at the beginning of this phrase indicates that this event took place after the event the story has just described. If it would be clearer in your language, you could show this relationship by using a phrase such as “and so.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
NEH 13 7 k1h1 grammar-connect-time-sequential וָאָבִ֣ינָה 1 In this context, the conjunction **And** at the beginning of this phrase indicates that this event took place after the event in the previous sentence. If it would be clearer in your language, you could show this relationship by using a phrase such as “when I got there, I discovered.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
NEH 13 7 k1h3 figs-idiom וָאָבִ֣ינָה בָרָעָ֗ה 1 In this context, this phrase means “came to understand the evil” or “discovered the evil” or “realized the evil.” If it would be clearer in your language, you could use any of those phrases or a similar one as an alternate translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
NEH 13 7 k1h5 בָרָעָ֗ה אֲשֶׁ֨ר עָשָׂ֤ה אֶלְיָשִׁיב֙ לְט֣וֹבִיָּ֔ה לַעֲשׂ֥וֹת לוֹ֙ נִשְׁכָּ֔ה בְּחַצְרֵ֖י בֵּ֥ית הָאֱלֹהִֽים 1 While in the book of Nehemiah the word **evil** often means things like “sad” or “harmful,” in this context, the word does describe something that is morally bad and destructive. Eliashib had not done this wrong thing to Tobiah, but on his behalf. Alternate translation: “about the wrong thing that Eliashib had done by allowing Tobiah to move into a storeroom within the temple courts”
NEH 13 7 k1h7 בֵּ֥ית הָאֱלֹהִֽים 1 Nehemiah speaks figuratively of the temple as the **house of God** as if it were God’s dwelling place. Alternate translation: “the temple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 13 8 k1h9 figs-idiom וַיֵּ֥רַֽע לִ֖י מְאֹ֑ד 1 This expression describes Nehemiah’s perspective on the action. It does not mean that Eliashib did a wrong thing to Nehemiah directly. Alternate translation: “I recognized how very wrong this was.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
NEH 13 8 k1i1 figs-manmade וָֽאַשְׁלִ֜יכָה אֶֽת־כָּל־כְּלֵ֧י בֵית־טוֹבִיָּ֛ה הַח֖וּץ מִן־הַלִּשְׁכָּֽה 1 Here the term **house** figuratively represents all the possessions of Tobiah. It does not mean a literal house that Tobiah owned, because the context shows that he was staying in a room within the temple. Rather, **house** is a metaphor for “property,” that is, the things a person owns and would keep in a house. Alternate translation: “I threw everything that Tobiah was keeping in that storeroom right out of the temple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-manmade]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 13 9 k1i3 grammar-connect-time-sequential וָאֹ֣מְרָ֔ה 1 In this context, the conjunction **And** indicates that this event took place after the event the story has just described. If it would be clearer in your language, you could show this relationship by using a word such as “then.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
NEH 13 9 k1i5 figs-explicit וָאֹ֣מְרָ֔ה וַֽיְטַהֲר֖וּ הַלְּשָׁכ֑וֹת 1 The implication is that Nehemiah spoke to the priests, since they would have been the ones to conduct a ceremony, like the one the story describes in [12:30](../12/30.md), to show that the people wanted the rooms in the temple to be ceremonially clean, in the hopes that they would once more be acceptable to God. Alternate translation: “I told the priests to conduct a ceremony to purify the rooms in the temple.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 13 9 k1i7 כְּלֵי֙ בֵּ֣ית הָאֱלֹהִ֔ים אֶת־הַמִּנְחָ֖ה וְהַלְּבוֹנָֽה 1 See how you translated these expressions in [13:5](../13/05.md). Alternate translation: “the equipment for the temple, the offerings that the people brought, and the sacred incense”
NEH 13 9 k1i9 bita-manmade בֵּ֣ית הָאֱלֹהִ֔ים 1 Nehemiah speaks figuratively of the temple as the **house of God** as if it were God’s dwelling place. Alternate translation: “the temple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-manmade]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 13 10 k1j1 grammar-connect-time-sequential וָאֵ֣דְעָ֔ה 1 In this context, the conjunction **And** indicates that this event took place after the event the story has just described. If it would be clearer in your language, you could show this relationship by using a word such as “then.” As with “understood” in [13:7](../13/07.md), **knew** here means “came to know” or “discovered” or “realized.” Alternate translation: “Then I discovered that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
NEH 13 10 k9k6 figs-activepassive מְנָי֥וֹת הַלְוִיִּ֖ם לֹ֣א נִתָּ֑נָה 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “no one had been giving the Levites the support that the law commanded the Israelites to provide for them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
NEH 13 10 k1j3 figs-activepassive מְנָי֥וֹת הַלְוִיִּ֖ם לֹ֣א נִתָּ֑נָה 1 The implication is that no one was giving the Levites their support because there was no longer any place to store the grain, oil, and other supplies in the temple, from where they could be distributed to them. This was because Tobiah had taken over the large storeroom. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “no one had been giving the Levites the support that the law commanded the Israelites to provide for them because there was no place to store the contributions now that Tobiah had taken over the storeroom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
NEH 13 10 k1j5 figs-abstractnouns מְנָי֥וֹת הַלְוִיִּ֖ם 1 As in [12:44](../12/44.md) and [12:47](../12/47.md), the abstract noun **portion** refers to the part of each crop that the law commanded the Israelites to give to the temple to support the Levites. If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate the idea behind this word with a different phrase. Alternate translation: “the support that the law commanded the Israelites to provide for the Levites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
NEH 13 10 k1j7 figs-explicit וַיִּבְרְח֧וּ אִישׁ־לְשָׂדֵ֛הוּ 1 The implication is that the Levites had had to return to farming their own land because they were no longer able to receive support from the people to serve in the temple. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “all of the Levites had left the temple and returned to farming his own land because they had all stopped receiving support to serve in the temple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 13 10 f2ng grammar-connect-logic-result וַיִּבְרְח֧וּ 1 In this context, the conjunction **And** indicates that the sentence it introduces explains the results of what the previous sentence described. Alternate translation: “as a result” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
NEH 13 10 k1j9 figs-idiom אִישׁ־לְשָׂדֵ֛הוּ 1 In this context, **a man** means “each one of them” or “every one of them” Alternate translation: “all of the Levites had returned to farming his own land” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
NEH 13 10 k1k1 figs-informremind הַלְוִיִּ֥ם וְהַמְשֹׁרְרִ֖ים עֹשֵׂ֥י הַמְּלָאכָֽה 1 Here the book repeats some background information to remind readers who the Levites and the singers were. Alternate translation: “the Levites and the singers, who were responsible for the worship in the temple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-informremind]])
NEH 13 10 k1k3 figs-ellipsis עֹשֵׂ֥י הַמְּלָאכָֽה 1 **The work** is an abbreviated way of saying “the work of the house of our God” as in [10:33](../10/33.md) or “the work of the house of God” as in [11:12](../11/12.md), that is, the work of the temple, meaning specifically everything required to maintain the worship there. Alternate translation: “who were responsible for the worship in the temple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
NEH 13 11 k1k5 grammar-connect-time-sequential וָאָרִ֨יבָה֙ 1 In this context, the conjunction **And** indicates that this event took place after the event the story has just described. If it would be clearer in your language, you could show this relationship by using a phrase such as “and after that.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
NEH 13 11 k1k7 figs-idiom וָאָרִ֨יבָה֙ אֶת־הַסְּגָנִ֔ים 1 As in [5:7](../05/07.md), **contended** is a technical term that describes a public accusation that requires the defendants to answer for themselves in the presence of their fellow citizens. Alternate translation: “Then I called the city officials to account publicly for what they had allowed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
NEH 13 11 k1k9 הַסְּגָנִ֔ים 1 See how you translated this term in [2:16](../02/16.md). Alternate translation: “the city officials”
NEH 13 11 k1l1 figs-explicit וָאֹ֣מְרָ֔ה 1 The implication in context is that what Nehemiah said was an accusation. If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a phrase that indicates this. Alternate translation: “I demanded to know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 13 11 mx4v figs-rquestion מַדּ֖וּעַ נֶעֱזַ֣ב בֵּית־הָאֱלֹהִ֑ים 1 Nehemiah uses the question form to challenge or even ridicule the officials who have failed in the basic responsibility of making sure that worship continues in the temple. This question can be translated as a statement. Alternate translation: “Because of you, the temple has been abandoned!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
NEH 13 11 k1l3 וָֽאֶ֨קְבְּצֵ֔ם וָֽאַעֲמִדֵ֖ם עַל־עָמְדָֽם 1 Here **them** refers not to the city officials but to the Levites and singers who had gone back to their farms. Alternate translation: “I brought the Levites and the singers back to the temple and I had them start doing their work again.”
NEH 13 11 k1l5 grammar-connect-time-sequential וָֽאֶ֨קְבְּצֵ֔ם 1 In this context, the conjunction **And** indicates that this event took place after the event the story has just described. If it would be clearer in your language, you could show this relationship by using a word such as “then.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
NEH 13 12 k1l7 grammar-connect-time-sequential וְכָל 1 In this context, the conjunction **And** indicates that this event took place after the event the story has just described. If it would be clearer in your language, you could show this relationship by using a word such as “then.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
NEH 13 12 k1l9 figs-hyperbole וְכָל־יְהוּדָ֗ה 1 **All** is a figurative exaggeration that means that people from throughout the province of Judah did this generally. Alternate translation: “the people of Judah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
NEH 13 12 a9ux figs-personification וְכָל־יְהוּדָ֗ה 1 Here Nehemiah refers to all of the Israelites living in the province of Judah figuratively as if they were a single person, Judah, the ancestor of the tribe by that name that lived in the territory that was now this province. Alternate translation: “the people of Judah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
NEH 13 12 k1m1 translate-unknown לָאוֹצָרֽוֹת 1 This means the storerooms in the temple. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
NEH 13 12 k1m3 grammar-connect-time-sequential וָאוֹצְרָ֣ה 1 In this context, the conjunction **And** indicates that this event took place after the event the story has just described. If it would be clearer in your language, you could show this relationship by using a word such as “then.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
NEH 13 12 k1m5 translate-unknown וָאוֹצְרָ֣ה עַל־א֠וֹצָרוֹת 1 **Treasurers** means officials who would be responsible for the storerooms in the temple. Alternate translation: “I appointed these men to be responsible for the temple storerooms.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
NEH 13 13 mu7f translate-names שֶׁלֶמְיָ֨ה הַכֹּהֵ֜ן וְצָד֣וֹק הַסּוֹפֵ֗ר וּפְדָיָה֙ מִן־הַלְוִיִּ֔ם 1 Shelmiah, Zadok, and Pedaiah are the names of men. As in [8:1](../08/01.md), where the word refers to Ezra, **scribe** means a teacher who has carefully studied the Law of Moses. **From the Levites** means that Pedaiah was one of the Levites. Alternate translation: “Shelemiah the priest, Zadok the scribe, and Pedaiah the Levite” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 13 13 k1m7 bita-hq וְעַל־יָדָ֔ם 1 **At their hand** is a figurative way of saying “assisting them” Alternate translation: “I appointed to be their assistant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-hq]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 13 13 k1m9 translate-names חָנָ֥ן בֶּן־זַכּ֖וּר בֶּן־מַתַּנְיָ֑ה 1 Hanan is the name of a man, Zaccur is the name of his father, and Mattaniah is the name of his grandfather. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 13 13 k1n1 grammar-connect-logic-result כִּ֤י הָאֱלֹהִים֙ שִׂמְּחָם֙ שִׂמְחָ֣ה גְדוֹלָ֔ה 1 In this context, the conjunction **For** indicates that the sentence it introduces explains the reason for what the previous sentence described. Alternate translation: “I appointed them because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
NEH 13 13 e8x3 figs-activepassive נֶאֱמָנִים֙ נֶחְשָׁ֔בוּ 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you can say who did the action. Alternate translation: “Everyone recognized that they were honest men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
NEH 13 13 k1n3 bita-hq וַעֲלֵיהֶ֖ם לַחֲלֹ֥ק לַאֲחֵיהֶֽם 1 In this context, **brother** seems to be a figurative way of saying “fellow priests and Levites,” although it is possible that some of the biological brothers of the men listed were included in this group. **Apportion** means “give the portions,” meaning the support, as described in [13:10](../13/10.md). Alternate translation: “Their responsibility was to make sure that their fellow priests and Levites received the support that the law commanded the Israelites to provide” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-hq]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 13 14 v861 figs-idiom זָכְרָה־לִּ֥י אֱלֹהַ֖י עַל־זֹ֑את 1 In this context, **remember** means to think about someone and consider what action you can take on their behalf. Nehemiah is not suggesting that God has forgotten about him. Alternate translation: “Please bless me, my God, for doing this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
NEH 13 14 k1n5 figs-aside זָכְרָה־לִּ֥י אֱלֹהַ֖י עַל־זֹ֑את 1 As in [4:4](../04/04.md), here Nehemiah stops addressing the audience of his story and speaks directly to God. You could indicate this by putting this verse in quotation marks. Review the note at [4:4](../04/04.md) about asides like this if that would be helpful. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-aside]])
NEH 13 14 k1n7 figs-metaphor וְאַל־תֶּ֣מַח 1 Nehemiah speaks of his good deeds as if they were something written that could be erased. Alternate translation: “do not overlook” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 13 14 k1n9 figs-abstractnouns חֲסָדַ֗י 1 The abstract noun **faithful kindness** here is the same as the term “covenant faithfulness” that Nehemiah applies to God in [1:5](../01/05.md), [9:17](../09/17.md), [9:32](../09/32.md), and [13:22](../13/22.md). It refers to a person consistently and dependably fulfilling the obligations they have accepted. If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate the idea behind this word with phrase that would bring out this meaning. Alternate translation: “the way that I have consistently provided for” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
NEH 13 14 k1o1 bita-manmade בְּבֵ֥ית אֱלֹהַ֖י 1 Nehemiah speaks figuratively of the temple as the **house of God** as if it were God’s dwelling place. Alternate translation: “your temple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 13 14 k1o3 וּבְמִשְׁמָרָֽיו 1 As in [12:9](../12/09.md) and [12:24](../12/24.md), the phrase **service watch** refers to the Levite singers. It means either an individual choir or a time on duty for the singers. Alternate translation: “and for the Levite singers”
NEH 13 15 k1o5 בַּיָּמִ֣ים הָהֵ֡מָּה 1 This phrase indicates that this event took place at the same time as the event the story has just related. If it would be clearer in your language, you could show this relationship by using a phrase such as “around that same time.”
NEH 13 15 k1o7 רָאִ֣יתִי בִֽיהוּדָ֣ה ׀ דֹּֽרְכִֽים־גִּתּ֣וֹת 1 Alternate translation: “I saw that some of the people of Judah were treading winepresses”
NEH 13 15 k1o9 figs-metonymy דֹּֽרְכִֽים־גִּתּ֣וֹת 1 The word **winepresses** figuratively represents the grapes that were in the winepresses. The people were treading on the grapes to press the juice out of them so that they could make wine. Alternate translation: “treading on grapes in winepresses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
NEH 13 15 z3xh figs-explicit בַּשַּׁבָּ֡ת 1 The implication is that the people of Judah should not have been doing such work on the Sabbath because God had commanded them to set apart that day, the seventh day of the week, as a special day for rest and worship. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “on the Sabbath, when they should not have been doing any work” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 13 15 k1p1 translate-names בַּשַּׁבָּ֡ת 1 This is the name of a religious observance. It occurs repeatedly in this part of the story, through [13:22](../13/22.md). It will be helpful to your readers if you translate it consistently. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 13 15 k1p3 figs-explicit וּמְבִיאִ֣ים הָעֲרֵמ֣וֹת וְֽעֹמְסִ֪ים עַל־הַחֲמֹרִ֟ים וְאַף־יַ֜יִן עֲנָבִ֤ים וּתְאֵנִים֙ וְכָל־מַשָּׂ֔א וּמְבִיאִ֥ים יְרוּשָׁלִַ֖ם בְּי֣וֹם הַשַּׁבָּ֑ת 1 These **ones** are not three different groups, but various people of Judah who were collectively doing all these things. The implication is that they were bringing these goods to Jerusalem to sell them, even on the Sabbath. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. “Others had loaded their wares, such as sheaves of grain, wine, grapes, figs, and other goods, onto donkeys, and they were bringing these goods into Jerusalem to sell on the Sabbath day.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 13 15 k1p5 figs-idiom וָאָעִ֕יד בְּי֖וֹם מִכְרָ֥ם צָֽיִד 1 The word **day** could be intended literally here and it could mean that Nehemiah protested that the Sabbath itself was not a day for selling goods, since that was work. Another possibility is that the word **day** does not refer to a specific day, but rather to a more general time when Nehemiah said this. Alternate translation: “I protested that they should not be doing the work of selling on the Sabbath” or “At the time when they were selling these provisions, I protested against that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
NEH 13 16 k1p7 וְהַצֹּרִים֙ יָ֣שְׁבוּ בָ֔הּ 1 Tyrians were people from the city of Tyre. **It** here refers to the city of Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “Also, some people from the city of Tyre who were living in Jerusalem”
NEH 13 16 yvh1 translate-names וְהַצֹּרִים֙ 1 Tyrians were people who came from from the city of Tyre. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 13 16 k1p9 bita-hq לִבְנֵ֥י יְהוּדָ֖ה 1 **Son of** is a figurative expression that indicates that a person shares the qualities of something. In this case, Nehemiah is describing people who share the quality of being residents of the province of Judah. (In context, this does not seem to be limited to actual descendants of Judah, that is, Israelites from that tribe, since the Tyrians seem to have been eager to sell to anyone living in the area.) Alternate translation: “the people of Judah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-hq]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 13 16 k1q1 figs-explicit וּבִירוּשָׁלִָֽם 1 The implication is that Jerusalem was the last place where anyone should have broken the Sabbath by doing work and engaging in commerce, because it was the place from which God had chosen to start making himself famous throughout the world, and the city where God had chosen to put his temple. (The concept is the same here as in [11:1](../11/01.md) and [11:18](../11/18.md), where Nehemiah calls Jerusalem “the holy city.”) If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “even in Jerusalem, the special city that God chose” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 13 17 k1q3 grammar-connect-logic-result וָאָרִ֕יבָה 1 In this context, the conjunction **And** indicates that the sentence it introduces explains something that happened as a result of what the previous sentence described. Alternate translation: “So” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
NEH 13 17 k1q5 figs-idiom וָאָרִ֕יבָה אֵ֖ת חֹרֵ֣י יְהוּדָ֑ה 1 As in [5:7](.//05/07.md) and [13:11](../13/11.md), **contended** is a technical term that describes a public accusation that requires the defendants to answer for themselves in the presence of their fellow citizens. Alternate translation: “Then I called the leading citizens of Judah to account publicly for what they had allowed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
NEH 13 17 k1q7 חֹרֵ֣י יְהוּדָ֑ה 1 See how you translated this term in [2:16](../02/16.md). Alternate translation: “the leading citizens of Judah”
NEH 13 17 k1q9 figs-explicit וָאֹמְרָ֣ה לָהֶ֗ם 1 The implication in context is that what Nehemiah said was an accusation. If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a phrase that indicates this. Alternate translation: “I demanded to know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 13 17 w5nr figs-rquestion מָֽה־הַדָּבָ֨ר הָרָ֤ע הַזֶּה֙ אֲשֶׁ֣ר אַתֶּ֣ם עֹשִׂ֔ים וּֽמְחַלְּלִ֖ים אֶת־י֥וֹם הַשַּׁבָּֽת 1 Nehemiah is using the question form for emphasis in order to scold the leaders of Judah. If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate what he says as an exclamation. Alternate translation: “You are doing an evil thing by treating the Sabbath day like any other day!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
NEH 13 17 k1r1 translate-unknown וּֽמְחַלְּלִ֖ים אֶת־י֥וֹם הַשַּׁבָּֽת 1 To **profane** something means to treat something that should be holy, set apart for a special purpose, as if it were something ordinary or common, just like anything else. Alternate translation: “treating the Sabbath day like any other day” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
NEH 13 18 k1r3 figs-rquestion הֲל֨וֹא כֹ֤ה עָשׂוּ֙ אֲבֹ֣תֵיכֶ֔ם וַיָּבֵ֨א אֱלֹהֵ֜ינוּ עָלֵ֗ינוּ אֵ֚ת כָּל־הָרָעָ֣ה הַזֹּ֔את וְעַ֖ל הָעִ֣יר הַזֹּ֑את 1 Nehemiah once again uses a question form for emphasis as he continues to scold the leaders of Judah. If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate what he says as a statement or as an exclamation. Alternate translation: “You know that your ancestors did the same thing, and that is why our God brought all this trouble on us and on this city.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
NEH 13 18 k1r5 bita-hq אֲבֹ֣תֵיכֶ֔ם 1 **Fathers** here figuratively means “ancestors.” Alternate translation: “your ancestors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-hq]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 13 18 k1r7 וַיָּבֵ֨א אֱלֹהֵ֜ינוּ עָלֵ֗ינוּ אֵ֚ת כָּל־הָרָעָ֣ה הַזֹּ֔את וְעַ֖ל הָעִ֣יר הַזֹּ֑את 1 As Nehemiah speaks to the leading citizens, he assumes that they will know that he is referring to the way God allowed the Babylonians to conquer Jerusalem, destroy much of the city including the temple, break down the city wall, and take most of the people into exile. As he reports this conversation in the book, he assumes that its audience will know this as well. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “our God allowed the Babylonians to take our people into exile and destroy this city” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 13 18 k1r9 figs-idiom כָּל־הָרָעָ֣ה 1 **Evil** here does not refer to something morally wrong, but to trouble or harm. Alternate translation: “all this trouble” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
NEH 13 18 k1s1 grammar-connect-logic-contrast וְאַתֶּ֞ם 1 In this context, the conjunction **And** indicates a contrast between how the leading citizens should be acting and how they actually are acting. You could make this contrast explicit by using an expression such as, “You should know better!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
NEH 13 18 k1s3 figs-explicit וְאַתֶּ֞ם מוֹסִיפִ֤ים חָרוֹן֙ עַל־יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל 1 Nehemiah assumes that the leading citizens will know that he is speaking of God’s wrath, that is, God’s anger at the people’s sin and the punishment that God may use to penalize and correct the people for what they are doing. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “You are making God even more angry with the people of Israel, and God may punish us even more.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 13 18 k1s5 figs-personification יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל 1 Here Nehemiah refers to all of the Israelites figuratively as if they were a single person, their ancestor, Israel. Alternate translation: “the Israelites” or “the people of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
NEH 13 18 k1s7 translate-unknown לְחַלֵּ֖ל אֶת־הַשַּׁבָּֽת 1 As in [13:17](../13/17.md), to **profane** something means to treat something that should be considered holy, that is, set apart for a special purpose, as if it were ordinary or common. Alternate translation: “by treating the Sabbath day like any other day” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
NEH 13 19 p31h writing-newevent וַיְהִ֡י כַּאֲשֶׁ֣ר צָֽלֲלוּ֩ שַׁעֲרֵ֨י יְרוּשָׁלִַ֜ם לִפְנֵ֣י הַשַּׁבָּ֗ת 1 Nehemiah uses this phrase to introduce the next event in his story. You do not need to represent it in your translation unless your language has a similar expression that it characteristically uses. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
NEH 13 19 k1s9 figs-metaphor כַּאֲשֶׁ֣ר צָֽלֲלוּ֩ שַׁעֲרֵ֨י יְרוּשָׁלִַ֜ם לִפְנֵ֣י הַשַּׁבָּ֗ת 1 Nehemiah speaks of the gates as if they were changing in hue, but this is a figurative way of saying that the sun was setting and evening was beginning. Alternate translation: “when evening came” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 13 19 k1t1 figs-metaphor לִפְנֵ֣י הַשַּׁבָּ֗ת 1 As in [13:4](../13/04.md), the expression **face**, which often refers figuratively to the front of something, has the further figurative significance of “in front of” or “before” a certain time. Alternate translation: “as the Sabbath was beginning” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 13 19 vk4t grammar-connect-logic-result וָאֹֽמְרָה֙ וַיִּסָּגְר֣וּ הַדְּלָת֔וֹת 1 Here the conjunction **and** indicates that the action described in the second phrase was the result of the action described in the first phrase. Alternate translation: “I gave orders for the doors to be closed and barred.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
NEH 13 19 wy3q וָאֹ֣מְרָ֔ה אֲשֶׁר֙ לֹ֣א יִפְתָּח֔וּם עַ֖ד אַחַ֣ר הַשַּׁבָּ֑ת 1 **They** likely refers to the gatekeepers. Alternate translation: “I ordered the gatekeepers not to open them again until after the Sabbath.”
NEH 13 19 k1t3 figs-idiom וּמִנְּעָרַ֗י הֶֽעֱמַ֨דְתִּי֙ עַל־הַשְּׁעָרִ֔ים 1 As in [4:16](../04/16.md) and many other places in the book, “young men” refers to the servants who worked for Nehemiah. While they probably were young adult males, the expression is specifically envisioning their role and status. Alternate translation: “I had some of my servants stand at the gates” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
NEH 13 19 k1t5 figs-personification לֹא־יָב֥וֹא מַשָּׂ֖א בְּי֥וֹם הַשַּׁבָּֽת 1 Here Nehemiah speaks figuratively of a load of goods as if it were a living thing that could go through the gates and into Jerusalem on its own. Alternate translation: “so that no one would bring in a load on the Sabbath day” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
NEH 13 19 k1t7 figs-explicit לֹא־יָב֥וֹא מַשָּׂ֖א בְּי֥וֹם הַשַּׁבָּֽת 1 The ultimate purpose was to keep merchants from offering goods for sale on the Sabbath and to keep the people from buying them. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “so that no one would bring a load of goods for sale into the city on the Sabbath day” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 13 20 s2hv figs-doublet הָרֹכְלִ֜ים וּמֹכְרֵ֧י כָל־מִמְכָּ֛ר 1 These two phrases mean similar things. You do not need to repeat both of them in your translation if that might be confusing for your readers. Alternate translation: “merchants who had goods for sale,” otherwise “some traders and some merchants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
NEH 13 20 k1t9 figs-explicit וַיָּלִ֨ינוּ…מִח֥וּץ לִירוּשָׁלִָ֖ם 1 **Lodged** means “spent the night.” The implication is that they wanted to start selling their goods first thing the next morning. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “spent the night outside Jerusalem so they could start selling their goods first thing the next morning” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 13 21 k1u3 figs-idiom וָאָעִ֣ידָה בָהֶ֗ם 1 As in [9:26](../09/26.md), this phrase means, “I warned them what what they were doing was wrong.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
NEH 13 21 k1u5 grammar-connect-time-simultaneous וָאָעִ֣ידָה 1 In this context, the conjunction **And** indicates that this event took place at the same time as the event the story has just related. If it would be clearer in your language, you could show this relationship by using a phrase such as “each time they did this.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]])
NEH 13 21 hi84 figs-rquestion מַדּ֜וּעַ אַתֶּ֤ם לֵנִים֙ נֶ֣גֶד הַחוֹמָ֔ה 1 As in [13:17](../13/17.md), Nehemiah is using a question form for emphasis as he scolds these merchants. If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate what he says as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “I do not allow you to spend the night just outside the city wall!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
NEH 13 21 k1u7 מַדּ֜וּעַ אַתֶּ֤ם לֵנִים֙ נֶ֣גֶד הַחוֹמָ֔ה 1 The implication, as in [13:20](../13/20.md), is that the traders want to begin selling first thing the next morning. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I do not allow you to spend the night just outside the city wall so you can start selling your goods as soon as the Sabbath day begins!”
NEH 13 21 k1u9 figs-idiom אִם־תִּשְׁנ֕וּ 1 This is an idiom that means “if you do this again.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
NEH 13 21 k1v1 figs-idiom יָ֖ד אֶשְׁלַ֣ח בָּכֶ֑ם 1 This is an idiom that means “I will use force against you.” Alternate translation: “I will forcibly drive you away from the city.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
NEH 13 21 k1v5 grammar-connect-time-sequential מִן־הָעֵ֣ת הַהִ֔יא לֹא־בָ֖אוּ בַּשַּׁבָּֽת 1 The expression in the first phrase indicates that the event it introduces took place after the event the story has just described. If it would be clearer in your language, you could show this relationship by using a phrase such as “after that.” Alternate translation: “After that, the merchants no longer came to the city on the Sabbath.” (See: Connect - Sequential Time Relationship)
NEH 13 22 k1v7 figs-explicit וָאֹמְרָ֣ה לַלְוִיִּ֗ם אֲשֶׁ֨ר יִֽהְי֤וּ מִֽטַּהֲרִים֙ 1 As in [12:30](../12/30.md) and [13:9](../13/09.md), **purify** means to perform a ceremony to make a person or a place ceremonially clean, to express the hope that it will be acceptable to God and useful for his purposes. Alternate translation: “I told the Levites to hold a ceremony to make themselves clean and acceptable to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 13 22 k1w1 figs-explicit וּבָאִים֙ שֹׁמְרִ֣ים הַשְּׁעָרִ֔ים לְקַדֵּ֖שׁ אֶת־י֣וֹם הַשַּׁבָּ֑ת 1 As in [3:1](../03/01.md) and [12:47](../12/47.md), **consecrate** means to set something apart for a special purpose. Nehemiah was telling the Levites that they should guard the gates in order to prevent people from bringing goods for sale into the city on the Sabbath day. That way, they would ensure that the Sabbath continued to be a day that was set apart for the special purpose of rest and worship, and it would not be treated like an ordinary day. Alternate translation: “and I told them that they should then guard the gates of the city so that no one would bring in goods to sell on the Sabbath as if it were an ordinary day” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 13 22 mis6 figs-idiom גַּם־זֹאת֙ זָכְרָה־לִּ֣י אֱלֹהַ֔י 1 In this context, **remember** means to think about someone and consider what action you can take on their behalf. Nehemiah is not suggesting that God has forgotten about him. Alternate translation: “Please bless me, O God, for doing this as well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
NEH 13 22 k1w3 figs-aside גַּם־זֹאת֙ זָכְרָה־לִּ֣י אֱלֹהַ֔י 1 As in [4:4](../04/04.md), Nehemiah stops addressing the audience of his story and speaks directly to God. You could indicate this by putting this verse in quotation marks. Review the note at [4:4](../04/04.md) about asides like this if that would be helpful. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-aside]])
NEH 13 22 zxc2 figs-abstractnouns וְח֥וּסָה עָלַ֖י כְּרֹ֥ב חַסְדֶּֽךָ 1 The abstract noun **greatness** expresses the vast extent to which God possesses the quality of **covenant faithfulness**. As in [1:5](../01/05.md), God having this quality means that he is inwardly disposed to keep all of his promises, and so he always does that faithfully. If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate the idea behind this abstract noun with an adjective such as “great.” Alternate translation: “and have mercy on me, because your faithfulness to those who belong to you is so great” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
NEH 13 23 k1w5 בַּיָּמִ֣ים הָהֵ֗ם 1 This phrase indicates that this event took place at the same time as the event the story has just related. If it would be clearer in your language, you could show this relationship in this case by using a phrase such as “around that same time.”
NEH 13 23 b4nt figs-idiom בַּיָּמִ֣ים הָהֵ֗ם 1 The term **days** is used figuratively here to refer a particular period of time. Alternate translation: “around that same time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
NEH 13 23 jp2w figs-idiom הֹשִׁ֗יבוּ 1 This is an expression that refers figuratively to marriage. Alternate translation: “who had married” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
NEH 13 23 l9c2 translate-names אשדודיות עמוניות מוֹאֲבִיּֽוֹת 1 These are the names of three people groups. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 13 24 w247 writing-background וּבְנֵיהֶ֗ם 1 In this context, the conjunction **And** indicates that this sentence will provide further information about the situation the book is describing here. You could use a phrase such as “and as for” to show that this is further background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
NEH 13 24 k1w7 וּבְנֵיהֶ֗ם חֲצִי֙ מְדַבֵּ֣ר אַשְׁדּוֹדִ֔ית וְאֵינָ֥ם מַכִּירִ֖ים לְדַבֵּ֣ר יְהוּדִ֑ית 1 This could mean one of two things. It seems most likely that the expression means that (1) these children spoke a mixed language, using Ashdodite expressions half the time and Hebrew expressions the other half of the time, so that none of them knew how to speak Hebrew fluently. The expression could also mean that (2) half of the children who were born to Hebrew fathers and foreign mothers spoke a foreign language. However, if half spoke Ashdodite, and none spoke Hebrew, this leaves open the question of what language the other half of the children spoke. Alternate translation: (1) “their children spoke a mixed dialect, using Philistine expressions half the time, so that none of them could speak Hebrew fluently” or (2) “half of their children spoke the language of the Philistines, and none of their children knew how to speak Hebrew”
NEH 13 24 k1w9 translate-fraction חֲצִי֙ 1 **Half** means one part out of two equal parts. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-fraction]])
NEH 13 24 k1x1 figs-ellipsis וְאֵינָ֥ם מַכִּירִ֖ים לְדַבֵּ֣ר יְהוּדִ֑ית וְכִלְשׁ֖וֹן עַ֥ם וָעָֽם 1 Here Nehemiah leaves out some of the words that a sentence would ordinarily need in order to be complete. This sentence seems to mean, “none of them could speak Hebrew fluently, but instead they mixed it with the language of whatever people group their mothers belonged to.” You could say that explicitly if it would be helpful to your readers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
NEH 13 24 k1x3 bita-hq וְכִלְשׁ֖וֹן 1 Here **tongue** figuratively means the language spoken by a person or a group of people. Alternate translation: “language” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/bita-hq]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
NEH 13 24 k1x5 figs-idiom עַ֥ם וָעָֽם 1 This is an idiom that means “of each people group” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
NEH 13 25 k1x7 figs-idiom וָאָרִ֤יב עִמָּם֙ 1 As in [5:7](../05/07.md), [13:11](../13/11.md), and [13:17](../13/17.md), **contended** is a technical term that describes a public accusation that requires the defendants to answer for themselves in the presence of their fellow citizens. Alternate translation: “Then I called these men to account publicly for what they had done” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
NEH 13 25 k1x9 וָאֲקַֽלְלֵ֔ם 1 As in [10:29](../10/29.md), **curse** means to express the wish that God would punish someone. Alternate translation: “I said I wished that God would punish them.”
NEH 13 25 hg44 translate-symaction וָאַכֶּ֥ה מֵהֶ֛ם אֲנָשִׁ֖ים וָֽאֶמְרְטֵ֑ם 1 By performing these actions, Nehemiah demonstrated to these men symbolically how serious a wrong they had committed. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I struck some of them and pulled out their hair to show how wrong they were to have married foreign women” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
NEH 13 25 gzx6 figs-123person וָאַשְׁבִּיעֵ֣ם בֵּֽאלֹהִ֗ים אִם־תִּתְּנ֤וּ בְנֹֽתֵיכֶם֙ לִבְנֵיהֶ֔ם וְאִם־תִּשְׂאוּ֙ מִבְּנֹ֣תֵיהֶ֔ם לִבְנֵיכֶ֖ם וְלָכֶֽם 1 Here Nehemiah is reporting the words of the oath in the second person, because this is his account of how he spoke to the men who had married foreign women. When these men said the actual oath, they would have used the first person. If it would be clearer in your language, you could use the first person in your translation as well. Alternate translation: “I made them take this oath: ‘If we allow our daughters to marry their sons, or if we or our sons marry their daughters, may God punish us severely!’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
NEH 13 25 k1y1 figs-ellipsis וָאַשְׁבִּיעֵ֣ם בֵּֽאלֹהִ֗ים אִם־תִּתְּנ֤וּ בְנֹֽתֵיכֶם֙ לִבְנֵיהֶ֔ם וְאִם־תִּשְׂאוּ֙ מִבְּנֹ֣תֵיהֶ֔ם לִבְנֵיכֶ֖ם וְלָכֶֽם 1 Nehemiah has the men take an oath using a common Hebrew formula that leaves out some of the words that a sentence would ordinarily need in order to be complete. Whenever a person takes an oath using this formula, the implication is, “May God punish me severly if I do this thing.” Alternate translation: “If we allow our daughters to marry their sons, or if we or our sons marry their daughters, may God punish us severely!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
NEH 13 25 k1y3 figs-idiom תִּתְּנ֤וּ בְנֹֽתֵיכֶם֙ לִבְנֵיהֶ֔ם 1 This is an idiom that means “allow your daughters to marry their sons” or “give your daughters in marriage to their sons.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
NEH 13 25 k1y5 figs-idiom תִּשְׂאוּ֙ מִבְּנֹ֣תֵיהֶ֔ם 1 This is an idiom that means “if you take any of their daughters as wives.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
NEH 13 26 k1y7 figs-explicit הֲל֣וֹא עַל־אֵ֣לֶּה חָטָֽא־שְׁלֹמֹ֣ה מֶ֣לֶךְ 1 Here Nehemiah supports his argument by appealing to facts that he assumes these men will know. Alternate translation: “You know that Solomon king of Israel sinned because he married foreign women.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 13 26 k1y9 figs-rquestion הֲל֣וֹא עַל־אֵ֣לֶּה חָטָֽא־שְׁלֹמֹ֣ה מֶ֣לֶךְ 1 Nehemiah is using a question form for emphasis as he scolds these men. If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate what he says as a statement. Alternate translation: “You know that Solomon king of Israel sinned because he married foreign women.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
NEH 13 26 k1z1 grammar-connect-logic-contrast וּבַגּוֹיִ֣ם 1 In this context, the conjunction **Yet** introduces a contrast between what Solomon would have been expected to do and what he actually did. You could begin the sentence with a phrase like “even though” to indicate this contrast. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
NEH 13 26 k1z3 figs-idiom וּבַגּוֹיִ֣ם הָרַבִּים֩ לֹֽא־הָיָ֨ה מֶ֜לֶךְ כָּמֹ֗הוּ 1 The expression **many nations** in this phrase indicates, “You could look among as many nations as you wanted, but you would still find no king like him.” In other words, “There was no other king like him anywhere in the world.” If it would be clearer in your language, you could say that as an alternate translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
NEH 13 26 k1z5 figs-activepassive וְאָה֤וּב לֵֽאלֹהָיו֙ הָיָ֔ה 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “God loved him very much” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
NEH 13 26 k1aa figs-idiom וַיִּתְּנֵ֣הוּ אֱלֹהִ֔ים מֶ֖לֶךְ עַל־כָּל־יִשְׂרָאֵ֑ל 1 This is an idiom that means, “God made him king over all of Israel.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
NEH 13 26 k1bb figs-explicit גַּם־אוֹת֣וֹ הֶחֱטִ֔יאוּ הַנָּשִׁ֖ים הַנָּכְרִיּֽוֹת 1 The implication is that these were foreign women whom Solomon married. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “The foreign women he married caused even him to sin.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 13 27 vp56 figs-rquestion וְלָכֶ֣ם הֲנִשְׁמַ֗ע לַעֲשֹׂת֙ אֵ֣ת כָּל־הָרָעָ֤ה הַגְּדוֹלָה֙ הַזֹּ֔את לִמְעֹ֖ל בֵּֽאלֹהֵ֑ינוּ לְהֹשִׁ֖יב נָשִׁ֥ים נָכְרִיּֽוֹת 1 Nehemiah uses a question form for emphasis once again as he continues to scold these men. If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate what he says as a statement or as an exclamation. Alternate translation: “We will not accept your excuses and allow you to keep doing this thing that is so wrong!” See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
NEH 13 27 k1cc figs-idiom וְלָכֶ֣ם הֲנִשְׁמַ֗ע 1 As in [9:16](../09/16.md) and [9:29](../09/29.md), **listen** in this context is an idiom that means not just to hear a statement about a course of action, but to agree to follow it. If your language has a word for “listen” that also means “agree,” you could use it here. Alternate translation: “we will not heed your words” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
NEH 13 27 k1dd figs-idiom כָּל־הָרָעָ֤ה הַגְּדוֹלָה֙ הַזֹּ֔את 1 Here the word **all** does not indicate the entirety of something. Instead, it expresses emphasis. Alternate translation: “this thing that is so wrong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
NEH 13 27 k1ee figs-explicit לִמְעֹ֖ל בֵּֽאלֹהֵ֑ינוּ לְהֹשִׁ֖יב נָשִׁ֥ים נָכְרִיּֽוֹת 1 Here acting unfaithfully means violating the Law of Moses. Nehemiah assumes that these men will know that the law forbade the Israelites to marry outside their people group. (In fact, it does so using language very much like the oath that Nehemiah made these men swear. For example, “Do not give your daughters to their sons or take their daughters for your sons,” Deuteronomy 7:3.) If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “By marrying foreign women, you are breaking the law that God gave us.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 13 27 k1ff figs-idiom לְהֹשִׁ֖יב 1 As in [13:23](../13/23.md), this is an expression that refers figuratively to marriage. Alternate translation: “marrying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
NEH 13 28 k1gg writing-background וּמִבְּנֵ֨י 1 In this context, the conjunction **And** indicates that this sentence will provide background information that is necessary for understanding the next event the book will describe. You could express the same meaning with a word that indicates this in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
NEH 13 28 k1hh figs-idiom וּמִבְּנֵ֨י 1 This means “one of the sons of.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
NEH 13 28 dft4 translate-names יוֹיָדָ֤ע בֶּן־אֶלְיָשִׁיב֙ 1 Joiada is the name of a man, and Eliashib is the name of his father. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 13 28 k1ii figs-informremind אֶלְיָשִׁיב֙ הַכֹּהֵ֣ן הַגָּד֔וֹל 1 Here Nehemiah repeats some background information to remind readers who Eliashib was. Alternate translation: “Eliashib, who was the high priest” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-informremind]])
NEH 13 28 k1ii חָתָ֖ן 1 Alternate translation: “had married the daughter of”
NEH 13 28 f8ak translate-names לְסַנְבַלַּ֣ט הַחֹרֹנִ֑י 1 Sanballat is the name of a man, and Horonite is the name of his people group. See how you translated these words in [2:10](../02/10.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
NEH 13 28 rhs8 grammar-connect-logic-result וָאַבְרִיחֵ֖הוּ 1 In this context, the conjunction **And** indicates that the sentence it introduces explains the results of what the previous sentence described. Alternate translation: “as a result” or “because he had done this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
NEH 13 28 k1jj figs-synecdoche וָאַבְרִיחֵ֖הוּ מֵעָלָֽי 1 **Him** means this son of Joiada. Nehemiah means not just that he made this man leave his personal presence, but that he forced him to leave Jerusalem, at least, and perhaps to stay out of the entire province of Judah. Nehemiah is using the space around himself figuratively to represent all Jerusalem and Judah. Alternate translation: “I forced him to leave Jerusalem” or “I forced him to leave the province of Judah.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
NEH 13 28 k1jk figs-explicit וָאַבְרִיחֵ֖הוּ מֵעָלָֽי 1 The implication is that this son of Joiada was serving as a priest himself (as his lineage entitled him to do), and so he was a high-profile case of flaunting the command in the law against marrying foreign women. Nehemiah needed to make an example of him. A further consideration may have been that Sanballat was an enemy to Nehemiah and the Jews, and this man was one of the people who was sending letters to Sanballat with information about Nehemiah, as 6:17 indicates. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express one of these possibilites explicitly. Alternate translation: “I forced him to leave Jerusalem because as a priest, he was setting a bad public example by being married to a foreign woman” or “I forced him to leave Jerusalem because he was helping our enemy Sanballat.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 13 29 k1ll figs-aside זָכְרָ֥ה לָהֶ֖ם אֱלֹהָ֑י עַ֚ל גָּאֳלֵ֣י הַכְּהֻנָּ֔ה וּבְרִ֥ית הַכְּהֻנָּ֖ה וְהַלְוִיִּֽם 1 As in [13:22](../13/22.md), Nehemiah stops addressing the audience of his story and speaks directly to God. You could indicate this by putting this verse in quotation marks. Review the note at [4:4](../04/04.md) about asides like this if that would be helpful. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-aside]])
NEH 13 29 k1mm figs-idiom זָכְרָ֥ה לָהֶ֖ם 1 **Them** likely means this son of Joiada, who had married a foreign woman, and Joiada himself, who had arranged with Sanballat for his son to marry Sanballat’s daughter. As often in this book, **remember** means to think about someone and consider what action you should take in their regard. Nehemiah is not suggesting that God has forgotten about Joiada and his son. Alternate translation: “treat Joiada and and his son the way they deserve for what they have done” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
NEH 13 29 mn8k figs-metaphor עַ֚ל גָּאֳלֵ֣י הַכְּהֻנָּ֔ה וּבְרִ֥ית הַכְּהֻנָּ֖ה וְהַלְוִיִּֽם 1 Nehemiah speaks here of Joiada and his son causing the priesthood to be dishonored and breaking the covenant as if these actions had made the priesthood and God’s covenant with the Israelites ceremonially unclean. Alternate translation: “they have dishonored the priesthood and broken the covenant you made with the priests and Levites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 13 29 k1nn figs-explicit וּבְרִ֥ית הַכְּהֻנָּ֖ה וְהַלְוִיִּֽם 1 This means the covenant that established the descendants of Aaron as priests and the Levites as their helpers, in other words, the covenant that God made with Israel through Moses. Alternate translation: “the covenant you made with the Israelites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
NEH 13 30 gd16 grammar-connect-time-sequential וְטִֽהַרְתִּ֖ים 1 In this context, the conjunction **And** indicates that this event it introduces took place after the event the story has just described. If it would be clearer in your language, you could show this relationship by using a word such as “then.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
NEH 13 30 k1oo figs-metaphor וְטִֽהַרְתִּ֖ים מִכָּל־נֵכָ֑ר 1 **Them** means the priests and Levites whom Nehemiah has just mentioned. He probably says **purified** in a figurative sense. He did not hold a ceremony of purification, since the priests and Levites themselves would have done that. Rather, he means that he made sure that none of the other priests or Levites were married to foreign women, and that in this way he ensured that the priesthood was no longer figuratively unclean, as described in [13:29](../13/29.md). Alternate translation: “I made sure that none of the priests or Levites were married to foreign women.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
NEH 13 30 s3y9 וָאַעֲמִ֧ידָה מִשְׁמָר֛וֹת לַכֹּהֲנִ֥ים וְלַלְוִיִּ֖ם 1 Generally in this book, the phrase **service watch** refers to the Levite singers. It means either an individual choir or a time on duty for the singers. But since Nehemiah also speaks of the priests here, in this context the phrase seems to mean more generally the time on duty for both the priests and the Levites. Alternate translation: “I made sure that the priests and Levites all came on duty in the temple when they were supposed to”
NEH 13 30 k1pp figs-personification וָאַעֲמִ֧ידָה 1 Nehemiah is speaking of these temple arrangements figuratively, as in [5:13](../05/13.md), as if they were a living thing that could stand, that is, stay in place or be established rather than go away. Alternate translation: “I made sure that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
NEH 13 30 k1qq figs-idiom אִ֥ישׁ בִּמְלַאכְתּֽוֹ 1 In this context, **a man** means “each one of them.” Alternate translation: “and that each one fulfilled his assigned responsibilities” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
NEH 13 31 vl4a וּלְקֻרְבַּ֧ן הָעֵצִ֛ים בְּעִתִּ֥ים מְזֻמָּנ֖וֹת וְלַבִּכּוּרִ֑ים 1 This verse continues the sentence that begins in the previous verse, so here Nehemiah is describing two further things that he **caused to stand** or made sure happened. He is referring to the promises that the people made in their covenant to bring these contributions to the temple to support the priests and Levites. See how you translated these terms in [10:34](../10/34.md) and [10:35](../10/35.md). Alternate translation: “I also made sure that the people brought their offerings of wood and of the first crops that grow in their fields at the times when they had promised to bring them.”
NEH 13 31 sh91 figs-aside זָכְרָה־לִּ֥י אֱלֹהַ֖י לְטוֹבָֽה 1 As in [4:4](../04/04.md), here Nehemiah stops addressing the readers of his story and speaks directly to God. You could indicate this by putting this verse in quotation marks. Review the note at [4:4](../04/04.md) about asides like this if that would be helpful. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-aside]])
NEH 13 31 ae94 figs-idiom זָכְרָה־לִּ֥י אֱלֹהַ֖י לְטוֹבָֽה 1 To remember someone **for good** is an idiom that means to reward someone with good things for the good that they have done. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
See in Reader
